加载中...
共找到 25,462 条相关资讯
Operator: Welcome to Dometic Q3 Report 2025. Today, I am pleased to present CEO, Juan Vargues; CFO, Stefan Fristedt; and Head of Investor Relations, Tobias Norrby. [Operator Instructions] Now I will hand the conference over to the speakers. Please go ahead. Juan Vargues: Good morning, everybody, and welcome to the presentation of this third quarterly report. I would like to thank you all for participating today. We know that this is a very busy morning for many of you. And with that said, let's move rapidly to the highlights. Starting obviously with still tough market conditions where the most effect is really by consumer confidence still staying at pretty low levels all over the world. We see also retailers, dealers, OEMs being keeping to be still today being very, very careful in building up inventories. At the same time, we also see encouraging signs of stabilization in order intake, and we see few quarters. We see improvements already in Q2, clear improvements as well in Q3. Looking at performance, a decline of 6% organically with Service & Aftermarket showing an improvement in comparison to Q2, moving from minus 12% to minus 4%. Distribution declined by 6%, very much driven by Mobile Cooling Solutions, and we will get back to that. There are some aspects or some reasons for that negative decline. And then OEM also showing negative minus 8% organically, which is a good improvement versus first quarters. and where we see Land Vehicle Americas moving in a positive manner as well as Marine after many quarters being positive in the quarter. Strong EBITDA margins landing at 10.4% versus 8.6% for last year, a combination of one side of the margin improvements led by cost reductions. As you all know, we are running a restructuring program that has been kicking in since day 1, and we see very positive effects out of that at the same time as we are working in many different areas. And at the same time, we also see that all segments with exception of Mobile Cooling are improving our margins in comparison to the last quarters as well. And again, we will comment specifically on Mobile Cooling Solutions. And strong cash flow, free cash flow, EUR 527 million and a leverage landing on 3.2% (sic) [ 3.2x ] in comparison to 3% -- to 3x last year. Looking in more detail to the numbers, almost SEK 4.9 billion in revenues with 6% organic decline -- 6% decline driven by FX and then 1% decline led by the portfolio changes that we have been doing, leaving some of the businesses that we have been into before. EBITA, just a little bit over SEK 0.5 billion over an EBITA margin of 10.4%. Looking at adjusted EPS, we ended up at SEK 0.64 and again, a free cash flow of SEK 527 million. And leverage, I already commented, landed at 3.2. Looking at the year-to-date numbers, almost SEK 17 billion in revenues with a decline of 9% organically, 5% led by FX and the same 1% led by portfolio changes. And EBITA just below SEK 2 billion. And good to see, obviously, that we are getting closer as well on the EBITA margin where we landed exactly the same level as 1 year. So we have seen a recovery in recent months in comparison to the first half of the year. Adjusted EPS, SEK 2.90 and a strong free cash flow of SEK 1.4 billion. Looking a little bit deeper into the sales evolution over time, Land Vehicles ended up at minus 9%, which is a clear improvement versus Q2 with Americas showing 3% negative growth, which is a substantial improvement in comparison to the situation we saw in Q2. EMEA showing a degradation as well as APAC in comparison to last quarter, very much led still today by the OEM side. Marine positive, was great to see after many quarters and also showing a positive order intake, which is positive for us, obviously, Mobile Cooling, 8% and then Global Ventures, minus 6%. When looking at the different channels, no major changes in reality, perhaps to point out that the OEM side is for the first time in many, many, many years below 40%, while both Distribution and Service & Aftermarket are moving 100 basis points upwards. And just as a reminder, looking at the RV OEM situation, we are just now -- RV OEM stands for 18% of total business in comparison to the 49% in 2017. So obviously, we are a less sensitive company to the cyclicality that we have seen on the OEM side. Looking a little bit more in depth into the different channels. We see a clear improvement in Service & Aftermarket. Still, we see that -- we see volatility month-to-month, but again, moving in the right direction. Distribution, very much affected by Mobile Cooling Solutions. And the main reason for that is really inefficiency in Katy, Texas since we had to employ above 200 new employees and by that training, a lot of training cost us inefficiencies, we will see this negative effect in Q3. We will also see that in Q4 and then it's going to be gone. And then -- so we will come back to Mobile Cooling, but we have a double effect on one side that had a negative impact on the growth and that had also a negative impact on the margins. Looking at OEM, we see a clear path moving forward, different segments. So we see LVA turning positive in the quarter, and this is the second quarter in a row that OEM in LVA has been positive, and we also see Marine turning positive, while we see still -- LVE and LVC being negative. Positive to see, obviously, when looking at our results, strong margin recovery in comparison to last year. We see strong gross margins, almost 30% compared to 27.3% last year, very much driven by cost reductions. Again, on one side, we have restructuring program, but we also have contingencies driven in all segments simply because we still see negative growth coming in. And we also have a positive impact on the sales mix. When looking at operating expenses, another area where we are working very, very hard. We see a decline of 6% in constant currencies despite the fact that we continue to invest in a number of areas. We see product development, one of the areas where we are investing the most, but also building up our sales organizations in a number of segments where we see a stronger growth moving forward. We see, again, margin improvements in all the segments with the exception of Mobile Cooling in the quarter. When looking at tariffs, not much new here to comment in comparison to last quarter. As you know, we have good protection in the U.S., having 9 of 12 factories that we have in North America based in the U.S. In the short term, obviously, and this is still carrying a lot of uncertainties moving forward. We -- it's very much about passing prices to the market, something that we have done in a pretty good way, and we have compensated for everything, but for a few customers in the Mobile Cooling Solution area. And that's really the impact that we see negative in the quarter of SEK 35 million that will be compensated by the pricing. We implemented prices already twice in all of the areas, by the way. But in the specific case of Mobile Cooling, we had a couple of customers where we prolong the time for kicking in with the new prices. This is going to have also a negative effect in Q4. And from Q1, We will not see any more negative effects. Looking at the different segments, starting with Land Vehicles. Total organic growth, negative organic growth of 9% with soft distribution on sales and aftermarket, while we see as well a double-digit decline in OEM in both EMEA and APAC, but positive growth in Americas. We see also a pretty strong recovery of margins for the entire segment, 6.3% versus 3.7% with clear profitability improvements in EMEA, a decline -- a slight decline in APAC, but still showing very robust margins. And then we see as well reduced losses in Americas. And we will continue, as you know, to drive the recovery on the Americas situation. And as we informed a couple of times during the last quarters, the most of the restructuring program that we are driving, it will have an impact on LVA and LVE. Moving over to Marine. Positive Q3 quarter with organic growth of 1%. We see OEM coming back to growth. We still see a single-digit decline in Service & Aftermarket, but we also see a positive order intake that should help us as well in coming quarters. EBITA recovered as well. We are again over 20% in EBITA margin, 20.8%. And as a consequence of the mix and also the cost reductions that we are driving in the segments. Then Mobile Cooling Solutions, a double hit, I would say. On one side, we didn't manage to see growth due to the labor constraints that we had in the factory that are costing us in efficiency. At the same time, we also saw a negative effect on the margins coming from both the tariffs. Again, that will be gone in Q1 next year at the same time as we have the labor ineffeciencies. And we also have negative wage impact simply. The Mobile Cooling business is highly seasonal. Historically, we always had a couple of hundred of non-immigrant foreigners working on our factories to keep up with the capacity needs. And the U.S. administration did some changes on forcing us to increase the salaries. Again, we are compensating on prices, but we have a time lag. And those negative effects will be gone from Q1, as I commented before. Moving over to Global Ventures, where we see also a negative growth of 6%, with growth in Other Global Verticals, very positive in some of the areas and then still decline in Mobile Power Solutions driven by the soft RV industry. Good margin improvements, 11.5% versus 9.2%, very much driven by Other Global Verticals. Happy to see as well our progress in the sustainability area with injuries well below target, 1.5. We see as well that we are on target in regards to female managers, and we'll keep working hard in that area moving forward as well. We see renewable energy also quite a bit already now above the target for the year. We keep assessing our suppliers, our vendors, and we ended up at 60%, slightly below the target for the year. And of course, we will reach the target at the end of December. and we see also progress in innovation where we landed at 22%, a couple of percentage points above last year. We are talking a lot about sales decline. We are talking a lot about cost reductions, but we keep investing in the product area and product innovation. This is for the first time. It's the first time that as the Dometic brand, we have soft coolers. It's a totally new area for the Dometic brand. We have soft coolers under the Igloo brand, but we're also launching a new series of soft coolers under the Dometic brand for the first time and we have great expectations. Also from a branding perspective to help us to reinforce the Dometic brand among consumers. Then if we move over into the gyro. We have very, very positive reception by customers. We have been introducing the products in a number of different shows around the world. We see order intake kicking in, in many different areas. I'm happy with the results. And on top of that, we are getting a lot of awards, which is always helping us when visiting new customers offering a totally new product area for us as well. And again, we are getting awards, a lot of awards, not just for the gyro in the Marine industry, but also for many other products that we have been launching in the last 12 months. So positive to see that our investments are paying off both in terms of awards and order intake. And then on the restructuring program that we initiated 1 year ago, as you all know, will generate savings of SEK 750 million when it is completed at the end of 2026. We closed down so far 1 factory and 3 distribution centers affecting 250 people altogether. And we are running just now at annual savings of SEK 250 million as the running rates. We had a cash out in the quarter of SEK 35 million and year-to-date a little bit above SEK 100 million. We keep continuing on our portfolio, and we discontinue one of the product areas that we had before. This is leading to a negative organic growth of 1% and we keep investing on -- sorry, keep spending time on the divestments. Still, we have not seen the finalization of any of them, but we keep working and are convinced that we will see the results moving forward. And with that said, Stefan, let's go a little bit deeper into the results. Stefan Fristedt: Okay. Thank you, Juan. Starting off by summarizing the P&L for the third quarter. we are very satisfied how the gross profit margin continues to develop, 29.6% versus 27.3% (sic) [ 27.4% ] last year. And the increase is driven by sales mix. We also have the restructuring program and other efficiency measures that are taking effect. Then we also need to mention here that Juan has mentioned a couple of times of the effects, especially in Mobile Cooling, where we have a time lag between the tariff cost as well as labor cost increases versus the mitigating price increases, and that has had a negative effect in the quarter of approximately 0.7%. And we expect that to continue in Q4, as was mentioned before. But from Q1 next year, we expect that the price increases are done to fully mitigate this development. Moving over to operating expenses. We have reduced operating expenses in constant FX due to the decline in net sales, it has increased somewhat in percentage of net sales. We keep on investing in strategic growth areas, as we have mentioned, and you have seen some of the results of that in terms of product development, Mobile Cooling and Marine are definitely 2 areas where we keep on investing deliberately. Other operating income and expenses, SEK 18 million, a small number in the quarter, and it's mainly related to a part of the FX effect. Net financial expenses is up a little bit in the quarter. However, the net interest on bank loans and financial income is down SEK 197 million versus SEK 214 million, and then we have a negative FX revaluation effects and other items leading towards that. On tax, we have an effective tax rate of 32%, which is equivalent to SEK 54 million in tax in the quarter. Moving over to the summary of our cash flow. Operating cash flow-wise, we see that we are continuing to drive efficiencies in working capital, coming back to that in a second. Then we have cash out related to restructuring of SEK 35 million in the quarter. And then as you can see, we are carefully managing our capital expenditure and where we spend. Free cash flow before M&A, as we mentioned before, paid and received interest is spending down and then we have been paying lower tax. Then cash flow for the period has also been impacted by that we did a bond issue of EUR 300 million in Q3. Coming back to that. At the same time, we also did a tender offer of EUR 100 million, so -- which was then a partial repayment of the bond that is falling due in May 2026. And then I would also like to underline that we are going to see further debt repayments in Q4 and in 2026. Moving over to more of how has the free cash flow developed over time. And as you can see, I mean, SEK 527 million. It's not on the same level as last year, which I did not expect either, but still solid level, I must say. And then you can also compare it to the other periods before that. So satisfied with the level of free cash flow in the quarter. Moving over to the working capital components. You can see that working capital over the last 12 months is starting to come down 26% compared to 30% in relation to net sales. And if we look on the quarter stand-alone, it was down to 21%. So we are moving in the direction that we have been talking about, where the target is to reach around 20% of net sales. And you can see on the inventory balance, we are SEK 4.6 billion now compared to SEK 6.3 billion 1 year ago, and the number of days is down to 124 versus 139. So things are moving in the direction that we have been planning for and expecting. As you can see, accounts payable level is staying stable as well as accounts receivables. Then moving over to CapEx and research and development. We are prioritizing among our CapEx project, and we have been spending a little bit less than SEK 100 million in the quarter. It's 2% of net sales versus 1.7% in the last 12 months, that's equal to 1.3%. If we look on R&D, as I said, we continue to keep up that level very deliberately because we believe in that this is important for the future. And the R&D expense to net sales is now 3% compared to 2.7% 1 year ago and 2.8% last 12 months. And as I mentioned before, it's a strategic important growth areas for us, example being Mobile Cooling and Marine. Next is going to talk about the debt maturity. As I mentioned, we did a EUR 300 million bond on a 5-year maturity with a fixed rate of 5% in the quarter. And the proceeds are going to be used to refinance our debt portfolio. We already did EUR 100 million in connection with this transaction by doing a tender offer on the 2026 bond. So there is EUR 200 million left on that one. And then as I mentioned before, you will see further debt repayments here in Q4 as well as in 2026. We have a USD loan that matures in '28, but it can be prolonged 1 year to 2029. And the average maturity is 2.8 years, which is obviously a longer average maturity compared to last year. Average interest rate is 4.8%, and we still have an undrawn revolving credit facility of EUR 300 million maturing in 2028. So moving over to our leverage. Maybe we can -- I mean, leverage went down 0.1 versus Q2 and which is obviously positive. And you can see in the table down below that it is mainly our cash flow development that has contributed with that development. We are obviously having a high focus across the organization on protecting margin and reducing working capital, as you know. And we just keep on repeating that we are committed on achieving our leverage target of 2.5. That is important to us. and it's -- but it is difficult to give an exact timing of when we will achieve it. So with that one, I hand back to you to give a summary of the quarter. Juan Vargues: Thank you, Stefan. So I mean, in tough times like we are going through and we have been going through now for 4 years, we have to control what we can control. And from that perspective, I feel good that we are improving our margins. We had a tough first half. We saw improvements at the end of the quarter. We have seen more improvements in Q3. And our intention is obviously to keep showing improvements moving forward as well. We see -- even if it's still tough and difficult to predict, we see a market stabilization. I'm happy to see the order intake improving and happy to see the backlog becoming stronger for every month. I have been spending a lot of time on the marketplace. I have been visiting a lot of shows. I have been meeting a lot of customers. And again, it's still tough out there, but the sentiment in the value chain is slightly better than it was 3 months ago and much better than it was half a year ago. So that's kind of sending some positive signals and some faith that we are getting closer and closer to positive territory. I'm happy to see cash flow. We are working extremely hard on our working capital on driving down inventories, but not just on inventories. I think we do an excellent job on receivables and we do an excellent job in payables, trying obviously to improve as much as we can our capacity of releasing cash and improving our leverage. Tariffs situation, lots of uncertainties, of course, but we are dealing with that in a good way. We had a negative effect in the quarter. But again, in comparison to what we expected on the 4th of April, I believe that the organization has done a terrific job landing the situation with our customers and our customers are also keeping faith in what we are doing every single day. Moving forward, difficult to predict, as I said, but the starting point in Q4 from a top line perspective is a little bit better than we had 3 months ago. And hopefully, we will see that even in the future. And then from a strategic perspective, we keep investing despite all the cost reductions that we are doing in a number of areas. There are 2 areas that where we are not cutting. The other way around, we keep investing in product development, innovation, and we keep investing in building up our sales organizations. And of course, we need to finance that, and that's why we are driving a restructuring program, which is clearly paying off. And with that said, I would like to open for a Q&A session. Please. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Agnieszka Vilela from Nordea. Agnieszka Vilela: I will ask them one by one. So on growth, Juan, you sound cautiously optimistic about the OEM business now in Marine and in RV in the U.S. But when I look at some of the peers commenting on the market development such as Malibu Boats or Winnebago, they do point to still flat wholesale volumes in 2026 in RVs and even declining both retail and wholesale in Marine. So can you give us an explanation why you are relatively a bit more optimistic on that? Juan Vargues: I mean everything is relatively in line, right? I mean we are coming from a situation where we have been kind of shrinking 11%, 12% quarter after quarter after quarter. For the first time, we see order intake moving upwards. We see the fact that we delivered 1% organic growth, and we have a different backlog situation that we have seen. I fully agree with you that we are not going to fly. I don't see the market turning back anytime soon, but I see an improvement. I see obviously that we are launching new products. I see that we are taking orders. I still believe that we might be seeing as well what we saw on the American RV industry, growth for a number of quarters and then slowing down for a couple of quarters, stabilizing the market. So that's the expectation. I don't see that we are dropping 11%, 12% again from where we are. So that's on the Marine side, Agnieszka. On the other side, Americas, I think, it's pretty stable, just now. I think that, again, retail is still coming down slightly at the same time as manufacturing is adapting again, as you have seen in the last couple of months and expectation is that it will be balanced between retail and wholesale in Q -- sorry, in 2025 and expectation for 2026 is a growth of some 3% versus 2025. Agnieszka Vilela: Perfect. And then the second question is on EMEA and profitability in the business. When I look what we expected in Q2, you beat our expectations quite significantly. Now in Q3, you missed a bit. So just if you could give us some factors that are affecting profitability right now in EMEA. What are the tailwinds, maybe savings and less logistics costs? And what are the negative impacts in EMEA right now for you? Juan Vargues: So you have a couple of questions. I mean, first of all, we had a better mix in Q2 than we have in Q3. So after OEM, the balance of the aftermarket and OEM was different. Then we have a second issue. We -- as you know, in EMEA, we have also an important business for us, which is the CPV, the Commercial Passenger Vehicles. We have the situation of one of the main customers we have, JLR, did suffer a cyber attack. In that business, we have decent margins and that had a negative impact, both from a sales perspective, but also from a margin perspective. So those are the 2 main differences that we have in EMEA. Stefan Fristedt: So on JLR, I mean, their factories have been closed for a big part of the quarter. Agnieszka Vilela: Okay. Can you quantify the impact on your EBITA in the quarter? Juan Vargues: No, not on EBITA, but it had quite an impact on the EMEA numbers specifically. Stefan Fristedt: On sales. Juan Vargues: On the sales, absolutely. Stefan Fristedt: I mean, CPV is generally a more profitable -- or yes, it's an over-average profitable business. Operator: The next question comes from Daniel Schmidt from Danske. Daniel Schmidt: A couple of questions. And then maybe turning back to Marine. I appreciate that it's quite difficult to exactly know if this is a longer turnaround or not. But I think given that sort of retail is not super strong, but it's also a function of the fact, I guess, that it's been quite hefty underproduction in Marine over the past 4, 5 quarters. So I guess there's some catch-up to be done there. Is that your feeling as well? Juan Vargues: Yes, it is. But at the same time, I need to comment as well, Daniel, that we might be seeing what we saw on the RV side that we had a couple of positive quarters and then might slow down before getting stability. So again, I do believe that we need just now to be super agile, right, on the way up and the way down as we have been on the RV side. I mean, the good news, when I perceive still, Daniel, I mean, again, you can take it from a negative perspective or a positive perspective. The positive perspective is obviously that I don't see the market coming down 12% again, that even the decline in retail is becoming smaller than what we have seen. At the same time, as you are totally right, production has been very, very low in comparison to retail. So there is a catch-up. So my feeling is that some manufacturers, they have started to produce again. But then, of course, if retail doesn't come in Q2 when the high season starts in the U.S. specifically, then we might have a slowdown again. And then you have another factor, which I would like to comment because, obviously, a lot of the questions that we get are always about the U.S. market simply because it's 75% of the market, the world market. But we have positive growth in EMEA that was pretty nice in the quarter, and we had positive growth as well in APAC. So as a matter of fact, for us, the growth in Marine in the quarter was not negative, but we want to fly in Q1. And just again, 75% of the business is in the U.S. So I was telling you that the rest of the world, we performed better. Daniel Schmidt: Okay. And could you say something about the pace? This is very detailed and sorry for that. But given that you are shifting from decline to growth now in Marine after 8 quarters in a row of decline, could you say anything about the pace you saw from July until now basically when it comes to Marine on a year-over-year basis in order intake or in sales or anything? Juan Vargues: It has been pretty stable in sales. We have seen improvements on the order intake. So our intake was positive -- the order intake was more positive than sales in the quarter. Stefan Fristedt: But keep in mind, Dan, that the part of that order intake is obviously for delivery also next year. So not everything is going to be delivered now. Juan Vargues: In the coming weeks. Stefan Fristedt: In the coming weeks or in the coming quarter. Daniel Schmidt: Yes. But even though there's no sort of big meaningful improvement in top line in Q3, it is back to growth, but the margin is up quite a bit, and of course, it comes back to the savings. But is there anything -- has there any impact at all when it comes to the gyro that you've talked about? Is that selling. Has that been delivered in Q3? Is that having an impact? Is that going to have a bigger impact in the coming quarters? Juan Vargues: We are delivering the gyro. It doesn't have any substantial impact on the margins. On the contrary, you have, as I commented, the geographical mix, which is benefiting us just now. Daniel Schmidt: Okay. And then when we -- as you mentioned, if you look at OEM on Americas on the LVE side, it is the second quarter in a row that you are performing better than the market. Is that the function, you think, of the work that you did last year in trying to get back to on certain customers that have been maybe discarding you a little bit and you're back to the model year '25 and '26 now. Is that what we're seeing because the market was -- it looks to be a little bit down on shipments so far in Q3 and the same was -- I think it was flat in Q2, the market and you were up a couple of percent. Is that what we're seeing? Juan Vargues: We have a lot of activities ongoing. We have -- so that's what I can tell you is that we are working very, very close to our customers just now. We're spending a lot of time. I am visiting quite a few of the customers myself, getting the feeling. We see positive -- we get positive comments in the recent shows as well, both in the U.S. as in Europe. So I'm optimistic. I mean we are not there, obviously. As you know, we shrunk more than the market for a couple of years. And of course, our intention is to recover part of what we lost. Daniel Schmidt: Yes. And then on EMEA, if you look into the last quarter of this year, I think there was quite substantial production shutdowns, especially from one of the bigger players. Do you see the same development happening in this year? Or will there be less shutdowns, you think? Juan Vargues: I think that we will see improvements versus last year simply because last year was brutal, right? I mean Q4 last year was very, very, very healthy. So I don't expect -- I mean, as you know, this industry is always kind of correcting by running shortened weeks, still to be seen what's going to happen in connection to Christmas, but I'm not expecting the same negative effect that we saw in Q4 last year. You're reading and you are talking to more or less the same people as I'm talking. I mean the positive is more optimistic today than we had 1 year ago. I mean 1 year ago is really when all these massive shutdowns took place, right? Now we have seen very low production numbers for 9 months basically. Stefan Fristedt: And registrations are bit higher than production. Juan Vargues: Absolutely. I mean registrations, if you look at registrations, registrations after 9 months are down to minus 4% in Germany, minus 2% for Europe, right? So of course, that after 1 year, you will get more and more into balance. Daniel Schmidt: Yes. And then sorry for missing the very early part of this call, but you did refer to labor irregularities impacting Mobile Cooling in the quarter, and you said something about needing to hire 200 people. Is that coming back to immigration policy in the U.S.? Is that -- was that the reason? And what was the impact in terms of impact on profitability? And is that continuing into Q4? Is that ending now? Juan Vargues: It's Q3 and Q4 and then we are going to be done. Stefan Fristedt: Yes. So I mentioned that the impact for Q3 was approximately 0.7% on the profit margin as a whole. And then it will continue into Q4 somewhere 1% to 1.5% units on the margin. And then from Q1, we expect these effects to be fully compensated by price increases. So it's... Daniel Schmidt: And that impact, is that both the tariffs and the labor irregularities combined? Stefan Fristedt: Yes. It is mainly tariffs and the labor efficiency/labor cost. There is also some currency effects in there as well. But the majority is related to the 2 first ones. Daniel Schmidt: Okay. And also, sorry for dwelling here. But Juan, you mentioned at the end of your remarks, I think that the starting point on -- from a top line perspective is a little bit better. Was that referring to the start of Q4 compared to the start of Q3? Or what was that comment relating to? Juan Vargues: Yes. So we have seen order intake improving quarter-by-quarter, right, since Q4 last year. So we had a pretty low Q4. Backlog situation was pretty low at the end of Q4 last year. Then we saw a further deterioration in Q1. We saw a clear improvement in Q2, and we saw an additional improvement in Q3. So our backlog situation at the end of the quarter is much better on the backlog situation than we have had at the beginning of Q3, which is positive. Operator: The next question comes from Gustav Hageus from SEB. Gustav Sandström: If I can ask a question on the organic growth in the quarter down with 6%? You mentioned customers trading down in aftermarket. You mentioned some price increases, but more to come. So it would be very helpful if you could try to sort out the components in organic decline here in respect to price mix and volume and what you expect in terms of prices now, if you can quantify that a bit with your new price hikes going into 2026, that would be helpful. Juan Vargues: I mean the vast majority of the prices is going to take place from a Service & Aftermarket perspective. And then the other one is really on Mobile Cooling, what we have seen. We compensated for the tariffs in both Marine and LVA. We almost compensated for the tariffs in Mobile Cooling. But again, we had a price time lag for a couple of customers, and they are major customers for us. So that's where we have the difference. And then, of course, we are doing minor price adjustments depending on the market, depending on the product and depending obviously on the competitive situation. So I would not expect massive price increases moving forward as far as the market looks as it does. I think we need to be careful just now, and we also need to find the right balance, obviously, between keep improving our margins, but also starting to recover some volume now when the market seems to move into a little bit easier situation. Gustav Sandström: Sure. But the negative organic growth in the quarter, is it fair to assume that the volume growth was bigger than that number? So we had... Juan Vargues: No, but I wouldn't overestimate how much bigger. I think we are a little bit bigger, not much. Gustav Sandström: Do you think single-digit volume decline in the quarter. Is that a fair assumption? Juan Vargues: Yes, it is. Gustav Sandström: Okay. Okay. And you mentioned the order intake improving sequentially. Do you see any trends in terms of mix, what type of products that are sold. And in terms of price versus competitors, if you can have a comment on that given that you have quite a lot of exposure from internal production versus some peers? Juan Vargues: Yes. So we see -- let me say, there were 2 questions. The first 1 was -- the second one is competition. The first 1 was? Gustav Sandström: Sort of did you see any improving mix sequentially? Juan Vargues: Yes. So we have seen very clear improvements on the OEM side. We have seen very clear improvements on the distribution side. And then on the contrary, Service & Aftermarket has been a [ second ] month. Gustav Sandström: And that comment relates to mix, so gradually improving mix in those 2 first? What was that comment on? Juan Vargues: But again, if we think about the 3 channels, we have seen very clear improvements on the Marine side, right, is on the OEM altogether, but especially on the Marine side and LVE, we still see that LVE and LVC are tough still today from an OEM perspective. But again, altogether, the OEM channel is improving quite a bit. We see the distribution channel also improving. And there, we have, as you know, a number of businesses where the biggest one is Mobile Cooling. So as I said, Mobile Cooling order intake is improving quite a bit as well. and then Service & Aftermarket has been pretty flattish in comparison to where we are coming from. So still a negative order intake, less negative, but still negative. Gustav Sandström: Okay. And in terms of pricing in U.S. versus some competitors, I guess, in particular, in Mobile Cooling and so forth, are you following also nondomestic producers in terms of price? Or are you -- yes. Juan Vargues: No, I think the difference -- the main difference is that we were pretty early. I feel some of our competitors were pretty late, but we see that all of them are increasing prices step by step. So I feel the difference, obviously, that most probably they built up a lot of inventories just in case as soon as Mr. Trump was elected, while we implemented the prices in connection to the tariff implementation. Gustav Sandström: Okay. And then final one for me, I guess it's a bit speculative, but on the net debt-to-EBITDA gearing target, what you chances are that you'll come below 3 as we end the year? Stefan Fristedt: I think we are now moving into the part of the year where cash flow is a little bit less strong, right? Q2 and Q3 is the 2 strongest cash flow quarters that we have. So it's -- I would probably say that 3 years would be nice, but I would still feel that I think we are still going to end above. Operator: The next question comes from Fredrik Ivarsson from ABG. Fredrik Ivarsson: Sorry, I got in a bit late, so excuse me if you already discussed this, but I'll try. First one on Mobile Cooling. We've seen sales declining, I guess, for 3 years now, and we've been talking about inventory reductions among retailers for quite some time now. Do you guys have a view on the inventory levels at the moment where you're at, especially Igloo in the U.S.? Juan Vargues: Inventories are not bad on the channel, what we can see, right? I mean then, of course, you have -- we have seen 2 months pretty nice inventories coming down and then you get major orders and then all of a sudden, the sell-through is a little bit worse. So I mean, something that we didn't comment on the report is that the last month, meaning September was pretty rainy in the U.S. And for the Mobile Cooling business, that has a lot of impact. So we cannot say that we perceive inventory levels in the Mobile Cooling channel being high just now. They are gone. I think people on the contrary are very, very, very careful in not building unnecessary inventories. So everybody is placing the orders in the very last minute. And that's a change from where we are coming from pre-pandemic, where people were building up inventories in advance. Now people are -- I don't know if we can talk about Just In Time manufacturing, but retailers are as much Just In Time as they can and putting on us being ready. Fredrik Ivarsson: Very clear. And then staying on Mobile Cooling, it seems to me like the margin is almost set to expand in 2025 despite all the issues you mentioned and then obviously, sales being down 20% organic over the last 3 years. So my question is, where do you see the margin in this business under more, say, normal circumstances? Juan Vargues: I mean we commented from the beginning, right, that we expect Mobile Cooling to be 15-plus EBITA. That's where we -- and that's still below, so to say, what the Dometic brand is coming from, right? But we believe that lifting from where we acquired the company to 15% is a pretty nice achievement. If you look at what we have been delivering during the last year, we have seen an improvement year-by-year, and that's our expectation. Stefan Fristedt: And I mean if you look on the product launches that we have been showing here over the last couple of quarters in Mobile Cooling, I mean, that is products that is certainly going to contribute to that development. Juan Vargues: So I mean this is one of the areas, clearly, where we are investing a lot in product development. We are investing in building up our sales organizations. And despite all the investments that we have, still, we see margin improvements. Now we have a couple of one-offs this quarter, and then we had also the production issues in Q2, right? But apart from that, we see an underlying improvement year-by-year, a clear improvement year-year. Fredrik Ivarsson: Yes. Yes, I appreciate that. And a follow-up just on the one-off you mentioned just now. Juan, did I hear you right? Do you guide for 1% to 1.5% on the group margin impact in Q4? Juan Vargues: Yes, based on both the tariffs and the wages and the labor efficiencies. Fredrik Ivarsson: Okay. So like SEK 40 million to SEK 60 million. Juan Vargues: It will be gone again from Q1. Fredrik Ivarsson: Yes, absolutely. Good. And maybe last one from my side. I saw the Igloo lawsuit trial moved to March from September. Do you have anything to comment on that? Juan Vargues: No. I mean from our side, the sooner, the better since we feel very, very confident that we are going to win the case. So there is not -- we have not provoked that delay. It's not us trying to delay. It's the other way around. We would like to get it done. the discussion beyond us. Operator: The next question comes from Rizk Maidi from Jefferies. Rizk Maidi: Sorry if this has been tackled. So I'll start with tariffs and Section 232 extension in August. Just wondering if this drives you to -- if there's any impact direct or more importantly, indirectly on the business, and I'll start there. Stefan Fristedt: I think that we will have to see where this ends in the bidder end. But I mean, with the price increases and other measures we have taken, we believe that we have -- when the time lag has closed, we believe that we have taken the measures to compensate for the increased tariff cost. Rizk Maidi: Okay. And then secondly, on Service and Aftermarket, I mean, the decline now, as you said, Juan, was less than before. Historically, you talked about this bullwhip effect. Maybe if you could just talk about sort of sell-in versus sell-out here. This market has historically been quite resilient. This is exceptional. Do you actually expect to recoup those big, call it, destocking years sort of -- does that need to reverse at some point in your view? Or that's basically you see it as a post-COVID buildup in inventories that would never go back to? Juan Vargues: No, I think that we are human beings. I think that's going to come back. But in order to get into that point, we need to get consumer confidence. We need to see the traffic and the foot traffic into the stores, the foot traffic, both physically and digitally to increase for the dealers to there to build up more inventories that they are doing today. Just now it's in the very last minute. But again, I'm fully convinced. Remember, if you go back 5 years ago, we -- the flight industry would never come back, right? The carriers would never recover, and you know where they are today, right? I think it's time. Rizk Maidi: Understood. And then perhaps last one on my side, just perhaps an update on divestments of noncore assets. How much has been achieved? How much is left? I don't know if you can communicate on this? And how do you see the appetite from potential buyers at the moment and the valuations you're able to get? Juan Vargues: So you have 2 different areas. One is product areas that we are leaving that we are discontinuing, low margins, we don't see that we can get into a #1, #2 position globally, and then we don't want to be part of that. As you know, we have already left 1% and is more to come. We will see changes over time. And then we have the divestments where we are working extremely hard. We are in discussions with a number of partners. But obviously, we still have a gap between the sell side and the buy side. And as we said, I mean, we want to create value. We don't want to give things away. And if we need to wait until the market looks in a better way, then we will do it. But again, all those discussions keep on going. Operator: The next question comes from Johan Eliason from SB1 Markets. Johan Eliason: Juan and Stefan, just a few questions here at the end, maybe on the cash flow again, you already alluded to where you sort of think net debt will end up to. But are there any particular issues we need to bear in mind when modeling the final quarter cash flow? Or are there any sort of higher charges from the restructuring programs or tariffs being paid out, et cetera, that could potentially impact the fourth quarter cash flow? I guess, otherwise, the pattern this year has been a decent cash flow, but a bit weaker than last year. And I thought that would be the case for Q4, but I just wanted to see if there's anything to bear in mind there. Stefan Fristedt: I think that you should look on the seasonal pattern, right, of our cash flow. That's number one. Then we were talking about that we had SEK 35 million in payout in Q3. I think you should expect that to be a little bit higher in Q4. And that will then, of course, also give you an indication that the cash out has been a little bit lower for 2025 compared to what we did believe in the beginning. But that's more related to the timing of certain activities. So that will be a little bit more that is flowing over to 2026. So -- but I think you should expect the payouts of that to be a little bit higher. So I think that's what I should comment. I mean it's like I've said, I mean, '23 was the best year ever. '24 was the second best year. And then I think 2025 is coming thereafter. So it's probably a good way of thinking about it. Johan Eliason: Good. And then you are leaving some areas where you see are not competitive. You have seen some competitive pressure. I think you talked about the big fridges over in the U.S. previously. Are you seeing any changes in the competitive picture now after tariffs and all what you have out there? Juan Vargues: Not much that far. I mean what we have seen is that we were pretty early increasing prices on the tariffs. Most of our competitors in the U.S. were slower, I guess, that they built up inventories in connection with the election. And -- but we have seen that all of them are increasing prices step by step. So I do believe that we need to wait a little bit longer to see what happens. I think that a lot of people have been living on inventories. Unknown Executive: And we have one question from the webcast audience. Could you please give some color on the inventory situation in the different distribution channels? Juan Vargues: We commented before. We see inventories in both APAC and EMEA coming down stepwise simply because of the difference between retail and manufacturing in the last 12 months. We see the U.S. LVE side. So the RV side in the U.S. is in balance, total in balance. We see Marine still unbalanced. In the marine side, 70% of dealers, American dealers still feel that they are carrying too high inventories. We are talking about distribution, we don't see any inventory buildup. I think that what we see there is that dealers and retailers are carrying as little as they possibly can. They rather lose business than they carry inventories. So everything is in the last minutes. And then on the Service & Aftermarket, it's exactly the same. So wholesalers nowadays, bigger distributors are not carrying inventories. They want manufacturers like us to carry the inventories. And dealers and smaller dealers, they are gone. So I believe we got a question before. Do you think that this kind -- the typical inventory buildups are going to come back? I'm fully convinced that they will. But in order for that to happen, we also need to see consumers starting to spend more money. I think we have been suffering the entire industry or industries. It's not just this industry. I mean we see that everything having to do with consumers with the exception of food is behaving in a very similar way. Unknown Executive: And we have one question remaining in the queue, I believe. Operator: The next question comes from Daniel Schmidt from Danske. Daniel Schmidt: Yes. Just 2 short follow-ups. On the savings program, it sounds like you're quite happy with the progress so far and a run rate of SEK 250 million by the end of Q3. How should we view that going into '26? Because it's quite meaningful steps that are supposed to be taken in terms of savings in '26. I think you've said run rate SEK 750 million as we leave 2026. And of course, it comes back to the actions that you need to take, how are they sort of scheduled for '26? Or how should we view that? Is that back-end loaded or even through -- evenly distributed through the year or... Stefan Fristedt: I would probably say that it's a little bit more back-end loaded because you're obviously going to get the full effect is coming -- going to come gradually after the implementation. But we have some bigger projects, right, that is going to take until like mid next year before they get fully implemented. But on the other hand, we also have some other activities that is going to be completed now in Q4. So -- but I would probably say it a little bit twisted towards the second half. But I mean, we still confirm SEK 300 million run rate saving at the end of this year and SEK 750 million by the end of next year. Daniel Schmidt: Yes. Okay. And then just maybe coming back again to the CPV incident in EMEA, you got the question and you said that it had an impact on sales, sounded meaningful. Would you dare to estimate how much that was in top line impact for you guys? Juan Vargues: It was -- well, in terms of krona, we are doing about SEK 30 billion for EMEA. Operator: There are no more questions at this time. So I hand the conference back to the speakers for any closing comments. Juan Vargues: Thank you very much to all of you for your attention. As we commented at the beginning, we know that it's a very busy day for many of you. We will keep working hard to protect our margins, but also to keep investing in the areas where we see the growth moving forward. And we are fully convinced that we are going to get down our leverage to the target. We cannot say when, but that's our firm intention, and we will get there. So thank you very much for your attention, and have a great day, all of you. Thank you. Stefan Fristedt: Thank you.
Operator: Welcome to the PowerCell Group Q3 2025 Report Presentation. [Operator Instructions] Now I will hand the conference over to the CEO, Richard Berkling and CFO, Anders During. Please go ahead. Richard Berkling: Good morning, and a warm welcome to this quarter 3 report on what is a very busy day on the Stockholm Stock Exchange with a lot of companies making their presentations. So we're extremely happy to see that many joining us at PowerCell. So we have closed quarter 3, and we are quite happy with the outcome. Previously, in quarter 1 and quarter 2, we reported with the headlines of steady pace through rough waters in quarter 1, which actually gave a good description on how quarter 1 played out. Quarter 2 had the headline steady pace through improving waters, really showing that we saw improvement in the market. And now the third quarter, what is describing the headline is the steady growth and solid margins, which actually described the company quite well where we are at the moment. We saw good growth in quarter 3 compared to 2024, up 90% compared to last year. Year-to-date, it is up over 50%, which is quite encouraging. Gross margin is continued to improve, although not on record levels, but we have talked about this before that we see volatility over the quarters. Also encouraging to see that the rolling 12 months revenue remained over SEK 400 million, which is the top line momentum we want to have in the company. Also encouraging that we protected the EBITDA in a way that we are still positive overall [Technical Difficulty]. Can you hear me? Anders During: Yes. Go ahead, please. Richard Berkling: I was kicked out for some reason. So continued positive EBITDA on rolling 12 months, also very encouraging. This is one of the focus areas we had for PowerCell. I would say, since the beginning, we need to show a breakeven level also in the early stage of this technology shift. So this is quite interesting. Anders will go more into details on this. We managed to leverage on the fixed cost base and drive growth and then despite having a slightly lower quarterly volume. So we're really happy with this progress that we can now show. Also some orders in quarter 3, although I would have expected or hoped for more, but it's also quite volatile in this market. What is encouraging is that we are continuing to see more OEM orders in the marine sector, where we now broke into the bulk carrier segment with the first -- world's first bulk carrier to GMI Rederi in Norway. So quite encouraging to see how the quarter was playing out. What we are in is a time of very focused execution where we also see then a quite good tangible process. I would say that the middle section here, where we talk about the operational resilience, is what is most important to me. We managed to provide a positive EBITDA on rolling 12 months because we are now in delivery mode. We are now actually tomorrow shipping the final shipments to our large Italian marine OEM, which means that we have completed deliveries of all those orders. And now in quarter 4, we are ramping up the final production assembly and will complete delivery to Torghatten up in Northern Norway with a large 2x 6.4 megawatt ferry installation, which means that we have now actually managed to build a company that is industrially stable. Starting production as we did in April this year is always something that you need to ramp up and industrial stability doesn't come for free. So the fact that the organization has been able to pull this off, deliver high quality on time or even before time, is something that is a very important quality mark for PowerCell. So the focused execution is something that I think that we should talk more about the PowerCell. Quite often, we talk about growth and we talk about the innovation of the company. But being an industrial credible partner is something that is going to win the orders going forward because with the OEMs that are placing the trust in new technology, they also need to place the trust in a very, very stable partner. So this is something that we're quite happy to be able to provide and also report. We also see, as we said, repeated demand around the Marine System 225 that we introduced last year in June. And that has been a very strong commercial success based on the fact that it is world-leading when it comes to performance, when it comes to energy density and when it comes to the value it creates for the customers that put this into operation. And then for PowerCell, once again, the operational resilience that we were able to start production and work on productivity, efficiency protecting the gross margin, which is extremely important for PowerCell going forward. So the combination of this is something that I'm quite happy to be able to report. With this, I would like to hand over to Anders on the numbers, and then I will come back and talk more about the outlook and how this connects into the broader context. Anders During: Thank you, Richard. I will take the opportunity to just run through the numbers. I think these numbers, after having listened to Richard, are in a way that, of course, the 19% growth is something to notice. I remember us saying in the beginning of this year and even at the quarter 4 report last year that we would find some more stabilization between quarters. And I think the third quarter is another evidence for that the more even, let's say, turnover in each quarter is there to stay for the future. Gross margin is slightly up. That is -- I mean, to the volumes we have and to the product mix we have when we sell, the variation of 6 percentage in a single quarter is not for us anything that is unexpected. It's more important to look at it when we get to the accumulated numbers and understand why the changes are there. EBITDA, I think, it goes without saying that we are happy with only being at minus SEK 2 million, given that we have taken SEK 5 million in provisions for the reorganization that we have announced. And I think the burning platform, and that what everyone is more concerned about listening to us today, is the operating cash flow. I think we have been quite explicit in the report describing what has happened in the first 3 quarters this year. I think that having listened also to now Richard saying that we're in final deliveries of immediately one of our larger orders ever and then continuing final deliveries of the second one, everyone can understand what that will do to cash flow as we progress into the future quarters of this year and the beginning of next year. So we go on to the accumulated numbers. We look at this point basically on the gross margin. Everyone recognized from the second quarter that we had a large deal with Bosch that brought in a lot of gross margin to us, given the fact that we were selling IP. And of course, for the remainder of this year, we will still see, on an accumulated level, a very high gross margin based on that deal. That is a level that, if I would guide anyone on this thing, may not be contained over the near future. We hopefully get back there later on. But short term, in each quarter, that level will not be maintained. I think it's important to also see that if we look at -- Richard mentioned operational leverage, you can claim a lot of things about what different things derives from. But one thing is certain that given the turnover we had last year, given the turnover this year and the change, excluding for all unusual items in the different accumulated book numbers are about SEK 88 million. And that for us feels very strong, acknowledging that at least half of it, when you make comparison, derives from the deal we made in Q2 with Bosch. But still, it's a very impressive for us at least change in how we manage profitability and earnings in the company. And as I mentioned and as I've highlighted to the right in this picture, background being given and everything that we feel completely comfortable about is that we have passed a lot of what has been described as the reason for building up working capital, and we also come to a stage where we can see that we are delivering and what follows with that. So moving on to the next one. It is basically saying that we feel comfortable having a stable path. We grow 30% plus in our industry. If you went back 5 years, I guess, that would be viewed as very humble. If you flip it around and say that this is an industrial company in an earlier stage of the market, it's a number that I feel that we are very comfortable with. And also that we have brought on rolling 12 months EBITDA to a positive number of SEK 21 million, and that makes us feel comfortable for the future as well. Having said so, I will leave it back to Richard for the continuation of the presentation. Richard Berkling: Then also reminding you on the upcoming reports, quarter 4 report February 4, 2026, and then quarter 1 report in 2026 on April 23. So then if we look at the segment highlights and what is building up the result and the business at the moment, we see good commercial traction in Marine, all subsegments. We saw the order from GMI Rederi, which was quite encouraging because that is, as we said, the first break into the bulk carriers. We need to mention then the IMO decision or postponement of decision last week. It was a disappointment to the industry. Many put their trust in the fact that the IMO would regulate the net zero tariffs on a global scale. However, in Europe, we already have in place even stricter regulations. So to me, I'm not too surprised that they delayed it because it takes time to change industries in a technology shift. So you will always have resistance. So hopefully, a year from now, they will have a resolution that is signed that is perhaps a bit more easy to adapt for the operators. But in the meantime, we continue to see a strong demand from especially Europe, but a lot of interest globally as well. Power generation, we were quite happy to yesterday report that Zeppelin Power Systems placed an order for 2 different systems implemented in Europe. The fact that they are now exploring to different applications is quite interesting because power generation, as we have pointed out, we believe that power generation will be the largest segment going forward. The difference from marine is that we have still not seen a trigger where an OEM is putting a stick in the sand and said, now we do this. But we are seeing a more clear commercial landscape emerging for backup power and peak shaving applications. There is a lot of discussion on data centers. Of course, we have a quite close collaboration with parties out there. But as I said, we have not seen the trigger where somebody is really putting a stick in the sand and say, now we do this. So we try to contribute with that. We try to challenge the industry, and I will have later on in the presentation some more news on what we will do in that segment. In aviation, we continue the certification process with ZeroAvia and other aerospace partners. They're not the only one who are in certification process. What is quite encouraging is that now ZeroAvia actually have delivered their first systems to customers, and they will be put in operation in 2027. So now we have a deadline on that one, which is really, really encouraging. This is the first information we have seen from them on when this will be put into operation. What we also have seen is that we have now industry validation that our strategy with the medium temperature PEM, which is our next-generation fuel cell stack is the good enough step for larger turbo aircraft in the next generation. So more interest in our collaboration together with Honeywell on the Newborn platform, which is already materialized in the commercial agreement in marine. But for aviation, the fact that we can do with the medium temperature is a technology step that is really valuable to PowerCell because that's where we have invested our position from a technology perspective. Going once back to the operational leverage. One reason why we are able to show this rather good underlying progress when it comes to operational leverage is that we have had for 2025, a strategy to consolidate. And we have consolidated to be able to accelerate. We have consolidation of product platforms. Previously, it was a bit fragmented, which was a risk for a company like PowerCell because you might end up in doing projects everywhere. Now since the introduction of MS 225, we have seen now a serious delivery, which you see in the bottom there. Start of production in April. We now have more than 100 systems in order and in the pipeline. As we said, we are completing the delivery to our Italian shipyard this week, tomorrow, which, of course, is one of the reasons why we have been tying up working capital to the extent that you have seen in the report. Now when we move on to delivery to the Norwegian ferries up in Bodo that is just one more proof point on how well the consolidation strategy have worked, which is also seen in the gross margins of PowerCell. But then in quarter 3, we also reported a change in the management group, which is also a consolidation of the organization. When building up a company like PowerCell, we changed more or less everything in the last 4 years, building up technology portfolios, product portfolios, operations, marketing, sales. I wanted to have a large management group to be able to cover all the aspects of PowerCell. Now we are more mature. We now see a more clear path towards growth. And then we need to have a more streamlined operational management team, which is also why we have consolidated the organization. So this is to increase speed and acceleration and also clear out more accountability now when we actually will speed up everything we do. Anders talked about this before, the fact that we have growth without cost base inflation, I think, is really, really important. Many companies like PowerCell when they grow, they tend to overinvest and always scale up with more and more resources. We are actually going to run 2026 on a lower overhead cost base than we have had before, which is also one proof point of this consolidation strategy, which is also then, I would say, a mitigation to make sure that we can defend both EBITDA and EBIT breakeven on lower levels than most of our colleagues in the industry. So the strategy is, of course, being profitable and scale through discipline. This is something that is in the DNA of the company, but you always need to be there and protect it, especially when you grow. But we see now that we maintain a breakeven level at around SEK 400 million of top line revenue. So then looking at the product strategy and next-generation platform. This is now something we have had in the reports a number of times, but it's worth reiterating. We see that the Marine System 225 platform that was introduced in June last year has been very successful. I would say the most dominant product in the marine industry for fuel cells. Now we are complementing it with a CE marking in quarter 4, optimized for power generation segment, which is a very important proof point and a quality stamp for PowerCell. We continue to see interest in the methanol reformer, both cruise ships, service vessels [indiscernible] and but we also see a growing interest from power generation. The main value there is that you get more energy on a smaller energy storage footprint. So where we have backup power for potential data centers with hydrogen, you need 1/6 of the size, if the energy is stored as methanol. So there is a large interest in this technology from the power generation segment as well. Also availability of methanol is quite good in different regions of the world at a low cost. So this could be something that is enabling growth in areas where you don't have access to hydrogen. And then power generation. In quarter 4, we will have an enhanced product offering in power generation, more optimized for that segment. It is built on the Bosch collaboration that we communicated in quarter 2, to be able to attract more price-sensitive applications. And this is something that is quite important in a technology shift that willingness to pay between segments are different. Marine commercial, for instance, have much higher requirements on performance, quality, robustness, et cetera, which makes the product there more expensive. For power generation, we need to have something that is a bit less expensive. It's a bit more price-sensitive segment, and this is where we now will introduce a new product platform in quarter 4. And then as we said before, we have a strong interest in our next-generation fuel cell stack, which is, I would say, our guarantee for future earnings, which is quite valuable to PowerCell. So reiterating what we said before, the building of the strategic foundations for PowerCell is that we have a platform system and product readiness, the ability to actually have industrialized components because right now, we see growth with a rather short from order to delivery. The demand is a bit volatile, but when we see an order, it's rather short delivery time. And this is really important to us that we are able to meet that. This is also why we have tied up a bit more working capital than perhaps we would have liked, but that is a trade-off that you have to do as both CEO and CFO in a company like PowerCell. It's also important to have the industrial partnerships because the OEMs will drive growth in the industry. They are the Tier 1 to the end user, and they need to invest and be the guarantee of technology, not just as a delivery but also over the life cycle as a service partner. We support with service to them as the second tier. And then, of course, the fiscal discipline. This is really, really important for PowerCell. And we will protect breakeven at low volumes, more or less regardless of anything. So if we then look back to what we set out to achieve in 2025, this was part of what we have said as the focus areas for 2025. So one focus was to reach breakeven on rolling 12 months. We can check that one. We also had an ambition to continue to grow with OEM contracts because we believe that, that is what we give the most sustainable growth. Also, those customers put products in operation. So they are proven and tested and actually validated that they generate value to the end customer. That one with the 2 recent OEM contracts that we have signed in quarter 2 and quarter 3 is quite encouraging. We have said that we need to scale existing product generation. And this is also what has now been generating the growth and also the fact that we reached breakeven. We are doing this, while still investing into the next generation. And I think that the last sentence there is quite important that we are proud of the ability to balance innovation, industrial stability and leverage growth. It's quite easy for a company like PowerCell to optimize on either/or. But the fact that the company has been able to provide this and also that we have had the support from the Board to pursue this sometimes complex strategy is something I'm really happy about because it is not just giving us the fact that we have breakeven today on low volumes. But with the next-generation products, we are now also well positioned for what will happen in future earnings. So that balanced approach is something that I'm really happy about, and I'm proud that we have had the support from both Board but also the commitment and the, I would say, brilliant performance from our team, both in operation and innovation and technology and sales and marketing. So really happy with that progress because it's -- we need it. It's difficult to do business in any technology shift, but we have proved that we can do it and we can actually breakeven on very low volumes. So with that, we open up for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Richard Berkling: Now I have to admit that I don't see the question. Let me see here. Here we are. Do you have any concrete initiatives in the data center area? We know that Bloom Energy and the situation in the U.S. is a question from [ Ari ]. Yes, of course, but as always, we cannot talk about things before they have materialized. There is a massive interest from the data center industry. And this is not only for CO2 emissions, but it's also for energy resilience. In many areas, the grid is full. So getting access to the grid, getting access to stable electricity is quite difficult. So replacing some of the old diesel generators with either fuel cells or something else is quite attractive for the data center operators. And they also have rather high margins on their own business, so they can do this. So we see a lot of commitments from the larger players. We met with some of them in New York during the New York Climate Week. But as I said, it is a combination of getting the whole value chain in position. You need to have supply of fuel, you need to have the grid access, et cetera. So finding the right balance point has been a bit tricky. But in quarter 4, as I said, we will come back with a more clear product offering and hopefully some clarity also in the potential that we see in this industry. So let me see here if we have more. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Richard Berkling: Anders? Anders During: Yes. Richard Berkling: Yes. We had a question, of course, on the cash position and how we see the end of the year and the beginning of next year, even though we don't make the detailed forecast, do you want to comment on that one? Anders During: I think it's without making forecast, which we will try not to do, but we would like to guide everyone reading the report as we understand that this is one of the key questions from a financial standpoint. And I think the efforts we have done in the first 3 quarters this year would -- either way you would have done it, accumulated more working capital. On top of that, we also spent money on those proceeds that we discussed during the share issue last year. And following what Richard just mentioned in the beginning of the presentation that we are in final delivery stages in 2 large projects. Obviously, those 2 large projects has terms and conditions included in them that indicates that once delivered, we get paid to not giving you any guidance, but with more stating that we feel comfortable about those dynamics. We are comfortable at this point in time. Richard Berkling: Very good. And then we had a question from [ Niklas Holmgren ] here. Once again, regarding the data centers, do you think you have the right product offering to make this a significant source of revenue for PowerCell over time? So far, it's been mainly SOFC manufacturers like Bloom Energy has been successful in this space. That is a very good question, and it requires some explanation. One reason why our technology, the PEM fuel cell complements the SOFC is that SOFC is a very stable installation. It doesn't take dynamic load well. So where we see a potential growing demand is for backup power and peak shaving because that's when you have the fast dynamic load that the PEM fuel cell is very strong with. The solid oxide fuel cell cannot do that because it takes a very long time to ramp up and ramp down. So there are different applications. So I think that the different technologies complement each other. And we believe that PEM fuel cells and the backup power peak shaving is a very relevant application for data centers because there are today very few areas globally where you can fully rely on grid access. So we believe that our technology will have a strong opportunity for the data center segment. With that said, as we presented here in the report in quarter 4, we will come back with a more clear product offering because we believe that the price point is slightly different from other segments. And we are now preparing an introduction of more targeted products to be able to capture that growth. So it's a very good question, and it gave us an opportunity to also explain the difference between our technology and the one that has been prevailing so far in this segment. Then also, we have a question on Torghatten. With Torghatten final delivery, can you comment on the service agreement with Torghatten? Yes, I can. Since we are completing delivery, we start delivery now in quarter 4 and will be completed in quarter 1. That means that for 2026, the service contract will be in place. It is a 10- to 15-year service contract that we will sign together with Torghatten. But the details of that contract, we need to come back to when it's signed because it's still under discussion. But of course, now when we are getting more large installations in operation with customers, the service side of PowerCell will be more interesting because now we will have a service revenue and a service opportunity that has been lacking before. And this is also one positive benefit of moving away from the early stages of project execution to more normal industrial applications and customers that put products into operational service. So it is both an opportunity for revenue, but also an opportunity to learn more and also show the industry how this works. So it's a good question. We had a question from Rakesh at Chevron Shipping. How do you expect the IMO Net-Zero talk failure to affect future orders? Well, since we didn't see any effects on the contrary that we had a positive effect because the IMO was not signed yet. This was just a proposal. It's been postponed now for 12 months. I think that the -- what we see now is that certain areas will wait. That is for sure, but I think that they waited anyway. So the segments and geographical areas where we see growth like Europe, that will continue because Europe already, as we said, have a more strict regulatory framework than what the IMO proposal was. So it's more likely that we see a continued hesitation in the U.S. for certain marine applications. But on the other hand, there are also those who want to accelerate because this is actually making business sense in certain areas already now. So we will continue to follow this and monitor, but we don't see any immediate impact on the order book or on the leads funnel that we are operating. I think that, that more or less concluded. We are now 1 minute past the deadline. So as always, thank you very much for listening in. We always encourage you to come and visit us in Gothenburg at the factory if you have time, regardless if you are a shareholder or if you are a financial analyst. So look us up, come visit us. And with that, have a nice day, and see you in February. Anders During: Bye-bye.
Operator: Good morning, and thank you for joining us today for QCR Holdings, Inc. Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. Following the close of the market yesterday, the company issued its earnings press release for the third quarter. If anyone joining us today has not yet received a copy, it is available on the company's website, www.qcrh.com. With us today from management are Todd Gipple, President and CEO; and Nick Anderson, CFO. Management will provide a summary of the financial results, and then we will open the call to questions from analysts. Before we begin, I would like to remind everyone that some of the information management will be providing today falls under the guidelines of forward-looking statements as defined by the Securities and Exchange Commission. As part of these guidelines, any statements made during this call concerning the company's hopes, beliefs, expectations and predictions of the future are forward-looking statements, and actual results could differ materially from those projected. Additional information on these factors is included in the company's SEC filings, which are available on the company's website. Additionally, management may refer to non-GAAP measures, which are intended to supplement but not substitute for the most directly comparable GAAP measures. The press release available on the website contains the financial and other quantitative information to be discussed today as well as the reconciliation of the GAAP to non-GAAP measures. As a reminder, this conference call is being recorded and will be available for replay through October 30, 2025 starting this afternoon, approximately 1 hour after the completion of this call. It will also be accessible on the company's website. I would now turn the call over to Mr. Todd Gipple, at QCR Holdings. Todd Gipple: Good morning, everyone. Thank you for joining our call today. I'd like to start with an overview of our third quarter performance, and then Nick will walk us through the financial results in more detail. We delivered exceptional third quarter results, achieving record quarterly net income and strong earnings per share growth of 26% compared to the second quarter. I would characterize this as a return-to-form quarter for our company as we have internal expectations to drive sustained top-tier financial performance for our shareholders and we hold ourselves accountable to achieve this level of success. We delivered across the board on our key operating metrics and exceeded the upper end of our guidance range for loan growth, NIM expansion and capital markets revenue. I would like to thank all 1,000 of our team members for their hard work delivering these exceptional results. Our record earnings were driven by a rebound in capital markets revenue as well as robust loan growth and continued net interest margin expansion that drove a substantial increase in net interest income. Also contributing to our strong results was an 8% linked-quarter increase in wealth management revenue as this business continues to perform at a high level. We are pleased to report continued margin expansion again this quarter, driven by strong earnings asset growth and higher loan and investment yields while maintaining a static cost of funds. Our loan growth accelerated significantly, increasing by $286 million or 17% annualized and was 15% net of the planned runoff from M2 equipment finance loans and leases. This growth was fueled by strong new loan production from both our LIHTC and traditional lending businesses. Looking ahead, we have a solid pipeline and remain optimistic about sustaining this momentum and are guiding to gross annualized loan growth in a range of 10% to 15% for the fourth quarter. As I discussed in our last earnings call, I view our company is operating through 3 primary lines of business: Traditional banking, wealth management and our LIHTC lending platform. I am pleased that each of these delivered improved performance this past quarter. We continue to deliver robust organic growth and improved profitability in our traditional banking business. Our multi-charter community banking model built around separate autonomous banks that attract top-tier talent and the best clients in our markets allows us to consistently capture market share from our competitors. We had strong traditional loan growth and core deposits grew at an annual rate of 6% for the quarter, and $410 million or 8% annualized year-to-date. Additionally, our digital transformation remains on track with key milestones achieved this year, including foundational work toward our Bank of the Future, and the successful conversion of the core operating system for the first of our 4 charters earlier this month. By streamlining and improving our technology stack, we expect to unlock significant operating leverage in the future as we convert our banks into a unified, more modern and efficient operating system. These upgrades are expected to drive measurable improvements in productivity, service delivery and cost structure while empowering both our bankers and our shared services support teams with better tools to serve clients more efficiently and effectively. Looking ahead, we anticipate continued progress on this initiative with each conversion bringing us closer to a fully integrated agile platform that enhances efficiency and reduces long-term operating costs. This will further improve the profitability of our traditional banking business. Wealth management also remains a strategic growth engine. Year-to-date, we've added 384 new client relationships and brought in $738 million in new assets under management. In the third quarter alone, AUM grew by $316 million or 5% and revenue surpassed $5 million, an 8% increase over the prior quarter. Wealth Management revenue year-over-year is up $1.5 million or 15% annualized. Our success in this business continues to be driven by the experience of our team and the power of our relationship-driven model which connects our traditional banking clients and key professionals in each of our communities with our dedicated wealth advisers across our markets. As we expand into Central Iowa and Southwest Missouri, we are gaining momentum and deepening client engagement, reinforcing Wealth Management as a key driver of our long-term strategy. Our LIHTC lending business delivered exceptional performance in the third quarter. Activity rebounded sharply, underscoring the continued demand for affordable housing and the strength of our seasoned team. Developers are actively navigating the broader macroeconomic challenges from earlier in the year. demonstrating resilience and a commitment to advancing their projects. We continue to view LIHTC lending as a highly durable, highly profitable and differentiated line of business for QCRH, anchored by our deep network of developer relationships and the historically high-quality assets, our platform consistently delivers. The demand for affordable housing remains high and recent legislation has expanded access to affordable housing tax credits. Our strong relationships with industry-leading LIHTC developers, combined with persistent market appetite, positions us well to grow this business and further strengthen our financial performance. In addition to winning more deals with our existing developer clients, our team has created new relationships with 10 experienced LIHTC developers this year with several of these being among the best developers in the country. Given the strong momentum and the resulting strength of our pipeline, we are increasing our guidance for capital markets revenue to be in the range of $55 million to $65 million over the next 4 quarters. On the topic of annual guidance for Capital Markets revenue, I wanted to share some facts about our past performance that will provide some strong evidence on the durability of this business. We first provided next 4 quarters guidance for Capital Markets revenue in January of 2023 as part of our Q4 2022 earnings call. Since then and through our earnings call in October of '24, we provided next 4 quarters Capital Markets guidance a total of 8x. Our actual capital markets revenue results are perfect 8 and 0 in those 8 periods. Capital Markets revenue for those next 4 quarters was within the guidance range once and actually exceeded the upper end of the guidance range, the remaining 7 times. During this 2-year period, our LIHTC team has navigated a variety of interest rate environments and other challenges to deliver consistently strong rolling 12-month results. We believe that this clearly demonstrates the durability of this highly profitable business. We do not evaluate our success or the value of this business by a single quarter, but rather our performance over a 4-quarter horizon. This is not a transactional business, but one built on relationships with some of the best LIHTC developers in the country and their projects have a long production cycle. We will work hard to continue to demonstrate the durability of this business in order to drive the high valuation that we believe it deserves. We also continue to work on our strategic goal of improving the balance sheet efficiency of our LIHTC lending business, especially during the typical 2- to 3-year construction phase for many of our LIHTC clients. One strategy includes partnering with third parties in LIHTC construction loan sale transactions, which will enable us to expand our permanent loan LIHTC lending capacity and drive increased Capital Markets revenue. Additionally, LIHTC construction loan sale transaction strengthens our regulatory capital position by reducing risk-weighted assets, resulting in increased total risk-based and common equity Tier 1 capital that improves our capital flexibility and allows us to more effectively deploy capital. LIHTC construction loan sale transactions build on the momentum of our successful LIHTC permanent loan securitizations launched in 2023, which has opened significant growth opportunities for this portion of our business. We remain committed to finding innovative ways to expand our LIHTC lending capacity and support our developer clients who are making a meaningful difference in the lives of those that need affordable housing. Our continued focus on innovation within our LIHTC business will not only strengthen our financial position, but also reinforces our long-term commitment to scalable growth that benefits our shareholders. Our use of LIHTC permanent loan securitizations and construction loan sale transactions enable us to balance concentration risk, asset growth, liquidity and capital levels while generating capital markets revenue that significantly exceeds the impact of the loan sales on net interest income. Although securitizations and LIHTC construction loan sales strategies reduce on-balance sheet growth, they offer greater long-term value to our bottom line. We've consistently grown our LIHTC business both in terms of portfolio size and the capital markets revenue it generates. By freeing up balance sheet capacity, we can accelerate new loan production and unlock additional Capital Markets revenue opportunities. Since 2024, our average quarterly net loan growth has been $160 million, excluding securitization, and we expect this momentum to continue. As a result, even when we securitize loans in a given quarter, the go-forward impact on NII is muted. We rapidly redeploy that capacity into new originations, generating capital markets revenue that exceeds what we would earn by retaining those loans on balance sheet. We continue to manage our LIHTC business with agility and execute on strategies to enhance its sustainability and begin growing this business in order to drive long-term value for our shareholders. As we capitalize on significant growth opportunities, we are also strategically managing our approach to surpassing the $10 billion asset threshold. Our use of LIHTC permanent loan securitizations and the construction loan sale transactions provide meaningful flexibility in navigating this milestone. Our preparation for crossing $10 billion began several years ago, and we have proactively layered the associated costs into our current run rate. As part of our Bank of the Future digital transformation, we've also successfully secured higher interchange revenues and reduced debit card processing costs, helping to partially offset the anticipated Durbin Amendment impact. Thanks to our proactive planning and strategic execution, we are well positioned across the $10 billion asset threshold with confidence and modest financial impact. Moving to asset quality, which improved this quarter with overall credit metrics remaining excellent. Net charge-offs declined compared to the second quarter, and our provision for credit losses was slightly lower than the prior period. Additionally, total criticized loans improved during the quarter and have decreased 9% year-to-date. Between the start of the third quarter and October 20th, we have returned $10 million of capital to shareholders with 129,000 common shares repurchased at opportunistic valuation levels. On October 20, the Board approved a new share repurchase program, authorizing the repurchase of up to 1.7 million shares of outstanding common stock. The new share repurchase program authorization equips us with a flexible capital allocation tool, enabling us to be opportunistic and repurchase shares when it aligns with our strategic and financial objectives, underscoring our ongoing commitment to shareholder value. In summary, QCR Holdings is executing at a high level across all 3 core business lines. We continue to invest in technology, talent and strategic growth initiatives while maintaining disciplined expense management. We remain confident in our ability to sustain top-tier financial performance and deliver long-term value to our shareholders. I will now turn the call over to Nick to provide further details regarding our third quarter results. Nick Anderson: Thank you, Todd. Good morning, everyone. We delivered record quarterly adjusted net income of $37 million or $2.17 per diluted share, driven by strong performance across our core businesses. Capital markets revenue rebounded to $24 million, up $14 million from the prior quarter. Net interest income increased $3 million or 18% annualized, supported by continued net interest margin expansion and exceptional loan growth. Our NIM on a tax equivalent yield basis increased by 5 basis points from the second quarter, exceeding the high end of our guidance range. This expansion was driven by strong growth in both loans and investments, coupled with higher asset yields. By leveraging our liability-sensitive balance sheet and maintaining disciplined deposit rate management, we have achieved deposit betas nearly 2.5x higher than our earning asset betas. We have reduced our cost of funds by 43 basis points since the Fed began cutting rates in 2024. While the most recent rate cut occurred just 2 weeks before quarter end, we expect to realize the full benefit of that rate cut in the fourth quarter of approximately $500,000 of additional net interest income or 2 to 3 basis points of NIM accretion. We also remain well positioned to benefit from any future rate reductions as rate-sensitive liabilities exceed our rate-sensitive assets by $1.1 billion. In the near term, if there are additional Fed rate cuts, we expect 2 to 3 basis points of NIM accretion for every 25 basis point cut in rates. If the yield curve steepens, we'd expect performance at the top end of that range. And if the yield curve remains flat or modestly inverted, then we would expect performance at the lower end of the range. Our NIM TEY has now expanded by 26 basis points over the past 6 quarters. We anticipate continued core margin expansion and are guiding to an increase in fourth quarter NIM TEY ranging from 3 to 7 basis points, assuming no further Federal Reserve rate cuts during the quarter. The NIM TEY guidance range reflects a full quarter benefit from the September rate cut. In addition, we have repricing opportunities on approximately $168 million in fixed rate loans, yielding 5.5%, resetting nearly 100 basis points higher and continued CD repricing in the fourth quarter with maturities of nearly $400 million. These CDs are currently yielding 4.13% and are expected to be retained and repriced at rates between 3.45% to 3.75%. Noninterest income totaled $37 million for the third quarter. driven primarily by $24 million in capital markets revenue. We saw robust LIHTC activity, which led to a $14 million increase in capital markets revenue and exceeded the top end of our guidance range. Our Wealth Management business generated $5 million in revenue for the third quarter, an increase of 8% compared to the second quarter. On a year-over-year basis, Wealth Management revenue has grown by 15% annualized reflecting the strength and momentum of this business. Significant AUM growth across our markets not only strengthens our foundation but also helps mitigate revenue pressure during periods of broader market volatility. Now turning to our expenses. Noninterest expenses grew $7 million for the third quarter, primarily from robust capital markets revenue and loan growth, which drove variable compensation higher. Professional and data processing expenses and occupancy and equipment expenses related to our digital transformation also contributed to the increase in noninterest expense. Our highly incentivized variable compensation structure is designed to enhance operating leverage and provide expense flexibility across changing revenue cycles, rewarding our employees only after value has been delivered to our shareholders. For the third quarter, our efficiency ratio was 55.8%, the lowest in 4 years. Compared to the first 9 months of 2024, we have maintained strong discipline over core noninterest expenses, which are up less than 1% on an annualized basis, while adjusted net income has grown by 9% annualized. We continue to manage our operating expenses with discipline while making strategic investments in technology and automation to further empower our high-performing operations team. These investments are key to enhancing our future operating leverage and supporting the scalability and profitability of our multi-charter community banking model. We are retaining our quarterly noninterest expense guidance, which is projected to be in the range of $52 million to $55 million for the fourth quarter. This includes costs for our digital transformation, including the successful completion of our first core operating system conversion in the fourth quarter. It also reflects assumptions that both capital markets revenue and loan growth are within our guided ranges. Moving to our balance sheet. During the quarter, total loans grew by $254 million or 15% annualized. When adding back the impact from the planned runoff of the M2 equipment portfolio, total loans grew by $286 million or 17% annualized. Since 2023, loan securitizations have played a key role in supporting the continued success of our LIHTC business, which remains a significant driver of capital markets revenue. Year-to-date, core deposits have increased by $410 million or 8% annualized. We continue to generate strong deposit growth across our markets. These results reflect the success of our relationship-driven strategy of growing core deposits, providing a solid funding base that supports future growth. Turning to our asset quality, which remains excellent. Total criticized loans decreased $6 million or 15 basis points to 2.01% of total loans and leases. Net charge-offs decreased by $2 million from the second quarter, driven by lower charge-offs from our M2 equipment portfolio. Our total NPAs to total asset ratio declined 1 basis point to 0.45%, which is the lowest level since September of 2024, and approximately half of our 20-year historical average. Total provision for credit losses of $4 million was up slightly from the previous quarter and was due to loan growth, partially offset by improved credit quality of the loan portfolio. The allowance for credit losses to total loans held for investment was 1.24%. We continue to closely monitor our asset quality across all business lines as part of our historically strong credit culture. As we have passed the 1-year mark since announcing our exit from the equipment financing business, we are pleased to report that the runoff of this portfolio is progressing as planned. The portfolio has declined by nearly 40% and is on track to fall below $200 million or less than 3% of our total loan portfolio by year-end. Credit loss expenses for this business are down 45% or $4 million year-over-year. NPAs are also down 29% year-over-year, reflecting both the runoff of the higher-risk assets and the improved seasoning of the remaining portfolio. These positive trends support our expectation for continued softening in future charge-offs from this portfolio and enable us to redeploy capital into our core traditional and LIHTC lending businesses. Our tangible common equity to tangible assets ratio rose by 5 basis points to 9.97% at quarter end, driven by record earnings and improved AOCI as interest rates declined, partially offset by exceptional loan growth and share repurchases. Our common equity Tier 1 ratio decreased 9 basis points to 10.34% and our total risk-based capital ratio decreased 23 basis points to 14.03%, due to our strong earnings growth that was overpowered by our exceptional 15% loan growth and opportunistic share repurchases. We remain committed to maintaining strong regulatory capital and consistently assess our capital structure to support our business model and growth objectives. Our goal is to maximize capital flexibility while benchmarking against industry peers. In September, we successfully completed the replacement of $70 million of subordinated debt originally issued in 2020 that became callable. The new issuance for the same amount was structured in 2 privately placed tranches at highly competitive rates. This transaction further supports our Tier 2 capital levels. Additionally, in August, we secured a new source of funding, which will further enhance our available sources of liquidity to support our growth. We pledged a portion of our held-to-maturity nonrated municipal bonds in exchange for term borrowings of $134 million at a rate of 4.05%, which will reprice in 3 years. Our nearly $1 billion investment portfolio of HTM municipal bonds is a differentiator for us and is a strong high-quality earning asset with tax equivalent yields near 6%, and new bond issuances in the mid-7% range. This recent transaction highlights our ability to strategically unlock liquidity from long-term investments to support growth. We delivered another quarter of exceptional growth in tangible book value per share, which rose $2.50, approaching nearly $56 per share, reflecting 19% annualized growth for the quarter. Over the past 5 years, TBV has grown at a compound annual rate of 12%, highlighting our continued financial performance and long-term focus on creating shareholder value. Finally, our effective tax rate for the quarter was 9.5%, up from 5% in the prior quarter. The linked quarter increase is primarily due to $10 million in higher pretax income that increased the mix of our taxable income relative to our tax-exempt income. Our tax-exempt loan and bond portfolios have consistently supported a low tax liability. Given a mix of revenue in line with our guidance range, we expect our effective tax rate to be in the range of 7% to 8% for the fourth quarter of 2025. With that added context on our third quarter results, let's open the call for your questions. Operator, we are ready for our first question. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question today comes from Damon DelMonte with KBW. Damon Del Monte: Congrats on a really nice quarter. I just wanted to start with the margin in the guidance. I think you're calling for 3 to 7 basis points of expansion. That does not include any rate cuts. Is that correct? Nick Anderson: Yes, that's right, Damon. Damon Del Monte: And you had said for each 25 basis points, you could see another 2 to 3 basis point increase on the margin? Nick Anderson: Yes. So when we set that guidance range for Q4, 3 to 7, 2 to 3 basis points of that is coming from a full quarter's worth of the September Fed rate cut. We've got a fair amount of fixed rate loan repricing and CD repricing in the fourth quarter in addition to some additional municipal bond purchases that we have in our pipeline. So a combination of all that gives us some confidence in that 3 to 7 range. Damon Del Monte: Got it. Okay. That's helpful. And then I guess my second question here would be on the buyback. Just given the growing capital levels and given the activity in the third quarter, is it fair to assume that you guys will remain active in that regard? Todd Gipple: Yes. Damon, thank you for the question. Regarding future buybacks, I'd say this, we're very profitable with higher earnings per share, less expected net organic growth as we start using other partners' balance sheets and capital rather than ours to drive higher earnings. So that's going to reduce our need to retain more capital for organic growth. While we're open to M&A and we continue to look for partners, it would be a great fit strategically and financially, it's really not a priority for us right now as we have the ability to grow TBV and EPS at a faster clip than our peers. So this really reduces our need to retain capital for M&A. As you know, we have a modest dividend. Historically, that's because we were prioritizing organic growth and M&A. So that leaves us with a significant amount of capital available for repurchases and that's why we got started in Q3. We are growing TCE near the upper end of our preferred range. We became comfortable we are going to be executing some LIHTC offtake and freeing up more capital. So we could be opportunistic in buying shares at what we believe are unreasonably low valuations. And so we expect to continue to be opportunistic, really no algebraic formula for when or how much and at what price. As you know, it's more art than science, but we would intend to be opportunistic with buybacks based on valuation. Operator: The next question comes from Nathan Race with Piper Sandler. Nathan Race: Congrats on a great quarter. Todd, I'm not sure if you touched on it in your prepared remarks, and I apologize if you did. But in terms of the appetite for additional securitizations and the timing of which you would expect to complete the larger one that we've discussed in the past, would love maybe if you could just update us on that front? Todd Gipple: Sure. We are anticipating doing a large permanent loan securitization in the first half of next year. We've delayed that a bit to really build a bigger inventory. We have found -- we've done 4 of them. This would be our fifth. We are finding it as significantly more beneficial to have a larger securitization the order of magnitude really does matter in profitability. So we're building a bigger portfolio by waiting a bit. It takes some time to get through all the machinations that Fannie and Freddie to get this done. But next year sometime, we're targeting something around $350 million. And that will, again, just like the construction loan sales we're contemplating here a little sooner, it frees us up to continue to grow the business and go a little more quickly in LIHTC. So that's really our game plan there. Nathan Race: Okay. Great. And how should we think about the NII impact from the construction loan sales and the larger permanent loan securitizations that you're contemplating for next year? I mean is it a meaningful NII give up just given the lower balances on the sheet? Or just any thoughts along those lines would be appreciated. Todd Gipple: Sure. And Nate, I understand it's a bit difficult as we're not being real precise on the construction loan sales. We're not being very precise on timing or amount. We'll have a lot more detail for all of you in the January call. So to be candid, I'd stick with using our guide on NIM and loan growth, the gross loan growth to model NII for Q4. We'll have a lot more precision in January in terms of NII impact of construction loan sales or offtake and the perm loan securitization. So we can be a little bit more precise likely in January. So I do apologize. It's a little harder for you guys to navigate. What I would say is that we are incredibly pleased to be on the verge of finding partners to buy our construction loan portfolio and not all of it certainly, but to get started. What it really does is it frees us up to do more perm financing which is where we make our capital markets revenue. And any give up in NII, I would expect more than that to be replaced by improved capital markets revenue. That's really the game plan here is to grow revenue by using other folks' balance sheet and capital and not our own. And maybe the other data point I'd give around this we can get into more detail offline with any of you that want to do the math more distinctly. But we've got about $2.5 billion in LIHTC on the balance sheet. And that's still well within our policy limits, internal policy limits, our percentage of capital and other limits that we have self-imposed. So we certainly have room, but what I would tell you is nearly $1 billion of that is construction. In construction, we are doing to accommodate our clients. They love our program, they love our people, they love our say-do ratio. So they often want us to do both. But that construction lending burns up capital even when it's not funded yet as unfunded commitments. So it really constrained how often we can say yes to clients, and we want to say yes to clients more often. So the way all of you should think about it is not necessarily a big drag on our total LIHTC portfolio. It's more -- we want to change the mix over time. We want to have the ability to offtake construction, so we can say yes to clients and free up more capacity to do perm financing where we make the capital markets revenue. So I know that's a very long answer to a short question, but that's really what we're shooting for here. Once we get these sales completed, we'll have a lot more data in January to talk about the impact on both NII and capital markets revenue. Nathan Race: That's really helpful, add sorry, go ahead Nick. Nick Anderson: Nate, I might add a few things here, too, just from the client perspective, while we say loan sale, these really are going to be accounted for as a loan sale but a participation, loan participation, if you will, where the client really is not necessarily affected or impacted. And that's honestly preferred by them. They appreciate, as Todd said, the say-do ratio that our SFG team delivers. And so really a transparent event for them. Nathan Race: Okay. That's really helpful. And I appreciate all the dynamics at play that make kind of the NII outlook a bit opaque. I suppose if we were to exclude loan sales and securitizations from the outlook. I mean how do you guys kind of think about the loan growth prospects next year? I know you're targeting 10% to 15% in 4Q, but just given the partners that you've added on the LIHTC side of things recently, curious if you can kind of just like frame up any loan growth expectations on a gross basis into next year? Todd Gipple: Yes. Sure, Nate, I appreciate the question. I'm probably going to be a little less transparent here, as we'll have a lot more in January. But I would tell you that based on the pipelines we see in both traditional bank and LIHTC, I do think our growth rate is going to be more in the double digits. It was a bit softer, certainly first half of this year. We do not expect that to be a problem going forward. I think this 10% to 15% guide in Q4 in January, we'll be more accurate about it. But I would expect double digits going forward. Operator: The next question comes from Daniel Tamayo with Raymond James. Daniel Tamayo: Maybe starting on the conversions and on the expense side. Just curious how much onetime costs or costs that are specifically related to the conversions are going to be happening in the fourth quarter. I think you called out that those are included in the $52 million to $55 million guidance. And then as we think about '26 expenses, if you're expecting savings from those conversions or how we can kind of think about the jumping off point for the run rate next year? Todd Gipple: Sure, Danny. I'll tee it up a little bit with some of the strategy and higher-level stuff. Nick will have a little bit more for you on NIE. Multiyear projects started in '23 with evaluation selection, setting our digital transformation strategy. We have accomplished a lot here in this year, '25. We converted all 4 banks to a new online banking platform with Q2. That went very well. We've been using Q2 for commercial online banking and treasury management for some time. We love their software, so do our clients, very good feedback from clients on the consumer platform as well and NPS, Net Promoter Scores are actually up post conversion. So we feel good about all that. So we did our first core conversion at the bank in Southwest Missouri, Guarantee Bank. It went incredibly well. Basically on day 1 had really no system issues. Call volumes were at normal levels. So our strategy of doing the consumer online banking platform first, which is what clients really see the bank through was a good strategy. Just got a couple of things to share, and then I'll let Nick talk a little bit about the expenses. But I want to share this because I'm very excited about it. I probably came through a bit in our prepared comments, but I just want to share 2 stories about the impact long term of our digital transformation because while we talk about expenses, getting it in place, the offset opportunity in the future is significant. We actually had 1 of our staff e-mail the CEO of the bank on Monday morning and said he booked a new business client and that in the old system used to take them around 40 minutes. He got it done in 16, the very first time he used the system. So we are very high on the new core. The second one is maybe a bit more funny. One of the staff said it was like going from Pong on Atari to the newest version of Xbox. So just a little bit of color around why we are doing this. We're leaving an antiquated Fischer core going to Jack Henry SilverLake. It's going to be at a much lower cost, far more efficient. To your bigger question, Danny, of how soon we're going to see that. We still have 2 conversions to go in April and October of '26. Our final one will be in April of '27. So it's really going to be the back half of '27 and beyond that we're going to see these efficiencies. And we've been managing this investment effectively. We really don't expect to fall outside those guardrails on NIE of 5% growth. So with that, I'll step back and I'll let Nick talk about the numbers a little more deeply. Nick Anderson: Yes. Danny, so significant team effort on this project, and they're doing a fantastic job of keeping us on schedule. And as Todd quoted some examples, creating those efficiencies with each of these conversions. So certainly, in 2025 here, there's some overlap in the cost component of these. I'm going to borrow a quote from Larry Helling, he would often say "We're paying for the bank of the future while we're still paying for the bank of the past." So we're experiencing some of that here today. Much of the expenses are centered around specifically the decommissioning and termination costs associated with our legacy core and some data conversions. So this year, we're laying the foundation for Bank of the Future, standardizing those configurations. And so this requires several other conversions of secondary applications, and all of this is a little bit front loaded, if you will, in 2025. So it's about a range of $4 million to $5 million of expense -- NIE expense here in 2025. We'd expect to see that come down into a range of $3 million to $4 million next year. And then as Todd mentioned in '27, we would expect to see some real efficiencies come to the bottom line, creating that operating leverage that we're looking for. Daniel Tamayo: Great. That's really helpful color. Maybe one on credit here. So you've had reserves come down the last couple of quarters. I think you called out some specific reserves that came out this quarter. You've got this strategy to push some construction loans off the balance sheet. You're going to still have the lower loss [indiscernible] coming on. Is it safe to assume that I guess, all else equal from a macro perspective, we might see reserves continue to trend down as a percentage of loans over the next several quarters? Todd Gipple: Yes, Danny, I don't think we expect that 124 basis points and necessarily keep dropping. We have dropped at about 6 basis points over the last several quarters. And I would tell you, it's really for good reasons. Our charge-offs from M2, which at times were 80% to 100% of the charge-offs we were having in the business over the last several years. We were really pleased to see that fall off pretty significantly in the third quarter. Our projections indicate the velocity of NPAs and charge-offs from M2 are slowing and we expect that to continue next year. So that and the fact we did get one NPA resolved in Q3 and that charge-off was around $1.2 million less than we had reserves. So we actually freed up some reserve on a really good outcome on getting on NPA off the book. So I guess what I'm trying to say is a lot of the reduction in the reserve level has been -- we've been resolving NPAs and sometimes with great outcomes, sometimes with just charge-offs in the M2 portfolio, but it's really been that we've been using that reserve for what it's intended to clean up deals, clean up the portfolio. So when we do have LIHTC construction loans come off, will free up some reserves, but we expect to rebuild that portfolio quite quickly. So I don't know that I have any expectations. Our coverage ratio is really going to drop much more. Operator: The next question comes from Jeff Rulis with D.A. Davidson. Jeff Rulis: Todd, I wanted to circle back to your maybe initial view of growth in '26, maybe not something you wanted to chat on. But you kind of referenced it more of a double-digit pace. I wanted to see if that's -- is that net of securitizations and construction sales? Todd Gipple: No, Jeff, I appreciate the ability to clarify that. That 10% to 15% range continuing into '26 would be gross production. And then in January on the fourth quarter call, I think we're going to be able to have a lot more color for you and everyone else in terms of what we're expecting net. Jeff Rulis: Got you. Okay. And then the follow-on is just to further -- as you talk about the partnerships on the securitization side, would that sort of replace you talked about the $350 million potentially targeted. Does that -- is the partnerships that are developing, does that make it less lumpy, more like kind of a fluid channel of LIHTC loan sales real time? Is that where we're headed in a sense? Todd Gipple: Yes, Jeff, what you're talking about is really, I think, called a forward flow arrangement where it's almost real time where those loans are getting moved to someone else's balance sheet. We're not really interested in that for a couple of reasons. One, it's a little difficult for operations to handle versus these participations that Nick mentioned. And the other is we really want to retain the flexibility. We want to be able to use this as a very effective tool to manage our LIHTC business, to grow that business, to improve capital markets revenue pull-through and to manage concentration and capital and everything else. So we really want it to be something that we can use as a tool when the time is right. So that, again makes it more lumpy. I know that makes your job and everyone else's more difficult. We will do our best to be as transparent as possible when we know we're doing those things, and we know that they are coming. But ultimately, the straightforward answer is, Jeff, we want the flexibility to manage it the best we know how for our shareholders. Operator: The next question comes from Brian Martin with Janney Montgomery. Brian Martin: Congrats on the quarter. Just the -- maybe, Nick, just 1 question on the margin. Just for the fixed rate loans that are repricing in '26, can you just give an idea on how much is there and then what -- kind of what the rate is on those? I think you gave forth. Nick Anderson: Yes. Brian, as we look into 2026, we've got about $560 million of fixed rate loans. They're currently yielding about $5.90. And so in today's rates, we're seeing new pricing coming in at like $6.25 to $6.50 range. So we'll have some positive uptick there. Brian Martin: Okay. And then just in terms of just deposit growth kind of funding maybe a bit stronger loan growth going forward? And I guess, just trying to think about how to think about deposit growth and some of that, I guess, is be dependent on the sales and the securitization, but just the general outlook on deposit growth here and level of borrowings is kind of how we think about that going forward? Nick Anderson: Yes. So Brian, I was looking the other day, we've added 1,500 new accounts year-to-date. And certainly, in Q4, we tend to have some seasonality with some public deposits from property tax payments in our area. But what I'm most impressed with is every quarter when I get the updated list of new accounts added and the relationships, I'm always very impressed. Its our private bankers, our treasury management teams, our senior leadership teams. They're out pounding the pavement in their markets, our markets. And it's something we don't often see from the bigger banks or some of our competition. So I think in some cases, I was discussing with one of our bank CEOs, we're chasing some of these larger clients that may not necessarily be borrowing clients. So they may not be on everybody's radar. And we're working those relationships over 15 years at times, and he shared a few opportunities that he's landed this quarter that were just that very long sales cycles, but they see our involvement in the community. They see our market presence and leadership in the community. And so yes, we continue to just drive new relationships that lead to new deposits. And so yes, but you also mentioned too, we have some opportunity with some of the construction loan sales and/or securitization that help take care of some of our funding needs, too. Brian Martin: Yes. Okay. Stay tuned for the January call. And just in terms of -- on the capital, is there kind of a target when we think about how much capacity you have to do these buybacks, where you kind of want to maintain the capital? I mean you talked about it's gotten to a level and it's going to continue to build quickly. But is there kind of a base to think about if we model in some buybacks where you think capital -- where you want to maintain kind of a minimum level or target level? Todd Gipple: Yes, Brian, I appreciate the question. I'm reluctant to give any guidance on just how many shares we might buy and when. But I understand that it does have a very positive impact on EPS when we can do it at the right valuation levels from that perspective. What I would tell you is we're at TCE at 10%, basically even with some buyback activity this past quarter. So we do have capacity. And what I would tell you is the key word I would use is opportunistic that at current valuation levels, we feel like it's attractive to the company and our shareholders for us to use this maybe even excess capital to repurchase shares. So we intend to continue to be opportunistic when it comes to that. But we're going to have to balance the other needs for capital as well. My long answer to the shorter question early on repurchases the 4 uses of that capital right now, buybacks are probably our highest and best use. Operator: [Operator Instructions] There are no further questions at this time, which concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Todd Gipple for any closing remarks. Todd Gipple: Thanks to all of you for joining our call today. We appreciate your interest in our company. Have a great day, and we look forward to connecting with you sometime soon. Thank you. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Maria Caneman: Good morning, and thank you for dialing in this morning. I am Maria Caneman, Head of Investor Relations here at Swedbank. Welcome to our third quarter results presentation. With me today is our CEO, Jens Henriksson; and our CFO, Jon Lidefelt. Jens and Jon will start with the presentation, and then there will be an opportunity to ask questions. Jens, I hand over to you. Jens Henriksson: Thank you, Maria. Swedbank has once again delivered a strong result in uncertain times. The geopolitical situation, continued uncertainty about tariffs and trade and the increasing concerns about weak public finances across the world are slowing down global growth. Twice a year, the world's economic policy decision-makers meet at the IMF. The starting point for their discussions is the world economic outlook, which was published a week ago with the headline, "Global economy in flux, prospects remain dim." With that said, our four home markets have healthy fundamentals, strong public finances, low government debt, innovative companies, profitable banks and low interest rates. In Sweden, we see signs of improvement. Our economists forecast growth of 2% next year, while the Swedish government is more optimistic and projects 3%. In Estonia, economic development is still subdued, and we are seeing some recovery in Latvia and the development in Lithuania continues to be strong. In these uncertain times, Swedbank stands strong and is well positioned for sustainable growth and profitability. We can today report a return on equity of 16% and earnings per share of SEK 7.53 for the third quarter. During the quarter, income increased while cost decreased. Our cost-to-income ratio was 0.35. Strict cost control is producing results. We have a conservative and thorough lending process and, during the quarter, we saw credit impairment reversals. We have a robust ability to generate capital, and we have a very strong capital and liquidity position. During the quarter, Standard & Poor's upgraded Swedbank's credit rating. In their decision, they highlight the bank's improved governance, regulatory compliance and risk management. Furthermore, during the quarter, the U.S. authority, SEC, ended its investigation into the bank's historical shortcomings without enforcement. We are delivering according to our plan, Swedbank 15/27. And as you know, it focuses on three areas: strengthen customer interactions, grow volumes and increase efficiency. Our customer focus is producing results. We have further improved our availability during the quarter, and now 70% of incoming calls in Sweden are answered within 3 minutes, and we are thereby getting closer to our target of at least 80%. We consistently work to improve our digital offerings, and we see that more and more customers do their everyday banking through our app or the Internet bank. We have also increased our efficiency. Our employees can spend more time meeting customers and less time on administration using new AI tools, and the number of advisory sessions per employee has increased. During the quarter, we lowered mortgage rates due to lower policy and market rates. Mortgage loans increased by SEK 5.2 billion, and mortgages in Sweden distributed through our own channels accounted for SEK 4.2 billion. Deposits from private customers are stable, and we continue to be close to our customers and give them advice. Strengthening their financial health is an important task for the bank. Savings and pensions continued to develop positively. Swedbank Robur saw a net inflow of SEK 9 billion in our four home markets. As announced in August, we want to acquire the remaining part of Entercard, thereby, Swedbank will have the largest card business in the Nordic-Baltic region. This will develop our business and strengthen our customer offering. In Lithuania, the business climate remains strong. In Sweden, Estonia and Latvia, economic activity is improving, but from low levels. During the quarter, corporate lending increased by SEK 7 billion. Our customers are showing a high demand for sustainable investments. 36% of the bonds arranged by Swedbank during the quarter were classified as sustainable, and our Sustainable Asset Register has now surpassed SEK 150 billion. We now own 20% of the investment bank, SB1 Markets. And during the quarter, they started up in Sweden. It's an important step in further developing our offering to corporate customers. In addition, our customers will get access to an expanded range of equity research. In the Baltic market, we launched the card payment feature, Click to Pay, a secure and convenient service that simplify payments. Jon, it's your turn now to deep dive into the financials. Jon Lidefelt: Thank you, Jens. We delivered a strong result in the third quarter with volume growth across markets and increasing income. We have continued our work with focus on long-term shareholder value through business growth and cost efficiency. Cost-to-income ratio was 35% and return on equity, 16%. Lending volumes grew in the quarter and the increase came mainly from Baltic Banking, where we continue to see solid growth on both the private and corporate side. Mortgage volumes in Sweden sold through our own channels increased by SEK 4.2 billion, while the savings banks reduced their mortgage volumes on our balance sheet by SEK 1.6 billion. We see continued result of our increased efforts on customer interactions and availability as we're capturing a larger share of the market. In August, our front book market share through owned channels was 16.4%, still below the back book market share of 17.8%, but the development continued in the right direction. Also for the corporate business in Sweden, the positive development continued with increasing volumes, though somewhat offset by repayments related to a couple of larger exposures. Customer deposit volumes were stable in the quarter. In Sweden, private deposits decreased somewhat from a high level as the second quarter was impacted by seasonal inflow of tax returns. In Baltic Banking, deposit volumes were overall stable. Net interest income decreased by 0.9% compared to the previous quarter, driven mainly by lower mortgage rates. Lower deposit rates impacted NII in Q3 with a full quarter effect, while lower rates on the lending side were gradually rolled in during the quarter. Higher business volumes had a positive impact of SEK 94 million in the quarter. Wholesale funding costs continued to decrease in the quarter. Liquidity was, however, reallocated from the markets business increasing liability volumes, but also positively impacted Central Bank placements. and, hence, had an overall neutral NII effect. Day count and FX effects impacted NII positively in the quarter. The Swedish Central Bank cut policy rates effective as of the 1st of October and ECB cut rates effectively as of the 11th of June. Hence, there are further repricing dynamics in play. Reminding you that the positive effect on the funding side materialized ahead of the negative effect on the asset side, furthermore, that it takes approximately 3 months in Sweden for a rate cut to roll in and 6 months in the Baltics. We will continue with our pricing strategy on both sides of the balance sheet and maintain focus on the balance between volumes and long-term profitability. Net commission income increased in the quarter, driven mainly by strong asset management commissions. Mutual funds had a net inflow of SEK 9 billion and combined with the positive stock market performance, increased asset under management to SEK 2,471 billion. Card commissions were seasonally higher in the quarter following higher spending abroad during the summer months, while brokerage and corporate finance commissions were seasonally lower. In addition, we saw positive development in commissions from insurance products. Net gains and losses remained at a high level in the quarter and amounted to SEK 847 million. Income was strong, driven by high business activity, mainly within fixed income. Positive revaluations supported the treasury result. Other income increased by 2.7%. Net insurance decreased driven by both normalized levels of claims compared to the low levels we saw in the second quarter and the effects from revaluations of future cash flows. One-off transfer, in connection with the establishment of SB1 Markets on the 1st of September, also contributed. The results from partly owned companies supported as well as increased income from services to the savings banks. As a reminder, our collaboration with the savings banks include cost sharing for IT development and administrative services. The savings banks' share of the cost is included in Swedbank's total cost, and you can see the corresponding income as services to the savings banks here under other income. Total expenses were 1.4% lower. Fewer employees, together with seasonally lower staff costs, IT maintenance and consultancy costs contributed. As announced in conjunction to the Q2 presentation, a VAT recovery of SEK 197 million related to the year 2016 was received in the beginning of the third quarter. In line with previous patterns, costs will be seasonally higher towards the end of the year. Costs for the full year 2025 is expected to be around SEK 25.3 billion at current exchange rates. This includes the already received VAT recoveries related to the year 2016, '17 and '18 amounting to SEK 576 million. It also includes SEK 200 million lower temporary investments this year and an estimated SEK 300 million lower costs due to FX. Asset quality is solid. During the quarter, there were reversals of credit impairments amounting to SEK 398 million, which corresponds to an impairment ratio of minus 8 basis points. The reversals are mainly driven by improved macro scenarios, and we have continued to reduce the post-model adjustment, which now stand at SEK 364 million. Individual assessments resulted in a SEK 568 million increase, driven by a few larger corporate exposures. At the same time, repayments and reversals of previously written-off exposures resulted in a release of SEK 451 million. I feel comfortable with our strict origination standards and the solid collaterals that secure our lending. Our CET1 capital ratio was stable at 19.7%. In the 2025 SREP, our Pillar 2 requirement was lowered by 40 basis points, and our CET1 capital requirement now stands at 14.8%, meaning we have a buffer of around 480 basis points above the requirement. The reduction by the Swedish FSA stems from two parts. Firstly, 20 basis points are related to the new CRR3 risk weights for standardized credit risks. This has an impact on the Pillar 2 add-on that we shall hold until the new Swedish IRB models are approved. Thereby, approximately 20 basis points of the expected capital relief of at least 50 basis points from the new IRB models has now materialized. We continue to expect most of the remaining impact from the IRB model updates to materialize during next year. The Swedish FSA also approved parts of our nonmaturing deposit model, resulting in 20 basis points lower capital requirement for interest rate risk in the banking book. To conclude, we continue to focus on growth and efficiency. We deliver strong profitability while maintaining prudent underwriting standards, strong liquidity and capital positions. Back to you, Jens. Jens Henriksson: So let me now sum up the quarter. Swedbank once again delivered a strong result in uncertain times. Income increased, cost decreased, and we saw credit impairment reversals. Return on equity for the third quarter amounts to 16%, cost-to-income to 0.35. Our credit quality is solid and our capital buffer is very strong at 4.8 percentage points. Swedbank is well positioned for continued sustainable growth and profitability, and we continue to deliver according to our plan, Swedbank 15/27, with a focus on strengthening customer interactions, growing volumes and increasing efficiency. We create value for our customers and our shareholders, and our customers' future is our focus. With that said, back to you, Maria. Maria Caneman: Thank you both very much. We will now begin the Q&A session. A kind reminder to please limit yourself to two questions per turn. Operator, please go ahead. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We have the first question from Martin Ekstedt, Handelsbanken. Martin Ekstedt: Can you hear me? Jens Henriksson: Yes, we can. Martin Ekstedt: Excellent. So could you just give us a bit more on the SB1 Markets initiative? You mentioned it launched in Sweden in the quarter. Is it now fully staffed up on the Swedish side? And are all the business lines up and running? That's the first one. Jens Henriksson: To be honest, I don't know if it's really fully staffed up. A lot of persons have gone over and I think they're doing some great jobs. So I think they're fully running. And the key point is that this is a partnership that offer our corporate customers a strength and offer through access to a larger set of investment banking services and sector expertise. And both corporate and private customers can also benefit from access to a broader range of equity research. So this is great. Martin Ekstedt: Okay, okay. And then second question, if I may then. I'm looking at your NII sensitivity on Page 20 of the presentation deck. So in the past, the NII elasticity, so to speak, or rate shifts have been balanced around plus/minus side. But your calculation example is now tilted towards seeing a larger impact if rates come down than if they go up. And I just wanted to confirm, this is due to some deposit rates now having reached 0 and therefore, are not able -- at least commercially able to go any lower, right, i.e., it's the floor of 0% rates that you mentioned on the page coming into effect. Is that correct? Jon Lidefelt: You're perfectly correct, Martin. That is the reason. Operator: The next question from Magnus Andersson, ABG. Magnus Andersson: My first question is how you view the prospects of potentially being able to increase the thin household mortgage margins in Sweden now that short-term rates are no longer expected to fall? And related to that, what market growth rate you think is necessary for this household mortgage margin pressure to ease? And secondly, just how -- you have lending growth now 4% quarter-on-quarter in the Baltics FX adjusted. How you view the sustainability of lending growth in the Baltics now that the deleveraging that's been going on for nearly 20 years finally seems to be over? And related to that, how you tame the inflationary tendencies, the impact on the cost base there? Jens Henriksson: Thank you for that. Two good questions. First one is, let me say a few words of the overall situation in the mortgage market, and reminding you that we are the market leader in all four home markets. And first, just me repeat that in the Baltics, we see continued strong growth in mortgage volumes. In Sweden, we've seen that the housing market remains muted, although we see some gradual increasing mortgage market growth during 2025 and you see that we're now picking up some momentum. And the reason for that is that we are more active. We have shorter waiting times and quicker to resolve questions. There is a strong competition out there, and we want to grow. And when that competition abates, we do not know. I don't think the competition will go down. I think it will be continued competition there. Then when you move over to the Baltics, we have seen quite a large volume growth in that. Reminding you that these are steady and stable economies, and we now expect Estonia and Latvia to pick off as well, while Lithuania has been doing very good. Magnus Andersson: Okay. So are you saying that you think the household mortgage margins we have in Sweden currently are here to stay? My question was whether you think there will be a potential to increase them going forward and what the trigger would be able to drive how you would be able to achieve that. Because I think it's a concern to all of us. Jens Henriksson: Well, I won't do any forecast on that. There is a tough competition. But I think when you see higher volumes, I think that we can grow in that environment. Magnus Andersson: Okay. And the inflationary impact on costs, in the Baltics? Jon Lidefelt: Magnus, I think as we've talked about before, I mean, in the Baltic Banking, we have lived with higher inflation for many, many years, even before the inflationary shock. So that is something that we are constantly working with to make sure that we can increase our efficiency to mitigate that. If you look at the societies as a whole, then I mean, our concern, as we have been talking about, generally, it's very stable and healthy. But of course, if the salary inflation continues, then that will eventually lead to a problem since it's going to be hard to pick up on the productivity in line with the current salary levels', increased levels. Operator: The next question from Andreas Hakansson, SEB. Andreas Hakansson: So first question on costs. You mentioned the three VAT refunds you had during this year. Could you tell us how many years have we got outstanding? And just to confirm that you don't assume one of those reversals to appear in the fourth quarter. Jon Lidefelt: You're correct. We have assumed no VAT recovery in the SEK 25.3 billion guidance that I gave you. If that will come, it will come as a one-off extraordinary thing that we will not take into account when we run our ordinary business. So no further VAT in the SEK 25.3 billion. We have, as I think I mentioned in the previous quarterly presentation, requested VAT return recovery for year 2019 up until 2023. It's in the hands of the tax authorities, and I have no visibility in the numbers, and we'll not speculate if and when we would get anything more back there. Andreas Hakansson: Are the cases similar? Or I mean, it seems like you won three cases. So are the other cases different? Or wouldn't the outcome be likely to be the same or... Jon Lidefelt: Sorry, I said '19 to '23. I should have said '19 to '24. But it depends a lot on the interest rate levels since this is sort of depending on the turnover that we have in the parts of our business that is non-VAT related and the one that there is VAT, i.e., mainly the leasing business. So it depends a lot on the interest rate levels for the years, and that's why I don't want to speculate in any numbers or if we would get it back before we have the answer from the tax authorities. Andreas Hakansson: All right. That's fine. Then on the Baltic NII, I mean, you talked about the 6 months' time lag. But could you just confirm that when you talk about that NII should trough 6 months after the loss rate cut, that's with a static balance sheet. And we saw already that NII grew Q3 with Q2 on the back of very strong volume. So if volumes continue at the current pace and, if anything, it seems to be picking up. Is there any reason why the NII shouldn't continue to grow even though you have that underlying pressure driven by interest rates? Jon Lidefelt: First of all, yes, you're correct. When I talk about the 3 and 6 months, then I mean the same margins, the same volumes, and then you'll have to make your own assumptions on that as well as some further central bank rate cuts. When it comes to the NII development in the Baltics, it's impacted by FX in this quarter. So underlying, the NII in the Baltics is stable quarter-over-quarter. Andreas Hakansson: With 3% volume growth, right? So those are the two components there, margin pressure and the volume growth. That's up to 0 in this quarter. Jon Lidefelt: Yes. Operator: The next question is from Gulnara Saitkulova, Morgan Stanley. Gulnara Saitkulova: So on capital, given your solid capital buffer, could you remind us of your latest thinking on how to deploy the excess capital between ordinary dividends, special dividends, buybacks or potential M&A? And how should we think about your approach to excess capital in a theoretical scenario where the AML resolution is still delayed by several years? Would you still aim to be around the midpoint of your targeted management buffer range? Or would you adopt a more cautious stance in that case? And if you were to pursue M&A opportunities, which areas or markets would be of the greatest strategic interest for you for potential acquisitions? Jens Henriksson: Well, thank you for that question. Let me be very short here. And that is that we have a capital buffer range between 100 and 300 basis points. In our 15/27 plan, we target the middle of it, i.e., 200 basis points. We now have a buffer of 480 basis points with a dividend policy of 60% to 70%. And the timing of further capital release continues to be a judgment call depending on the many uncertainties, where the long-running U.S. investigations is the largest one. And we have no intention to hold more capital than necessary. When you look into M&A activity, reminding you that we've had seen quite a lot of M&A activity during the last quarter. We want to acquire Stabelo. We want to acquire the remaining part of Entercard, and both those two are still subject to approvals. And then we've gone into SB1 Markets, which was the first question. As a CEO, I always need to look out for new opportunities. Operator: The next question is from Markus Sandgren, Kepler. Markus Sandgren: I was just going to follow up on Gulnara's question when it comes to Entercard. Can you just give some more flavor of your thinking about the acquisition? And what do you think or what's your planning in terms of asset quality for that company? Jens Henriksson: Well, straightforward, we've had a business cooperation with Barclays, and we own roughly 50-50 each. And they wanted to sell it, and we wanted to acquire it. It's that simple. And the reason we want to do that is that we want to become the largest card business in the Nordic-Baltic region with scale benefits and, of course, benefits also from increased efficiency. And I think Jon will get back later when we have more information when that's fulfilled and tell you the effects on the bank at large. What we will do is we'll do a strategic overview. And when we look on Entercard, we've seen that we think that the risk level is a bit too high, and we wanted to reduce it a bit more to a more appropriate level for Swedbank. Markus Sandgren: And what does that reduction mean? Is it getting rid of loans? Or how do you plan to do it? Jens Henriksson: We -- let us get back to that when hopefully, this goes through all the sort of processes. Operator: The next question from Shrey Srivastava, Citi. Shrey Srivastava: It's actually on the 20 basis points benefit to your sort of capital requirements that you've got from being able to model the contractual maturity of nonmaturing deposits. My question is twofold. The first is, is this all we can expect to see in terms of benefit? And secondly, does this open up the possibility of you sort of investing these nonmaturing deposits in potentially sort of high-yielding, long-dated assets going forward? Jon Lidefelt: Thank you, Shrey. First of all, we have gotten a partial approval for our modeling of nonmaturing deposits. So all things equal, if we would get the full approval, that would be a little bit more to come. When it comes to our NII -- or sorry, non-NMD hedging, I have said in previous quarters on questions from you and your colleagues that we have had some hedges. It's been an important tool for us to have in the toolbox. So we wanted to test it and try it out. But it is and has been immaterial from an NII perspective so that you can discard the impact of the hedges that we have in place when you forecast our NII. The approval that we have gotten, it still means, to make it simple, that our liability side is still shorter than our asset side. So if we would add further hedges to prolong our asset side, which is what we want to do in order to smoothen out NII when the timing is right, it would still mean that our capital for IRRBB, our Pillar 2 charge, will go up even with this approval. It might go up a bit smaller than before, but there still will be an increase. We will come back should we do more or should our hedges be material to make sure that we are transparent should that be in the future. Shrey Srivastava: And a very brief follow-up. You said you received partial approval. Should you receive full approval, what sort of capital benefit can we expect there? Jon Lidefelt: Unfortunately, as long as the Swedish FSA do not change their view on this, even a full approval will lead to the same thing, that if we prolong our asset side, our capital charge will still go up. There is a difference between the Swedish FSA's view and the view that banks under ECB supervision have. They can do this hedging much more efficiently than we can do. Shrey Srivastava: And a final one for me. Have you noticed a sort of softening of the Swedish FSA's view? Because it seems sort of that way, looking at the partial approval you received. Or is that inaccurate? Jon Lidefelt: No, I have not. Operator: The next question from Namita Samtani, Barclays. Namita Samtani: My first one, I just wondered what measures you're taking in the Baltics to bulletproof your ROE of above 20%. I saw an announcement that Revolut is now offering mortgage loans or something similar to that in Lithuania. And in time, that will probably become a full offering. And clearly, the deposit rates they offer better than banks. So what initiatives is Swedbank taking to protect itself from competitive threats? And then secondly, I appreciate the 2025 updated cost guidance. But we're almost through 2025. Could you please qualitatively talk us through the main moving parts of costs going forward or what we should think about going into 2026? Jens Henriksson: Well, the key thing about Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, these are growing economies, and when compared to Sweden, they will grow with, let's say, 1%, 1.5% more. So it's a very attractive market. And it's also a market that doesn't have the same financial inclusion as there is in Sweden. So that means that we see many possibilities. And I think we went through very much this when we had Swedbank 15/27. In the end, it's about being close to our customers. We are the most loved brand in the Baltic region for the seventh year in a row. We want to grow volumes, continue to grow with the countries. We want to increase financial inclusion. We want to be -- have more customer interactions and want to make sure that we keep costs contained and work in an efficient way. So in that sense, it's not different from the other markets. Is the competition tough? Yes, it is tough. Will it be tougher? Yes. But that's life. Keep on and be close to your customers. Do you want to say a few things about the costs? Jon Lidefelt: I think your question was about 2026 costs, and we will come back in conjunction to the Q4 presentation on that. But principally, we tried to explain how we work with cost efficiency with the headwind and investment and so forth when we had the 15/25 presentation. But more details, I'll come back with when we present the Q4 results. Operator: The next question is from Tarik El Mejjad, Bank of America. Tarik El Mejjad: Just quick two questions, please. First, on costs. I mean you had quite impressive, good cost control here with cost/income really at very low levels. I just questioning the strategy of sustained hiring freeze, which -- how long that you can be sustained and especially in the context of potentially a recovery of growth. But also, we just had a call with one of your competitors and the approach is this hiring freeze or control could be sustained as long as we invest in AI and technology and be able to question each time, can we replace or hire or invest in some technologies that would be more cost efficient? Where are you in this thinking and these investments in AI and technology? And the second question is on the U.S. on money laundering litigation. I mean I've been following those with the German, French banks and so on in the past with the OFAC. How the conclusion from the SEC, you think are correlated to what would come for DOJ? Or is it -- because usually it's bundled within one decision. How do you read that? Are you more optimistic about the outcome? Jens Henriksson: Well, thank you. Two important questions. The first one when it comes to the personnel, we steer the bank on costs, not on FTEs. But what happened a year ago was that we saw that FTEs increased too much due to change of churn. And what we did then was that we implemented an external hiring freeze but sort of possibility for people to make exceptions. I gave quite a few exceptions but it worked. And then last quarter, we decided to take that away. And we now have a process where Jon take that sort of those kind of decisions together with the Head of HR. So we do not have a hiring freeze anymore. That's the first thing to say. The other thing is to say that we see quite a lot of use of AI. We work it both on the individual level and on a structure level. We work with AI for a very long time. And what we want to do is we want to decrease administration so that we can see more time with our customers. So to give you an example is that right now, we are seeing that the waiting lines or sort of the time waiting, if you call into a Swedish customer center, it's much shorter than before. So we've reached 70% of the call answered within 3 minutes. Why? New technology. And then we can use call summary, so that means you can have more time to meet the customers rather to do the administration, and we can do more things like that. When it comes to the U.S. investigation, first thing to say is that when it came to OFAC, that was closed quite a while ago. And as I said in my introduction, during the quarter, SEC decided to close their investigation without any further actions. That said, still have two other investigations by U.S. authorities. And now I need to sort of repeat myself. But I've told you many times when I was new as CEO, I met and called around and talked with colleagues that have been in similar circumstances. And they told me that a process like this usually takes 3 to 5 years. Now more than 6 years have passed, but the time line is fully owned by the U.S. authorities. I can just repeat what I say, and that is I still do not know whether we will get any fines. And if we do get the fines, I cannot estimate the size of those. And we've been as transparent as possible during this long-running process. And when something material happens, we'll continue to adhere to that principle. Thank you. Operator: The next question is from Nicolas McBeath, DNB Carnegie. Nicolas McBeath: I had a question on the deposit volumes. So after the most recent rate cut in Sweden, your deposit rates on some of your most popular savings account like eSavings have been cut to 0. So I was wondering how are deposit volumes behaving on these accounts. Have you seen any increased tendency of withdrawals since the rates were introduced, either to your own Swedbank players or migrations to competitors' deposits with above 0 rates? That's my first question. Jon Lidefelt: Well, thank you, Nicolas. The volume or the mix has been stable in that sense. So we have not seen any mix shift. And over time, the deposit beta has been around 1 on accounts with interest rate and where the sort of distance to 0 has been enough to reduce it. So then as we have talked about before, sometimes, we have for business reasons, taking a little bit of time lag between doing different rate changes. But over time, it has been one, and we have not seen mix shifts lately. Nicolas McBeath: All right. And then I had a question on levies for next year. What's your expectation there? And could you confirm whether the cost for interest-free deposits at Riksbank, will those be taken on the levies line or reduced NII? Jens Henriksson: Well, let me start with saying that if you see overall loan demand in Sweden from both corporate and private customers is subdued. In the Baltic, demand is stronger. And just to be blunt here, but we have an appetite for healthy loan growth while sticking to our conservative lending standards and focusing on profitability. You want to follow up, Jon? Jon Lidefelt: On your question on the Swedish Riksbank, we will have to deposit SEK 6 billion for which we will not get an interest rate for now for 9 months, I think it is. I think the jury is still somewhat out on exactly how to account for that. But my assumption or belief is that, yes, it will be under the bank tax row. And then the discussion is will it be a one-off now in Q4 or will it be spread out for the period? But most likely under the bank tax rule. Yes, I think that was the answer, right? Nicolas McBeath: Yes. And then just also if you could comment what your expectations for bank taxes are for 2026? Jens Henriksson: Bank taxes, don't get me started. But let me say a few words. And then as always, I want you to remind you that banks are an important part of our societies. What we do is we channel our customers' hard-earned deposits to lending, thus empowering people and businesses to create a sustainable future. And to do that, we need to be profitable. And a sustainable bank is a profitable bank. And we are proud taxpayers that contribute to the financing of welfare and security in our home markets. What we do not like are sector-specific taxes, retroactive measures and an unpredictable regulatory environment. What we do like is equal treatment, a rule-based system and an investment climate that fosters growth, financial stability and sustainable transformation. With that said, I need to say that. Then let me do a quick tour across our four home markets. First, Estonia, general corporate taxes are increasing as we see, but there is a political debate on that. In Lithuania, corporate taxes are also up. And then remind you that on top of this, since 2020, there is a 5% extra tax on banks, and the extra investor tax on NII further on top will be phased out during the year. In Latvia, we will have 3 years with a similar investor tax. There are some discussions on excluding new lending from the tax. If that would materialize, it would be positive for the Latvian economy. In Sweden, the government has proposed a base deduction to the bank tax while delivering the same tax revenues. And the tax rate is therefore proposed to be raised from 6 to 7 basis points in 2026. And now there is a government inquiry of some kind that will look into the specifics. And then as Jon talked about, let's call it what it is, it's another tax on the banking system, is that the Riksbank has decided that credit institutions from the end of October this year will need to place an interest-free deposit with them. And as Jon said, it amounts to around SEK 6 billion that will earn 0 interest. Operator: The next question from Sofie Peterzens, Goldman Sachs. Sofie Caroline Peterzens: Here is Sofie from Goldman Sachs. So my first question would be on net interest income. When do you expect net interest income to trough? One of your competitors this morning said that it will be 3 to 6 months after the last rate cut? Do you think that's kind of fair? Or do you have a different view to this? And then my second question would be on the VAT refund that you continue to get. It was SEK 197 million now in third quarter and SEK 174 million, sorry, in the previous quarter. Like when should we expect these VAT refunds to come to an end? Or should we expect still some VAT recoveries in 2026? Jon Lidefelt: Thank you, Sofie. If I start with the NII, then if we assume no further rate cuts, to make it a bit simple, then ECB did their last one. It was effective on the 11th of June; and the Swedish Riksbank, it was effective as of 1st of October. And then if you take 3 months roughly in Sweden and 6 months roughly in the Baltics, that means that around year-end these rate cuts will be priced in, and the first quarter next year then will be the first quarter where you have a full quarter effect. Then as I've said before, you'll have to add your own assumptions on potential further rate cuts from the central banks, volume growth and margin development. When it comes to the VAT, then I don't know. There is a discussion from the Swedish government to change the VAT legislation. And everything around the VAT recoveries is due to that there has been a clash between the Swedish VAT law and the European regulation around that. So I would expect in a couple of years that there will be a new Swedish law in place. I don't know how fast or when it will come or what it will mean. So I don't -- we don't know. We'll have to see what happens. But we have so far then asked back for '19 to '23. Now it's clear '23, I've been a bit back and forth on it. But '19 to '23, we have asked recoveries for. And then let's see for the years after how things play out. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question from Riccardo Rovere, Mediobanca. Riccardo Rovere: Just a quick follow-up, again, on NII. Do you think that the pickup in lending volumes in general, and also deposits could somehow offset the last leg of pricing that you've just mentioned, 3 months in Sweden, 6 months in the Baltics. It should be visible by the end of the year, the same volumes can offset that? Jens Henriksson: We lost you. But thank you, Riccardo. Riccardo Rovere: Can you hear me? Jens Henriksson: Okay. Sorry. Now we can. Do you want to... Riccardo Rovere: Can you hear me now? Jon Lidefelt: Yes. Jens Henriksson: Yes. We hear you. Okay, please repeat. Riccardo Rovere: Okay, fine. Just wondering whether you think the volume growth, deposits and loans could somehow offset the last legacy repricing that you've just mentioned, 3 months in Sweden, 6 months in the Baltics, so to say that the last cuts done should be visible by the end of the year because that is the margin part of the equation in NII. I was wondering whether the volume side of the equation can somehow offset it. Jon Lidefelt: Thank you, Riccardo. Yes, I mean you're perfectly right, but I do not sort of forecast the NII. So I can leave that to you to do your own assumptions on volume growth, margin development and so forth. But of course, there is an offsetting effect on this. I said that in this quarter, higher volumes has had a positive impact of SEK 94 million on the NII. So of course, growth do offset. But I'll leave you to do your own assumptions on how that will develop going further. Operator: This was the last question. I would like to turn the conference back over to Maria Caneman for any closing remarks. Jens Henriksson: Well, I'll take that, Maria, if it's okay with you. So thank you for calling in, and thank you for always asking tough and knowledgeable questions. I now look forward to meeting you and many of your colleagues in our dialogue on Swedbank. Thank you for calling in. Bye.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to the Core Laboratories Q3 2025 Earnings Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note, this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Larry Bruno, Chairman and CEO. Please go ahead. Lawrence Bruno: Thanks, Danielle. Good morning in the Americas, good afternoon in Europe, Africa and the Middle East, and good evening in Asia Pacific. We'd like to welcome all of our shareholders, analysts and most importantly, our employees to Core Laboratories Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Call. This morning, I'm joined by Chris Hill, Core's Chief Financial Officer; and Gwen Gresham, Core's Senior Vice President and Head of Investor Relations. The call will be divided into 6 segments. Gwen will start by making remarks regarding forward-looking statements. We'll then have some opening comments, including a high-level review of important factors in Core's Q3 performance. In addition, we'll review Core's strategies and the 3 financial tenets that Core employs to build long-term shareholder value. Chris will then give a detailed financial overview and have additional comments regarding shareholder value. Following Chris, Gwen will provide some comments on the company's outlook and guidance. I'll then review Core's 2 operating segments, detailing our progress and discussing the continued successful introduction and deployment of Core Lab's technologies as well as highlighting some of Core's operations, recent client interactions and major projects worldwide. Then we'll open the phones for a Q&A session. I'll now turn the call over to Gwen for remarks on forward-looking statements. Gwendolyn Schreffler: Before we start the conference this morning, I'll mention that some of the statements that we make during this call may include projections, estimates and other forward-looking information. This would include any discussion of the company's business outlook. These types of forward-looking statements are subject to a number of risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to materially differ from our forward-looking statements. These risks and uncertainties are discussed in our most recent annual report on Form 10-K as well as other reports and registration statements filed by us with the SEC. We undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. Our comments also include non-GAAP financial measures. Reconciliation to the most directly comparable GAAP financial measures is included in the press release announcing our third quarter results. Those non-GAAP measures can also be found on our website. With that said, I'll pass the discussion back to Larry. Lawrence Bruno: Thanks, Gwen. Moving now to some high-level comments about our third quarter 2025 results. Core continued to execute its strategic plan of technology investments targeted to both solve client problems and capitalize on Core's technical and geographic opportunities. Third quarter 2025 revenue was up over 3% compared to Q2 and Core achieved nice sequential improvement in operating income, operating margins and earnings per share. Looking at Reservoir Description in more detail, revenue in the third quarter was up over 2% compared to Q2. For the third quarter, ex items, operating margins in Reservoir Description were 13%. The segment's financial performance in the third quarter reflects continued demand for rock and fluid analysis across the company's global laboratory network. Demand for laboratory services tied to the assay of crude oil and derived products remained steady as trading patterns somewhat improved following disruptions caused by sanctions. There is still uncertainty in the demand for these assay services due to ongoing international geopolitical conflicts and evolving sanctions. In addition, pending tariffs and supply-demand balance concerns continue to generate volatility in commodity prices. In Production Enhancement, third quarter revenue was up 6% compared to Q2. Ex items, third quarter 2025 operating margins were 11%, up from 9% in Q2. This sequential improvement in margins reflects continued demand for completion diagnostic services, both onshore and offshore, along with improved international product sales. In addition to our quarterly dividend, Core Lab returned excess free cash to our shareholders by repurchasing more than 462,000 shares of company stock during the third quarter, equating to approximately 1% of Core's outstanding share count and representing a value of $5 million. Looking forward, Core intends to use free cash to fund our quarterly dividend, pursue growth opportunities and improve shareholder value through opportunistic share repurchases. As we look ahead, Core will continue to execute on its key strategic objectives by: one, introducing new product and service offerings in key geographic markets; two, maintaining a lean and focused organization; and three, maintaining our commitments to returning excess free cash to our shareholders and strengthening the company's balance sheet. Now to review Core Lab's strategies and the financial tenets that the company has used to build shareholder value over our nearly 30-year history as a publicly traded company. The interest of our shareholders, clients and employees will always be well served by Core Lab's resilient culture, which relies on innovation, leveraging technology to solve problems and dedicated customer service. I'll talk more about some of our latest innovations in the operational review section of this call. While we continue to pursue growth opportunities, the company will remain focused on its 3 long-standing, long-term financial tenets, those being to maximize free cash flow, maximize return on invested capital and returning excess free cash to our shareholders. I'll now turn it over to Chris for the detailed financial review. Chris Hill: Thanks, Larry. Before we review the financial performance for the quarter, the guidance we gave on our last call and past calls specifically excluded the impact of any FX gains or losses and assumed an effective tax rate of 25%. So accordingly, our discussion today excludes any foreign exchange gain or loss for current and prior periods. Additionally, adjustments, which net to a gain of $4.6 million have been excluded from today's discussion of the third quarter 2025 financial results. You can find a summary of those items in the tables attached to our press release for the third quarter of 2025. Now looking at the income statement. Revenue was $134.5 million in the third quarter, up $4.4 million or over 3% compared to the prior quarter and flat year-over-year. The sequential improvement is primarily associated with increased demand for our laboratory analytical services and completion diagnostic services in international regions. Of this revenue, service revenue, which is more international, was $101.1 million for the quarter, up 5% sequentially and up over 2% year-over-year. As mentioned earlier, sequentially, we saw an increase in international service revenue for both our laboratory analytical services and our completion diagnostic services when compared to the second quarter. For the U.S., service revenue remained flat sequentially and was down almost 4% from last year. Product sales, which is more equally tied to North America and international activity, were $33.4 million for the quarter, down slightly from last quarter and down 6% year-over-year. Our international product sales are typically larger bulk orders and can vary from one quarter to another and were up nicely in the third quarter when compared to the second quarter. However, laboratory instrumentation sales decreased in the third quarter, but coming off a very strong second quarter. Looking at year-over-year, the decrease in product sales was primarily due to the lower levels of completion activity in the U.S. onshore market. Moving on to cost of services, ex items for the quarter was 74% of service revenue, improving from 77% in the prior quarter and from 76% in the same quarter last year. The year-over-year and sequential improvements in cost of services was primarily due to cost efficiencies and reductions in overall compensation costs associated with actions taken earlier this year. Cost of sales ex items in the third quarter was 88% of revenue compared to 85% last quarter and flat compared to last year. The sequential increase was due to higher absorption of fixed costs on a slightly lower revenue base in the quarter as well as an increase in the cost of imported steel due to tariffs. As we continue to focus on cost efficiencies, we anticipate the manufacturing absorption rate in future quarters will be in line with projected product sales. G&A ex items for the quarter was $10.7 million, a slight increase from $10.5 million in the prior quarter and $10 million in the same quarter of the prior year. For 2025, we expect G&A ex items to be approximately $42 million to $44 million. Depreciation and amortization for the quarter was $3.6 million, decreased slightly compared to $3.7 million in the last quarter and the same quarter in the prior year. EBIT ex items for the quarter was $16.6 million, up $2.1 million from $14.5 million last quarter, yielding an EBIT margin over 12% and expanding 120 basis points sequentially. Our EBIT for the quarter on a GAAP basis was $20.9 million, which includes a gain of approximately $5.2 million associated with the final settlement of insurance claim for our U.K. facility that was damaged by fire. Interest expense of $2.7 million remained flat compared to the prior quarter and decreased from $3.1 million last year. The decrease in interest expense from last year is due to a lower average borrowings on the credit facility in 2025. Income tax expense at an effective rate of 25% and ex items was $3.5 million for the quarter. On a GAAP basis, we recorded tax expense of $3.8 million for the quarter at an effective rate of 21%. The effective tax rate will continue to be somewhat sensitive to the geographic mix of earnings across the globe and the impact of items discrete to each quarter. We continue to project the company's effective tax rate to be approximately 25% for 2025. Net income ex items for the quarter was $10.2 million, an increase of over 15% sequentially, but down almost 14% from the same quarter last year. On a GAAP basis, we had net income of $14.2 million for the quarter. Earnings per diluted share ex items was $0.22 for the quarter, an increase from $0.19 in the prior quarter and a decrease from $0.25 last year. On a GAAP basis, EPS was $0.30 for the third quarter of 2025. Turning to the balance sheet. Receivables were $110.3 million and decreased approximately $3.6 million from the prior quarter. Our DSOs for the third quarter improved to 71 days from 75 days last quarter. Inventory at September 30, 2025, was $58.2 million, down $1.5 million from last quarter end. Inventory turns for the quarter improved to 2.0, up from 1.9 in the prior quarter. We continue to focus on managing our inventory to lower levels with improved returns and anticipate inventory turns will gradually improve over time. And now to the liability side of the balance sheet. Our long-term debt was $117 million as of September 30, 2025, and considering cash of $25.6 million, net debt was $91.4 million, which decreased $3.4 million from last quarter. Our leverage ratio was reduced to 1.1 at September 30, down from 1.27 last quarter end. As of September 30, 2025, our debt was comprised of $110 million in senior notes and $7 million outstanding under our bank credit facility. As Larry stated earlier, the company will remain focused on executing its strategic business initiatives while maintaining a healthy balance sheet. Looking at cash flow. For the third quarter of 2025, cash flow from operating activities was approximately $8.5 million. And after paying $2 million of CapEx for operations, our free cash flow for the quarter was $6.5 million. As discussed in prior quarters, the capital expenditures associated with rebuilding our U.K. facility, which was damaged by fire in February 2024, are covered by the company's property and casualty insurance and have been excluded in the calculation of free cash flow. Additionally, we expect CapEx to remain aligned with activity levels. And for the full year 2025, we expect capital expenditures for operations to be in the range of $11 million to $13 million. The forecast for capital expenditures excludes CapEx associated with rebuilding the U.K. facility. Core Lab will continue its strict capital discipline and asset-light business model with capital expenditures primarily targeted at growth opportunities. Core Lab's operational leverage continues to provide the ability to grow revenue and profitability with minimal capital requirements. Capital expenditures have historically ranged from 2.5% to 4% of revenue even during periods of significant growth. That same level of laboratory infrastructure, intellectual property and leverage exists in the business today. We believe evaluating a company's ability to generate free cash flow and free cash flow yield is an important metric for shareholders when comparing and projecting company's financial results, particularly for those shareholders who utilize discounted cash flow models to assess valuations. I will now turn it over to Gwen for an update on our guidance and outlook. Gwendolyn Schreffler: Thank you, Chris. Turning to Core Lab's outlook for the fourth quarter. The IEA, the EIA and OPEC+ continue to forecast growth in crude oil demand between 700,000 and 1.3 million barrels per day in 2025 with a similar level of incremental growth projected for 2026. This growth continues to drive primarily by demand from non-OECD countries, including Asia, India and emerging markets across the Middle East and Africa. As noted in the IEA's report published September 16, 2025, crude oil field data shows the natural decline in existing producing fields is accelerating globally and now represents a major long-term supply risk. Addressing steeper decline rates and bringing new fields online will be central to ensuring energy security and maintaining market stability. As such, according to the IEA, significant annual investment in oil and gas resource development will be required for many years to come. Core Lab's Reservoir Description and Production Enhancement technologies are directly aligned with these investment imperatives. In the near term, potential tariff headwinds, combined with OPEC+ decisions to increase production levels are contributing to market volatility and lower commodity prices. Despite the current softness and long-term crude oil demand fundamentals remain intact. Core Lab maintains its constructive outlook and continues to see steady activity across committed long-cycle projects, including deepwater along the South Atlantic margin, North and West Africa, Norway, the Middle East and certain areas of Asia Pacific. These projects by nature of their scale and planning cycles tend to be less reactive to near-term commodity price fluctuations. Core Lab's revenue opportunity on awarded projects will remain somewhat dependent on our clients' geological success rates. Activity tied to smaller scale short-cycle crude oil development projects are expected to remain more sensitive to changes in commodity prices. As a result, changes in crude oil prices are anticipated to have a more immediate impact on drilling and completion activity in the U.S. onshore market. Geopolitical conflicts, evolving trade and tariff dynamics and volatile commodity prices continue to create uncertainty in demand for laboratory services tied to the maritime transportation and trade of crude oil and derived products. Despite these headwinds, Core Lab projects Reservoir Description's fourth quarter revenue to be up sequentially. The U.S. frac spread count continues to trend lower, and the company anticipates the typical year-end seasonal decline in U.S. onshore completion activity. However, growth in demand for Core's diagnostic services and energetic system product sales in both international and offshore markets may somewhat offset the decline in U.S. onshore activity. As such, Core projects Production Enhancement to be down slightly sequentially. Core believes that the tariff measures under consideration will not apply to the vast majority of service revenue and product sales provided by the company. Core services account for over 75% of the company's total revenue and are currently not subject to tariffs. Core's product sales have been less than 25% of total revenue and are primarily manufactured in the U.S. Tariffs on exported products would not apply to approximately 50% of these product sales as they are consumed in the U.S. drilling and completion market. Certain raw materials imported and consumed in production enhancements, U.S. product manufacturing and service businesses are attracting import tariffs. We continue to take steps to mitigate the impact of tariffs. In summary, Reservoir Description’s production -- Reservoir Description's fourth quarter revenue is projected to range from $88 million to $90 million with operating income of $11 million to $12.3 million. Production Enhancement's fourth quarter revenue is estimated to range from $44 million to $46 million, with operating income of $2.9 million to $3.7 million. Core's fourth quarter 2025 revenue is projected to range from $132 million to $136 million with operating income of $14 million to $16.1 million, yielding operating margins of approximately 11%. EPS for the fourth quarter is expected to range from $0.18 to $0.22. The company's fourth quarter 2025 guidance is based on projections for underlying operations and excludes gains and losses in foreign exchange. Our fourth quarter guidance assumes an effective tax rate of 25%. With that, I'll turn it back over to Larry. Lawrence Bruno: Thanks, Gwen. First, I'd like to thank our global team of employees for providing innovative solutions, integrity and superior service to our clients. The team's collective dedication to servicing our clients is the foundation of Core Lab's success. Looking at the macro, as Gwen mentioned, even after assessing current and near-term economic headwinds, the IEA, EIA and OPEC projections continue to point to growth in global crude oil demand in 2025 and beyond. The various estimates show growth in demand of between 0.7 million barrels per day and 1.3 million barrels per day for 2025 with similar additional demand growth projected for 2026. In addition to the forecasted growth in demand, new production will need to be brought online to offset the natural decline from existing producing fields. Combined, these trends will require continued investment in the development of onshore and offshore crude oil fields. U.S. tight oil production has been by far the largest component of non-OPEC oil production growth since 2010. Continued growth in global oil demand, combined with constrained incremental U.S. oil production growth supports the thesis that the balance of future supply growth must increasingly rely on discoveries and field developments outside the U.S. In summary, the current forecast suggests a multiyear cycle in which U.S. onshore production growth slows and future growth in global supply will be driven by capital investment in international conventional offshore fields and unconventional opportunities in the Middle East. These trends support increased demand for Core Lab services across the globe, particularly for Reservoir Description. The most recent EIA short-term energy outlook for U.S. oil production is 13.5 million barrels per day in 2025, and the agency currently projects production to remain essentially flat in 2026 with only nominal growth in U.S. production over this time frame. Of particular note, during the third quarter, the IEA pivoted from earlier projections on the need for investment in new oil and gas production, stating that in addition to continued investment in existing fields, more than 45 million barrels of oil production from new conventional oil fields must be added by 2050 just to maintain current production levels. Any growth in demand would add to that number. The IEA now states that significant annual investment in oil and gas resource development will be required for many years to come as the natural decline in existing producing fields is accelerating globally. The new IEA analysis published in September, the agency's global field-by-field data show that steeper natural declines now dominate supply risk. The IEA quantified this risk, stating that oil output would fall approximately 8% per year from natural decline. Nearly 90% of upstream CapEx since 2019 has gone just to offset declines, not to meet continuing demand growth. Additionally, the IEA sees 20-year average project lead times, and they conclude that delayed or inefficient development of new production will further compound the supply risk. Directionally, these IEA revisions and the need for increased investment in oil and gas projects align with Core Lab's long-standing view that the decline curve never sleeps and always wins. Along with new exploration, appraisal and development programs, disciplined data-driven optimization of existing reservoirs is the fastest, lowest risk path to supply reliability and operator returns, a scenario that Core Lab is uniquely positioned to deliver through its Reservoir Description and Production Enhancement Technologies. With Core Lab's expanding opportunities across international markets, such as with unconventional plays in the Middle East and emerging onshore and offshore deepwater conventional plays in a number of regions, including along the South Atlantic margin, the company continues to enhance its portfolio of innovative offerings for our growing global client base. Now let's review the third quarter performance of our 2 business segments, turning first to Reservoir Description. For the third quarter of 2025, revenue came in at $88.2 million, up over 2% compared to Q2. For Q3, operating income for Reservoir Description ex items was $11.6 million, up from $10.8 million in Q2, yielding operating margins of 13% with incremental margins of 41%. While demand for Reservoir Description lab services remained strong in several regions across our global network, ongoing international geopolitical conflicts, along with sanctions, continue to produce headwinds that impact the demand for laboratory services tied to the trade and transportation of crude oil and derived products. The demand for these services did rebound some in the third quarter as trading patterns continue to realign. Now for some operational highlights from Reservoir Description. In the third quarter of 2025, Core Lab completed phase 1 of a major reservoir fluid study in the Middle East. This analytical program addressed the critical challenge of crude oil stability by determining how natural pressure depletion impacts asphaltene behavior. As pressure drops across producing reservoirs, asphaltene can precipitate from some crude oils. These solid particles can then plug pore-throats, impair permeability and even obstruct production tubulars. Consequently, asphaltene precipitation has significant implications for both production efficiency and infrastructure integrity. As reservoirs mature, a decline in pressure will destabilize the delicate balance of pressure, volume and temperature, or PVT, that governs the thermodynamic behavior of the crude oil. This disruption can cause costly formation damage in the subsurface, leading to reduced production rates and other operational issues. The operator engaged Core Lab to deploy its proprietary full visualization PVT laboratory technologies alongside Core's advanced near infrared and high-pressure microscopy detection techniques. Combined, these technologies enabled precise measurement of asphaltene onset pressures and depositional behaviors under a range of reservoir and production conditions. Concurrently, Core Lab designed and executed advanced laboratory Core flood experiments to quantify permeability impairment as the laboratory system pressure was reduced to below critical asphaltene precipitation thresholds. These laboratory results form the essential hard data inputs into dynamic reservoir models that will allow the client to mitigate risk as they develop pressure maintenance strategies for the field. This project is now progressing into phase 2, which will assess the feasibility of pressure maintenance and solvent injection programs aimed at permeability restoration and reducing formation damage. Throughout the life cycle of oilfields, Core Laboratories measurements and interpretations help our clients maximize hydrocarbon production from their assets. Moving now to Production Enhancement, where Core Lab's technologies continue to help our clients maximize their well completions and improve production. Revenue for Production Enhancement for Q3 came in at $46.3 million, up 6% compared to Q2. Third quarter operating income for Production Enhancement, ex items was $4.9 million, yielding operating margins of 11%, up from 9% in Q2. In the U.S., Diagnostic services benefited from increasing demand as complex U.S. land completion designs like trimulfrac and extended lateral length horizontal wells become more and more common. Core's expansive portfolio of completion products also saw increased demand in international markets. Now for some operational highlights from Production Enhancement. In the third quarter of 2025, a national oil company engaged Core Lab's production enhancement team after experiencing nearly 2 months of costly downtime due to a stuck, heavyweight drill pipe in a well from offshore West Africa. The operator deployed Core's proprietary dual-end severing tool, which is engineered for high-efficiency pipe recovery operations, particularly in scenarios where conventional drill pipe and casing cutters are not up to the task. Core Lab provided the operator with extensive assembly and field application procedures and training and real-time guidance to determine the optimal deployment position within the wellbore for maximum effectiveness. Core's proprietary tool works by using precisely timed energetic events that are sequenced to generate two equal and opposing shock fronts. This technology focuses the energy outward towards the drill string and severs the drill collar. As a result of Core Lab's proprietary technologies and unmatched client service, the drill pipe was successfully recovered and well operations were restored. Also in the third quarter, one of Canada's most active heavy oil operators needed to identify which bore holes in the multilateral wells were contributing the most oil to overall production. This is a key challenge in optimizing completions in low-temperature heavy oil reservoirs. Having successfully used Core Lab's SPECTRACHEM Water Tracers in previous multistage fracturing operations, the operator again turned to Core's engineering team for a solution using chemical tracers to assess oil production from these challenging complex wells. The operator deployed Core's unique FLOWPROFILER Engineered Delivery System, or EDS. These oil tracers were placed into each lateral leg, allowing the operator to monitor produced oil concentrations and generate a precise production contribution profile. The operator found the diagnostic results to be of high value and is now including Core's FLOWPROFILER EDS oil tracers as a standard evaluation technology for future projects. That concludes our operational review. We appreciate your participation, and Danielle will now open the call for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question comes from John Daniel from Daniel Energy Partners. John Daniel: Hopefully, you can hear me okay. Well, first question is on the transaction you all just did. If you could elaborate on maybe what some of the opportunities might be for similar sized transactions globally? And this is a sidebar, I thought it was an interesting way you structured the purchase price where a lot of it's on the back end in terms of earnout, it's pretty new way to do that. So just any color on those opportunities. Lawrence Bruno: I'll let Chris fill in a lot of the sort of the details on that, but just a little background there, John. So I think you know, I came to Core Lab now 26 or so years ago through a similar sort of tuck-in technology acquisition. And so have a pretty good model for that. Core Lab did a series of those private company acquisitions. They offer technological advantages. They offer geographic advantages. And as you and some of the other folks have heard us say before, everybody has got hockey stick projections on how their business is going to play out over the next few years. Well, we think it's a good approach to have them participate, in that the need to deliver that hockey stick if they're going to be rewarded for that hockey stick. So yes, so I think that approach make sense. And I think we'll look at -- we're always looking at similar acquisitions. And Chris, any color you might want to add on the Solintec acquisition? Chris Hill: No. I think the way we did structure that may be a little unique from what you normally see. We would love to structure most transactions like that, but it takes two parties to agree on what those terms look like. So we are very happy with the acquisition and then it's kind of a win-win if we end up paying that earn-out, for both the seller and us. Lawrence Bruno: And I think I would add to that, that Solintec has a long multi-decade history in Brazil, and we are really glad to have them part of the Core Lab family. John Daniel: Okay. I guess just my follow-up question, a bit unrelated to the M&A market, but you guys do a really good job of kind of traveling the globe and seeing your customers, and I think you alluded to going to Asia Pac in the third quarter. I'm curious when you sit down and talk with those folks, obviously, don't name me names, but like when they look into their crystal ball, 2 to 3 to 4 years from now, are they suggesting to you higher activity, lower activity? Any color would be appreciated. Lawrence Bruno: Yes, higher activity, and it's across the board. I'd say it's Middle East still leading the pack, South Atlantic margin and West Africa, I would say, are in the second position. And then recently here in Asia Pac, we're seeing some sort of, I'll call it, they've been on the drawing board for a while, but finally getting -- closer to getting kinetic, if you will, on some exploration programs. And with those, for us, there's some work tied to exploration, but we really hope our clients are geologically successful because it's when they get into appraisal and development, that's really kind of the wheelhouse, particularly for Reservoir Description. And then eventually, it's production, and that plays out into our Production Enhancement Group. But it's clearly rising in our perspective here, that activity levels over the next few years should be going up. And I think there's -- we have even more confidence into the trends that we've been describing over the last year or so saying that, "Hey, there is a wave coming of more international investment." And I think it's tied to a realization that the production from U.S. land has largely absorbed the rest of the world from having to bring new production on and that, that phase at 15-year cycle from 2010 to 2025, look, there's still going to be a lot of oil and gas produced in the U.S., but the growth that has covered a lot of the decline around the rest of the world, that's starting to come to an end. John Daniel: Okay. That's very helpful. Thank you for including me. Lawrence Bruno: Yes. Thanks, John. I appreciate the call. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Seeing that there are no further questions, I would like to turn the conference back over to Larry Bruno for closing remarks. Lawrence Bruno: Okay. Thanks, Danielle. We'll wrap up here. I think we've got a pretty busy earnings release morning going on here, so probably a little bit of people juggling phones. In summary, Core's operational leadership continues to position the company for improving client activity levels in the coming quarters and years. We have never been better operationally or technologically positioned to help our global client base optimize their reservoirs and to address their evolving needs. We remain uniquely focused and are the most technologically advanced, client-focused reservoir optimization company in the oilfield service sector. The company will remain focused on maximizing free cash and returns on invested capital. In addition to our quarterly dividend, we'll bring value to our shareholders via growth opportunities, driven by both the introduction of problem-solving technologies and new market penetration. In the near term, Core will continue to use free cash to repurchase shares and strengthen its balance sheet while always investing in growth opportunities and evaluating various methods to increase shareholder value. So in closing, we thank and appreciate all of our shareholders and the analysts that cover Core Lab. The executive management team and the Board of Core Laboratories give a special thanks to our worldwide employees that have made these results possible. We're proud to be associated with their continuing achievements. So thanks for spending time with us, and we look forward to our next update. Goodbye for now. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Odd-Geir Lyngstad: Hello, and good morning, and a very warm welcome to Elkem's Third Quarter Results Presentation. My name is Odd-Geir Lyngstad, and I'm responsible for Investor Relations here in Elkem. In today's presentation, we will go through the highlights for the quarter and give an update on the markets before we go through the outlook for the fourth quarter. CEO, Helge Aasen, will take us through this first part of the presentation before CFO, Morten Viga, will present the third quarter results in more detail. We will open for Q&A after Helge and Morten's presentations. So with that, I give the word to CEO, Helge Aasen. Helge Aasen: Thank you, Odd-Geir, and good morning, everyone. Very nice to see the turn up today. Yes, we seem to be repeating ourselves when it comes to describing the markets we operate in. The story about weak and challenging conditions doesn't seem to go away. And the market does actually remain much the same as it has been for a while now. However, despite challenging macroeconomic environment, Elkem's results are relatively good, but of course, below our financial targets. The EBITDA for the third, I'm sorry, the EBITDA for the third quarter ended at NOK 829 million, which gave an EBITDA margin of 11% for the group. If you exclude silicones, the operating income ended at NOK 4.1 billion with an EBITDA of NOK 586 million, which then represents a margin of 14%. This result is to a great extent, explained by good operational performance and ongoing cost improvements. Silicon Products was impacted by low silicon and ferrosilicon prices in the third quarter. But Specialty segment as Foundry alloys and Microsilica, which is a silica powder, delivered improved results. Carbon Solutions continued to deliver good margins, but the operating income and the following EBITDA is impacted by the lower sales. Silicones has improved on cost and market positions and delivered a higher EBITDA compared to the same period last year. The strategic review is ongoing. We gave an announcement some weeks ago, and I can just confirm that this is moving ahead as planned with an exclusive sales process, and we are still aiming for closing this transaction within the first half of next year. So before we go on to the market update and the results, I'd like to say a few words about our ESG work. It's built on two main pillars: reduce CO2 emissions and to supply the green transition with critical materials. Our aim is to reduce and ultimately remove fossil CO2 emissions from the smelting processes. Elkem supports the green transition through the supply of critical raw materials, and we work systematically to cut emissions and reduce waste throughout the entire value chain. Circularity is also playing an increasingly important role in this world. And we have introduced a new, actually a breakthrough method for recycling silicones through a mechanical recycling. And this then goes back into what used to be waste now is going back into new formulations. Our efforts within ESG are also recognized with strong ratings from EcoVadis and CDP. And in the third quarter, we received a gold rating from EcoVadis, and this puts us among the top 5% of all the companies they are assessing globally. And over the past years, Elkem has consistently received either gold or platinum ratings from EcoVadis, which places us among the top of the companies they are rating. Here, we show a couple of examples from Silicon Products and Carbon Solutions, illustrating some of our strong cost and market positions. I mentioned Microsilica initially. It's SiO2 silica powder, a byproduct from the ferrosilicon and silicon metal smelting processes. And over decades, we have developed this into a portfolio of specialty products, which go into quite a wide range of end applications. To mention some of them, construction, well drilling, cementing, refractories and also polymers. Over the past years, this product area has consistently grown and shown stable high margins. And I think it's a very good excellent example of how we are able to specialize on the basis of commodity production capacity. We're also a leading producer of electrode paste, electrodes and refractory materials coming from Elkem Carbon. This goes into the metallurgical industry. And these products are probably not very familiar to you, but they are critical consumables and lining materials, which are very important for stable operations and lifetime in furnaces and electrolyser cells in the aluminum industry. Also here, we are focusing on product development, and we have developed a more environmentally friendly product. With bio-based binders, which greatly improves working conditions. This solution has a proven performance record, and we have installed the product in more than 15,000 aluminum electrolytic cells. And we are gaining market share. Competitive cost position can, of course, be explained by many factors, operational knowledge, operational excellence, economies of scale, upstream integration, et cetera. However, electric power is another, of course, very important cost factor in the production of most metals. We have long-term supply agreements for renewable hydropower in Norway, Iceland, Canada, Paraguay. And access to long-term competitive energy contracts is a prerequisite for achieving competitiveness and also, of course, predictability in order to plan investments, et cetera. And renewable sourcing of energy also gives us a low carbon footprint, which clearly is, if not gaining or achieving premiums on end products, it gives us a preferential supplier status. CRU, a global business intelligence company, have published their analysis of the 2025 cost curve, which is illustrated on the graph here. This is for silicon 99, silicon metal. And as you can see from the chart, this puts our Salten and Thamshavn plants in Norway among the lowest cost producers in the western part of the world. Then coming to another important frame condition, which is trade barriers. That's affecting several markets and industries these days. And as you know, a highly dynamic and quite unpredictable environment. We are affected by this directly and indirectly. Two relevant examples are EU's ongoing safeguard assessment on silicon and on ferrosilicon and potentially silicon metal and also a U.S. countervailing duties assessment on silicon metal imports. EU safeguard measures could come into effect from November 19th. It's so far unclear how this is going to affect Elkem and how it will be structured. The potential measures will be aimed at raising prices, obviously, and protecting internal production within the EU, but we don't know how Norway and Iceland will be positioned in it. The regulations appear to focus on ferrosilicon and foundry alloys in this round, and there's no clear indication if silicon will be included. But most likely, silicon will be subject to another process at a later stage. The U.S. has imposed countervailing duties on silicon imported from several countries, including Norway with a preliminary rate of 16.87%. The basis for these duties are the CO2 compensation and CO2 quotas that the Norwegian companies receive under EU's carbon schemes. And our position on this is that these policies are a compensation for CO2 tax and do not constitute countervailable subsidies harming the U.S. domestic industry. We have had similar cases in the past. And each time we have been able to document that there was no injury to U.S. industry. So, we don't know the outcome of this round. It's now introduced as a preliminary measure, and then it will be followed by a permanent decision later on. Unclear when, partly because of the shutdown of the U.S. government at the moment. A few more words on the strategic review process. It's underway, as I mentioned, and it is going according to plan. We cannot say much more about the process beyond the status update that we gave during the third quarter. We are in an exclusive sales process with a major industrial player with a significant presence in the global chemical industry. The process is well aligned with the strategic review and represents an important milestone. And in a challenging market environment. But we are confident that the potential transaction will represent the best possible outcome for the silicones division in Elkem. And we're also confident that this process will be the best outcome for the rest of Elkem and as such, benefit to all stakeholders.Subject to further negotiations, final agreement and necessary approvals, the closing of the transaction is, as mentioned, expected to happen during the first half of next year. Now let's have a look at the markets. Automotive continues to be an important sector for Elkem, driving demand for many of our products. The growth in this sector remains weak with the exception of China, where the production is up in 2025. This is mainly the case for electrical vehicles. During the first half of 2025, the overall production in the EU is characterized by weak order intake and consequently low number of new registrations. Forward-looking forecasts have been revised upwards as markets adapt to ongoing trade and structural changes. Europe's outlook is up, supported by improved expected demand in Germany, France, Austria and Turkey. China's forecast has increased due to incentives and export growth. But overcapacity and price competition clearly persist, especially for electrical vehicles. North America is also seeing upgrades driven by tariff relief and higher production. In South America, the gains are so far limited by very high import pressure. So, any improvement in the automotive sector will definitely have a positive impact for Elkem. Several markets have been impacted by weak demand and various trade regulations and governmental initiatives. In the EU, the silicon reference price dropped by approximately 20% in late June. This was mainly due to low import prices from China, which suffer from, I would say, a severe oversupply. Prices in the EU then recovered modestly again in September due to improved market balance. This was a result of capacity being taken out in Europe as well as higher prices in China. U.S. silicon prices have increased in the third quarter. This is expected to continue to rise due to trade regulations. And in China, we have seen some price recovery from very low levels, mainly due to signals that the government will launch initiatives to curb overcapacity. Discussions are ongoing there regarding new energy consumption standards for the industry, which seems to be aimed at reducing overproduction. The ferrosilicon markets have many of the same drivers as silicon. Also here, we have a market impacted by trade regulations and possible safeguard measures in the EU, which have resulted in price fluctuations. The market sentiment is still characterized by weak demand and downward price pressure. However, based on the expected safeguard measures in the EU in August, we saw ferrosilicon prices jump up. This didn't last very long. It dropped back down again when it became clear that no preliminary measures would be announced. Prices in the U.S. increased towards the end of the third quarter. This was mainly driven by trade regulations. And in China, we've also seen some recovery from very low levels, partly due to this government focus on reducing excess production capacity. It's also somewhat linked to higher raw material costs in China. The market for carbon products is much smaller than silicon and ferrosilicon. We don't have reference prices to compare with here. Quite a big difference between regions when it comes to demand. But obviously, the underlying driver is the production of steel, which again triggers ferroalloy demand and then, of course, the aluminum industry. Global steel production in the third quarter remained quite stable compared to the same quarter last year. Europe experienced a 3% decline, whereas North America saw a 3% increase, largely due to tariffs again.The steel and ferroalloys markets continue to face challenges. Carbon Solutions specialized product offering and wide geographic presence is, however, proving to be resilient and creating a stability in earnings. Then moving on to silicones. Also like in silicon metal, overcapacity is significantly hampering any meaningful price recovery in the commodity part of the business. Producers are actively trying to increase the prices, and we've seen quite a lot of fluctuations in China, in particular, during the quarter. DMC prices first rose from a level of around RMB 10,400 per tonne to up to RMB 12,250. This was a result of a fire at one of the bigger players. But due to the overcapacity, that was a very short-lived price uptick and prices subsequently lowered again because other producers are ready to fill the gap quite quickly. So, the current price level is around RMB 11,050 per tonne and quite sensitive to changes in raw material costs, where silicon metal obviously is one of the big input factors. Demand in China continues to be weak, especially in construction. Demand for commodity silicones in the EU and the U.S. is also negatively impacted by changing tariff policies. But I would say, in general, there's quite good and stable demand for specialties. So, coming to the outlook. Silicon Products are still going to face quite challenging conditions and low demand on a historical basis. But as mentioned in the presentation, our leading cost position and good performance in more specialized part of the business are mitigating the negative impact. Carbon Solutions benefits from good cost positions and geographical diversity, and continued weak demand will have some impact on the results. Silicone producers are actively trying to increase prices. But as mentioned, the markets are still hampered by overcapacity. Potential trade regulations and protective measures are expected to impact our markets going forward. And of course, we are very eager to see the safeguard measures in the EU and how that's going to play out. It's not yet concluded, and very hard to say the overall impact on Elkem from this. So I think with that, I'll give the word to you, Morten, and take us through the financials. Morten Viga: Thank you very much, Helge, and good morning, everybody. So it's a pleasure to go through the financial numbers for Q3. Our operating income for the quarter amounted to NOK 7.5 billion, and that's down 7% compared to the third quarter last year. All divisions had a decline in operating income this quarter, mainly explained by lower sales prices. Elkem's EBITDA for the quarter was NOK 829 million. This was also well below the third quarter last year, but it's slightly higher than Q2 this year. The reported group EBITDA margin for the quarter amounted to 11%, which is somewhat below our long-term target of 15% to 20% EBITDA margin. Having said that, we should also emphasize that the EBITDA margin for the continuous operations, i.e., excluding silicone's was 14%. And it is important to bear in mind that these margins are generated in a situation where sales prices in key markets are at or close to historical low levels. And as such, the EBITDA is not supported by market conditions, but it's held up by good operational performance and a very strong underlying cost position. There were no particular one-offs affecting the EBITDA in the third quarter. As usual, we provide an overview of some of the main financial numbers and ratios. I will not go into detail on all of them, but it's important to note that the Silicones division has been reclassified as discontinued operations and assets held for sale. In this presentation, we mainly focus on the financial numbers, which include silicones. However, the regular financial statements, including the profit and loss statements, reflects Elkem's results excluding silicones. And in the table to the right, you can see the comparable figures for Elkem with and without silicones. Including silicones, the group EBITDA amounted to NOK 829 million. The realized effects from the currency hedging program was minus NOK 16 million reported in the segment Other. Other items amounted to NOK 78 million and the main [Technical Difficulty] of minus NOK 17 million. Net finance expenses were minus NOK 34 million. And here, the main items related to net interest expenses of minus NOK 114 million, which was largely offset by currency gains on NOK 96 million, mainly related to translation effects on our external loans. The income tax was minus NOK 96 million, and this gives a very high effective tax rate of 65%. And the reason for that is that the Silicones division had a loss before income tax, which is rather high, and there is no tax in a major part of that division. Let's then take a look at the divisions and start with the Silicon Products division. So, the silicon and ferrosilicon markets remained difficult, but the division's EBITDA for the third quarter was supported by good operating performance. Total operating income amounted to NOK 3.4 billion, representing an 8% decrease compared to the same quarter in 2024. And the decline in operating income is mainly driven by lower sales prices for the commodity segments in silicon and ferrosilicon. EBITDA amounted to NOK 389 million, representing an EBITDA margin of 12%. The EBITDA is higher than the previous quarter, but significantly lower than Q3 '24, and this is explained by significantly lower sales prices, particularly for silicon. This is partly countered by good and stable results from the specialty segments, particularly foundry alloys. And as I said, in addition, the EBITDA is supported by strong operations and good cost improvements. Sales volume increased by 13% compared to the third quarter last year, mainly due to improved sales of specialty products. So, if we look at the Carbon Solutions, this division is once again presenting a good margin, and it reached an EBITDA margin of 28% in the third quarter despite very challenging market conditions. Total operating income amounted to NOK 822 million, which was down 7% from the third quarter last year. And this decline here is mainly explained by lower sales prices. The EBITDA was NOK 231 million, which represents an EBITDA margin of 28%. The EBITDA margin is in line with the previous quarter, but it's somewhat lower than Q3 '24, mainly explained by lower sales prices and somewhat higher raw material costs. The sales volume for the third quarter was in line with the previous quarter, but is negatively affected by low steel production, particularly in the EU. As mentioned, and very well known, the Silicones division is under strategic review. The division has a good portfolio of specialty products, which provides to a large extent, stable sales and margins. But also, the division's exposure to the commodity market is still very significant. And particularly in China, we have seen strong price pressure hampering our margins. The division has, however, been able to compensate for lower commodity sales prices in the quarter through higher sales volumes and good cost improvements. Total operating income amounted to NOK 3.6 billion, which was down 6% from the third quarter last year. Higher sales volume in the third quarter was more than offset by lower commodity sales prices. The EBITDA amounted to NOK 248 million, representing an EBITDA margin of 7%, and this is in line with the previous quarter, but it is significantly 23% higher than the third quarter last year, mainly driven by cost improvements and better sales volume. Sales volume was up 10% compared to the third quarter last year, mainly due to higher sales volumes in the Asia Pacific region, where we also have introduced a new production line, higher capacity, and significantly stronger underlying cost position. Let's now take a closer look at some of Elkem's key financial ratios. The earnings per share, EPS were quite low also in the third quarter with NOK 0.05 per share, and that brings the EPS year-to-date to minus NOK 0.77 per share. And we are, of course, not satisfied with this, and we are working on further cost reductions and other improvements to mitigate the market situation. The EPS was also this quarter negatively impacted by net losses from the Silicones division, which is under strategic review. And if you exclude the Silicones division, the EPS for the third quarter would have been NOK 0.34 per share plus, and it would have been a positive NOK 0.40 per share year-to-date.The balance sheet remains very solid. Total equity amounts to NOK 24 billion by the end of third quarter, which equals an equity ratio of 50%, very stable level. Elkem's financing position is well managed, and we have a very good and robust maturity profile. However, as you can see, the interest-bearing debt has continued to increase, and the current leverage is above our target level of 1 to 2x EBITDA last 12 months. By the end of the third quarter, our net interest-bearing debt amounted to NOK 11.7 billion, and that's up by NOK 0.3 billion from the previous quarter. And based on the last 12 months EBITDA, the debt leverage ratio is now 3.1. Our target is clearly to bring down the leverage, and Elkem has a plan to deleverage the company after the strategic review process has been concluded, which we plan to achieve during the first half of next year. By the end of the third quarter, Elkem's interest coverage ratio was 6x, which is well within the covenant of 4x, which is the covenant in our loan agreements. The cash flow from operation was NOK 526 million in the third quarter. We have a high emphasis on preserving and generating a good cash flow despite underlying market weaknesses. And this was a clear improvement from the previous quarters. It's explained by lower reinvestments and also positive working capital changes. As already mentioned, the markets are weak, and we will definitely continue to focus on a very disciplined capital spending as long as the weak market conditions prevail. In the third quarter, total investments were down to NOK 312 million and reinvestments were NOK 244 million, which amounted to 39% of depreciation. Strategic investments are very much down and amounted only to NOK 68 million as we have completed all major strategic CapEx projects previously. So let me take the opportunity to wrap up this presentation by summarizing the main headlines and takeaways from the quarter. We will continue to focus on cash generation and a very disciplined capital spending in response to the challenging market conditions. We're very happy to see that Silicon Products has leading cost positions and strong performance within the specialty segments. And I think this is very important to bear in mind when the markets are really, really, really tough out there. Also, Carbon Solutions is in a very good position, and we benefit from good cost positions and a very geographically diverse customer base. Silicones, also a very tough market, but we have improved our cost and market positions based on specialization and also based on new and more modern production lines, both in China and in France. The safeguard measures for ferrosilicon and ferroalloys in the EU and a new trade defense regime for steel in the EU could lead to improved market conditions if these measures are successfully supporting increased industry production in the EU, which is the intention. The strategic review process is progressing as planned with an exclusive sales process ongoing. And as we said, we expect to have the transaction closed within the first half of 2026. So I think that summarizes the presentation, and then I hand back the word toOdd-Geir for the Q&A session. Odd-Geir Lyngstad: Thank you, Helge, and Thank you, Morten. We have a good audience here today. So I think we will start and see if there are any questions from the audience. There is Marcus? Marcus Gavelli: Marcus Gavelli, Pareto Securities. So you talked about the safeguard measures, and clearly, we have no visibility right now. But could you try to provide some color on how you think about potentially worst-case scenario with higher tariffs and with Elkem potentially not being as competitive in the EU market. What sort of flexibility do you see having to redirect volumes and do other sort of measures to fight that? Helge Aasen: I think if we are left on the outside of this and have to compete on the same basis as everybody else, EU is a big net importer of ferrosilicon. And I would claim that Norway and Iceland are among the best position to continue to supply that market. So I don't think we will have to redirect volumes. Obviously, we are very uncertain about how the price protection mechanism will be constructed or put together. But that could, of course, I would say, I don't see a big downside, but there is quite a significant upside if this is done in a way that favors us. Marcus Gavelli: And also just to follow up on the, you mentioned the cost reductions that you're currently looking at. Could you also provide some color on what sort of measures that is? Is it, we've seen some ferrosilicon production now being curtailed? Is it more trying to optimize the production? Or is it actual larger reductions you're looking at? Helge Aasen: This is a wide range of different measures. Obviously focusing on fixed cost reductions continuously, but it's also linked to a lot of optimization in production, producing campaigns where we have the best cost position in different plants and furnaces, and yield improvements. And yes, there's no one particular program that's yielding this, but a very big effort ongoing, and it's giving results over time. Magnus Rasmussen: Magnus Rasmussen, SEB. You have an improvement in the Silicon Products EBITDA Q-on-Q despite lower silicon metal prices, as you said in Q2. Our understanding is that after the decision that you were to be allocated more CO2 quotas, which you reported in early July, you have to purchase less CO2 quotas on a running basis to cover what was previously a deficit. Has that been a positive driver this quarter, and by how much? Helge Aasen: Sounds like a CFO question. Morten Viga: Yes. You're absolutely right. We have got the ruling from the Norwegian Ministry, securing equal treatment with our European competitors. And that's very important. We have not yet received any additional quotas. Such things takes a bit of time, but we are very sure that we will receive a good amount of new quotas. And of course, that will put us in a much better position. There are no particular significant, let's say, CO2 quota P&L elements in our Q3 results. Magnus Rasmussen: When you, on a running basis, start to receive quotas on equal terms as your peers in Europe, then I assume you will not have to purchase quotas to cover that deficit as you've done in the past. Doesn't that imply that you will get a cost saving? Morten Viga: That is correct that in the future, there are 2 important things about this. First of all, equal treatment that's very important as a principle. And certainly, we will have significantly lower CO2 quota costs in the future when we receive those quotas, either late this year or early next year, we assume. So for our long-term competitiveness, it's good news, very good news. Magnus Rasmussen: And also, I see that your net interest-bearing debt in silicones is increasing by about NOK 375 million quarter-on-quarter. And it seems to me like more or less half of that is driven by you repaying what you label as bills payable in your balance sheet, and bills payable has come down by more than half over the past year. So, I'm just wondering why you are repaying that working capital financing ahead of the sale of the division? Morten Viga: No, that is kind of a working capital management done by the Chinese operation. So, I'm not able to give a precise answer to that. But they're managing this position. And as you rightly say, they have decided to repay some of that and reduce some of the bills outstanding. Magnus Rasmussen: Should we expect bills payable to be repaid ahead of the sale? And/or should we look at bills payable as interest-bearing debt when the sales price? Morten Viga: You should not look at bills payable as interest-bearing debt. So, it's part of the working capital management done locally in China. Odd-Geir Lyngstad: Are there any further questions among the audience? If not, I think the questions are quite well covered from what I see here, but one additional question maybe that could, and that is how long you expect curtailments at Rana in Iceland to last, and also if any of our competitors are reducing capacity to the same extent? Helge Aasen: Yes. We had an idle furnace in Rana, and we decided to postpone starting it up again. We are closely monitoring what's happening now. It's obviously inventory management, but it's also in anticipation of what will be the outcome of the safeguard decision in November. And then we have, we're going to stop one furnace in Iceland in mid-November, and that will be idle for 2 months, approximately, and what was the other part of the question? Odd-Geir Lyngstad: Competition. Helge Aasen: Yes, competition. Interestingly enough, Ferroglobe, which is our biggest competitor in silicon products in the conference, I think a couple of weeks ago, announced that they are now stopping all production in Europe. So, it says something about Elkem's competitive position. Odd-Geir Lyngstad: Very good. Thank you very much. And that also concludes our presentation here today. So, thank you very much for attending. Helge Aasen: Thank you.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to Ladder Capital Corp.'s Earnings Call for the Third Quarter of 2025. As a reminder, today's call is being recorded. This morning, Ladder released its financial results for the quarter ended September 30, 2025. Before the call begins, I'd like to call your attention to the customary safe harbor disclosure in our earnings release regarding forward-looking statements. Today's call may include forward-looking statements and projections, and we refer you to our most recent Form 10-K for important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from these statements and projections. We do not undertake any obligation to update our forward-looking statements or projections unless required by law. In addition, Ladder will discuss certain non-GAAP financial measures on this call, which management believes are relevant to assessing the company's financial performance. The company's presentation of this information is not intended to be considered in isolation or as a substitute for the financial information presented in accordance with GAAP. These measures are reconciled to GAAP figures in our earnings supplement presentation, which is available in the Investor Relations section of our website. We also refer you to our Form 10-K and earnings supplement presentation for definitions of certain metrics, which we may cite on today's call. At this time, I'd like to turn the call over to Ladder's President, Pamela McCormack. Pamela McCormack: Good morning. During the third quarter, Ladder generated distributable earnings of $32.1 million or $0.25 per share, delivering a return on equity of 8.3% with modest adjusted leverage of 1.7x. Credit performance remained stable and the quarter was marked by 3 notable developments, a significant acceleration in new loan originations, continued progress in reducing office loan exposure and the successful closing of our inaugural investment-grade bond offering. These results reflect our disciplined business model and conservative balance sheet philosophy, positioning Ladder for continued earnings growth and greater capacity to capitalize on investment opportunities across market cycles. Loan portfolio activity. Origination activity accelerated in the third quarter with $511 million of new loans across 17 transactions at a weighted average spread of 279 basis points, our highest quarterly origination volume in over 3 years. The spread reflects the mix of assets originated, which were predominantly multifamily and industrial, consistent with our focus on stable income-producing collateral. Net of $129 million in paydowns, the loan portfolio grew by approximately $354 million to $1.9 billion, now representing 40% of total assets. Year-to-date, we originated over $1 billion in new loans with an additional $500 million under application and in closing. Notably, the full payoff of our third largest office loan, a $63 million loan secured by an office property in Birmingham, Alabama, reduced office loan exposure to $652 million or 14% of total assets. Approximately 50% of the remaining office loan portfolio consists of 2 well-performing loans secured by the Citigroup Tower in Downtown Miami and the Aventura Corporate Center in Aventura, Florida. Securities portfolio. As of September 30, our securities portfolio totaled $1.9 billion, representing 40% of total assets. During the quarter, we acquired $365 million in AAA-rated securities, received $164 million in paydowns through amortization and sold $257 million of securities, generating a $2 million net gain. Paydowns and sales exceeded purchases, resulting in a modest net reduction in securities holdings this quarter. This reflects our disciplined approach to capital allocation as we did not replace certain securities that ran off, consistent with our view that spreads may widen in the mortgage market given recent volatility and the Federal Reserve's ongoing runoff of mortgage-backed securities. Consistent carry income from our real estate portfolio. Our $960 million real estate portfolio generated $15.1 million in net operating income during the third quarter. The portfolio primarily consists of net lease properties with long-term leases to investment-grade rated tenants and continues to deliver stable, predictable income. Capital structure and liquidity. During the third quarter, we closed our inaugural $500 million 5-year investment-grade unsecured bond offering at a rate of 5.5%, representing 167 basis point spread over the benchmark treasury, the tightest new issuance spread in Ladder's history. The offering was met with strong demand and the bonds have since traded tighter in the secondary market, reaching spreads as low as 120 basis points. This transaction validates the strength of our conservative balance sheet philosophy and disciplined business model. As one of our premier debt capital markets bankers noted, it also firmly planted Ladder's flag in the investment-grade market. The continued tightening of our bonds positions us for lower borrowing costs, stronger execution and improved shareholder returns. As of quarter end, 75% of Ladder's debt consisted of unsecured corporate bonds and 84% of our balance sheet assets remain unencumbered. We maintained $879 million in liquidity, including $49 million in cash and $830 million of undrawn capacity on our unsecured revolver, which provides same-day liquidity at highly competitive rates. Outlook. Ladder's unique investment-grade balance sheet, disciplined use of unsecured debt and robust origination platform positions us to capitalize on investment opportunities, while maintaining prudent credit risk management. We expect fourth quarter loan originations to exceed third quarter production. Recent credit rating upgrades and our successful inaugural investment-grade bond issuance have lowered our cost of debt and expanded our access to a deeper, more stable capital base that remains consistently available across market cycles. Over time, we expect our strong balance sheet, modest leverage and reliable funding profile to position Ladder alongside a broader set of high-quality peers, including equity REITs rather than solely within the commercial mortgage REIT space. As investors increasingly recognize the strength of our senior secured investment strategy and conservative capital structure, we believe our equity valuation will reflect this alignment. Combined with our disciplined credit risk management and ability to deploy capital with speed and certainty, these attributes reinforce our capacity to deliver strong, stable returns for shareholders across market cycles. With that, I'll turn the call over to Paul. Paul Miceli: Thank you, Pamela. In the third quarter of 2025, Ladder generated $32.1 million of distributable earnings or $0.25 per share, achieving a return on average equity of 8.3%. In the third quarter, we closed our inaugural investment-grade bond offering of $500 million 5-year bond at 5.5%. The proceeds were partially used to call the remaining $285 million of bonds that were maturing in October and fund loan originations. As of quarter end, $2.2 billion or 75% of our debt is comprised of unsecured corporate bonds across 4 issuances with a weighted average remaining term of 4 years and a weighted average coupon of 5.3%. Our next corporate bond maturity is now in 2027. The offering strengthened our balance sheet and affirmed our commitment to the investment-grade bond market as our primary source of capital. We're encouraged by the bond's strong trading performance in the secondary market and believe our bonds offer attractive relative value to fixed income investors with [ meat on the bone ] to tighten further as the market continues to recognize Ladder's distinct long-standing investment strategy, anchored by conservative lending attachment points, AAA-rated securities and high-quality real estate equity investments. As of September 30, 2025, Ladder's liquidity was $879 million, comprised of cash and cash equivalents and our undrawn capacity of $850 million unsecured revolver. Total gross leverage was 2.0x as of quarter end, below our target leverage range. Overall, our balance sheet remains strong and primed for continued growth as our investment pipeline continues to build. As of September 30, 2025, our unencumbered asset pool stood at $3.9 billion or 84% of total assets. 88% of this unencumbered asset pool is comprised of first mortgage loans, investment-grade securities and unrestricted cash and cash equivalents. As of September 30, 2025, Ladder's undepreciated book value per share was $13.71, which is net of a $0.41 per share CECL reserve established. In the third quarter of 2025, we repurchased $1.9 million of common stock or 171,000 shares at a weighted average price of $11.04 per share. Year-to-date in 2025, we've repurchased $9.3 million of common stock or 877,000 shares at a weighted average price of $10.60 per share. As of September 30, 2025, $91.5 million remains outstanding on Ladder's stock repurchase program. In the third quarter, Ladder declared a $0.23 per share dividend, which was paid on October 15, 2025. As of today, our dividend yield is approximately 8.5% with a stock price that we believe has been pulled down by the broader market concerns around private credit. We'll note that our dividend remains stable and our asset base continues to turn over into freshly originated loans, AAA securities, high-quality real estate equity investments. With a stable earnings base complemented by our investment-grade capital structure, we believe there's ample room for our dividend yield to tighten, specifically when compared to other investment-grade REITs with similar credit ratings to Ladder. We continue to expand our investor outreach efforts now as an investment-grade company, and we look forward to further educating the market on our story. Building on Pamela's overview of our performance, I'll highlight a few additional insights to how each of our segments fared in the third quarter. As of September 30, 2025, our loan portfolio totaled $1.9 billion with a weighted average yield of approximately 8.2%. As of quarter end, we had 3 loans on non-accrual totaling $123 million or 2.6% of total assets. In the third quarter, we resolved 2 non-accrual loans, first through the payoff at part of a $16 million loan through the sale by a sponsor of 2 mixed-use properties in New York City; and the second be a foreclosure of a loan collateralized by an office property in Maryland with a carrying value of $22.7 million. No new loans were added to non-accrual in the third quarter. Our CECL reserve remained steady at $52 million or $0.41 per share. We believe this reserve is adequate to cover any potential losses in our loan portfolio, including consideration of the ongoing macroeconomic shifts in the U.S. and global economy. As of September 30, 2025, our securities portfolio totaled $1.9 billion with a weighted average yield of 5.7%, of which 99% was investment-grade and 96% was AAA-rated, underscoring the portfolio's high credit quality. As of quarter end, approximately 80% of the portfolio of almost entirely AAA securities were unencumbered and readily financeable, providing an additional source of liquidity, complementing our same-day liquidity of $879 million. In the third quarter, our $960 million real estate segment continued to generate stable net operating income. The portfolio includes 149 net lease properties, primarily investment-grade credits committed to long-term leases with an average lease term of 7 years remaining. For further information on Ladder's third quarter 2025 operating results, refer to our earnings supplement presentation, which is available on our website and our quarterly report on Form 10-Q, which we expect to file in the coming days. With that, I will turn the call over to Brian. Brian Harris: Thanks, Paul. The third quarter was a particularly gratifying one, highlighted by the successful completion of our first corporate unsecured issuance as an investment-grade issuer. We now have access to a much larger investor base in the investment-grade market than the high-yield market where we had issued our prior 7 offerings over the last 13 years. Having access to this larger pool of capital should allow us to further optimize our liability management in the years to come. We believe that by being a regular issuer in the investment-grade corporate bond market, we will be able to lower our overall interest expense to a greater extent than what we could expect in the secured repo and high-yield markets. We prioritized getting to investment-grade ratings several years ago. So having that distinction today from 2 of the 3 major rating agencies is very satisfying, and we plan to maintain or improve our ratings over time. While Ladder has historically been grouped into a peer group of other commercial mortgage REITs, we believe we are more properly comped against other investment-grade rated property REITs who finance their operations like we do, primarily with the use of corporate unsecured debt and large unsecured revolvers. If we succeed in curating an equity investor base that views us more in line with investment-grade property REITs, we think our stock price will start to reflect a lower required dividend yield more in line with how these investment-grade property REITs with lower leverage are valued. In the fourth quarter and beyond, we expect to continue adding to our inventory of higher-yielding balance sheet loans, while staying nimble enough to pivot into securities acquisitions during periods of high volatility when these investments provide extraordinary opportunities to add safer, more liquid investments as market turbulence flares up. We are hopeful that the yield curve will steepen much more next year as the Fed makes good on market predictions of several cuts to the Fed funds rate. This in turn should pave the way for more regular contributions to securitizations. We are always on the lookout for opportunities to own more real estate, but we expect most of the lift to earnings next year to come from organic growth of our loan portfolio. We're expecting to finish this transformational year on a positive note as market conditions do appear to favor our business model as we head into 2026. We can take some questions now. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Jade Rahmani with KBW. Jade Rahmani: I'm interested to know if you're doing anything differently on the origination side from prior to the IG rating. Perhaps that has opened you up to deals that are closer to stabilization or perhaps larger in size. Clearly, the IG rating might give you a competitive advantage over non-bank lenders. So if you could provide any color on that, it would be helpful. Brian Harris: Sure. Thanks, Jade. Yes, I would say, we're looking at some slightly larger transactions and it's just a lot more stability around it financing it this way. You don't have to go about trying to figure out if an individual lender will see the assets the same way you do. But I wouldn't call it anything wholesale indifference. Slightly larger, yes, everything is a little bit more profitable when your cost of funds go down. But for the most part, the one real change that I see in this part of the cycle versus the last time is the assets on which we're lending are of much, much better quality than the garden apartment buildings and older warehouse properties. So we seem to -- when I take a look at the assets that we're lending on, they're really newly built Class A apartment complexes, resort style almost. And a lot of the industrial portfolios are also quite new as a result of all the onshoring that took place. Jade Rahmani: And on the origination side, I noticed a difference between fundings and commitments upfront that seemed, at least from the outside, a little larger than historically. Were there any construction loans in there or any large CapEx projects in those deals, if you could provide any color? Brian Harris: I wouldn't say as a rule, but we generally don't write construction loans. So there are no construction loans in that portfolio that you're looking at. And as far as heavy CapEx work, I think if you're gravitating towards a slightly wider spread than maybe you're expecting, I don't think it's as a result of a higher construction component or a lot of TI hammer swinging. It really is just -- we're just getting a little bit better. I think the portfolio doesn't look like it's changing meaningfully. Right now, it's most of the assets are industrial and multifamily. I'm not sure it will stay that way. And we haven't been avoiding hotels. We put one under app recently, but we just haven't run across too many of them. And as I said, a lot of the -- we try to focus more importantly rather than property types is on acquisitions where the borrower is buying something usually at a reset basis. Some of these resets are quite remarkable. But as opposed to cash out refinances. The only real cash out refinances that we're doing is if a guy is coming off a construction loan on an apartment building, and he's only 50% leased now. So those oftentimes have 30% or 40% equity in them. And sometimes there's a cash out refi because the property is now complete and half leased. So other than that, it's pretty straight down the middle lending on apartments and industrial properties. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Steve Delaney with Citizens JMP. Steven Delaney: Congrats on the strong quarter. Curious, let's start with lending. You seem to like the market. You have plenty of capacity. But let's talk about just the $1.9 billion rather than the $5 billion overall portfolio, focusing on the loan portfolio because you appear to be increasingly active there. Do you see -- looking at that portfolio, if we were to look out over the next year, do you see further growth and meaningful growth in that $1.9 billion loan portfolio? And can you give us some idea of a range with your current capital base, how large the loan portfolio might be able to grow? Brian Harris: Sure. Thanks, Steve. let's start with capital first because if you remember, in the second half of 2024, we took in over $1 billion in loan payoffs. And while we began originating loans more frequently, we were not originating at that pace. So what was happening is each quarter, the loan book would get a little bit smaller. This is really the first quarter in a while where we've originated more than has paid off, and we expect that to continue. So the fourth quarter is off to a very good start. I would expect or as I said originally, the organic side of growth will come from just building up the bridge book. I think that's the place where we're focused right now. And we're pretty happy with where spreads are. They're a little bit less competitive than they were really, I would say, just a couple of months ago, which tends to happen after you hit the midpoint of the year. But -- so I would expect that $1.9 billion portfolio to go up by $1 billion in all likelihood. Maybe I would -- if I had to take the over-under on that $1 billion, I would take the over. We're quite active right now and business begets business. So I think that when we had a pretty strong origination quarter, that gets noticed by borrowers as well as brokers and the phone rings a little bit more. As Pamela mentioned, we have over $500 million in loans under application right now. You never really know how many of these are going to close depending on what happens with the volatility sometimes coming out of the political picture as well as the geopolitical side of things. But generally, I would expect that we -- I think we had that loan book up to around $3.4 billion a couple of years ago, and I would like to get back there. And I think that will come from a few places. One, we have a larger revolver that's mostly undrawn. We have a lot of securities. Securities are paying off at a much more rapid clip than loans right now. And I think that's a testimony to the payoffs that have been coming in and the capital markets becoming more welcoming to single asset transactions. So as you pay down those AAAs in a CLO, the financing becomes quite unpopular. So they've been calling a lot of those bonds, and we'll expect that to continue. I think that our securities portfolio will, through attrition pay off, but also we will sell them. As we said in the quarter, we sold a little over $250 million. We own over -- I think we own over $2 billion today. I would expect that number to go down, but I would expect the loan inventory book to go up. Steven Delaney: That's really helpful color, Brian. In terms of [ specialty ] comparison, you mentioned the property REITs and their valuation is something that you would be envious of on a -- whether it's on a PE or a dividend yield. Looking at the ROE at 8.3%, I would say, it kind of strikes me as being solid, but in terms of valuation and where the stock is trading relative to book that some improvement to that, maybe something in the 9% to 10% range might be very beneficial to the stock price, and therefore, your valuation relative to book. Is that improving the ROE in a prudent manner? Is that part of your vision for the next 1 to 2 years? And do you think the strategy you have in place will necessarily take your ROE some higher? Brian Harris: I would say yes to all of those parts of that question. The game plan is to write more loans and we'll get through the cash component of our liquidity. As you remember, we had a lot of T-bills when T-bills were yielding 5.5%, and that kept us away from very tight mortgage loans because if it wasn't at the margin worth sacrificing the liquidity and safety of the securities, we really didn't do it. But now with the Fed cutting rates and promising to cut further, we have a nice mix of floating rate and fixed rate liabilities. So we would expect our cost of funds to be going down. That revolver, I'll remind you, is now priced at SOFR plus 1.25%. So if I am of the opinion the Fed is going to cut rates 100 basis points, usually probably bridging over Powell's last few stance as well as the next Fed official that comes in. And if that happens, you get SOFR down around 3% we can borrow unsecured at 4.25% at that point. So that should all bode well. We've got floors in our bridge loan portfolio up around 6%, 6.25%. And so the loan -- the rates we're able to write loans at these days have actually gone up not down in the last quarter anyway. So we're going to continue doing that. And after we get through the cash component of our liquidity, we'll then begin to sell down or pay down the securities. And the way it comes out on paper, we're hoping to add $1 billion to $2 billion of assets net on the balance sheet and we're hoping to pick up 3% to 4% of profit margin. So if we can take a security that we're earning 5.5% on and get it and pay that loan -- pay the security off and then redistribute, reinvest that money into a loan portfolio that's earning 8.5%, we think that bodes very well for dividend, ROE as well as earnings. So it's not a hard ping-pong ball to follow. That is going to be what we're going to do. It's what we've been saying we're going to do. The one thing that has really masked all the work that we've done has been the very rapid pace of payoffs. And those are high-yielding instruments and we hate to see them go. But when they've been around a little bit past their expiration date, you do want them to pay off, and we've been pretty successful at that. So credit, very stable. We like what we're seeing. The quality is good. The borrowers are good. They've been patient. They're not in difficult financial binds as a result of owning too many over-levered properties. So it looks strong. And you got the stock market at an all-time highs, you got spreads low, rates low, Fed cutting. These are all good conditions on the weather map for a successful lending business at Ladder. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our next question comes from the line of Tom Catherwood with BTIG. William Catherwood: Brian, I just wanted to go back to something that you said in response to Steve's question, and I want to make sure I heard it right. Did you mention that -- I thought you said rates we can get on loans have gone up, not down. Did I hear that right? Brian Harris: The ones we're looking at, yes. I think -- well, you're seeing -- I mean, I'm not immune to looking at corporate spreads, credit spreads, mortgage spreads. But there's a couple of things going on more recently in the -- literally the last 60 days, I would say. The Fed is letting the mortgage-backed securities portfolio run off. So the agency securities market is actually not as tight as you would think on spread. And the reason why is the Fed is effectively letting $30 billion roll off. I think it's $30 billion. I'm not a Fed watcher. So if I have that wrong, please don't send me a bunch of e-mail. But the other -- after April, when the tariff talk started and now the back and forths that go on, the commercial sector was -- as it always does, and I've said this to you probably several times. In January, every year, we go to a convention down in Miami called CREFC. Everyone is a bull. Everyone comes out, it's going to be its best year ever, and they put a carry trade on until the middle of June. Around the middle of June, they think maybe we paid too much for these things and they start to sell them and they're less aggressive. At Ladder, we have found a nice little theme I think in loan sizes. We traditionally like loans at $25 million to $30 million on middle market lenders by choice. However, we dabbled occasionally in larger loans. The banks are not really writing loans in the $100 million range. That's a little too small for them to put on their balance sheet and then try to securitize. They'll write $1 billion loan with a consortium of banks, but $100 million loan is under their radar and $100 million is probably a little too big for a lot of the CLO issuers that are out there that we mainly compete with. So we're actually very happy in our $50 million to $100 million range right now and we'll try to stay there. And so don't think that we've changed our stripes if we start picking up loans that are a little larger than average. We're still doing plenty of smaller loans, too. But the $100 million type loan is a better asset. It's newer. It's got better financial characteristics to it. And it is higher rate because the competitive landscape is just not as bad as it was. And keep in mind, I'm talking about the last 60 to 90 days. The first half of the year was very, very tight and we were not originating a lot for that reason. In fact, we were buying a lot of securities. Another good proxy, Tom, if you want to take a look at it, is the CLO market. So there's a lot of CLOs coming to market. And they're in the 145, 155, 160 area for AAAs. That's wider than they were just a few months ago. It's not extraordinarily wider. But you're also seeing the VIX tick up. I think it was around 25 the other day after being at 15 for a month. So when you see the VIX ticking up like that and all the volatility around the rhetoric and the political circles, we're able to find things that are pretty attractive. Again, I also think we have a reputation as being very reliable. So as we get to the year-end here, we tend to do -- we always do better in the second half of the year than the first year -- first half of the year when it comes to production. That has been something that has followed me around through my whole career. And I think it has more to do with seasonality and what happens. As you know, insurance companies, they allocate money into fixed income. Usually, by June or July, they're fully invested. So even that competitive force kind of backs off a little bit, too. So we actually prefer to fatten up going into the end of the year. William Catherwood: Got it. Really appreciate that answer, Brian. And then if I think about then sources and uses -- and again, I know you laid it out before, how you think about funding things. But if the spreads and securities are somewhat widening and the revolver is priced at S plus 125, wouldn't it make sense to then just put everything on the revolver and then term it out with unsecured once you get to $400 million, $500 million and just keep wash rents repeat that? Or is -- do you think selling down securities along with using the revolver gives some other benefit? Brian Harris: Well, I think it's almost like we have several companies at Ladder with the products that we dabble in. But on the floating rate side -- I'm sorry, on the securities side, I mean, if you take a look at the rating agency REITs, the agency buyers like AGNC and Annaly and a couple of others, these guys are throwing off dividends of 14%, 15%. And they're levered, I don't know, 7x, 8x in many cases. That's way too hot for us on leverage, but with government-guaranteed paper, with a lot of duration, I think your risk is in the duration side of that. But at where we are, these securities, there -- if we levered them up and easily can, the financing cost is around SOFR plus 50 on a AAA. If we're buying things at 150, you can figure out that there is a pretty good spread in there. So we can lever those up to about 15%, but it's a lot of leverage. And the road we're on is not to just have a low cost of funds so we can lever things up. The game plan is to focus more and more in the years ahead on unsecured debt that we extend. But the game -- the change at Ladder versus before we were IG, we would normally be thinking about issuing another bond here because we're growing rapidly, we're going to need more capital. We've got sources of ability to get capital, but we might think about that. But if you really think the Fed is going to cut rates by 75 or 100 basis points, it would not go out and do a bond deal right now because that revolver is going to get down to a low-4% rate. And that's what we think will happen. It doesn't have to happen. But if it does, that's probably the first thing we'll do is draw that. We don't want to draw all of that because that's not what the agencies and investors want to see on the bond side. So -- but my guess is we'll probably -- I don't think securities were ever meant to be a long-term hold for us. They're kind of a parking spot for us while we're waiting for better opportunities to come by on the loan side. And I think our patience has been rewarded because I think Paul mentioned that our spread on the loans we wrote in the $500 million or so was around $279 million. I think the spread on what's coming in the fourth quarter is going to be wider than that. Operator: Our next question is a follow-up from Jade Rahmani with KBW. Jade Rahmani: Just curious if you would contemplate launching a securities fund, if you can deliver 15% type returns with leverage, you could put the leverage in the fund, not on Ladder's balance sheet and create value for investors looking for that type of return profile. And of course, comparing to residential mortgage securities, commercial has a lot more predictable duration. So you don't have the prepayment volatility that the agency REITs deal with. Brian Harris: Yes. I mean, we've done that before. When we first opened, we ran a few investment portfolios even some individuals that we knew because sometimes securities get cheap, but most people with the first and last name don't know how to go buy them. And so oftentimes, we'll get a call and say, why don't you buy these? So we have an asset that's yielding, as I said, a levered yield of around 15% I think. So that's generally attractive, but it does come with a lot of leverage. We've historically looked -- we've looked at that. We've looked at stapling on a residential mortgage arm of things because we all understand that business also, but haven't done it. And the last thing we've looked at too is possibly spinning off our triple net portfolio because we don't get much for that in valuation. So this is going to be -- 2026 is going to be a year about really fine-tuning the columns and what the right cap rate should be on those things. We have an internal manager that has no value apparently. So there's lots of things we can do now around the edges, but the first step is going to be becoming an investment-grade company. And we still like the -- given where we are in the cycle right now, we like the commercial mortgage business better than the residential side. The residential side could get very interesting though, not from a loan, but from a standpoint of if there's too much supply due to the absence of the Fed. So those are very attractive, but as I said, they do have a lot of duration on them. So -- but we're probably -- we're agnostic as to holding on to things that yield 15% or selling things that make 1 to 2 points and then recycling the money. And I think that, that is an option open to us right now, as you saw in the small sales that we did in the third quarter. Jade Rahmani: And then the New York office equity investment you made, how are you feeling about that? Is that a long-term hold? It looks like it was pretty prescient in terms of timing. But could you also remind us the size of that? Brian Harris: Sure. Our investment -- we're a minority participant in the equity on that. But we may very well get involved in the debt side of that situation later on, but we have a loan from an insurance company for now. But that building, 780 Third Avenue, by the way, if anybody cares, is -- we put in a $13 million or $14 million investment. At the time, the building was about 50% occupied. I don't know where we are on free rent, but I do believe we've now -- the building is leased over 90% in just a short -- under 1.5 years. So we do like that one. Again, that's a very high-quality building. Third Avenue is not known for high-quality buildings, but a lot of the lower quality is becoming residential. And a lot of those poorly occupied office buildings that are becoming residential, those tenants are looking for space. The real benefit we picked up was between JPMorgan and Citadel, Park Avenue is being just gobbled up on space and a lot of those tenants are also moving. So we didn't -- we thought we were going to get Third Avenue tenants looking for an address. We wound up getting Park Avenue tenants that were being displaced by JPMorgan's expansion. So all going well. I wish we had done more of that. And do we like that? We are looking at another situation right now of larger size than the one we did at 780 Third Avenue, and we like it. These transportation hubs in New York City tend to do better. They come out a little bit quicker, especially when people have concerns around safety on mass transportation. I think that situation has largely corrected itself with the return of people. Our offices are full. We haven't ordered anybody to be in 5 days a week, but most of them are. So we generally like pockets of the office market, but we do understand the obsolescence associated with some of the older ones. So yes, we like where we are. We're happy to do more of those investments. And that long-term hold is the last part of your question there. I would say, we're going to hold that for a while, yes. Operator: We have no further questions at this time. Mr. Harris, I'd like to turn the floor back over to you for closing comments. Brian Harris: Thanks, everybody, for listening and those who dialed in afterwards. And good year 2025, we're in the fourth quarter. The reason I say that now is because we're not going to talk again until after the new year comes and we get through the audited financials. But a lot of this is just falling into place the way we largely expected it. The only real surprises were the rapid paydowns that took place in the second half of last year, but we're catching up quickly. We've had an inflection point here in the last quarter where we originated more than paid off, and we think that, that is going to be a consistent theme over the next 4 or 5 quarters. So thank you for tuning in, and we'll catch up with you after the new year. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, this does conclude today's teleconference. You may disconnect your lines at this time. Thank you for your participation, and have a wonderful day.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to the United Rentals Investor Conference Call. Please be advised this call is being recorded. Before we begin, please note that the company's press release, comments made on today's call and responses to your questions contain forward-looking statements. The company's business and operations are subject to a variety of risks and uncertainties, many of which are beyond its control. And consequently, actual results may differ materially from those projected. A summary of these uncertainties is included in the safe harbor statement contained in the company's press release. For a more complete description of these and other possible risks, please refer to the company's annual report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2024 as well as the subsequent filings with the SEC. You can access these filings on the company's website at www.unitedrentals.com. Please note that United Rentals has no obligation and makes no commitment to update or publicly release any revisions to forward-looking statements in order to reflect new information or subsequent events, circumstances or changes in expectations. You should also note that the company's press release and today's call include references to non-GAAP terms such as free cash flow, adjusted EPS, EBITDA and adjusted EBITDA. Please refer to the back of the company's recent investor presentation to see the reconciliation from each non-GAAP financial measure to the most comparable GAAP financial measure. Speaking today for United Rentals is Matt Flannery, President and Chief Executive Officer; and Ted Grace, Chief Financial Officer. I will now turn the call over to Mr. Flannery. Mr. Flannery, you may begin. Matthew Flannery: Thank you, operator, and good morning, everyone. Thanks for joining our call today. I apologize in advance for my voice. As I'm fighting through a little cold here, but I'm sure we'll get through it okay. Yesterday afternoon, we were pleased to report our third quarter results. The hard work of our nearly 28,000 employees enabled record revenue and adjusted EBITDA. The year is playing out better than we originally expected our updated guidance reflects the demand environment we continue to successfully serve. In short, our unique value proposition, experience, and ability to support a broad range of our customers' needs distinguishes us from the competition. Last quarter, I spent a lot of time on the road visiting branches, job sites and meeting with customers. And while this is nothing new. It did make the quarter's results and our subsequent guidance update, no surprise from my perspective. Our branches are very busy, and the team is working hard to serve customer demand. Our people are true differentiators in the rental industry and their professionalism and knowledge, their expertise and their commitment day in and day out shows. We often talk about putting the customer at the center of everything we do as it feeds our flywheel of growth. Without the dedicated United Rentals team members safely executing our customer-centric model, we could not generate the success we continue to deliver. And from where I sit today, I expect this momentum to carry into 2026. In the third quarter specifically, we again saw growth across both our General Rental and Specialty businesses with optimism from the field and our customer confidence index, reinforcing our expectations going forward. The demand for used equipment also remains healthy. Now with that said, let me get into the review of our third quarter results and our updated 2025 guidance. And then Ted will review the financials in detail before we open the line for Q&A. Let's start with the quarter's results. Our total revenue grew by 5.9% year-over-year to $4.2 billion. And within this, rental revenue grew by 5.8% to $3.7 billion, both third quarter records. Fleet productivity increased 2%, contributing to OER growth of 4.7%. Adjusted EBITDA increased to a third quarter record of over $1.9 billion, resulting in a margin of 46%. And finally, adjusted EPS came in at $11.70. Now turning to customer activity. And as I mentioned, we saw growth across both our Gen Rent and Specialty businesses in the quarter. Specialty continues to post double-digit increases with rental revenue up 11% year-over-year driven by growth across all our product offerings and an additional 18 cold starts. Year-to-date, we've opened 47 cold starts as we continue to fill out our specialty footprint. We see this combined with the power of cross-sell and the addition of new products to our portfolio as critical points of competitive differentiation, which benefit our customers while also providing important drivers of long-term growth. By vertical, our construction end markets saw strong growth across both infrastructure and nonresidential construction, while our industrial end markets saw particular strength within power. We continue to see new projects kicking off. And while data centers are certainly 1 area of growth, we also saw new projects across infrastructure, semis, hospitals, LNG facilities and airports to name just a few. Our end market exposure by vertical is intentionally diversified and our equipment is fungible to ensure we can serve demand no matter where it presents itself. Now turning to the used market. We sold $619 million of OEC at a recovery rate of 54%. The demand for used equipment is healthy, and we're on track to sell approximately $2.8 billion of fleet this year. As I mentioned in my opening remarks, the year is playing out better than we initially expected. To meet this demand, we spent nearly $1.5 billion of CapEx in the quarter and now expect to spend over $4 billion on fleet this year. This positions us not only to capitalize on the current environment, but also for the anticipated growth in 2026. Our customers and the field remain optimistic, particularly around large projects and key verticals. And thanks to our go-to-market approach and one-stop shop value proposition, we believe we're well positioned to be the partner of choice for these projects. Year-to-date, we've generated free cash flow of $1.2 billion, with the expectation to generate between $2.1 billion and $2.3 billion for the full year, including the impact of our higher CapEx spend. As a reminder, the combination of our industry-leading profitability, capital efficiency, and the flexibility of our business model enables us to generate meaningful free cash flow throughout the cycle, and in turn, allocate that capital in ways that allow us to create long-term shareholder value. Speaking of capital allocation, we always start with ensuring the balance sheet is in a good place, and it is. We then fund organic growth reflected through our CapEx and complement this with inorganic growth that makes financial and strategic sense. In the remainder, we returned to shareholders. This quarter specifically, we returned over $730 million to shareholders through a combination of share buybacks and our dividend. For the full year, we remain on track to return nearly $2.4 billion to shareholders. Our leverage of less than 1.9x leaves plenty of dry powder to support disciplined M&A, where we continue to pursue opportunities to put capital to work and attractive returns. Our M&A pipeline remains robust within both Gen Rent and Specialty and across the spectrum of deal sizes. And while it's difficult to predict the timing of M&A, this is an important capability we've built over our company's history. And we'll continue to use it to enhance our business and drive shareholder value. As we enter the final months of 2025, we're focused on execution, and delivering the results outlined in our updated guidance, including total revenue growth of 5% or 6% ex use, strong profitability, robust free cash flow and returns above our cost of capital. Although our growth is coming with some additional costs, which Ted will cover in his remarks, we're working through these challenges and are taking proactive measures, including bringing in additional fleet to help mitigate fleet movement costs. I'm very pleased with 2025 and how it's playing out ahead of our initial expectations and see good momentum heading into next year. Based on what we see today, 2026 will be another year of healthy growth. We believe the tailwinds we've discussed throughout this year will carry over and our unrelenting focus on being the partner of choice for our customers, positions us very well to win this business and to outperform the industry. For now, we won't get into the specifics about '26 as we're in the middle of our planning process, but we will share more details in January as we always do. In closing, I'm pleased with the outstanding job the United Rentals team is doing to support our customers. And that's the starting point for everything we do. Not only do we have the scale, technology and value proposition to make us the preferred partner, but we have a history of execution our customers can rely on. By working together with our customers to meet their goals to drive safety, productivity and efficiency, we ensure we build a relationship with trust that positions us to win in the marketplace. Subsequently, our strategy, business model, competitive advantages and capital discipline allow us to generate compelling shareholder returns for the long term. So with that, I'm going to hand the call over to Ted, and then we'll take your questions. Ted, over to you. William Grace: Thanks, Matt, and good morning, everyone. As you just heard, the year continues to progress well with third quarter records across total revenue, rental revenue and EBITDA. More importantly, based both on what we're seeing and hearing from customers, we expect the strong demand to continue, which is supporting our increases in both rental revenue and CapEx guidance. More on that in a minute, but first, let's go through this quarter's numbers. As you saw in our press release, rental revenue increased $202 million year-over-year or 5.8% to a third quarter record of $3.67 billion supported again by growth from large projects and key verticals. Within this, OER increased by $133 million or 4.7% and driven by 4.2% growth in our average fleet size and fleet productivity of 2%, partially offset by some fleet inflation of 1.5%. Also within rental, ancillary and re-rent grew over 10%, adding a combined $69 million of revenue. Consistent with our first half results, third quarter ancillary growth again outpaced OER as we continue to focus on supporting our customers. Moving to used, we generated $333 million of proceeds at an adjusted margin of 45.9% and a 54% recovery rate, while OEC sold set a third quarter record at $619 million. Combined, these results speak to the continued strength and health of the used equipment market. Turning to EBITDA. Adjusted EBITDA increased $42 million year-on-year to an all-time record of $1.95 billion. Within this, a $69 million increase in rental gross profits was partially offset by a $6 million decline in used gross profit dollars. SG&A increased $23 million, which is in line with revenue growth, while other non-rental lines of businesses added $2 million. Looking at profitability. Our third quarter adjusted EBITDA margin was 46.0% implying 170 basis points of compression on an as-reported basis and 150 basis points ex used. At a high level, margin dynamics in the third quarter were similar to what we've discussed the last several quarters. This includes the impact of ancillary, the strategic investments we're making in the business and still relatively elevated inflation. An area I might call out again this quarter was delivery, which was impacted both by higher fleet repositioning costs in support of large projects and our use of third-party outside haul to serve the stronger-than-expected demand seen during our seasonal peak. To try to put this in perspective, our third quarter delivery costs increased 20% year-on-year versus a roughly 6% increase in rental revenue. Simply assuming that these costs increase proportional to revenue. This gap implies over $30 million of additional cost year-on-year and translates to an almost 80 basis points drag in our EBITDA margins. Now I'm sure we'll talk more about this during Q&A. But this provides a great example of the balance we are constantly managing between capital in the form of fleet and costs, both fixed and variable with the goal of serving customers as efficiently as possible. Shifting to CapEx. Third quarter gross rental CapEx was $1.49 billion. I'll speak more to this in a moment, but this included the acceleration of some purchases to help us support the stronger-than-expected demand we are experiencing. Moving to returns and free cash flow. Our return on invested capital of 12% remains comfortably above our weighted average cost of capital, while year-to-date free cash flow was $1.19 billion. Our balance sheet remains very strong with net leverage of 1.86x at the end of September and total liquidity of over $2.45 billion. All note, this was after returning $1.63 billion to shareholders year-to-date including $350 million via dividends and $1.28 billion through repurchases. In total, between dividends and share repurchases, we still plan to return almost $2.4 billion in cash to our shareholders this year. This equates to a little better than $37 per share or a return of capital yield of almost 4%. Now let's shift to the updated guidance we shared last night, which reflects our confidence in delivering another year of solid results. As you've heard us say a few times this morning, we are seeing stronger-than-expected demand. In response, we accelerated the landing of some fleet into Q3 while also raising our full year CapEx guidance by $300 million at midpoint to a range of $4 billion to $4.2 billion. In turn, we are increasing our total revenue guidance by $150 million at midpoint, while narrowing the range to $16 billion to $16.2 billion, implying full year growth of roughly 5% at midpoint. Within this, our used sales guidance is unchanged at around $1.45 billion, which implies total revenue growth ex used of 6% at midpoint. I'll note that the additional CapEx accounts for roughly half of the increase to our revenue guidance, given we'll only realize a partial year of OER benefit with the balance coming from ancillary. On the EBITDA side, we are narrowing our range to $7.325 billion to $7.425 billion while maintaining the midpoint of $7.375 billion. Ahead of Q&A, I'll quickly mention that the lack of implied pull-through from this additional revenue reflects our expectation that, as I just mentioned, a portion of the increase will come from lower-margin ancillary while we also expect to manage through similar cost dynamics in Q4 and especially delivery. Turning to cash flow. We reaffirm the midpoint of our guidance for cash flow from operations at $5.2 billion, while our revised free cash flow guidance of $2.1 billion to $2.3 billion simply reflects the additional investment in CapEx that we plan to make. Importantly, our updated free cash flow guidance does not impact our share repurchase program. I'll remind you that we intend to repurchase $1.9 billion of shares this year, which highlights our strategy of both investing in growth and returning access capital to our shareholders. So to wrap up my prepared remarks, overall, we were pleased with how the quarter played out, especially on the demand side. And while our margins were burdened by the cost mentioned, we remain focused on supporting our customers' growth as efficiently as possible as we lean into their demand. So with that said, let me turn the call over to the operator for Q&A. Operator, please open the line. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We'll take our first question from David Raso with Evercore ISI. David Raso: Obviously, we have the demand positive and the cost negative here. So I just wanted to dive into the demand side first. The cadence of the CapEx, when I think about '26, and the comment you accelerated equipment for the third quarter. But just so we're clear, when you're thinking of the demand profile that you said was better than you expected, is any of this '25 CapEx increase pulling forward 2026. And if not, just thinking about the cadence of sort of the CapEx for '26, obviously, when you bring this much fleet on the third quarter, people wonder how do we go into '26 with a level of fleet just given the seasonal weakness? So that's a demand question. I'll follow up with a quick cost question. Matthew Flannery: Sure, David. I'll take that. This was not a pull forward from 2026. This accelerated CapEx in Q3 was to meet the demand that we were already seeing and to be responsive to specifically some large project wins throughout the year, but that put a little more need for fleet here in the back half. Then we let the Q4 CapEx flow through as normally would. Some of that's seasonal. And to your point about 6 all of this, although not a pull forward, is supported by being very comfortable that we expect 2026 to be a growth year, which is why we felt comfortable raising this full year CapEx. As far as CapEx cadence for next year, we haven't finished our planning process, but you can expect there to be the standard, let's say, we're going to sell $2.8 billion, maybe a little bit more in CapEx next year. The replacement for that is going to be $3 billion, $4 billion plus depending on how much more we sell. And then there'll be growth on top of that. That's the part that we're going to work through in the planning process this year. But to be clear, we certainly expect to have some growth CapEx here in 2026. And then we'll let you know about the cadence of that as we see how the demand plays out. David Raso: Okay. And then on the cost side, I mean, it's easier for me to say, but ancillary revenues are up to close to 18% of total rental revenue. How do we think about pricing for those services? I know -- I appreciate the comment, providing those services is partly why you win more than your fair share, let's say, of the major projects. But it's it went from sort of an afterthought to, again, if you want to throw in a re-rent, it's 20% of rental revenue. So is there a way to rethink that pricing, some kind of annual contracts, something where it doesn't continue to be a drag. And related to that, the fleet productivity number, I know you don't like going into the details, but can you give us some sense of the components of fleet productivity. Were both utilization rate up 1 up, 1 down. Just trying to get a sense of those components as we sort of push against the cost. Matthew Flannery: Yes, I'll take the latter part there, David, on fleet productivity, and then Ted can add some color on the ancillary. But on the ancillary, I do want to remind you that A big portion of this is delivery, which is basically a pass-through fuel, which is not a large markup. So there's just some things there that have historically been. And it's a fair point about the pricing. But as we think about that, and Ted can get into the detail of the math of how that impacts us, there's nothing new other than we're doing more of it as we continue to serve more products and services. And the fleet productivity, as I stayed true to telling you qualitatively. We're very pleased with how rate and time have performed throughout the year and specifically in Q3. I would say the gap, the difference between what you saw in Q2 at 3.3% fleet productivity, and Q3 at 2% was mix. Mix was a good guide for us in Q2 and not in Q3. So we would see that as normal variability. And it's important for us to remind you all that mix is just -- we're catching that. We're not driving that. That's a result of who you rent to, how you went to, what your rent, how long, what geography. So it's not anything that we have any capability to predict, quite frankly, because it's reactive and responsive to where the demand is. And then we just let you know that. But to be clear, rate and time are both up this year, and we feel good about it. William Grace: And on the margin side within ancillary, David, obviously, the thought there is you want to be responsive to the customers all kind of ties back to this concept of being the partner of choice. Frankly, it's hard for us to predict what that mix will look like between something like pickup and delivery or installation breakdown, setup, fueling, et cetera. The margins themselves don't fluctuate a tremendous amount, but they are what they are. So delivery to Matt's point is probably the thinnest of that. That's really kind of just the convention of the industry. Others are certainly not going to have the kind of margins that we have in rental. But as we've said, they're definitely positive and they add GP dollars with very little capital coming along with that. So we think they benefit us both strategically and financially, but it's going to drive kind of variability depending on what that composition looks like. Operator: We'll take our next question from Rob Wertheimer with Melius Research. Robert Wertheimer: You've mentioned a few times across the call solid demand indicators kind of driving some of the CapEx move. Could you talk a little bit qualitatively about what that looks like in the field? Is this mega projects that we all knew about but are probably coming online? Is the share gain as people appreciate? Is this interest rate intensive construction having what's kind of going on? Matthew Flannery: Sure, Rob. As we've talked about really for the past year plus -- there's some feedback there from somebody. But as we talk about large projects are really carrying the ball here. So we feel really good about that. And when we asked, what surprised us, we had a higher win rate than maybe we had originally planned for, and that's what the additional CapEx was for. As far as the local markets, the local markets, we would call flattish. It's very choppy in certain markets. There's a little bit more opportunity than others, but I'd call it net across the network probably flat on the local and really the growth coming from major projects, which are robust and we expect to do well, and I'm glad to see the teams executing on it. Robert Wertheimer: And then the fleet repositioning that's been there this quarter and before, related to that shift in demand. Does that have an end date to it? Where you've kind of got stuff moved around where you want it? Or is that just a new world where projects are bigger and in different places? I'll stop there. Matthew Flannery: So part of that is think about the disbursement of revenue, right? Think about a couple of years ago when we talked about broad-based demand and our network was a real advantage for us because we could just serve more demand out of our same cost basis basically with some variable costs. Now as these major projects are throughout our network, but there are chunks of revenue that we have to move fleet to from certain places. And in many instances, has some additional cost with these mega projects of building an on-site and a support team there. So I'd say that's a dynamic and the part that surprised us the most, and we've been very upfront about this is the delivery of mobilizing that fleet to these sites. Whether they be remote or not, it's -- you're mobilizing it from multiple areas. So that's a little bit different cost that we have to absorb that when we were spreading it throughout the network in the local markets just didn't have that additional cost burden. Outside of that, I wouldn't call out anything different. When you look at these decisions on their own, the math makes sense. They're good decisions. It's just some additional costs that you don't have to incur when you're not so weighted on the large projects. Operator: We'll take our next question from Michael Feniger with Bank of America. Michael Feniger: Matt, just on the local market, it seems like you're signaling 2026 as a growth year. Is that inclusive of the local market? Or is that more on the larger progress? And if we see rate cuts, is that alone get the local markets back. Historically, there's been a delay between rate cuts and construction picking up, but those rate cuts happen in deep recession. So I'm curious if you feel the feedback loop from rate cuts is a little shorter than normal in terms of when that pipeline might fill up. That's more of the second half next year type of event. Matthew Flannery: Yes. We don't pretend to know, right, how that -- and I think if you look at history, there's different outputs. So if you can't even look at history and hope it will repeat itself because it's been different during different cycles. But sentiment feels a little bit better with there being a rate cut and talk of more rate cuts, but you don't take sentiment to the bank. Right now, we call local markets flat. We're going to go through our planning process for the balance of this quarter. That will inform our guidance. And we'll get a little bit closer to the local market as we talk to the branch managers and the district managers that are much closer to that and they'll give us their feedback on what do they think their growth potential is locally, outside of large projects. And then we'll have a better idea, but I agree with the tone of the sentiment. We just got to see does our team think when that's going to manifest and how we're going to capitalize that growth. But we'll be excited for that to happen. We do think it's potential upside, whether that's to '26. The back half, '26, '27, we're not even sure yet. So it's something that we'll communicate when we give out guidance. Michael Feniger: Perfect. And Matt, you mentioned accelerated the CapEx to meet the demand. Did large projects -- did you see anything that got green lit that maybe was on the fence? Or are you seeing your typical win rate starting to inch up versus prior years? And just a tag on that, Ted, if there's any way you could help quantify where you think that power vertical for you guys? How big you think that is today for you guys versus maybe where it was a few years ago? Matthew Flannery: Yes, I would just say it's -- we just had greater success and the customers that rely on us have had greater success in these large projects, and the pipeline is robust. So I would say that's what drove the extra demand. It's really just good execution from the team, and I'll let Ted talk to the power vert. William Grace: Yes, Mike, thanks for the question. So it's currently in low double digits, say, 11%, 12%. It's probably a reasonable area. And if you go back to when we introduced what we called our power vertical strategy. And just to be clear, this is really a focus on investor-owned utilities, whether it's generation, transmission, distribution. At the time in 2016, it was probably 4%. So we're probably coming up on nearly tripling that relative exposure to what we think is, at the time, we thought it would be a very large stable business it's very large. It's obviously seen a lot of investment, and we expect that to certainly continue for the long foreseeable future. So I feel like we're really well positioned there. and we've spent the better part of a decade building what we think is a lot of competitive advantages to serve those customers in that market uniquely. Operator: We'll take our next question from Steven Fisher with UBS. Steven Fisher: I just wanted to ask about the -- come back to the margin dynamics here. Just looking at the Q2 versus Q3 year-over-year specialty going from 220 basis points to 490 basis points headwind. It sounded like qualitatively, the drivers weren't really that different categorically, but just curious what accounts for that difference in year-over-year? Was there sort of faster growth in Yak that was driving more of that delivery impact? Or what just accounts for the 220 versus 490. William Grace: Yes, absolutely, Steve. Thanks for the question. So overall, I would say the cost dynamics within specialty and frankly, the whole business has been pretty consistent across the year. When you look specifically at specialty 2Q versus 3Q, the big difference was the increase in depreciation we had in that, and that spoke to kind of the aggressive investment we're making in Yak more than anything in matting. I mean those assets get depreciated at a far faster pace than any other asset class we have in that business. So when you look at kind of the 490 basis point decline, 200 basis points of that was depreciation, so call it 40%. The other pieces were the same things we've talked about like delivery and really ancillary being the other big piece. Steven Fisher: Okay. That's helpful. And I think you are on track or planning to do 50-ish cold starts this year. I think you're pretty close to that already. Do you think that momentum is likely to kind of continue into the fourth quarter? And any sense of having done 70-plus last year and maybe on track for 50 plus this year, directionally, where you see the cold starts heading for next year? Matthew Flannery: So we haven't finished the planning process yet, as I said earlier, and that's where we'll make those decisions. As far as with the balance of the year, we're in a small period here in Q4. Maybe there'll be another 10 to a dozen in Q4. It really depends on the timing of if the team finds the real estate and the bodies to be able to do it. So as far as '26, stay tuned. They've executed. The teams executed real well on cold starts here in '25, and they'll propose the plans for '26 in the next 6 weeks. Operator: We'll take our next question from Jamie Cook with Trust Securities. Jamie Cook: I guess just 2 questions. The setup for 2026. Obviously, ancillary is just becoming a larger part of the business, it just sounds like structurally, that will be a headwind on margins. But I guess, Matt or Ted, I'm just trying to think about, obviously, you're seeing demand or demand is starting to improve or maybe your share is just improving. But I'm just wondering, the setup in 2026 with a lot of the inflationary pressures in particular with tariffs and Section 232. And you have the ancillary business becoming larger. To what degree do you think we can start to push through higher rental rates. Is the market strong enough that they could absorb that just given some of the cost headwinds that we could see continuing into 2026? William Grace: Yes, good question, Jamie. We don't want to get too far ahead of ourselves. But certainly, if you just take a step back and you decompose what's happened in 2025 as a starting point. A lot of the margin dynamics have been being responsive to customers. You touched on ancillary, but obviously, that is dilutive. And you could ask yourself why are you doing that? And again, it's to really be this partner of choice and be responsive and frankly, use that as a tool to be a better partner and take share. We think that's absolutely worked out. And while it is dilutive to margins, as we've talked about, there are a lot of benefits to it. So how does that play out next year? Time will tell. We don't think that's a bad business. But we'll have a sense for what that's going to look like over the next 6 weeks as we get through the business planning process. Then you think about things like cold starts and investments, and I don't think anybody would dispute the logic, strategic or financial of the cold starts we're doing in specialty. To your question on inflation, broader inflation, it's still elevated, as I said in my prepared remarks, is it going to subside in '26? Time will tell, but certainly, we are very aggressively managing our costs in any environment, but certainly in this one. So then you come to the delivery piece. And that's obviously been kind of the biggest discrete challenge we faced this year, and that's driven a lot by being responsive to customers. That's what just helped support the demand and the growth you've seen. We're trying to figure out that piece next year, what is the growth? What does it look like from a physical footprint standpoint? And then how do we most effectively serve it. Matt talked about the idea of managing CapEx differently such that you could mitigate some of that incurred cost moving fleet. We're working through that, but that again is being responsive to where demand is and supporting our customers. So all that is to say that we're looking at those things, they will all affect 2026 margins and flow-through. But the focus, as always, is on profitable growth. And from that standpoint, we think the team is managing the business really well. Operator: We'll take our next question from Ken Newman with KeyBanc Capital Markets. Kenneth Newman: So maybe to follow up on that answer, that response now, Ted. I think, Matt, you mentioned growing the fleet for both stronger demand, but also maybe to better address the fleet movements. I know you don't want to talk about '26 yet, but just higher level, how do you think about balancing those 2 dynamics, right, to keep time yet strong into next year? And just how long do you think it takes to tackle some of these cost inefficiencies. And maybe to that point, do you need to accelerate cold starts in order to tackle the movements or the fleet repositioning costs? Matthew Flannery: Yes, it's a great point, Ken. And one that we're talking about. First off, and getting together with our partners, our customers and fleet planning, right, a little more accurately. But to be fair to them, these big jobs are dynamic and all of a sudden, any 50 units that we weren't given a heads up on and they need to make up. So we have a choice to make in that -- to give you that example in that instance. So first, it starts with me challenging our team in the field, hey, let's make sure we're communicating. The earlier we know, the more efficient we could be. And then there is a component of why there are some categories in our desire to drive high time -- high fleet productivity, we've been running hot for a while, for quite a few years. There's certainly some categories that we're going hand to mouth again. And we just got to be careful about that. So we are going to look at that. There's a balance between operational efficiency and that capital efficiency. But both are important. So that's something we'll look at as we're going through the planning process. So these are all, like I said earlier, individually, when you look at the decisions to ship this stuff through third parties, it's the right decision, mathematically. It's just how can we avoid that incremental cost? How can we minimize it as best we can. And that's something that we'll have some learnings from this year, and we'll work on it. But that will all be embedded in our guidance for 2026. Because I don't think the dynamic of big projects carry and evolve is going to change a lot in '26. We'll see if the local market gets some more growth. But big jobs, we already have that visibility. We know that's going to be a big part of the opportunity. Kenneth Newman: Right. No, that makes sense. And then just for my follow-up, I appreciate all the color around the drags on the fleet repositioning costs. When we think about core profitability, ex some of these higher ancillary and delivery mix, is there anything -- is there any reason to think that you can't drive flow-through kind of in line with your more normalized type of margins, right? Because you're kind of signaling a growth year for next year ex some of these more volatile mix impacts. Anything to suggest that you can't kind of get back to that 40% plus type of flow-through ex those items? William Grace: I guess what I'd say is the core profitability of the business, we think, is performing well, right? And we've talked about the impact of delivery this year, which is just a function of serving our customers as efficiently as we can. And to Matt's point, it's balancing operating efficiency with cost efficiency or call it capital efficiency with margin. So we think we're doing those things well, and we think the underlying business is actually performing as expected. In terms of what it looks like going forward, again, we would expect the core to perform well. A lot of this, and I hate to repeat myself, but it is being responsive to what customers ask of us and how demand is evolving. And so when you think about it, that again explains a lot of what we're doing with ancillary, what we're doing with cold starts. And so I come back to what I just said to Jamie, we feel really good about that core profitability, and our goal is always to be as efficient as possible serving demand. That doesn't change. But when you look at kind of what those margins look like when we talk about updated guidance or whatever, we would say that this is really being responsive to the market itself. Operator: We'll take our next question from Tami Zakaria with JPMorgan. Tami Zakaria: I have just 1 question. It sounds like customer demand has accelerated on the large project side. So is it fair to assume your raised equipment purchase plans would be across Gen Rent and Specialty equipment? Or is there -- are there any specific categories where you're seeing better demand? Matthew Flannery: No. I think you raised a good point. It is -- historically, we've been putting a lot more growth into specialty. And you see that in the results. This -- think about these large projects are taking our full portfolio. So the incremental investments would be more broad than maybe our earlier growth expectations of mix. So we know where the high time categories are and we'll continue to make sure that we're running a good balance of capital efficiency and responsiveness in those. So I'd say it's more looks like our overall portfolio. It's what these investments look like. Operator: And we'll take our next question from Sabahat Khan with RBC Capital Markets. Sabahat Khan: So your earlier commentary indicated that the larger project side of the business is continuing to trend well. Some of these really took on as the IIJA really got going. I guess when you look ahead 1, 2 years, 3 years, do you think the business or the industry needs some sort of a renewal to that IIJA program? Or is the industry just generally inflecting towards these larger mega projects, just some thoughts there. William Grace: Yes, absolutely. Certainly, infrastructure broadly has been a very strong market for us. And certainly, the IIJA has helped support that. Our best sense is there's still a healthy amount of that initial or that money left. So that should support it. The thing we've always talked about infrastructure, there's certainly not a lack of demand in the sense of the need to reinvest in infrastructure, we certainly expect that, that will continue, whether it's funded by state initiatives or local initiatives or federal dollars. So we'll see ultimately what that funding looks like. But there's no question that the country on the whole needs to continue investing aggressively in reinvigorating infrastructure. And the other thing we've talked about, just maybe as a corollary to that question is, infrastructure has been a great market for us. It's an important part of our business, but we've got a lot of these tailwinds. And certainly, we're writing a lot more than just 1 wave of infrastructure. When you think about a lot of the onshoring, a lot of the remanufacturing in the U.S. and power and other things in technology, all those come together to give us a really optimistic outlook for the foreseeable future on demand. Sabahat Khan: Great. And then just as a follow-up, I think there's been commentary in the past that it may not necessarily be a larger project, lower margin type of a setup. But as you think about larger projects becoming a bigger part of your mix, and it sounds like you're ramping up that side, you're moving fleet around to meet these large projects. Is there sort of an inflection point that you see in your business at which, look, larger projects are going to be stable at this space and now we'll get operating leverage on the sort of the cost base that we install to perhaps meet that demand that the larger customers looking for? Just any view on how -- as that business grows, is there a view on sort of an inflection point on overall margins and operating leverage? Matthew Flannery: Yes, it's a good point. What we've talked about historically is when you think about large projects versus our base margins, we have always. And still believe, by the way, that although some of those large projects do get some discount as they leverage the bulk spend with us, that we get to serve it more efficiently on site versus spreading that overall. The 1 area that has changed as it's become a bigger part of the portfolio that, quite frankly, we didn't anticipate was the repositioning of the fleet. So it's a little bit of where the jobs are, where you're positioned, and what I said earlier, how well you can plan with the customers to position the fleet, that's going to decide that. Just to put it in context, in the relative scheme of things, we're talking about small numbers, right? You're talking about 1% of your operating costs, but it does make noise within the metrics, which is why we explain it to you all. So even with this extra burden transportation costs, it's still relatively close to the same. It's just the challenges where the fleet is versus where the need is and how you continue to improve that operating efficiency is what will make that decision. But I wouldn't see it as terribly different even in its current environment with these extra costs because in the scheme of a $15 billion company and the cost base we have, it's not a big number. Operator: We'll take our next question from Tim Thein with Raymond James. Timothy Thein: Maybe just the first question is maybe for you, Matt, just in terms of the customer dialogue and what you're hearing from -- in terms of some of the national account customers, it's been a couple of months since we've had the tax reform passed. And if you -- and some of the sentiment readings have kind of been all over the board, but it doesn't seem to be much change in terms of kind of forward-looking CapEx and other growth plans. But I'm just curious, have you detected or seen any change in terms of -- again, just kind of thoughts around big project spending and now that some time has elapsed since the OBBBA has passed? Matthew Flannery: Yes. Our customers remain optimistic. And when we look at our customer confidence index, we get that feedback when we talk to our national account teams which are dealing with the largest contractors in North America, we get positive feedback, and we're getting it from the field as they're asking for more support from a fleet perspective throughout the year. So we don't see any negative trend there at all or any kind of need for a reboot of any kind of spending. And the pipeline that we have visibility to it looks pretty good for '26. And the feedback from our customers and our field teams matches that sentiment. Timothy Thein: Okay. And maybe looking a little bit further out, the 2028 goals that you outlined at the Investor Day back in '23, you obviously wouldn't have kept it in the slides if you didn't think it was still realistic. But the elements of it is, specifically around what the implied flow-through look to be a bit more challenging. Does that -- do those targets maybe rely a bit more on M&A from here? Or maybe just kind of an update as to how we're tracking towards those. Again aspirational -- go ahead. William Grace: Yes, absolutely. So starting with the growth. I mean we feel like we're tracking well, right? We talked about this aspirational goal of $20 billion by '28. And I think if you do the simple math, you need to keep compounding something like 7%. And so we feel like that is still very much in play, I feel good with that. The margins, frankly, will be more challenging to hit that kind of roughly implied margin and the corollary to flow-through. But when we look at kind of why, there are a few things that we point to. You mentioned about acquisitions. Frankly, acquisitions tend to pull us in the opposite direction to getting there. We've long talked about this Tim, you and I have talked about this and probably Matt and I have talked to the entire investment community about this, but acquisitions tend to be dilutive to our margins. And that's why we take the time to explain what that margin profile looks like, but we really talk about the returns and most specifically, those cash-on-cash returns because that's how we think about allocating capital. But if you look at the acquisitions we've done since '22, they've virtually all been dilutive. That doesn't mean they weren't good deals. We would say strategically, they were all 10s, and I'd say financially, they've all been 10s but they're going to have that dilutive effect. So just to put some numbers around that, I've looked at the math. The acquisitions probably account for 70 or 80 basis points of margin dilution since 2022 in isolation. I think if Matt and I could go back in time, we would have done every one of those deals. And frankly, we probably would have done -- we would have loved to do twice as many deals if they had the same financial profile. But the margins are also impacted by the ancillary. This is -- if you think about that evolution of being responsive to customers and how ancillary has grown from, let's say, 15% of our rental revenue mix to now approaching the very high teens. That's probably not something we would have anticipated back then. It's had this dilutive effect. We've talked about it today. We've talked about it for a while. But again, these are really beneficial things we're doing to take care of customers to frankly use its competitive advantages over incumbents, and they've helped support the growth you've seen us achieve. So there, again, like we would not go back and do things any differently with ancillary. And certainly, I would just say the broader inflationary environment has been worse than probably anybody expected since '22. That being said, we feel like we've managed it really well on an underlying basis. And so again, the margins, it will be a stretch. I'll say that. I don't think that surprises anybody. That doesn't mean we're not going to keep pushing for it. And it doesn't mean we're not incredibly focused on driving better core profitability of the business. So Matt, I don't know if you'd add anything. Matthew Flannery: I think that's right. It was an aspirational plan, and I think it was the right one. There's been some dynamics that have changed in the construct of the business. And we'll keep informing everybody as it goes along. So -- but we do feel good about basically the core profitability of this. Operator: We'll take our next question from Scott Schneeberger with Oppenheimer. Scott Schneeberger: A couple from me. First one is just if you could speak to -- I know it's early and you're not giving guidance for next year. But your conversations right now, it's that time of year where you're speaking with the OEMs on pricing looking forward. Just with tariffs hovering, what are the conversations like is it's going to be anticipated as a normal pace of rate increases for the upcoming year? Or might there be something that could surprise us? Matthew Flannery: Yes, Scott. As I said before, we try not to share information with our partners and suppliers on open mic, but we feel like we're in a good position. The consistency of the scale of spend that we've shown just to support our partners with, I think it's valued as much today as it ever has been, specifically in this past year. And we think we'll be in pretty good shape for purchases in '26, both from a cost perspective and from being able to support perspective. And our partners have done a really good job when you go back a few years ago when supply chain disruption. Getting back to normalized expectations, and we're very pleased with how they've responded. Scott Schneeberger: Thanks, Matt. And then on the theme of the day, just want to ask the question kind of in a different way. If you have a strong demand, the seasonal uptick next year, which it looks like you are expecting with the elevated level of re-rent, ancillary and large projects and need for probably still delivery, you're addressing it with some CapEx. But -- and it's -- you guys have mentioned on these earlier questions, hey, we're going to look and see what we can do to improve. But are there some ideas with regard to relationships with transportation providers on the outside, maybe where you can get some bulk pricing? Are there operational execution initiatives that you're looking at, is one part of this question. And then the second part of the question is, you haven't done -- obviously, H&E stepped away, but haven't done an acquisition in a while. What is the appetite there? I just heard Ted's response to Tim's question, but curious on where that may be applicable on this issue or just general appetite for M&A overall? Matthew Flannery: Sure. So on the outsourcing, we obviously already do a lot of outsourcing. And we do have some partnerships within that spend. It is something we look about -- look at, whether it's in-sourcing or outsourcing more for that flexibility. I think we lean more towards -- we seem to do things more efficiently when we can in-source, but that's a little bit harder when you're talking about some of these longer hauls. So that is something that we're wrestling with, and it's a great point, something that we're talking to people about in the space. As far as M&A, listen, we've built a great capability throughout our history as good purchasers and good integrators. And we do feel one of our mantras is can we make this business better, when we make that decision. So we continue to work a pretty robust pipeline. We just haven't found the right deals yet. I think we did $20 million of M&A this year. We did 1 small deal. We don't predict forecast or even planned M&A because I think that's how people end up doing bad deals. So we talk about our organic growth and we look at M&A as opportunistic. But to be clear, if we are always work in the pipeline, both in Specialty and Gen Rent, and if we find something that fills out our footprint better or a new product that our customers can rely on us for, like we've done in the last couple of big deals, matting and mobile storage, we're going to lean in. It's just a matter of finding that right deal where the -- where it meets all 3 legs of that stool we talk about of cultural, strategic and most importantly, financial. Operator: And there are no further questions on the line. I'll turn the program back to Matt Flannery for any additional or closing remarks. Matthew Flannery: Thank you, operator. And to everyone on the call, I appreciate your time. I'm glad you could join us today. Our Q3 investor deck has the latest updates. And as always, Elizabeth is available to answer your questions. So until we speak again in January. I hope you all have a safe and happy holiday season and a happy new year, and we'll talk soon. Take care. Operator, you can now end the call. Operator: Thank you. This does conclude today's program. We appreciate your patience. We appreciate your attendance. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good day, and thank you for standing by. Welcome to the Atlantic Union Bankshares Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please be advised that today's conference is being recorded. I'd now like to hand the conference over to your speaker today, Bill Cimino, Senior Vice President of Investor Relations. Please go ahead. William Cimino: Thank you, Daniel, and good morning, everyone. I have Atlantic Union Bankshares' President and CEO, John Asbury; and Executive Vice President and CFO, Rob Gorman, with me today. We also have other members of our executive management team with us for the question-and-answer period. Please note that today's earnings release and the accompanying slide presentation we are going through on this webcast are available to download on our investor website, investors.atlanticunionbank.com. During today's call, we will comment on our financial performance using both GAAP metrics and non-GAAP financial measures. Important information about these non-GAAP financial measures, including reconciliations to comparable GAAP measures, is included in the appendix to our slide presentation and our earnings release for the third quarter of 2025. In our remarks on today's call, we will also make forward-looking statements, which are not statements of historical fact and are subject to risks and uncertainties. There can be no assurance that actual performance will not differ materially from any future expectations or results expressed or implied by these forward-looking statements. We undertake no obligation to publicly revise or update any forward-looking statements except as required by law. Please refer to our earnings release and the slide presentation issued today and our other SEC filings for further discussion of the company's risk factors and other important information regarding our forward-looking statements, including factors that could cause actual results to differ from those expressed or implied in the forward-looking statement. All comments made during today's call are subject to that safe harbor statement. And at the end of the call, we'll take questions from the research analyst community. Now I'll turn the call over to John. John Asbury: Thank you, Bill. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us today. Atlantic Union Bankshares delivered a solid third quarter, while maintaining our focus on execution and integration of the Sandy Spring acquisition. Our quarterly operating results illustrate the earnings potential of the company we envisioned. While merger-related costs continued to create a noisy quarter, we believe we are on a path to deliver on the expectations related to the acquisition of Sandy Spring for adjusted operating return on assets, return on tangible common equity and efficiency ratio. The Sandy Spring integration is progressing smoothly. Over the weekend of October 11, we successfully completed our core systems conversion and closed 5 overlapping branches as planned. We are experienced acquirers, and I want to recognize our outstanding and dedicated team for their commitment and diligence in executing this complex process. We have now unified Sandy Spring Bank under the Atlantic Union Bank brand and operate as one integrated team. While some merger-related impacts will persist in our fourth quarter results, we expect to enter 2026 having achieved our cost savings targets from the acquisition and with our enhanced earnings power visible on a reported basis. Our commitment to creating shareholder value remains unwavering. We believe Atlantic Union is well positioned to deliver sustainable growth, top-tier financial performance and long-term value for our shareholders. The strategic advantages gained from the Sandy Spring acquisition, combined with continued organic growth opportunities, reinforce our status as the premier regional bank headquartered in the lower Mid-Atlantic. We have a robust presence in attractive markets, providing us with further growth opportunities. I will now summarize the key highlights from our third quarter performance and share insights into current market conditions before turning the call over to Rob for a detailed financial review. Here are the highlights from our third quarter. Quarterly loan growth was approximately 0.5% annualized in the typically seasonally slower third quarter. Notably, lending production increased modestly versus the second quarter. However, in the latter part of the quarter, an uptick in loan paydowns had a decline in revolving credit utilization from 44% to 41% offset some of the increased production. Average loan growth quarter-over-quarter was a good story at 4.3% annualized. Our pipelines indicate we should have loan growth consistent with the seasonally strong fourth quarter. While forecasting loan growth remains challenging and the still uncertain economic environment, we currently expect year-end loan balances to range between $27.7 billion and $28 billion, inclusive of the negative impact of the fair value loan marks. We paid down approximately $116 million in broker deposits during the quarter and continued to reduce higher cost nonrelationship deposits from the Sandy Spring portfolio. By moving quickly to lower our deposit rates, we anticipate further improvement in our cost of deposits in the fourth quarter. We were pleased to see approximately 4% annualized growth in noninterest-bearing deposits in the third quarter. Our reported FTE net interest margin remained steady at 3.83%, reflecting a modest decrease in accretion income quarter-over-quarter. As a reminder, some quarterly fluctuation in accretion income is to be expected. Importantly, if you exclude the impact of accretion income, our net interest margin improved compared to last quarter. I'd also like to point out the strength we saw in fee income, especially with interest rate swaps and in wealth management. Opportunities in both lines were augmented by the Sandy Spring acquisition. And during the quarter, approximately $1 million of swap income is attributed to the former Sandy Spring Bank. Sandy Spring did not offer interest rate swaps for the acquisition, and we believe that will provide upside to the combined entity going forward. Overall, credit quality improved despite an increase in charge-offs largely driven by 2 commercial and industrial loans that have been partially reserved for in prior quarters. One was the larger credit first disclosed in the fourth quarter of 2024 involving a borrowing base misrepresentation. Ongoing uncertainty in its resolution led us to charge off the remaining balance of approximately $15 million in addition to the previously incurred specific reserve of $14 million. Leading asset quality indicators are encouraging. Third quarter nonperforming assets as a percentage of loans held for investment remained low at 0.49%. Past dues remained low and criticized asset levels improved by more than $250 million or 16%, which brings criticized loans as a percentage of total loans down to 4.9% at the end of the third quarter from 5.9% at the end of the second quarter. As typical, we'll present more details in our third quarter 10-Q filing. We do remain confident in our asset quality and reaffirm our forecast for the full year 2025 net charge-off ratio to be between 15 and 20 basis points, in line with prior guidance. In the Greater Washington, D.C. region, recent headlines have focused on government employment reductions and the government shutdown. However, we believe both our economic data and on-the-ground observations indicate resilience in the market. Atlantic Union maintains a well-diversified portfolio with approximately 23% of total loans of the Washington metro area and the remaining 77% across our broader footprint. The exposures that prompt the most inquiries are government contractors and office buildings in the Washington metro area. Updated disclosures on these segments can be found on Pages 21 through 23 of our supplemental presentation, and these portfolios are performing well. Our government contractor finance portfolio is predominantly focused on national security and defense. We believe these businesses are well positioned, supported by a record high defense budget and ongoing defense modernization efforts. Government shutdowns are not new to us. With more than 15 years in this specialty, we have seen many. Most contractors we finance provide essential services and have historically continued to operate during shutdowns, typically drawing on lines of credit to maintain payroll and repaying those lines when government funding resumes. We are certainly monitoring the shutdown and its duration. More broadly, August unemployment rates for Maryland and Virginia stood at 3.6%, well below the national average of 4.3% and among the lowest for states with larger populations. Official government September data is not yet available due to the shutdown. While we anticipate some increases in unemployment rates across our markets, we expect this to remain manageable and below the national average, consistent with the current Moody's state level forecast. With the Sandy Spring systems conversion now behind us, strong pipelines and expanded footprint in attractive markets, specialty lines and increased investment in North Carolina, we believe we are well positioned for continued organic growth. In summary, it was a good quarter as we continued our focus on disciplined execution and the integration of Sandy Spring. This quarter also marks my ninth year with the company. Over this time, we have intentionally and carefully built the distinctive and uniquely valuable franchise that we envisioned in our strategic plan and have consistently communicated for years. We have done what we said we do in establishing the banking platform we set out to create. With this foundation in place, we believe we are well positioned to capitalize on the expanded markets gained through the Sandy Spring acquisition, continue our growth in Virginia and pursue new organic growth opportunities in North Carolina and across our specialty lines. We are set up well to demonstrate the organic earnings power of the franchise we have worked so hard to build on a reported basis, absent merger-related noise in 2026, and that's what we intend to do. Looking ahead, our focus remains on delivering sustainable top quarter performance relative to our peers and creating long-term value for our shareholders. With that, I'll turn the call over to Rob for a detailed review of our quarterly results before opening the call for questions. Rob? Robert Gorman: Well, thank you, John, and good morning, everyone. I'll now take a few minutes to provide you with some details of Atlantic Union's financial results for the third quarter. A commentary today will primarily address Atlantic Union's third quarter financial results presented on a non-GAAP adjusted operating basis, which excludes $34.8 million in pretax merger-related costs from the Sandy Spring acquisition and a $4.8 million pretax loss recorded in the third quarter for the final CRE loan settlement related to the approximately $2 billion of Sandy Spring acquired CRE loans that we sold in the second quarter. As a result, the final net pretax gain from the CRE sale transaction was $10.9 million. That said, in the third quarter, reported net income available to common shareholders was $89.2 million, and earnings per common share were $0.63. Adjusted operating earnings available to common shareholders for $119.7 million or $0.84 per common share for the third quarter, resulting in an adjusted operating return on tangible common equity of 20.1% and adjusted operating return on assets of 1.3% and an adjusted operating efficiency ratio of 48.8% in the third quarter. Turning to credit loss reserves. At the end of the third quarter, the total allowance for credit losses was $320 million, which is a decrease of approximately $22.4 million from the second quarter, primarily driven by the net charge-off of two individually assessed commercial and industrial loans that were partially reserved for in the prior quarter, as John noted. As a result, the total allowance for credit losses as a percentage of total loans held for investment decreased to 117 basis points at the end of the third quarter, down from 125 basis points at the end of the prior quarter. Net charge-offs increased to $38.6 million or 56 basis points annualized in the third quarter from $666,000, only 1 basis point annualized in the second quarter, primarily due to the net charge-off of the two commercial industrial loans that we've discussed. This brought the annualized year-to-date net charge-off ratio through the third quarter to 23 basis points although we are maintaining our full year net charge-off ratio guidance to be in the 15 to 20 basis point range. Now turning to the pretax pre-provision components of the income statement for the third quarter, tax equivalent net interest income was $323.6 million. That's a decrease of $2.1 million from the second quarter, primarily driven by lower interest income on loans held for sale due to the impacts of the CLO approximately $2 billion of performing CRE loans at the end of the second quarter and lower net accretion income, partially offset by lower borrowing costs and higher investment income as we used proceeds from the CRE loan sale to pay down short-term borrowings and broker deposits and to purchase additional investment securities in the third quarter. As John noted, the third quarter's tax equivalent net interest margin remained at 3.83% as lower earning asset yields were fully offset by declines in the cost of funds. Earning asset yields for the third quarter declined by 5 basis points to 6% compared to the second quarter due primarily to lower accretion income and the impacts from the CRE loan sale, which resulted in a decrease in average loans held for sale balances and an increase in lower-yielding cash and investment average balances. The cost of funds declined by 5 basis points in the third quarter to 2.17%, primarily due to the impact of the 4 basis point drop in the cost of interest-bearing liabilities to 2.93% from 2.97% in the second quarter driven by lower average short-term borrowings and broker deposit balances as well as lower customer time deposit rates. Noninterest income decreased $29.7 million to $51.8 million for the third quarter, primarily driven by the $15.7 million preliminary pretax gain on the CRE loan sale in the prior quarter compared to a $4.8 million pretax loss in the third quarter of 2025, related to the final CRE loan sale settlement accounting, as well as by the $14.3 million pretax gain on the sale of our equity interest in Cary Street Partners which was recorded in the second quarter. Adjusted operating noninterest income, which excludes the pretax loss and gain on the CRE loan sale in both quarters, the pretax gain on the sale of our equity interest in Care Street Partners in the second quarter and pretax gains on sales of securities in both quarters increased $5.1 million from the second quarter to $56.6 million, primarily due to a $4.2 million increase in loan-related interest rate swap fees due to higher transaction volumes and a $1.2 million increase in other operating income primarily due to an increase in equity method investment income. These increases were partially offset by a $2.2 million decrease in bank-owned life insurance income due to debt benefits of $2.4 million that was received in the second quarter. Reported noninterest expense decreased $41.3 million to $238.4 million for the third quarter, primarily driven by a $44.1 million decline in merger-related costs associated with the Sandy Spring acquisition. Adjusted operating noninterest expense, which excludes merger-related cost in the second and third quarters and the amortization of intangible assets in both quarters increased $3.1 million to $185.5 million for the third quarter, primarily due to a $1.3 million increase in marketing and advertising expense, a $966,000 increase in professional services expenses related to strategic projects, $874,000 increase in other expenses, primarily due to an increase in other real estate owned and credit-related expenses and an $800,000 increase in occupancy expense. These increases were partially offset by a $1.6 million decrease in salaries and benefits expense, primarily driven by reductions in full-time equivalent employees and lower group insurance expenses which was partially offset by an increase in variable incentive compensation expenses. At September 30, loans held for investments, net of deferred fees and costs were $27.4 billion, that was an increase of $32.8 million from the prior quarter, while average loans held for investment increased $291.8 million or 4.3% annualized from the prior quarter. At September 30, total deposits stood at $30.7 billion, a decrease of $306.9 million or 3.9% annualized from the prior quarter, primarily due to declines of $256.3 million in interest-bearing customer deposits and $116.1 million in broker deposits. This was partially offset by an increase of $65.5 million in demand deposits. At the end of the third quarter, Atlantic Union Bankshares and Atlantic Union Bank's regulatory capital ratios were comfortably above well-capitalized levels. In addition, on an adjusted basis, we remain well capitalized, as of the end of the third quarter, if you include the negative impact of AOCI and held-to-maturity securities unrealized losses in the calculation of the regulatory capital ratios. During the third quarter, the company paid a common stock dividend of $0.34 per share, which was an increase of 6.3% from the previous year's third quarter dividend amount. As noted on Slide 16, we've updated our full year 2025 financial outlook for AUB and have also provided our financial outlook for the fourth quarter. Please note that the final outlook for 2025 and the fourth quarter include preliminary estimates of purchase accounting adjustments with respect to the Sandy Spring acquisition that are subject to change. We now expect loan balances to end the year between $27.7 billion to $28 billion while year-end deposit balances are projected to be between $30.8 billion and $31 billion, driven by mid-single-digit annualized growth in loans and low single-digit annualized growth in deposits in the fourth quarter. Fully tax equivalent with net interest income for the full year is projected to come in between $1.160 billion and $1.165 billion that we are targeting the fourth quarter fully tax equivalent net interest income run rate to fall between $325 million and $330 million. As a result, we are projecting that the full year fully tax equivalent net interest margin will fall in a range between 3.75% and 3.8% for the full year and between 3.85% and 3.9% in the fourth quarter driven by our baseline assumption that the Federal Reserve Bank will cut the Fed funds rate by 25 basis points in October and December, and that term rates remain stable. In addition, the projected fully tax equivalent net interest margin ranges include the impact of our estimate of the net accretion income from the Sandy Spring acquisition, which are volatile and subject to change. On a full year basis, adjusted operating noninterest income is expected to be between $185 million and $190 million, and we're targeting the fourth quarter adjusted operating noninterest income run rate to fall between $50 million and $55 million. Adjusted operating noninterest expenses for the full year are estimated to fall in a range of $675 million to $680 million, while the fourth quarter adjusted operating noninterest expense run rate is expected to be between $183 million and $188 million. Based on these projections, we expect to produce financial returns that will place us within the top quartile of our peer group on an operating basis and meet our objective of delivering top-tier financial performance for our shareholders. In summary, Atlantic Union delivered solid operating financial results in the third quarter. We continue to be on track and confident that we will achieve the anticipated financial benefits of the combination with Sandy Spring. As a result, we believe we are well positioned to continue to generate sustainable, profitable growth and to build long-term value for our shareholders in 2025 and beyond. I'll now turn the call over to Bill to see if there are any questions from our research analyst community. William Cimino: Thanks, Rob. And Daniel, we're ready for our first caller, please. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Russell Gunther with Stephens. Russell Elliott Gunther: First question for me is on the loan growth front. I appreciate your guys' thoughts in terms of what transpired this quarter in the mid-single-digit outlook for next. Wondering, is that mid-single-digit sustainable outcome for 2026 based on where pipelines and investor sentiment stands today? And as you look out, is a high single-digit a possibility on this larger pro forma balance sheet? And I guess an adjacent question, John, I think you mentioned whether it's an increased appetite or expectation for growth within specialty lines. So I'd be curious if you could expand upon that as well. John Asbury: Sure. To answer your questions, we do expect at this point, mid-single-digit loan growth on the total company for next year. Based on past experience, we certainly believe that we're capable of doing high single-digit loan growth. And what I will refer to as a more normalized environment, assuming we see such a thing again, which I think we will eventually, but there's still a lot of uncertainty out there, obviously. And we do see strength in our specialty lines. And as part of our strategic planning process. And as a reminder, we're going to do an Investor Day in early December, and we'll take you into more detail. We continue to look at additional opportunities to further grow and expand our specialty lines such as equipment finance and others. Dave, do you have anything to add to that? David Ring: Yes. I mean we're still seeing production for new client acquisition and growing at a slightly higher rate, 35% of our production this quarter came from new clients. Coming into the bank, that's a great trend and positive momentum. The pipelines at Sandy Spring now that they've been converted here since April 1 have grown dramatically, three or fourfold. And our pipeline within the legacy bank is higher than it normally is as well. So if pull-through is what we expected to be, we think we'll have a good solid fourth quarter. John Asbury: Yes. And so as you saw, loans averaged up 4.3% Q-over-Q, which is good. But what really happened is in the back half of the quarter, we saw paydowns, which are always an issue to some extent. But the line utilization drop was kind of what really hit us towards the end of the quarter, and that should come back over time. Russell Elliott Gunther: I appreciate that. And then just last question for me, switching gears a bit on to the expense outlook. I appreciate the thoughts on where 4Q could shake out. And I believe you guys mentioned cost saves for Sandy Spring will fully be in the run rate in early 2026. So I just wanted to circle back to what was a, I believe, the efficiency guide for the pro forma franchise, about 45%, excluding amortization expense. Is that still on the cards for 2026? And as it relates to the expense side of the house, how are you guys thinking about keeping a lid on the absolute expense base as you organically build out North Carolina over the next few years? Robert Gorman: Yes. Russell, I'll take that one. Yes, we still -- we're, of course, in the middle of our 2026 planning process, but we fully expect to see mid-single -- mid-40s on the efficiency ratio, inclusive of the investments in the North Carolina franchise. Coming out of the -- you see our guide in the fourth quarter is $183 million to $188 million. If you annualize that at some inflation to that and additional costs associated with North Carolina. We should be flat year-over-year to pro forma first quarter. If you include the first quarter run rate for Sandy Spring in 2025, it should be flattish, which would basically be able to provide us with the mid-40s efficiency ratio. So feel good about that. Of course, if we don't see the revenue come in, but the other part of that is revenue growing at high single-digit level going into next year. If we don't see that, we're obviously focused on positive operating leverage. So we would take some actions on the expense side, maybe have to delay some things. But at this point in time, we don't anticipate that happening. Operator: Our next question comes from Stephen Scouten with Piper Sandler. Stephen Scouten: Rob, I wanted to just follow back on that expense messaging you just gave there. So if we're looking at $190 million and then you said add North Carolina, add inflation and then it should be flat from there? Or is there a baseline like of a 1Q '26 kind of all in? I'm assuming all cost saves out kind of run rate you can give us as a starting point? Robert Gorman: Yes. So what I would say is it's probably about the $190 million give or take level would be a good run rate for going forward on excluding any of the related or amortization of intangibles. That's how we're kind of looking at it. So you've got, call it, a $185-ish million run rate at another $5-or-so million annualized that for those items that we talked about inflation, et cetera, so it would be pretty good run rate. Stephen Scouten: Got it. And that 1Q '26 run rate shouldn't calculate all the Sandy Spring cost savings at that point in time, correct -- more or less? Robert Gorman: Yes. We don't see it all in the fourth quarter because there's -- we just finished the conversion, there's cleanup going on. There's some related systems disengagement that's happening. We still got some duplicate costs there. So those will all come up by the end of the fourth quarter. Stephen Scouten: Got it. Got it. Okay. And on the -- John, you noted there were a higher level of paydowns and I think you guys noted in the press release to lower line utilization there at quarter end. Do you have any data in terms of kind of what paydown levels were this quarter maybe versus any prior quarters? And kind of what would lead you to believe that maybe that paydown activity would slow a bit? Or is the better growth not so much about paydown levels slowing but production levels continue to ramp higher? John Asbury: Yes. I think it's probably more about production levels continuing to ramp higher. And let's see, I'll call on Dave Ring here, who leads all our commercial businesses. But -- we've seen for a while higher levels of paydowns. But as I think about Q3 versus Q2, I don't think it was out of line. David Ring: No. No. Production in both quarters was very close. It's a little higher this quarter than last quarter. Paydowns were relatively the same over the quarter. There are just more players right now in our markets, and we're going to see some of the paydown activity that we're seeing today probably throughout the rest of the year and into next year, but we're relying on higher production cost. John Asbury: Yes. And so often on paydowns, you'll see commercial real estate that is sold or refinanced into the institutional non-recourse term markets like some of the Fannie or Freddie programs, for example, for multifamily. And the pullback that we've seen in term yields tends to create more of that. But we feel good about the overall setup. Stephen Scouten: Got it. And then last thing for me, just around the margin, obviously, the low end of that range kind of remained at the 3.75%, but obviously, the range was tightened kind of removing some theoretical upside there. What kind of changed quarter-over-quarter that kind of takes that higher level off the table? Is it just where we ended up here in the third quarter? Or is it more rate cuts being baked in? Or kind of -- any color there to what's leading to that? Robert Gorman: Yes. It's more about where we came out in the third quarter, kind of dialed back some of the impacts of the accretion income in the fourth quarter. That would have been driving -- it could be higher on the higher end. So we dialed that back a bit. But we feel like on the core basis, we should see some expansion. That's why we're guiding to 3.85% to 3.90% in the fourth quarter. So it's a bit higher than when we came in at 3.83% in the third quarter. But that 3.75% to 3.80% is for the full year, Stephen. So that's kind of where we are. So it's going to -- we see it going up, but not quite as much as we had anticipated. We had a 3.75% to 4% coming in this year. But accretion hasn't been coming in as high as we were expecting. John Asbury: Yes. It is somewhat difficult to predict that with great precision because it's influenced, as you know, by payoffs and that sort of thing. And so you'll see a little bit of volatility. And obviously, as we get a few more quarters under our belt, we'll have a better sense for the sort of what to normally expect. But there's always an element of fluctuation in that, be it up or down. Stephen Scouten: Yes, no doubt. All this modeling is a little bit art, a little bit science. So definitely... John Asbury: Correct, Stephen. Operator: Our next question comes from Catherine Mealor with KBW. Catherine Mealor: My question is just back to the margin, maybe just getting into the pieces of it. And on the deposit side, as we think about another couple of rate cuts, I think of you as asset-sensitive, but Sandy Spring lessens that a little bit, right? And so then as we think about on the NIM expansion over the next few quarters even with rate cuts. Can you help us think about, first, on the deposit side, how much room you think you can lower deposit costs to keep the margin kind of in that level? And then secondly, if you could give us just some color on new loan yield rates and kind of where you see -- where you think loan yields go outside of some of the purchase accounting noise? Robert Gorman: Yes. So Catherine, we think we have a lot of room on the deposit cost side as the Fed gives us cover and continues to lower rates, we're expecting. Obviously, we saw a 25 basis point cut in September. We're expecting one in late October and then in December. Just to give you a perspective on that, we had about $13 billion of deposits that reprice pretty quickly, following that cut like an 85 basis -- of that population, about 85% betas. The good news that we're seeing is on the deposit side, we can lower rates pretty quickly. We're talking probably in mid-50s betas on interest-bearing deposits in mid-40s through the cycle on total deposits. If you look at the short-term rate changes we just made, those pretty much offset the variable rate note loan book that we have, which is about $13 billion, $14 billion. So those kind of are offsetting each other in terms of reducing or having the impact of lower yields on the loan side versus lower deposit costs. So the real impact as we go forward here in terms of looking for a core margin expansion is what's happening with term loans and the back book fixed rate and new loans coming on, what rates are those coming on. We think as a result of our average portfolio yields of, call it, [ 5.10 to 5.15 ] on our fixed loan portfolio today, repricing in the, call it, [ 6.10 to 6.20 ] range in the last quarter. We should be able to see a pickup in terms of the core margin, primarily due to lower deposit costs, lower variable rate loan yields offset by higher fixed rate loan yields. Catherine Mealor: Okay. That's awesome. And then my second question is just on credit. I know you were -- you didn't like having these two C&I losses this quarter. Just kind of curious if you could give just a broader perception of any of the credit trends you're seeing within the portfolio. I think there's especially within D.C. and just kind of the health of the Sandy Spring portfolio now that you've got a couple of quarters under your belt with that portfolio. Just any kind of credit -- additional credit commentary would be helpful. Just to try to figure out whether those two are isolated events or if there's anything else we should be aware of happening within the portfolio? John Asbury: Yes. Those are certainly the two that you saw that had specific reserves. One of them was partially reserved and it was just an unusual situation that -- both actually were identified and partial reserves were taken in Q4 of last year. One in the end was fully reserved, actually slightly more than the ultimate resolution. The other just due to ongoing uncertainty, we elected to charge the rest of it off as we work to maximize recovery. So that's totally unrelated. Broadly speaking, the overall credit trends look good. You can see that in our numbers. You can see, obviously, 0.49% nonperforming assets as a percentage of the total loan book is a pretty good number. Past dues down criticized down. And we feel pretty good. Obviously, we're well aware of all the headlines that go on in the greater Washington region, but we're hard-pressed to point to any real problems as a result of that. The client base is actually quite resilient. So we feel pretty good about it. Doug, anything you would add? Douglas Woolley: Now all the leading indicators of those kinds of big problems all look very good and moving in the right direction. Like John said, criticized noticeably lower since the second quarter. Past dues continue to be low. So we all feel very good about where we are. Obviously, we're paying attention to what's going on in and around D.C. with the shutdown. But we just don't see any weakness anywhere, and we'll be prepared for anything supporting customers and whatnot. I was Chief Credit Officer, Doug Woolley. Catherine Mealor: Great. Is it fair to say the D.C. noise is maybe more of a growth issue than a credit issue for that? John Asbury: Yes, I would say so. I do think that it impacts confidence to some extent. But as Dave Ring pointed out, the pipelines are growing. And you've heard me make this point before, don't think of us as a D.C. Bank. About 23% of the total portfolio would be in the broad Greater Washington metro area. But Sandy itself was -- is and always has been the Bank of Maryland. And we are seeing opportunities there. So overall, we think that we're in the right spot. As you know, we do not finance larger office buildings, which definitely could be problematic. And from a government contract finance standpoint, I would expect to see more opportunity there over time since it's mostly focused on national security and defense. And even interestingly, we were talking to the head of government contract finance yesterday, even with the government shutdown because the defense department is still operating, we're seeing contracts awarded like right now. So we do feel pretty good about the opportunity there over time. But yes, it's -- I think it does put a damper on growth, particularly as it relates to commercial real estate investment, but it's very submarket specific as well, even in that Greater Metro D.C. area. Operator: Our next question comes from Janet Lee with TD Cowen. John Asbury: Janet, we're glad. Thank you for picking up coverage on us. Sun Young Lee: Of course. I believe you guys touched on it a little bit. Apologies if I missed it. So are you attributing all of the loan decline that you saw on the C&I side to lower utilization? And basically, are you also referring to the loan growth coming back in that mid-single digits as the utilization picks back up seasonally in the fourth quarter to the mid-single digits range? Or is that more so in a typical environment, you'd be a mid-single digit to high single-digit grower? John Asbury: Yes. I wouldn't say all of it was a result of the reduced line utilization, but that was a material number contributing to that. And I think it's -- Dave Ring, you'll have to weigh in here. From my standpoint, we've got the pipeline right now to support the targets that we laid out, which are roughly mid-single-digit loan growth based on what we're seeing in Q4. So that's not really predicated on a reversal and line utilization, although that would be helpful. Is that accurate? David Ring: Yes. We're -- we have the pipeline to -- it's just pull through. We just have to pull it through. And sometimes it takes longer than others and things creep into other quarters. But we have the pipeline that will -- that implies... John Asbury: Dave makes a good point. We actually had some financings that were slated and expected to have closed in Q3 that did not. And we're seeing that come through now. We're actually off to a pretty good start in Q4. Sun Young Lee: Got it. That's a helpful color. So on a core basis, I guess you're not guiding to 2026, but -- should I think of the core NIM trajectory based on your comment as being able to stay stable as rates come down with an upper bias if the yield curve steepens? Or would it be a sort of board pressure given your asset sensitivity profile? How should I think about that? Robert Gorman: Yes. The way we're thinking about it is we think there's opportunity for core expansion, give or take, in the low single digits per quarter. That's predicated on that the fixed rate loan portfolio back book and new fixed loans coming on are repricing higher, call it, 100 or so basis points higher. So that really depends on where term rates go. So if we do have a steeper curve, that would be very helpful to that projection that goes -- if it increases more, that will be more beneficial. So we are calling for in our baseline for the Fed to cut 2x here in the remainder of this year, 2x next year, but we do expect to see some expansion in the margin, again, not material. If term rates were to drop materially from really looking at, call it, the 5-year term rate, we could see some contraction in that projection that I'm talking about -- either a flat margin or it could be down depending on the term rate structure. John Asbury: And we are certainly less asset sensitive than we used to be. Sandy acts as a bit of a natural hedge. And as you can see on Slide 11 of the supplemental presentation, where we break out the drivers of net interest margin change, to Rob's earlier point, the core net interest margin actually went up Q-over-Q. It was really just fluctuation in accretion that caused the reported net interest margin to be stable. Sun Young Lee: If I could just ask one more question. For those of us including myself, who is newer to the name. So you made it clear that the government contractor finance group is doing fine. I mean, it's more security like national security and defense focus or more protected there. If the government shut down is prolonged, hopefully not. But if it does get extended, like what would you be -- in what way could it -- or could it impact you the most in terms of -- like what would you be most worried about? Is it the consumers in your -- the consumer customers in your market? Or is it just lower commercial activity? Could you just elaborate on what would you be most worried about or maybe not? John Asbury: Yes. Sure. The government contractors should be fine. We have lived through many shutdowns before. The longer shutdown was 35 days in the first Trump administration. We've never had an issue as it relates to government shutdowns. They have to wait to be paid, but most of them are doing essential services. And so they will continue to work, as I indicated. Normally, what we would expect to see them do is they'll draw on their lines as they await payment. It creates a timing difference. To the extent that they -- we have any that are working on nonessential services, what they do, it's a variable cost structure. They would furlough workers. You're already seeing that in some cases up there. So I think broadly, it certainly could sort of, I guess, I would say, further slow things down, we should be fine. The one thing we -- the only thing we can say with certainty is the U.S. government will reopen. That will happen. The question is how long it's going to take? Interestingly, I was just looking at some data. As of the end of the day yesterday, we had 50, 5-0 consumers contact us, wanting to talk about some sort of potential relief because they've been impacted. And the most common thing that you would see might be a payment deferral or a fee deferral. And that's on the consumer side, and we're very happy to work with customers if there's any sort of event weather like this in that region. So we do not have any reason at this point in time to be particularly concerned about it. Operator: Our next question comes from Brian Wilczynski with Morgan Stanley. Brian Wilczynski: Maybe just sticking with the loan growth. I think during your prepared remarks, you talked a little bit about higher competition that you saw in the third quarter across some of your markets. I was wondering if you could give some more detail on that, where it's coming from and just what you're seeing broadly? John Asbury: Yes. We're certainly accustomed to competition. I'm a 38-year commercial banker by background, and I don't ever remember a time when it's not been competitive, at least for the better credits, which is the types of things that we do. We sometimes see other banks kind of turn it on and turned it off, which we've never done. We've always been a consistent provider of capital, and that's part of how we differentiate ourselves in the marketplace. We are definitely in a turn it on environment right now, where some who had pulled back or fully open for business. We see that show up in terms of an element of pricing pressure, not that we've ever been the low-cost provider. But it's -- the banks are eager for business. Dave, anything to add? David Ring: In the first couple of quarters, we were impacted a bit by private credit. John Asbury: Yes, particularly in the government contract space. David Ring: Right. As a competitor in some of the specialty businesses, but that slowed down a little bit, frankly. And it's really the traditional banks coming in back in, turning it on again, like John said. And one of the things we're very proud of is we're consistently in the market. We don't turn it on and turn it off. And -- but we're seeing some of those banks come back in and turn it on. Brian Wilczynski: That's really helpful. And then maybe just on Sandy Spring. You mentioned that the integration is now complete. I was wondering if you could talk a little bit more about some of the revenue-related synergies. I think you mentioned briefly that swap income was higher. But as you look out to Sandy Spring, what are the opportunities that you see on the revenue side that you can lean into a little bit more over the next few quarters? John Asbury: Yes. Sort of moving -- starting at the top of the house, the single best opportunity is simply the fact that they're no longer constrained by commercial real estate concentrations or liquidity issues, which means they are, in fact, fully open for business. So that's good from a lending standpoint. They do pick up additional capabilities. Interest rate hedging is a great example. Other examples that we'll see as it begins to mature, will be foreign exchange, where we have a good offering broadly. They had a good treasury management offering, but we brought additional capabilities to the table as well. Dave, do you want to pick up from their specialty lines? We've already seen equipment finance business up there. David Ring: I mean the biggest probably help over the next, call it, 15 months is just them getting back into the market. We've retained almost all of their bankers. And most of them have stayed on their own as well without us having to work hard to retain them. And they are back to business back and calling. So new client acquisition is going to be a real important thing in that market for us. The things we bring to the table around talking at a higher level to clients, bringing in products like John said, plus loan syndications, asset-based lending and some other things into that market. That's a really good asset-based lending market, for instance, which we will penetrate deeper because of our acquisition of Sandy Spring. So there are a lot of things just -- but I would think of it just holistically as two good banks coming together, combining products and services, they had some that we didn't have. John Asbury: Correct. David Ring: They had some really interesting offerings, some niche treasury management capabilities that we now have. John Asbury: Right. And they've brought some really good leadership to the table as well. And so we really think we're just stronger in that market because of the combination. Operator: Our next question comes from David Bishop with Hovde Group. David Bishop: Staying on that topic in terms of the Sandy Spring opportunity. John and Rob and Dave, as you expand maybe their pure commercial C&I lending capabilities, do you see the opportunity to sort of harvest more deposits behind new loan relationships and maybe what legacy Sandy Spring is bringing to the table? David Ring: Overall, they did a pretty good job gathering deposits. And we've done a pretty good job since April 1 of retaining those and trying to deepen and enhance relationships to get more. But -- they actually brought some products to the table that we're going to leverage in that market around escrow, the title businesses, litigation services, things like that, that will bring pretty chunky, nice big deposits into the bank. But in general, if you acquire a C&I client and you're giving them a line of credit, it comes with the deposits. It comes with the treasury management fees. And so we're really focused on new client acquisition in that market. And we do think we give them the capacity and the ability to do more faster new client acquisition. Like I said earlier, 35% of our production this quarter was from new client acquisition, and we expect that to kind of ramp up with Sandy over time. John Asbury: It's a good team with great leadership, and we complement each other. David Bishop: Got it. And then a follow-up, maybe, John, I think you mentioned the freeable some pretty material movement, I think it was $250 million decline in criticized. Maybe curious any sort of color you can give on where you saw that improvement types of credits, segments, et cetera? John Asbury: Pretty much across the board. Part of what we did in part just a function of the environment, we continue to dig pretty deeply in terms of scrutinizing the portfolio, not that we don't do that in the normal course. We've especially done that with the Sandy Spring portfolio being new to us. And the reality is we call them as we see them. The overall health of our client base is pretty good. And so we've seen it pretty much across the board. Doug Woolley, the Chief Credit Officer is here, is that a fair assessment? Douglas Woolley: Dave, the improvement in credit is at the client level. There are no industries or markets that are of any concern. It's just individual clients that may suffer difficulties. And of course, we work with them all the way through, and that's where the improvement comes from, the improvement of their operations. And we do believe we are conservative risk raters. Operator: Our final question comes from Steve Moss with Raymond James. Stephen Moss: Maybe going back to loan growth here. John, I hear you on the mid-single digits with potential to be doing higher single digits over time here. And obviously, the pipeline has increased. Just curious here with the North Carolina expansion, what kind of contribution could you see next year from that from loan growth, if any, that could be additive? John Asbury: Dave? David Ring: So we're adding bankers in North Carolina. We've actually seen North Carolina turn to positive growth after... John Asbury: Initial America... David Ring: Yes. And there's very positive momentum there. What we like about North Carolina is it is a real active market, and you could drive down any highway and see multiple manufacturing distribution facilities. And -- we have now -- we think we placed a lot of talent in that market to go after that business. We have pretty low market share. So there's a lot of upside in that state. John Asbury: Yes. It's arguably from an economic development standpoint, it's arguably the best of the growth markets where we have a physical presence, which we're expanding. So Steve, that is potential upside. We're being very conservative in terms of how we think about it. We're speaking to loan growth expectations for the entirety of the franchise. But Dave, you and I have a conversation yesterday, you've been here 8 years. And we think about how diversified the bank is now versus what we first saw and all the -- I think you referred to it as the levers that we have to pull now. So this is a very diversified franchise. And so we see opportunities really in all markets, but North Carolina will have the fastest rising tide. David Ring: And we do have roughly 20 bankers now in that market going at it, which is an increase over time. So we're very excited about the opportunity there. We're in Wilmington. We're also in the Triad and Triangle markets, and we have a presence in Charlotte and in South Carolina as well. So we're pretty excited about that. Stephen Moss: Okay. Appreciate that color there. And then one last one for me. Most of my questions have been asked and answered. But I'm not sure if I missed it. Curious, Rob, as to the purchase accounting assumptions for the fourth quarter and for 2026. Robert Gorman: Yes. So in terms of the accretion income, I think you could -- if you take a look at the third quarter, it's kind of what we're anticipating for the fourth quarter, call it about $40 million, $41 million which was down from the third quarter, as we mentioned. It's probably going to continue to decline as we go through next year. But call it about between $35 million and $40 million run rate -- quarterly run rate going throughout next year and continue to come down as we go into '27. John Asbury: And of course, that's being replaced, that cash income has been reinvested. Robert Gorman: Yes, exactly. Turning into core. John Asbury: Since it's mostly interest rate marks. Stephen Moss: Okay. And actually, maybe just one last one for me here. John, with regard to capital return here, profitability, you're talking about -- you're definitely building capital. Just curious, you talked about a buyback as well, how to think about maybe the timing of a buyback starting next year? John Asbury: Yes. We're definitely going to be accreting capital at a good rate. And even more so as we get through Q4 once all of the Sandy Spring related expenses are out. And you can see we have pretty handsome operating metrics right now, which should get better still. So Rob, do you want to talk about how we would think about the -- well, actually, let me say this, clearly, as always, first priority for capital is simply to reinvest in the business and fund lending growth. But what we're guiding for implies that we're going to be accumulating capital faster than we need it. Therefore, capital will continue to rise. Robert Gorman: Yes. Taking into consideration our growth on the balance sheet, the investment and strategic initiatives and things, assuming we've got the capital for that. We're comfortable managing with a CET1 between 10% and 10.5%. So anything beyond, call it, 10.5% would be available for buybacks, excess capital, if you will. Our projection call for that is probably be in that position probably in the second half of next year. So likely we would export for an authorization to repurchase shares sometime in that time frame. William Cimino: Thank you, Steve. And thanks, everyone, for joining us today. We look forward to talking with you at our Investor Day in December. Have a good day. Operator: This concludes today's conference call. Thank you for participating. You may now disconnect.
Linda Hakkila: Hello all, and welcome to follow Konecranes' Q3 2025 Results Webcast. My name is Linda Hakkila. I'm the VP, Investor Relations here at Konecranes. And with me today, as our main speakers, we have our President and CEO, Marko Tulokas; and our CFO, Teo Ottola. Before we proceed, I would like to remind you about the disclaimer as we might be making forward-looking statements. Here, you can see our agenda for today. We will first start with a presentation from our CEO, and he will give us a market update and guide us through the group performance. After that, our CFO, Teo Ottola, will guide us through the business area performance and talk about the balance sheet topics. Before we start with the Q&As, our CEO will still summarize the main points of the quarter. But now, without any further comments, I would like to hand over to our CEO. Marko Tulokas: Thank you very much, Linda. I'd like to start by saying that I'm extremely pleased with our performance in quarter 3 and throughout the year 2025. Konecranes' team delivered a very strong quarter in continuation to our solid half year performance. Under the prevailing market conditions, this is an excellent achievement. This is -- with this kind of market uncertainty, an order intake, a growth of 23% year-on-year is a very good starting -- start for the quarter 3 or is a very good quarter 3. Our demand environment has remained stable despite the market uncertainty and our sales teams have been able to close well despite the timing-related hesitation. Our orders are up now by 23% year-on-year in comparable currencies and our order increased more than 7% -- order book increased, sorry. The order intake increased in all business areas. Our sales amounted to nearly EUR 1 billion in the third quarter. This means a decrease of 5.5% year-on-year in comparable currencies. Despite the decrease in sales, we reached a record high EBITA margin of 16.7%. That is an increase from second quarter level of 14.3%. Our profitability in the third quarter was supported by good execution, as well as some one-off items. We will go through the performance by business area later in this presentation. The next, I will again go through some words to our general market environment. Let's start with our Industrial segment. In general, our demand environment remained good despite somewhat weaker macroeconomical data. The capacity utilization rates are the best macro indicators that describe these conditions for Industrial business area. And from the data, we can see some weakening year-on-year, but still our order intake in Industrial Service and Industrial Equipment grew in quarter 3. That was really driven by good activity in our standard equipment business, as well as some significant modernization and process crane projects. At the same time, within our industrial customers, we have seen somewhat cautious behavior, both in timing of new orders, as well as delay in project delivery acceptance. Our operating environment continues to be impacted by geopolitical tensions and volatility, especially related to tariffs. Now let's then talk about the market environment for Port Solutions. And in Port Solutions markets, we continue to see good activity. The Container Throughput Index, which is the main indicator here, continued at a strong level in the third quarter compared to the historical readings. It is now up by 3% year-on-year. And as we say in our demand outlook, the long-term prospects related to container handling or container traffic remain good overall. Now we will now next take a look at our sales and order intake development. In the third quarter, the group order intake grew by 23% year-on-year in comparable currencies, and that is an increase in all 3 BAs. Looking at geographical markets, we saw some improvement in our order intake in Americas and APAC region, as well as some weakening in EMEA. Our sales in the third quarter decreased both in reported terms and comparable currencies, which was mainly driven by the lower order book in Port Solutions. And in the third quarter, we saw a decrease in net sales for Industrial Service and Port Solutions, but very strong delivery performance in Industrial Equipment after a less strong quarter 2. On a group level, we saw a decrease in net sales in all regions. Moving on to the order book. And our order book reached its highest level since quarter 1 of 2024 and amounted to over EUR 3 billion at the end of the third quarter. We saw an increase in Industrial Equipment and Port Solutions, while there was a decrease in Industrial Service. Our book-to-bill has been positive throughout the year. And looking back to our long-term performance, our order book continues to be on historically good level. And then finally, looking at the EBITA margin development, which reached also a record high level. In the third quarter, we generated EUR 165 million of EBITA. This translates to very strong EBITA margin of 16.7%. And this performance came from really solid execution, as well as some one-off items. And EBITA margin increased year-on-year in all BAs. Industrial Equipment reached its all-time high margin of 14.1% in the third quarter. And Industrial Service and Port Solutions also had very good margins of 22.7% and 11.8%, respectively. Then let's move on to the performance towards our financial targets. Last year was very good for us, and our performance has continued strong also this year. This graph shows the rolling 12 months figures for our sales and EBITA margin and progress towards our long-term financial targets. Our group sales remained flat whilst our comparable EBITA margin increased when comparing the last 12 months to full year 2024. The group profitability in the rolling 12 months, we are at the lower end of our profitability target range of 13% to 16%. Of course, we consistently continue to work towards those targets. While increasing our EBITA margin, we also aim to continue to grow our sales faster than the market. In Industrial Service, our steady progress over the last 5 years continues and the sales in the rolling 12 months remained relatively stable, but our EBITDA margin increased to 21.5%. We are already today well in line with our target range, but naturally still closer to the lower end of the bracket. And in Industrial Equipment, sales in the rolling 12 months remained flat. And also our EBITA margin for the same period decreased compared to full year 2024. That is mainly due to the weaker H1 and particularly the weaker quarter 2. While the quarter 2 performance for Industrial Equipment left room for improvement, our performance in quarter 3 was, in turn, exceptionally strong. Also here, we will continue to work to strengthen the over-the-cycle performance of the Industrial Equipment business. Then moving on to the Port Solutions. We have continuously improved our financial performance during the last 3 years, as you can see from the graph, and we will also continue to so in -- we continue to do so in quarter 3. Our sales increased in the rolling 12 months compared to 2024, which is already a very good year. And our EBITA margin for quarter 3 remained at a high level, which resulted in an EBITA margin of 10.8% for the rolling 12 months. Needless to say that I'm very pleased with this progress. Now, I will hand it over to Teo Ottola, our CFO, for some time, and then I'll return back in a moment. Teo Ottola: Thank you, Marko. And let's move on in the presentation. Actually, before going into the business area numbers, so let's take a look at the comparable EBITA bridge between Q3 of this year and Q3 of last year. As we have seen, the margin improvement is large in a year-on-year comparison. And when we take a look at the euro, so this turns into EUR 22 million improvement. And if we unpack this next a little bit. So first, starting with pricing. So our prices were somewhere between 2% to 3% higher than a year ago, maybe closer to 3% than 2%. But nevertheless, this improvement or increase in prices is somewhat less than what we have been having in the beginning of '25. When we combine this price increase to the fact that our sales declined more than 5% in a year-on-year comparison. So actually, we are looking at quite a significant underlying volume decline in the third quarter in comparison to the situation a year ago. And this, of course, creates a negative operating leverage impacting the profits as well. But there are then several positive things supporting our profits. First of all, net of inflation pricing, so that was slightly positive in a year-on-year comparison, even though the positive impact comes primarily as a result of tariff-related price increases, so we have increased prices in line with the tariffs. But then as a result of the inventory turns being slow, so actually, the benefit comes first and then the cost will be flowing in a little bit later in terms of material consumption. In addition to that one, we had a clearly better mix now than a year ago. But the biggest explanation of all is very good execution that we had. So the performance of the business was excellent, particularly in the project execution, which is visible primarily in the ports, but also in the other business areas. When we combine into this one that our fixed costs actually were lower than what they were a year ago, we were able to create this improvement in the EBITA despite lower sales. When we take a look at the performance a little bit more in detail, so we can note that our performance this time was helped by some one-off type of levers, things. One of them was that we actually received an R&D grant in Finland in the amount of roughly EUR 4 million that was booked in the third quarter. This is, of course, visible in the fixed cost, and that is one of the reasons why fixed costs are now lower than what they were a year ago. I already mentioned the tariff-related price increases and the tailwind that we got there. So that was less than EUR 5 million, but several millions anyway. And then we had also some provision releases within the Industrial businesses. And altogether, these are, let's say, roughly EUR 10 million or so. Then the next one I'm going to discuss is not like a one-off topic. It's normal business practice. But as a result of the good project execution within Port Solutions, in particular, we were able to release provisions and that impacted positively our result in the third quarter. So normal business as such, but this quarter was better than average definitely from that point of view. So they are some of the topics explaining the profitability and the profits within the third quarter. Let's then move into the businesses and start with Service, as usual, maybe here worth noting that exactly as in the second quarter, so also here, the FX impact is quite big. So let's more focus on the numbers with the comparable currencies. In Service, order intake grew by almost 9%, 8.7%. This is clearly higher growth than we have had in the first half of '25. This growth was actually supported by some large modernization orders that were already mentioned by Marko as well. But even if we excluded those ones, or the delta as a result of the modernizations, we still would be having growth even if the majority of the growth is created by these modernization orders. When we take a look at the field service, so actually, our order intake declined in a year-on-year comparison. And in parts, it was an increase. Then taking a look at the regions, we had increase in the Americas and EMEA, but a decrease in APAC, and it's worth noting that the modernization deals took place primarily in the Americas. Agreement base continued to grow more than 5% with comparable currencies and order book was slightly lower than what we had a year ago. Net sales grew only by 1.2%. And this is, of course, less than the price increases have been. So the underlying volume actually was lower than what we had a year ago. There, the reason is basically the slowness of order intake in the field service, and we had a decline in sales in field service within the Service. Spare parts were basically stable in a year-on-year comparison. And then from the region point of view, stable in EMEA, whereas decrease in the Americas and Asia Pacific. Comparable EBITA margin improved by more than 1 percentage point to 22.7% despite the somewhat sluggish sales development. This was primarily driven by very good cost management within the Service business, but to some extent, also by pricing, which was partially in relation to these tariff-related price increases and the timing tailwind there. So then Industrial Equipment, very good order intake, close to EUR 350 million. That is as much as 26% growth in external orders when comparable currencies. When we take a look at this by the business units, so we had actually growth in process cranes and components, but we had a decline in standard cranes. And then of the regions, decrease in EMEA, whereas the other 2 regions saw growth. Then the sequential picture, which is important as well. So in comparison to the second quarter, actually, we saw sequentially a significant increase in process crane orders. Components were more or less flat in a sequential comparison and standard cranes declined slightly. Order book is higher, clearly higher than what we had at the same time 1 year ago. Sales grew very nicely, 6.3%, again, with external sales in comparable currencies after a little bit, let's say, lower first half. We had increase in standard crane and component sales, but a decrease in process cranes, which then also, at the same time, meant that the product mix was somewhat better than a year ago. Then when taking a look at the margin, so excellent EBITA margin, 14.1%, a very big improvement in a year-on-year comparison, of course, driven partially by volume. So the underlying volume improved here in Industrial Equipment quite a bit. There were also some of the one-off items that we already discussed. For example, the R&D grant is mostly visible in the Industrial Equipment. But then also good execution otherwise, as well as the optimization program that we have been running has been giving benefits also for this quarter. And the mix also was slightly better than a year ago. Port Solutions, good order intake or excellent order intake here as well, more than EUR 450 million, that is 36% growth in a year-on-year comparison. We had very good order intake in yard cranes. This would mean primarily RTGs and ASCs. If we take a look at the regions, Americas and APAC improvement, EMEA, a decline. And here also, again, taking a look at a little bit of the sequential topic, but also the so-called short-cycle product categories within Port Solutions. So lift trucks, there we had year-on-year growth in the order intake, but sequentially down. And then from the port service point of view, we had growth both year-on-year as well as sequentially. Sales was clearly down by almost 19%. This was, of course, known from the point of view that the order book was lower for the third quarter than a year ago. So order book overall is in good shape, 10% higher than a year ago, but the same thing continues now for the fourth quarter as we had for the third quarter as well. So we have less order book for the fourth quarter now than what we had 1 year ago for the fourth quarter. So the order book is more beyond this year or beyond the current year than what we had the situation 1 year ago. Comparable EBITA margin developed very well, 11.8%, 2.2% improvement. This is, obviously, not driven by volume because the volume declined very much, but primarily because of the very good execution, supported by some of the provision releases, like I said, and then also the product mix, particularly in Port Solutions was clearly better than a year ago. Then next, a couple of comments on the net working capital, cash flow. We actually had net working capital of only EUR 285 million at the end of the third quarter. That's only 6.7% of rolling 12-month sales. This is very well in line with our target of being below 10%. If we take a look at the, let's say, delta to the situation a year ago, it is primarily inventories where the decline has come. And then in sequential comparison, it's maybe more accounts receivable. This net working capital development, together, of course, with the good result meant a very good free cash flow on record levels, this one as well, more than EUR 200 million, which is then, of course, consequently leading to this slide where we now actually, during the third quarter, have moved from being in net debt situation to being in net cash position, not much, but negative gearing anyways at the end of the third quarter. On the right-hand side, we can then see the return on capital employed, which is 21.7%, and this is a comparable number, but also the reported number is more than 20%. We have added actually a slide on the U.S. tariffs as well because that, of course, continues to be a relevant discussion topic. On the right-hand side of the slide, we have the Konecranes exposure. So these are the numbers that we have already given earlier. So the internal volumes from Europe to the U.S. is EUR 180 million or less than EUR 180 million. And then on top of this internal volume, we obviously then also have deliveries of fully assembled port cranes and lift trucks. We are, of course, subject to the normal reciprocal tariffs of 15% in, for example, in the complete cranes. But then many of our components, particularly spare parts are also subject to so-called steel derivatives where we are then subject to a 50% tariff. And also the tariff codes added now to the steel categories in August was impacting us as well so that we have now more components and parts within the 50% category than what the situation was before. What we have done is that, we have increased prices, more or less, in line with the tariffs. We are, of course, monitoring the situation. We are monitoring what the competitors are doing, how the customer demand is developing. We are discussing with the suppliers to be able to define the steel content of the components because, of course, that can help us to, in a way, get the tariff, particularly the steel derivative tariffs on the right level if we can prove that what is the share of actual steel in the components. So all in all, we have been able to manage the pricing well. This most likely will become somewhat more challenging going forward so that maybe not all of the tariff increases are possible to put into the customer prices. We do not expect this to be having any major impact on the margins, but the situation may be in the future, a little bit more tighter than what it has been so far. This actually was the last slide that I had, and now I invite Marko back to the stage. Marko Tulokas: Right. Yes, let's see how this works. So we had some issues with the first slides earlier. So now this should be now working again. So now let's look at our demand environment, demand outlook. So our demand in the industrial customer segment has remained good and continues on a healthy level. However, the demand-related uncertainty and volatility, due to these geopolitical tensions and trade policy tensions remain, particularly in North America. This translates into higher uncertainty, both in the timing of the order, as well as some postponement of maintenance activities within industrial customers or Industrial Service customers that, of course, may impact also the delivery performance or delivery acceptance of customers. Our sales funnel remained on a strong level and funnel development during the quarter was stable. Comparing against the previous quarter, the numbers of new sales cases is slightly down. Then to our port customers, the global container throughput continues on a high level and long-term prospects related to global container handling remain good overall. And our pipeline of orders is good and contains projects of different sizes. And I'll reiterate our financial guidance for this year. Our net sales is expected to remain approximately on the same level in 2025 compared to 2024. And we continue to expect that our comparable EBITA margin is -- to remain approximately on the same level or to improve in 2025 compared to last year. Now, before we start the Q&A, I'd like to go over 3 themes that we are leveraging to build on our strong foundation and to -- continue to drive the long-term profitable growth. Historically, looking at in the long-term -- long run, these have been and are the fundamentals behind our success, and they are the ones that are still very relevant today and will continue to provide us further runway also into the future. First of all, our Konecranes customer base is diverse and global. Our dual channel market approach gives us the most comprehensive access to customers globally and to different segments. Our broad product and service life cycle offering continues to give us an advantage when catering to the customers' wide needs and create stability against customer segments demand volatility and helps us to address specific customer segments within those markets. This approach to the market, our offering and our customer excellence culture is critical, but personally this -- but it's also personally something that I'm passionate about and I want to continue to foster. And then secondly, I would like to emphasize the life cycle approach of Konecranes. Developing a service and life cycle approach over decades has been and is very much in the Konecranes' DNA. We are not only providing equipment to our customers, but also taking care of them during the lifetime. That long-term customer relationship and focus on servicing all makes and moves -- feeds our service -- sales funnel continuously with equipment and service products. That -- this cornerstone in our operating model has served us well, but it continues to provide us further runway for growth and efficiency. The life cycle approach is naturally our way of doing business, but it's also the only sustainable way to operate in today's world. And thirdly, it is the technology leadership. So Konecranes has been the innovator in this market and reinforcing our technological leadership continues to be crucial. So focusing on technology innovation and development allows us to differentiate our offering versus our competitors. It creates more value to our customers and helps us to leverage the life cycle approach even more in the future. So in conclusion, we have a strong foundation and great teams in place to build on our success and drive for expansion and growth. And I thank you very much for your attention. Now we move on to the Q&A. So Linda? Linda Hakkila: Thank you, Marko, for the presentation, and thank you, Teo also. So now we are ready to start the Q&A session, and we will first start taking questions through the conference call lines. So, operator, we are ready to start taking questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Daniela Costa from Goldman Sachs. Daniela Costa: I want to ask on 2 things. First, I guess, starting with the growth in Industrial Equipment, given you mentioned sort of like the capacity utilization figures in the beginning, which haven't sort of yet started any big recovery. Can you talk about sort of what drove -- was there any particularly -- particular verticals? Was there some prebuying on the components? Or what has -- or market share gains or something, what has kind of caused really the strength there and how sustainable you see that going forward? That's first. And I'll ask the other one after. Marko Tulokas: Yes. I mean, maybe the key reason there or the main point is to say -- you refer to the segments or the verticals. And, of course, that is -- although the general capacity utilization may not be yet more on the contraction, not reinvestment level, but there are several verticals that are quite strong at the moment and drive demand. I'd just name a few. The obvious one, I guess, on everybody's lips is the defense segment. So that has been, of course, a topic for quite a while already. And in the third quarter, we not only saw more opportunities in the funnel, but we started to also see quite a few actual orders in that segment. That is a clear example. There are other areas where the long-term investment trend for other reasons than just productivity or capacity utilization are strong and maybe aviation is another example of where there's quite a lot of investment activity. And there are a few others. And that, of course, is one of the key reasons why we continue to have a solid order intake there. And then, of course, finally, I would also say similarly in the Port segment, when we talk about larger investments or bigger projects, particularly in the process crane side, they tend to take quite a while to decide and for the customers to make the investment decision and then place the order. And therefore, it is not always exactly easy to forecast or predict. And secondly, not always exactly in line with the macroeconomical indicators. Daniela Costa: And the second one just on Port Solutions. I think in many calls before, you've talked about sort of the opportunity or on the whole STS situation in the U.S. with replacement of Chinese cranes and tariffs there. But the U.S. is just proposing an even bigger scope of what they could be putting in terms of tariffs on China. I know about a year ago, you said that you were building the supply chain domestically there for the STS. Can you talk a little bit about, let's assume, this 100% on STS and the 150% in the remaining port equipment would go through? Where do you stand now in terms of building the capabilities to supply and to get a share of this opportunity domestically? And are there any side effects elsewhere in the world where you're seeing any increase in competition from the Chinese? Just give us a picture of how this has changed given the scope seems to be changing of what will be included there? Marko Tulokas: Maybe I'll start and then you complement in case I forgot some part of the question. First of all, the recent development in those tariffs that was early -- announced in early October, they're, of course, not yet, in our understanding, completely clear on what is the scope of application. And secondly, what is actually how much tariffs are being applied. So there is a certain uncertainty and, of course, what will be the final solution. And that, of course, is for us and also the market, something that needs to be and must be clarified in the end. But that doesn't take away the essence of your question, which was that have we been preparing? And the answer is that, yes, we continue to prepare for the possibility to manufacture in the States. And we have been looking, mainly based on subcontractors and utilization of our own existing facilities and the industrial team that we have in the States, which is more than 2,000 people today in several manufacturing sites. So we have an opportunity to explore that, too. But that is the local U.S.-made scope. There is that, let's say, gradual up parcel or move to that direct -- to that eventual outcome, which means that there are products that would be manufactured in Europe or other parts of Asia. And there, we have even more activities going on and readiness for supplier as it is already today. I recall that your last part of your question is that, do we see increasing activity elsewhere? Then to some extent, might be the right answer, and that is maybe more towards the other parts of Asia as well as in the Southern Hemisphere. Teo Ottola: Yes. Maybe to add on this competition elsewhere topic that, of course, if we talk about the STS', so we will need to remember that the market share for the Chinese competitor is also globally very high. So that this, of course, in a way, it may increase the competition elsewhere, but the market share already is there for the competition also outside of the U.S. And then if one takes a look at the RTGs, so there the situation is that the, let's say, our relative market share in the U.S. is significantly bigger than what it is for STS'. So there, on the other hand... Marko Tulokas: And it would be the same elsewhere also. Teo Ottola: Yes, and would be the same elsewhere. So that these 2 products are from this geographical split point of view, a little bit different. Marko Tulokas: Yes. Operator: The next question comes from Panu Laitinmäki from Danske Bank. Panu Laitinmaki: I have 2. Firstly, on the margin outlook. So, obviously, Q3 was strong and had some one-off positives that you mentioned, and it was above your long-term target. But how should we think about kind of Q4 and going forward, given that you kept the guidance where the low end of having margins at the same level as last year would imply quite, let's say, lower margin for Q4, if I would read it kind of directly? So, yes, could you explain how should we expect margins to develop going forward? Marko Tulokas: Maybe you start with this, Ottola. Teo Ottola: Okay. I can. So, yes, the short answer to the question that do we expect the fourth quarter margin to be equal to the third quarter margin? So no. So we are expecting fourth quarter to be lower than the third quarter. Third quarter was high. And, of course, there are these topics that we were discussing, there is about EUR 10 million or so, let's say, clear one-offs, one can say the product mix was very good. So this is maybe not a one-off, but doesn't necessarily repeat itself as such. And then the productivity or efficiency or execution, whichever word we want to use, was particularly good in the third quarter. So maybe from that point of view, Q3 was a little bit of exceptional. Other than that, of course, unfortunately, other than what we have in the guidance and what now concluded between, let's say, our expectation on Q3 versus Q4, we are not -- or we have -- we do not communicate more on that, unfortunately. Panu Laitinmaki: Okay. Maybe another one is on the order intake outlook. So, I mean, it's a bit mixed if I listen to you, you say that there are less new cases coming to the pipeline and you flagged increased uncertainty in the market. But on the other hand, we saw pretty good orders in Industrial Equipment and you mentioned these strong verticals. So, I mean, what should we expect going forward? So is it kind of driven by these strong verticals better than the macro implies? Or are you seeing some pressure from macro going forward? Marko Tulokas: Yes. Of course, when we look at these new sales case trends and so forth, that tends to fluctuate a bit month after month, so that's maybe something not to put too much attention. But generally speaking, the -- and it's good to remember that we operate in so many customer segments that quite well kind of evens out these fluctuations in the different segments. And now we are held with certain strong segments that are making up for that, let's say, general somewhat more fluid picture. But what can just be simply said that our sales funnels in the industrial side, and I understand you were more referring to that are stable and they are on a good level on average. Teo Ottola: And maybe to build on that one, I mean, like you pointed out, so the sales funnels are basically stable and the number of new cases is slightly down. I mean, if there's nothing major there. But actually, the average size of the case is slightly up. And that's why the funnel as a whole looks fairly stable despite all macro discussion and topics that there are. Operator: The next question comes from Antti Kansanen from SEB. Antti Kansanen: It's Antti from SEB. A couple of questions from me as well, and I'll start with something that Teo, you said on the EBITA bridge that you flagged that you had maybe a temporary benefit from tariff-related price hikes. So I didn't fully understand what you mean by why would you benefit first? And what were you referring then on the cost impact that might come later? So a bit more clarity on that one, please? Teo Ottola: Yes. The reason is that, when we are increasing the prices at the time when we start to import the goods to, for example, in this case, to the U.S. So first of all, we have old inventory in the U.S., which is with the old prices. That's one thing. And then the other thing is that, when you are using average price in the inventory, so it tends to be so that the material consumption comes through at a different time when the sales number actually comes. And this may create a mismatch, which we are here also seeing. So that's good when it works like this. But then the reality is that, as we have not tried to gain anything on the tariffs as such. So, of course, the disadvantage will be coming a little bit later. It can take a while, depending on the component that we are talking about. In Service, it will come quicker. In Equipment, it will come a little bit later, but it will balance itself over time. Antti Kansanen: Okay. But it doesn't sound like this would be a kind of a major driver for any margin fluctuation that we're seeing, for example, on the Industrial Equipment side, which was obviously a big step-up from the second quarter and maybe there will be a bit of a step down, but this is not a massive driver on the margin? Teo Ottola: The overall number, like I said, is less than EUR 5 million, and it is split basically between Industrial Equipment and Service. So from that point of view also, it's not a massive driver. Plus it will not probably vanish in 1 quarter. Marko Tulokas: Right. Teo Ottola: So it will take a little bit -- it's like a rolling in a way, impact because of the average price that we, in practice, have from the inventory management point of view. Antti Kansanen: Okay. And maybe a second kind of clarification, the EUR 10 million or so that you're kind of flagging as say, EBITA one-offs this quarter. That's mainly on Industrial Equipment, impacting mainly the Industrial Equipment division. Am I correct? Teo Ottola: That is correct. So actually, the tariff-related price tailwind that we just discussed is more in Industrial Equipment than in Service, exactly because of this thing that the impact comes through quicker in Service and slower in Industrial Equipment. And the R&D grant, which is the other big topic is primarily within Industrial Equipment. Antti Kansanen: Okay. And then the second question, maybe this is a similar topic, but project execution on the port side. If I remember correctly, I mean, the previous quarter margins on the ports were very good as well compared to the history. I didn't remember that you flagged mix back then, but that was also kind of a good execution and now continues on the port side. Is there something that we should maybe see as kind of a structural improvement, something that we can extrapolate going forward? Or are we still kind of wait and see whether this is sustained? Marko Tulokas: Well, I'll start again then. First of all, in the ports execution, I mean, always one thing that happens, these are big projects. And when you deliver a big project, of course, you make certain provisions for that project risks. And this execution in this particular quarter, some of those provisions were released. And hence, that's also relative to the sales. So the volume impact wasn't as big. It has some mix impact. But the underlying reason is the same that our project execution has been on rather conditions. There isn't or hasn't been recently any significant, let's say, difficult projects. That, of course, in the nature of the business cannot guarantee that that would not happen at all. But I think our project management capabilities already over the last few years have been improving kind of consistently. And in that way, we are kind of confident that we can do that quite well now. But it doesn't remove the fact that, I mean, in that sort of business that there is some risk involved also. Teo Ottola: Yes. The main point from our point of view is, of course, to be able to have this improvement trend so that, of course, every now and then a quarter is better and then maybe also worse. But when the trend is in the right direction from the project execution point of view, so then things are good from our point of view. From the mix point of view, there probably isn't anything structural that would need to be taken into consideration. We have, of course, consistently been saying that we want to grow more in port services than in other areas there. But as long as we have good order intake from the Equipment point of view, so this will not be visible in 1 quarter or maybe even in 1 year so that this is a much longer sort of project to change that structure. Antti Kansanen: Okay. Then last one for me is on the order side. I mean, I guess there was a couple of bigger ones that you flagged both on Industrial Services, on the process crane side, obviously, on the ports as well. Was this a bit of an active quarter in terms of big projects? And is there something explaining the timing? Or am I just reading too much into it? You also mentioned that the average case size is growing. So was this a particularly active big project quarter for some particular reason or just a coincidence? Marko Tulokas: I mean, coincidence is maybe not the word that I would use, of course, it's part of a consistent and continuous work and working on the funnel and the timing of the orders because the customer-related reasons sometimes, of course, happens. It's not entirely under our control for sure. Maybe I'll answer that mainly related to the process crane business, and you see that the process crane business orders particularly was good. And in that case, I'd say that we had, in the same quarter, several quite successful larger projects, whether it is in power or aviation, or to some extent, also elsewhere. So that is maybe a slightly larger than usual quarter, but that doesn't take away that both in the ports and in the industrial process crane side, there are still further opportunities in the funnel also. This is just timing-wise, particularly in process crane good quarter. Teo Ottola: I would say that it would be a little bit difficult to find the connection between the decision-making timing and something that has happened in the world from the macro point of view or even from the macro point of view to us so that coincidence is not the right word, but there is probably not a big scheme behind that would explain this timing. Marko Tulokas: If you find, please least let us know. Antti Kansanen: I'll do that. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Tom Skogman from DNB Carnegie. Tomas Skogman: This is Tom from DNB Carnegie. Sorry for asking about the margin guidance, but I mean, the January to September margin is already 1 percentage point higher than it was 1 year ago. So is there any reason you did not change the guidance in group that we should be aware of as a risk element for Q4? Marko Tulokas: Maybe, Tom, since they asked the previous related question also, you can start on this, too. Teo Ottola: There is -- we are not expecting anything dramatic in the fourth quarter that would be somehow deviating from the normal course of business significantly. I guess that it is rather that we would be saying that the third quarter was a little bit on the higher side because of the topics that we have been discussing. So fourth quarter -- this year's fourth quarter, like many other years' fourth quarters as well. So it is a combination of primarily of mix and then, of course, the underlying volume. And this balance is then, of course, very important from the margin development point of view as well. Tomas Skogman: Okay. If then looking at kind of building blocks for 2026, I would just like to get a bit of clarification when I do my own EBIT bridge. So to my understanding, there is no cost-cutting kind of program ongoing for next year. So what do you -- what would you like to guide when it comes to fixed costs? And this modularization of products, is that kind of rather a negative or a positive next year as you have indicated you have both the new and the old generation of products in manufacturing next year? Marko Tulokas: I didn't quite get the last part, so I'll let Teo answer that. But the first part when it comes to the fixed things, we first -- we don't guide the fixed cost per se, but there is some tail end of this industrial restructuring program also remaining. And, of course, when it comes to fixed cost, we are closely observing the demand environment. And we have also, during this year, made adjustments to the organization as needed based on the demand environment. Teo Ottola: I guess the other question, if I understood Tom correct, was that is the product renewal/launch in Industrial Equipment going to be a positive or a negative for '26 in comparison to '25? Marko Tulokas: Sorry, Tom, I didn't quite get that. So yes, first of all, those launches are now progressing basically to the second launch year. And during this year, the launch has been towards the second half proceeding all the time better. So I mean the amount of products that we are converting is catching up is probably a good way to say it. So that is proceeding quite satisfactorily, I would say. And now we have in all 3 regions, the new viral posts available also. So in that sense, the readiness is there. It is -- as I think I explained also last time when you have a new product, you run in manufacturing for some time, you will run 2 products in parallel. And that, of course, has the tendency to increase manufacturing cost. And secondly, you have some product cost, variable cost-related timing to catch up with the old legacy product that has been in the market for quite a while. In both accounts, we have still next year, some costs on the new product that are higher than the existing product. But we are moving ahead quite well on that, and we are -- we have been kind of preparing for that for the most part. So I wouldn't take that as a very significant consideration. Tomas Skogman: Okay. And then the big tariffs on RTG cranes, I don't understand why we discussed so much the STS cranes. I mean, isn't the RTG crane the big opportunity for you in the U.S. I mean, that is much more high-margin products than STS cranes and the Chinese companies have been very strong there as well. And in that product, you have already set up to deliver quickly basically. Marko Tulokas: Yes, that is true. At the same time, it is -- although we don't exactly comment on the competitors' market share in the region, but the Chinese competition in this case is not as big on the RTGs as it is on the STS. That's maybe the main reason to your -- or the main answer to your questions. Tomas Skogman: But do you expect kind of a clearly increased market share in RTG crane orders in '26 and '27 if the current tariffs are holding up basically? Marko Tulokas: No, I think, like I said, the Chinese competition where this is facing, of course, is not big on RTGs in the same way as they are on STSs. That's probably as much as we can say on that market topic. Tomas Skogman: You don't want to disclose at all what -- I understood that the Chinese have not 50% of the market, but 30%, 40% of the market in the U.S. Isn't that right? Marko Tulokas: Not in the RTGs. Not on the RTGs. Tomas Skogman: Okay. Then finally, on electrification, it's like a big theme. Do you have -- all companies that operate within electrification show pretty good growth at the moment. But what of these ones are big end customers to you that you see that they are expanding and ordering cranes from you? Marko Tulokas: Did you say -- I think the line is a little bit bad. Did you say what are the big customers... Tomas Skogman: Electrification -- just generally, electrification is a very strong sector when we look at the engineering. And you have a lot of sales -- I mean, it could be Hitachi, it could be ABB or Siemens or whatever, but what type of products do you see strong demand? Marko Tulokas: Okay. So you're asking our demand from that segment that benefits from the electrification. Sorry, I misunderstood. I understood our electrification of the products now I heard that, of course. Yes. I mean, of course, that is one demand driver that when the whole world is more moving towards electrification, automation and in that way, more sustainable, then that drives demand in different ways, more directly and indirectly. And this indirect demand that is coming from the investments to the more sustainable machines and so forth is driving also demand in these customer segments. They are, however, generally speaking, not as large or as big crane users as many others. But it is true that we -- you can see that positive demand in also in those segments and in some cases, also quite large pieces of equipment. So, I guess, the answer to your question is that, yes, that is certainly a one demand driver also. Tomas Skogman: And what about gas turbines? They are investing massively at the moment, for instance, the gas turbine manufacturers. Marko Tulokas: Gas turbines is one way, of course, I mean, besides wind and nuclear and hydro and a number of other things are one way of generating the electricity. We have seen it historically also that demand moving from one technology to others. And now it is more maybe on that gas and, of course, the wind and nuclear and so forth. So that is true. But on the other hand, it is then being -- there is a reduction on the other side at the same time in the other technologies. And those are typically the users for those sort of equipment for gas turbines, there are other large pieces of equipment or bigger projects because of the technology involved. Operator: The next question comes from Mikael Doepel from Nordea. Mikael Doepel: Just a follow-up on the order intake here. So, I guess, what you're saying is that you had a few big orders in the quarter across the key segments -- basically across all segments actually. But you're also saying that you have a fairly good pipeline of projects, both in Ports and Industrial. Just trying to get my head around looking at the numbers in Q3, EUR 1.1 billion, how would you describe that? Is that normal in your view? Or is it exceptionally strong? Or how should we think about the level of orders in the quarter and when we think ahead from here? Marko Tulokas: I mean, you're referring to quarter 3 now or the following quarter… Mikael Doepel: Yes. Exactly. Marko Tulokas: Yes. I mean that was the same topic that we discussed a moment ago. So I would maybe reiterate, first of all, the really strong funnel is maybe not what we said earlier. So we have a stable funnel and there are opportunities, large opportunities also in the funnel as there has been on the first half of this year. So that hasn't per se changed. And it's a timing question when those actually realize. That is not something extraordinary. They have always existed there and it's just more -- are kind of timing-related topic that when they actually mature and so forth and now particularly for the industrial side of things. So it is -- it was a good quarter also from a bigger project point of view and hence, the large order intake. But as it was stated by Teo also earlier, we had a rather stable order intake in the other -- very stable order intake in the other areas, broadly speaking, too, and growth in the agreement base and growth in basic service, too, which is in that way, many way, the very important thing also or most important thing. Mikael Doepel: Okay. And on that topic, actually, I missed what Teo said in the beginning on Industrial Equipment when you talked about the sequential order intake increase. If you just could repeat that, please, in Industrial Equipment? Teo Ottola: Yes. Sequentially, we actually had a very big increase in process cranes. So in the heavier side, we were more or less flat on the components. So -- and then the standard cranes were slightly down. So standard cranes were actually down both sequentially and year-on-year, whereas then process cranes this time have done well in the third quarter. So it was up both year-on-year as well as Q-on-Q. Marko Tulokas: With not a very good year last year. Teo Ottola: With -- maybe against easier comparables, that is correct. And components, which is maybe the most important one, taking a look at it from the demand point of view, has been, let's say, up year-on-year and flattish sequentially. So, I mean, very hard to conclude anything significant from that one either. Operator: There are no more questions at this time. So I hand the conference back to the speakers for any closing comments. Linda Hakkila: Thank you very much for all your questions. We have covered a lot of different topics, but I would still have one question left here in the chat. So, can you please talk about the ship-to-shore cranes opportunity? Where can you produce outside of China? And do you need any additional CapEx to start new production? Or is it possible to use the existing plants? Marko Tulokas: Well, for the STS cranes, we have and we have had also the possibility to produce those products also in this time zone in several places. And there are 2 locations in APAC and Southeast Asia, where we have also working on a subcontracting-based model to produce STS cranes. So that is nothing new as such. So that is a typical thing for us that we have to make sure that we have several kind of channels in place all the time. Now because of this situation, we have been, of course, accelerating those activities or those projects to find the subcontractors. Linda Hakkila: Thank you, Marko. I think this concludes our session today. So I want to thank you all for following our webcast, and I want to thank Marko and Teo and wish you all a lovely evening. Thank you. Marko Tulokas: Thank you very much. Teo Ottola: Thank you very much.
Operator: Before we begin, I would like to remind you that this conference call may contain forward-looking statements with respect to the future performance and financial condition of Civista Bancshares, Inc. that involves risks and uncertainties. Various factors could cause actual results to be materially different from any future results expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements. These factors are discussed in the company's SEC filings, which are available on the company's website. The company disclaims any obligation to update any forward-looking statements made during the call. Additionally, the management may refer to non-GAAP measures, which are intended to supplement, but not substitute the most directly comparable GAAP measures. The press release also available on the company's website contains the financial and other quantitative information to be discussed today as well as the reconciliation of the GAAP to non-GAAP measures. This call will be recorded and made available on Civista Bancshares' website at www.civb.com. At the conclusion of Mr. Shaffer's remarks, he and the Civista management team will take any questions you may have. Now I will turn the call over to Mr. Shaffer. Dennis Shaffer: Thank you. Good afternoon. This is Dennis Shaffer, President and CEO of Civista Bancshares, and I would like to thank you for joining us for our third quarter 2025 earnings call. I'm joined today by Chuck Parcher, EVP of the company and President of the bank; Rich Dutton, SVP of the company and Chief Operating Officer of the bank; Ian Whinnem, SVP of the company and Chief Financial Officer of the bank and other members of our executive team. This morning, we reported net income for the third quarter of $12.8 million or $0.68 per diluted share, which represents a $4.4 million or 53% increase over the third quarter in 2024 and a $1.8 million or 16% increase over our linked quarter. This also represents an increase in pre-provision net revenue of $4.9 million or 45% over our third quarter in 2024 and a $1.9 million or a 14% increase over our linked quarter. Net interest income for the quarter totaled $34.5 million, which is in line with the linked quarter. As a reminder, last quarter included a onetime $1.6 million adjustment stemming from the conversion of our core lease accounting system. This nonrecurring item boosted net interest income and contributed to our second quarter reported margin of 3.64%. As a result, our net interest margin declined by 6 basis points to 3.58%. However, excluding the prior quarter's adjustment, our margin would have been 3.47%, resulting in an 11 basis point expansion in our margin. Our funding cost for the quarter declined by 5 basis points to 2.27%, which is 34 basis points lower than the previous year's third quarter. In July, we successfully completed our follow-on common stock offering, issuing approximately 3.78 million new shares and raising $80.5 million of new capital. This additional capital will allow us to continue growing our franchise by accelerating organic growth, investing in technology, people and infrastructure. More immediately, we used our new capital to reduce overnight borrowings and to strengthen our tangible common equity that we thought might have weighed on our stock. Earlier this month, we also announced that we have received regulatory approval from both the Federal Reserve and the Ohio Department of Financial Institutions to complete our previously announced merger of Farmers Savings Bank into our bank. Farmers will hold their shareholder meeting to formally approve the merger agreement on November 4, and we plan to close the transaction shortly thereafter. Our teams have already begun preparations for a successful system conversion in early February of 2026. We look forward to welcoming Farmers' employees and customers into the Civista family. Earlier this week, we announced a quarterly dividend of $0.17 per share, which is consistent with the prior quarter. Based on September 30 closing market price of $20.31, this represents a 3.3% yield and a dividend payout ratio of nearly 25%. During the quarter, noninterest income increased $3 million or 46.2% over the linked quarter and was consistent with the third quarter of 2024. The primary driver of the increase from our linked quarter was a $1.4 million increase in fees related to leasing operations. This increase was attributable to a $1 million reduction in fee income resulting from a nonrecurring adjustment in the second quarter of 2025 related to the Civista Leasing and Finance core system conversion, coupled with increased leasing activity in the third quarter of 2025, resulting in a $300,000 increase in revenues. Noninterest income for the quarter was $9.6 million, which was consistent with the prior year's third quarter. We did experience a $494,000 decline in leasing fees on fewer originations. However, this decline was offset by increases in nearly every other noninterest income category. We continue to focus on controlling expenses. For the quarter, noninterest expense was $28.3 million, which represents an increase of $845,000 or 3.1% over the linked quarter. However, the primary driver of the increase was $700,000 in nonrecurring acquisition expenses related to the merger with Farmers Savings. In looking at our noninterest expense compared to the prior year's third quarter, while some of the line items fluctuated, total noninterest expense was virtually unchanged. The main category fluctuations for the third quarter comparisons were compensation expense decreased $700,000 for the third quarter of 2025 compared to the prior year's third quarter due to an increase in the deferral of salaries and wages related to the loan originations in 2025. Marketing expense decreased $300,000 for the third quarter of 2025 compared to the prior year's third quarter, mainly due to a shift to lower cost digital marketing and lower promotional expenses related to advertising and product marketing. These decreases were offset by the aforementioned acquisition expenses that increased noninterest expense by $700,000. Our efficiency ratio for the quarter improved to 61.5% compared to 64.5% for the linked quarter and 70.5% for the prior year third quarter. Our effective tax rate was 18.5% for the quarter and 16.2% year-to-date. Turning our focus to the balance sheet. For the quarter, total loans and leases declined by $55.1 million. Loan demand remained strong across our footprint. However, we experienced over $120 million of payoffs during the quarter. Most of these payoffs were the result of businesses being sold and real estate projects leasing up and moving on to the CMBS permanent market. While we view most of these payoffs as good due to their successful nature, it does present some headwinds when a significant number of loan payoffs pay off in one quarter. While loans were flat or declined in nearly every category, our most significant declines were a $36 million decline in commercial and ag loans and a $48 million decline in nonowner-occupied CRE, both were primarily the result of the previously mentioned payoffs. We did have a $27 million increase in residential loans. The loans we originate for our portfolio continue to be virtually all adjustable rate and our leases all have maturities of 5 years or less. Year-to-date, we have grown our loan portfolio by $14 million. As we have shared on previous calls, we've been pricing commercial and ag opportunities aggressively. It had been more conservative in how we price commercial real estate opportunities, attempting to manage our concentration in the CRE portfolio. Post capital raise, we have become more aggressive in pricing CRE opportunities, which has contributed to substantially increasing our pipelines going into the fourth quarter. That said, we are mindful of making sure we have the funding and capital to support our CRE growth. At September 30, our CRE to risk-based capital ratio was 288%. We have established an internal CRE limit of approximately 325% of our risk-based capital going forward. During the quarter, new and renewed commercial loans were originated at an average rate of 7.25%, residential real estate loans were originated at 6.59%, and loans and leases originated by our leasing division were at an average rate of 9.36%. Loans secured by office buildings make up 4.8% of our total loan portfolio. As we have stated previously, these loans are not secured by high-rise metro office buildings rather they are predominantly secured by single or 2-story offices located outside of our central business districts. Along with year-to-date loan production, our pipelines are strong and our undrawn construction lines were $173 million at September 30. This should allow our organic loan growth to return to an annualized mid-single-digit range for the fourth quarter and increase into the mid to high single digits in 2026, as we leverage Farmers' excess deposits and our loan pipelines continue to build. On the funding side, total deposits grew by $33.4 million, which is meaningful given that we were able to reduce our dependence on brokered deposits by $23 million during the quarter. This represents a $56.4 million increase in core deposit funding during the quarter as we continue to focus on our deposit-generating initiatives. This helped us lower our overall cost of funding by 5 basis points during the quarter to 2.27%. We continue to see migration from interest-bearing demand accounts into higher rate deposit accounts during the quarter, which caused our cost of funds to increase 15 basis points. However, as we previously mentioned, our total funding costs declined by 5 basis points as we executed the funding approach that we messaged on last quarter's call. We continue to focus on growing core funding. In July, we launched our new digital deposit account opening platform. We started slowly limiting online account opening to CDs in markets near our current branch locations where we felt we had some name recognition. We plan to begin offering checking and money market accounts during the fourth quarter. We are also preparing to roll out our deposit product redesign initiative during the fourth quarter. The goal of this initiative will be to streamline deposit accounts that we acquired through various acquisitions and align our product set with our new digital channels. Our deposit base continues to be fairly granular with our average deposit account, excluding CDs, approximately $27,500. Noninterest-bearing deposit and business operating accounts continue to be a focus. In addition to those already mentioned, we have several initiatives underway to gather these type of deposits, including monthly marketing glitches and marketing to low to no deposit balance loan customers, which are yielding some success. At quarter end, our loan-to-deposit ratio was 95.8%, which is down from the linked quarter. We anticipate further reducing this ratio into our targeted range of 90% to 95% once the Farmers acquisition closes. Other than the $509.5 million of public funds with various municipalities across our footprint, we had no deposit concentrations at September 30. We believe our low-cost deposit franchise is one of Civista's most valuable characteristics, contributing significantly to our solid net interest margin and overall profitability and look forward to adding Farmers' low-cost deposit base to our franchise. The declining interest rate environment reduced some of the pressure on bond portfolios. At September 30, our securities were all classified as available for sale and had $44.5 million of unrealized losses associated with them. This represented a reduction in unrealized losses of $8.9 million since December 31, 2024. At September 30, our security portfolio was $657 million, which represented 16% of our balance sheet. And when combined with cash balances, it represents 22.3% of our deposits. We ended the quarter with our Tier 1 leverage ratio at 11%, which is deemed well capitalized for regulatory purposes. Our tangible common equity ratio increased from 6.7% at June 30 to 9.21% at September 30 on our strong earnings and successful capital raise. However, post-closing on our Farmers acquisition, we anticipate our tangible common equity ratio declining to 8.6%, which we feel gives us capital to support organic growth, invest in technology, people and infrastructure. Civista's earnings continue to create capital and our overall goal remains to maintain adequate capital to support organic growth and prudent investment into our company. We will continue to focus on earnings and will balance the payment of dividends and any repurchases with building capital to support our growth. Although we did not repurchase any shares during the quarter, we continue to believe our stock is a value. Despite comments made during some of the large bank earning calls, the economy across our footprint continues to show no real signs of concern. For the most part, our borrowers plan for and continue to successfully navigate tariff and other economic issues specific to their industries. Our credit quality remain strong and our credit metrics remain stable. Civista, like most community banks, has no exposure to shared national credits nor we have significant exposure to floor plans, indirect auto lending or loans to non-depository financial institutions, which seems to be the types of credit that have caused much of the recent concern. For the quarter, criticized credits were virtually unchanged at $93.3 million. The continued strong performance of our credits, coupled with significant loan payoffs resulting in a minimal $200,000 provision for the quarter. Our ratio of our allowance for credit losses to loans is 1.30% at September 30, which is consistent with the 1.29% at December 31, 2024. In addition, our allowance for credit losses to nonperforming loans is 177% at September 30, an improvement when compared to 122% at December 31, 2024. In summary, it's been a very busy and productive quarter. We reported strong earnings that were 53% higher than the previous year's quarter. We grew pre-provision net revenue by 45% over the previous year's quarter. After adjusting for onetime items, we expanded our margin by 11 basis points over our linked quarter. We continue to gather new customers, increasing core deposits by $87 million year-to-date. We had a very successful capital raise and our teams are working towards the successful integration of our new Farmers team members and customers. That's a pretty productive quarter and one that I believe sets us up for a strong finish to the year and one that should get us off to a strong start in 2026. I cannot be more bullish for Civista and our shareholders. So thank you for attention -- your attention this afternoon and your investment. And now we will be happy to address any questions you may have. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Ryan Payne from D.A. Davidson. Ryan Payne: Maybe starting with the margin. How do you see that shaking out on a rate sensitivity basis, if we do see a few more cuts before the end of the year? And any expected impact from further cuts if we kind of think into 2026? Ian Whinnem: Ryan, it's Ian. So the way that we're really looking at it right now is just a cut in October, another cut in December. And then we're still working through kind of that 2026 guidance. At least from a baseline of -- if there's a cut in October and December, also with the addition of Farmers coming in, we are anticipating the margin to expand about another 5 basis points in the fourth quarter from where the third quarter was. Ryan Payne: Got it. Helpful. And moving to capital. So on capital priorities post close of Farmers, it sounds like that will be reserved for organic growth, and you will remain opportunistic on repurchases. But maybe on M&A, how conversations are going? And has the deal kind of brought in more inbounds or interest? Dennis Shaffer: No, I wouldn't say it has. I mean, I think really, we're really focused right now on growing organically, first off, and we want to increase our tangible book value. We want to continue to see our earnings per share grow. M&A can be tough at times. For instance, last year, we took -- looked at 6 deals, and we passed on all 6 of those deals because they just didn't meet our criteria. So we feel we're pretty disciplined when we evaluate an M&A transaction, and we're going to continue to stay disciplined as opportunities present themselves. The Farmers deal checked a lot of boxes for us and gave us some much needed liquidity. So that's why we went ahead and did that deal. There's been other deals announced here even this week in Ohio. That certainly probably does spur some interest. But really, the main reason we raised the capital was to help support our organic growth and allow us to make the necessary investments, like I mentioned, in technology and people and infrastructure. Our real focus is really on deepening our relationships and growing fee income, expanding our digital services and bringing new products and verticals because we want to gain just a greater share of our customers' wallet, and we want to focus on attracting new customers to the bank. So our data tells us that customers with strong relationships bring in about 4x the revenue compared to other customers. So in order to deepen those relationships and bring in those customers, we have to make capital investments in things like artificial intelligence and profitability tools. And I think these investments will enable us to precisely target our best opportunities, improve the effectiveness of our cross-selling efforts improve retention and just optimize profitability by putting these pricing tools in the hands of our sales team. So that's just one example of how we plan to use the capital. I think another example that we've talked about on previous calls is how we've been using it to make investments in the robotic process automation. So we'll continue to focus on just leveraging that type of automation to help us grow the bank while just improving our operating leverage. We've had some success with that, and we're going to continue to make improvements because I think that just makes us a more efficient organization. So again, we will look at M&A if it meets our criteria, but our main focus is really to organically grow the bank and just increase our earnings. There's just a lot of disruption right now in our markets, and we feel there's really a lot of organic opportunity for us as we continue to make the necessary capital investments to take advantage of those opportunities. Ryan Payne: Great. Got it. Last one for me, just a housekeeping item. The effective tax rate coming in higher than historical, anything impacting that this quarter? And would you expect to stay in kind of this range going forward? Ian Whinnem: Yes. We ended up increasing our expected earnings for the remainder of the year. So to balance that out, it did increase in the third quarter. On a year-to-date basis, we're at that 16% to 16.5% range. We anticipate that for the fourth quarter. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Brendan Nosal from Hovde Group. Brendan Nosal: Maybe just starting off here on the outlook for loan growth. Hear you loud and clear on the mid-single-digit pace for the fourth quarter and then mid- to high across 2026. Can you just kind of talk about your confidence in achieving that given that year-to-date loan balances are pretty flat. So that's a pretty meaningful ramp. Just talk about why you have confidence in your ability to achieve that. Charles Parcher: Sure, Brendan. This is Chuck. If you look historically, we've always been a great loan generating operation. And with our -- where our real estate concentrations were earlier in the year, we really weren't -- I don't want to say we weren't competitive, but we weren't very aggressive in trying to bring new business into the bank. And it kind of caught up with us a little bit here in the third quarter where we had a bunch of expected payoffs. As Dennis mentioned, most of them what I would call good payoffs, a couple of companies selling and a few projects going out to the permanent market. But our pipeline right now is sitting higher than it was last year, significantly higher than it was earlier in the year. So we feel good with the momentum going into the fourth quarter. We know we've got a few more payoffs that we're kind of staring out in the fourth quarter, but not to the same level that we had in the third. So we feel good about looking out to that mid-single-digit growth going forward. Dennis Shaffer: And Brendan, I would mention that I think it's important to note on the payoffs, that we had several of our business clients that we were really successful in maintaining some of those deposits, both at the bank and at the wealth management level in areas of the bank. So even though we lost some of the interest income from the payoffs of loan, we maintain that relationship, and we're making money in other areas of the bank. So I think that's important to note that kind of -- I sat in our wealth and trust and wealth meeting yesterday and a couple of those loan payoffs, we've got significant wealth related. We're now managing that money that the business owner received. So we are making some money from that. So I just think it's important to note that we didn't include that in our earlier comments. Brendan Nosal: Yes. That's helpful color. I appreciate it. Maybe moving over to the fee income. Gain on sale of loans was up significantly for the quarter. Can you just kind of decompose that into 1-to-4 family gains versus lease gain on sale and how we should think about that line item going forward? Ian Whinnem: Yes, absolutely. So in the third quarter, roughly $1.1 million gain on sale. It's about $850,000 of it was mortgage, $300,000 of it was CLF or our leasing side of things. Of the -- there was an additional $300,000 on that for gain on disposal of equipment on the leasing side. So that's kind of that lumpy stuff that we end up seeing as opposed to the more traditional gain on sale. Charles Parcher: And Brendan, I will say, I think probably like almost every other community bank in the country, we really do feel like we'll see a major uptick in gain on sale if we see the 30-year mortgage refinance rates go under 6%. We've got a -- I think we've got a backlog of what we would consider a lot of refinance opportunity if we do see those rates dip down for a while. Brendan Nosal: Okay. Okay. Good. And then while I have you, just maybe on fee income overall. I know that it tends to be volatile quarter-to-quarter. And this felt like a particularly strong quarter versus earlier in the year. Any thoughts on the overall level of fee income to wrap up the year? Ian Whinnem: Yes. So if we take that $9.6 million that we had in the third quarter, if we back out the BOLI and the security gains, getting us down to about $9 million, we anticipate being about $9.2 million in the fourth quarter, and that would include about $50,000 from Farmers. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Terry McEvoy from Stephens. Terence McEvoy: Maybe a question on the decline in loan yields in the third quarter relative to the second quarter. Could you just talk about, is that just a mix shift you're building the residential portfolio, some pricing competition? And then looking out into the fourth quarter, do you see an opportunity to expand loan yields kind of on a core basis before the merger just on some fixed asset repricing? Ian Whinnem: Yes. So just a reminder, Terry, this is Ian, in the first quarter -- or sorry, in the second quarter, we had a nonrecurring item that was in the interest income, which is about $1 billion. And so if that gets excluded, then we end up being much more normalized on the yields on loans. Charles Parcher: And Terry, to your point, we just got the 9/30 report. We're watching very closely the amount of loans that will reprice over the next 12 months, and we've got about $225 million that will reprice here over the next 12 months in those adjustable rate most of them 5- and 3-year mortgages. So we do feel we'll see a pickup in yield on that $225 million as we fight a little bit of the probably floating rate stuff going down during the same time period. Terence McEvoy: Great. Thanks for the reminder and the update there. Much appreciated. And then I believe you said the systems conversion early February, could you maybe talk about the timing of the cost saves? And in the back half of next year, do you expect that to be fully in the run rate? Ian Whinnem: Yes. So we anticipate, as you mentioned, the system conversion occurring, that reduces a lot of the contract expenses for processing as well as some of the staffing reductions will take place following that deal. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Tim Switzer from KBW. Timothy Switzer: Most might have been answered already, but could you -- are you able to tie down at all when in November, you guys are expecting to close Farmers? Is it beginning of the quarter, towards the end? Just to kind of help us with the modeling. Dennis Shaffer: Yes. We hope -- they have their shareholders' meeting on November 4, and we hope to close it shortly thereafter, definitely probably before the middle of the month. So if you're modeling, you're going to have at least 45 days for the quarter. We'll have both banks together. That would probably be fairly conservative. We hope to be a few days ahead of that, but to be safe on your modeling. Timothy Switzer: Got you. Okay. And then the NIM guidance has been very helpful. Are you able to quantify at all what maybe the purchase accounting impact is on the NIM and what you guys expect from like a full quarter basis? Ian Whinnem: Yes. Let me see if I have that handy. I do not have that in front of me actually. Dennis Shaffer: We'll shoot that out to all of the analysts on the call today. Timothy Switzer: Okay. And then I was wondering what you guys are seeing in terms of like loan competition on pricing in your markets, any kind of changes there recently? Charles Parcher: Tim, I think everybody has gotten a little bit more aggressive. We're seeing that the rates kind of fall down below that 6.5% level, probably somewhere between the 6% and 6.5% level on the better deals. So it's pretty competitive across -- I wouldn't tell you there's any one market here in Ohio or Indiana that's any less or more competitive. They're all very competitive right now, both on the deposit and on the loan side. Dennis Shaffer: And I would say, Tim, the disruption in the marketplace is obviously, I think, going to help us. You've got some of the bigger players like Huntington and Fifth Third, who have announced some deals out of state. And their focus is probably -- their attention is elsewhere. And then we still -- the premier WesBanco thing is less than a year old, and we just saw the Middlefield announcement yesterday. All that disruption really helps us, so in that change. So we think that will benefit us both from a loan and deposit standpoint. Timothy Switzer: Okay. Yes, that's helpful. And outside of the disruption that you mentioned, do you have a sense for the loan pricing specifically, how much of that the competition is being driven by either slowing demand from borrowers versus simply the lower rates from the Fed? Charles Parcher: I think the demand has been pretty consistent. I mean, as I said earlier, we weren't quite as aggressive in the first half of the year just based on where we're sitting out on the balance sheet. But I would tell you demand has been pretty consistent in Ohio all year. And we -- knock on wood, the economy here, especially in the 3Cs in Ohio has been really good, and we don't see that changing anytime soon. Dennis Shaffer: Yes. We feel the economy and our customers have really adapted to some of the conditions, as I stated during earlier comments. I think it's probably more driven by rate than anything else. I mean the lower rates by the Fed and stuff, that's going to hopefully spur a little bit more activity as well. Charles Parcher: And I think there's -- I do think -- especially some of our competition, I think there's a lot more confidence around commercial real estate than there was 12 to 18 months ago. I think everybody was a little bit leery of it, which helped us keep rates up on certain things. But now I think that's started to subside, obviously, and rates are starting to shoot back down. Ian Whinnem: Tim, this is Ian. On the accretion question that you had, it would be about $150,000 in the fourth quarter. Timothy Switzer: Okay. So then when we get into the full quarter in Q1, that would be $300,000. Ian Whinnem: Yes, in that range, maybe $280,000. Operator: There are no further questions at this time. I would now like to turn the conference back to Mr. Shaffer. Please go ahead. Dennis Shaffer: Thank you. And in closing, I just want to thank everyone for joining us for today's call and for your investment in Civista. I remain really confident that this quarter's list of accomplishments and strong financial results and just our disciplined approach to managing the company positions us really well for long-term future success. I look forward to talking to you all again in a few months to share our year-end results. So thank you for your time today. Operator: This concludes today's conference call. Thank you for participating. You may now disconnect.
Fernando Fernandez: Hello, and welcome to Unilever's Third Quarter Trading Statement for 2025. Thank you for being with us today. I am joined here by Srini Phatak. Srini's appointment as Chief Financial Officer was confirmed by the Board last month, following an extensive search process. Srini's vast experience and expertise are great assets for Unilever, and I am really delighted we will keep building on the strong partnership that we have formed. In a moment, Srini will take you through the detail of the third quarter results. First of all, let me highlight the key elements of our performance as I see it. We have delivered a good quarter with 4% underlying sales growth and acceleration of volume growth to 1.7% for Unilever, excluding Ice Cream, despite subdued markets. Growth was broad-based across all business groups, with each of them delivering underlying sales growth above 3%. This performance keeps Unilever on track to meet our full year outlook and is evidence of our powerful innovation, improved execution and significant shift into premium segments and fast-growing channels. It is also fully in line with the priorities we have set for the business. For example, our major growth engines, Beauty & Wellbeing and Personal Care delivered particularly strong performances. Our power brands continued to outperform, delivering 4.4% growth in the quarter with volumes up 1.7% for total group and 2.2% excluding. We also saw a continuation of sustained strength in developed markets, particularly North America. Volume-led growth in that region was 5.5%, and it was driven by Personal Care and improved performance in Prestige Beauty, and once again, exceptional delivery in Wellbeing. Europe grew underlying sales by a competitive 1.1% despite a strong comparator. Structurally, our business in Europe continued to improve and strengthen. Our emerging market business step up with 4.1% USG led by a return to growth in Indonesia and China. Overall, emerging markets grew well despite the short-term impact of the goods and service tax reforms in India and some challenges in Latin America. We have delivered these results while preparing our Ice Cream business for the demerger, which we expect to be completed before the end of the year. The time line is being revised as a result of the U.S. government shutdown impacting the work of the SEC. Shin will say more about the final stages towards the merger in a moment. In summary, a positive set of results this quarter that reaffirm our confidence in the steps we have taken to make Unilever a true marketing and sales machine. They will continue to guide and inform our actions over the quarters ahead. With that, I will hand over to Srini to take you through the third quarter results in detail. And after that, I will come back to say something about the remainder of the year and beyond and also provide a brief wrap-up. We will then take questions. First of all, over to Srini. Srinivas Phatak: Thank you, Fernando. Unilever's underlying sales growth in third quarter was 3.9% with broad-based progress across the business groups. Underlying price growth was 2.4% and volume contributed 1.5%. This resulted in a two-year compounded annual volume growth rate of 2.6%. We expect the Ice Cream demerger to be completed in 2025. In this context, excluding Ice Creams, our underlying sales grew 4%. Volume in the quarter was 1.7% compared to 1.1% in the previous quarter. All the four business groups delivered positive volume growth with a two-year compounded annual volume growth rate of 2.4%. Our Power Brands, which represent over 75% of our turnover, grew 4.4% in the third quarter, including 1.7% from volume. Power Brands, excluding Ice Cream, delivered 2.2% volume growth, in line with our medium-term volume ambition. Strong performances included double-digit growth from Vaseline, Liquid I.V., Nutrafol, Cif and Domestos and high single-digit growth from Comfort, OLLY and Cornetto. Dove, our biggest brand, keeps outperforming the market with a 6% USG in the quarter and 8% year-to-date. Before turning to the business groups, let me first provide some color on our performance across different geographies. Developed markets continue to perform strongly. North America grew underlying sales by 5.5% with 5.4% from volume, reflecting the continued benefits of our multiyear portfolio transformation. Growth was driven by strong performances in our Personal Care and Wellbeing brands, underpinned by premium innovations. This marks the fifth consecutive quarter of robust volume-led growth in North America, supported by share gains across key categories and sustained brand investment. Europe grew underlying sales by 1.1% with a 0.6% decline in volume and 1.7% growth from price. Our performance was broad-based and robust given high comparators of over 6% growth. We gained share across major markets, power brands and multiyear premium innovations, including the rollout of Wonder Wash and Cif Infinite Clean continued to perform well. Asia Pacific Africa delivered 6.8% underlying sales growth with 3.5% from volume and 3.1% from price. This is a clear acceleration versus the first half, reflecting an improved performance in key markets and a stronger execution across categories. Indonesia returned to growth as we saw the benefits of the extensive business reset we have undertaken. Strengthened brand plans, sharper channel execution and renewed customer partnerships are driving improving trends. Sequential improvements in run rate position Indonesia for sustained progress into 2026. In China, while the market environment remains subdued, we delivered low single-digit growth, supported by innovations within our key brands and interventions in pricing. The macro environment in India continues to be favorable. Earlier in the year, personal income tax and interest rates were lowered. In September, the government reduced GST or sales taxes to 5% on around 40% of our portfolio, making the affected products roughly 10% cheaper. While these changes are expected to improve consumption through higher disposable income and improved sentiment, quarter 3 sales were temporarily impacted as trade reduced inventories and consumers delayed purchases in anticipation of lower prices. Trading conditions are expected to normalize from November onwards. Underlying performance was driven by premium portfolios in Beauty & Wellbeing and Personal Care. Turning to Latin America. Underlying sales declined by 2.5% in third quarter with a 7.3% decline in volume, partly offset by a 5.2% from price. Markets across Latin America are experiencing a broad-based softening, reflecting continued macroeconomic pressure on category growth and consumer demand. In Brazil, our focus remains on restoring competitiveness in laundry, where we are seeing early signs of progress. In deodorants, we continued to gain share in a declining market, impacted by a temporary shift in product formats. Our Foods business delivered double-digit growth in Hellmann's, supported by the continued success of its flavored mayonnaise range. In Argentina, the macroeconomic backdrop remains unstable amid ongoing political uncertainty. We expect to see improvement in the region during 2026. Beauty & Wellbeing underlying sales growth was 5.1%, driven by strong volume growth of 2.3% and 2.7% from price. Our volume momentum remains very solid with a two-year CAGR of 4%. Dove Hair, Vaseline, Hourglass, K18, Liquid I.V. and Nutrafol, all delivered double-digit volume-led growth, reflecting the strength of our premium innovations and disciplined execution. Hair Care was broadly flat. Growth in our premium portfolio was offset by declines in Clear and Sunsilk, which were impacted by soft market conditions in China and Brazil and by lower TRESemmé volumes in the U.S., where we have pricing and promotional corrections in place to support improvement. Core skin grew mid-single digit, led by Vaseline, which delivered double-digit growth in both sales and volume. Growth was supported by premium innovations such as the new Cloud soft light moisturizer in India. Prestige Beauty grew mid-single digit, led by volume as the category showed gradual recovery. Performance remained mixed with Hourglass and K18 continuing to grow double digit, while Paula's Choice and Dermalogica returned to low single-digit growth after declines in the first half. Wellbeing continued its exceptional run, delivering strong double-digit growth. Power Brands, Nutrafol and Liquid I.V. sustained their outstanding performance, supported by deep innovation funnel, increased brand investment and selective international expansion. Personal Care underlying sales growth was 4.1%, driven by 1% volume and 3.1% price. The two-year compounded annual volume growth rate of 2% reflects the continued resilience across our core categories, supported by strong growth in Asia Pacific, Africa and in North America, which was driven by Dove. Premium innovations in deodorants and skin cleansing continued to lead growth with the rollout of whole body deodorants and the expansion of premium body wash driving strong consumer engagement and share gains. Deodorants grew low single digit, led by Dove in North America. Growth was partly offset by weaker performance in Latin America, reflecting a decline in category volumes and a temporary shift in product formats. Skin cleansing grew low single digit with commodity-related pricing weighing on volumes. Dove continued to perform well, supported by its premium innovations and the launch of a limited edition seasonal body wash ranges. Lifebuoy grew low single digit. Oral Care delivered high single-digit growth led by our power brands, CloseUp and Pepsodent with strong momentum in Asia Pacific Africa. In September, we further strengthened our Personal Care portfolio with the completion of acquisition of Dr. Squatch, expanding our presence in the fast-growing premium male grooming segment in North America. Home Care underlying sales grew 3.1% in the third quarter with 2.5% from volume and 0.6% from price. Volume growth stepped up versus the previous quarter, driven by sustained performance in Europe and improving trends across several key markets in Asia Pacific, Africa. Fabric cleaning was flat overall. Europe grew mid-single digit as the rollout of Wonder Watch continued to drive volume growth and strengthen our competitiveness. Wonder Wash will reach 30 markets by the end of the year. This was partially offset by a decline in Brazil, where the market conditions remained soft and we implemented corrective pricing actions. Home & Hygiene grew mid-single digit with balanced contributions from both price and volume. Growth was led by Cif and Domestos, both delivering double-digit performances. Cif Infinite Clean, a multipurpose cleaner powered by probiotics has now been rolled out across major European markets and is delivering strong early results. Fabric enhancers grew high single digit. Comfort delivered strong volume-led growth, supported by the continuous success of its Crystal Fresh technology. Foods delivered growth ahead of the market with underlying sales of 3.4% with 1.3% from volume and 2.1% from price. Growth was broad-based across regions, led by strong brand execution. Condiments delivered mid-single-digit growth with positive volume and price. Hellmann's maintained its strong momentum with mid-single-digit growth led by volume. This was supported by competitive growth in developed markets and by a particularly strong double-digit growth in Brazil, where Hellmann's is growing from strength to strength. Cooking Aids grew low single digit with positive volume and price. Knorr and Unilever Food Solutions both delivered low single-digit growth amidst subdued market conditions. Ice Creams underlying sales grew 3.7% in the third quarter with flat volume and 3.7% from price. Volumes were flat against a mid-single-digit comparator last year with a two-year compounded annual volume growth rate of 3.4%. Growth continues to be competitive, reflecting strong innovation, ongoing operational improvements and disciplined execution across regions. Cornetto led with high single-digit growth, while Ben & Jerry's grew mid-single digits, supported by the launch of new Sundae flavors and a larger shareable pack format that is expanding the consumption occasions. Now let me take you through the latest update on the Ice Cream demerger. All the preparatory work for the demerger remains on track with the shareholder circular published on 2nd October and the approval of share consolidation received on 21st of October. Due to the U.S. government shutdown, the SEC is currently unable to declare the U.S. registration statement effective, resulting in revisions to the original time line. We remain committed to and are confident of implementing the demerger in 2025, and we will share further updates as soon as practicable once there is greater clarity on the timing. Let me also now explain how the demerger and the share consolidation will work in practice. As a part of the demerger, shareholders will receive one share in the Magnum Ice Cream Company for every five Unilever shares they hold. Following the demerger, we will carry out a consolidation of Unilever shares to maintain comparability between Unilever's share price and key per share metrics before and after the demerger. This is a standard technical adjustment in transactions of this nature, and the final ratio will be confirmed shortly after TMICC shares begin trading. Importantly, Unilever is expected to pay quarter 4 dividend in full, ensuring continuity for our shareholders through the completion of the Ice Cream demerger. Turnover for the third quarter was EUR 14.7 billion, down 3.5% year-on-year. Underlying sales growth of 3.9% was more than offset by a negative currency impact of 6.1%. We now expect an adverse currency impact on full year turnover of around 6% and a 30 basis points on the underlying operating margin. Portfolio changes also reduced reported turnover with an impact of negative 1% from net disposals. Acquisitions contributed 0.5%, led by strong double-digit growth from K18 and Wild and supported by the addition of Dr. Squatch following the completion of its acquisition in September. This was more than offset by a negative 1.6% impact from portfolio disposals, including The Vegetarian Butcher, which was completed in September. With that, over to you, Fernando. Fernando Fernandez: Thank you, Srini. Let me conclude by saying something about how we see the remainder of the year. In short, our outlook is unchanged, and that applies both including and excluding Ice Cream. In either case, we expect underlying sales growth to be within our 3% to 5% multiyear range. Growth in the second half will be ahead of the first half. This despite some softness in certain markets, notably Latin America. Overall, we expect we will continue to outperform our markets with a strong competitive performance in developed markets and an improved performance in emerging markets. Volume growth in quarter 4 should be at least in line with quarter 3. On the bottom line, we continue to expect an improvement in underlying operating margin for the full year, with second half margins of at least 18.5% or at least 19.5%, excluding Ice Cream. Of course, we will continue to monitor external events closely in what remains an uncertain environment. Finally, on the back of a strong quarter, we are looking ahead to the rest of the year and into 2026 with confidence and resolve. Unilever is changing fast and the strategic priorities we have set out. The portfolio is stronger with more beauty, more wellbeing, more personal care. This quarter saw Beauty & Wellbeing up 5.1% and Personal Care up 4.1%. The shift to premium and digital commerce is accelerating, both organically and through M&A as per the recent acquisitions of Wild and Dr. Squatch. Our anchor markets are delivering superior growth. Our U.S. business has now posted five consecutive quarters of strong volume-led growth. The performance expectation we are placing on people within the company are higher with clear accountability and real differentiation in our incentive outcomes. And our commitment to make Unilever a marketing and sales machine permeates everything we are doing from the acceleration of desire at scale in elevating our brand portfolio to the significant investment we are making to step up execution and excellence in every part of the business. In short, we are crystal clear on what we need to do and where we want to invest. We will not be diverted from these priorities. As we look ahead, it is clear that some markets and categories will remain soft for a while, but we have put Unilever on a stronger footing and are increasingly confident in our ability to continue outperforming markets, whatever the conditions. With that, thank you for listening, and we are looking forward to taking your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Jemma Spalton: Our first question comes from Warren Ackerman at Barclays. Warren Ackerman: Warren here at Barclays. So I've got two and one housekeeping. The housekeeping one on the clarification on volume, at least Q3 level. Can you just confirm, Fernando, you're confirming also 2% volume growth into '26 as well. So just looking forward. And my two questions are, firstly, North America, really super growth, very impressive. Can you talk a bit about the growth of the wellbeing -- the Prestige and Wellbeing unit within North America, there's been some investor concerns that Liquid I.V. might be plateauing, and you've seen a recovery in the Prestige piece. Maybe you can talk a little bit about what's happening with Paula's Choice and Dermalogica and sort of the look forward in North America. And then the second one on Latin America. I mean, clearly, the macro is tough, but there seems to be some self-inflicted issues in Brazilian laundry powder, Brazilian deodorants. Can you explain a little bit your actions you're taking, what learnings you've made? I think you've been in the region yourself. Is there a risk that you've taken too much pricing in Latin America to hit hard currency FX? And what reassurance can you give us that we won't see that in other EMs? And as we look forward on LatAm, can you maybe give some clarity on the pathway forward and the growth you expect in LatAm in '26? Fernando Fernandez: Thank you, Warren, and good morning, everyone. Well, let me start by North America, and I feel the performance that we are having there with five consecutive quarters now of volume growth of 4% and at a time in which markets are visibly tougher there, I believe it's a reflection of the profound transformation we have done in our portfolio, the setup of a U.S. for U.S. innovation model and a huge focus in strengthening relations with key retailers. I mentioned that in the last call, for the first time in many, many years, we have ranked #1 in Personal Care, #1 in Foods and #3 in Beauty in the most popular survey with the top 130 retailers in U.S., and that basically show our ability to make markets in that region. Regarding performance of Beauty & Wellbeing there, it was really strong. Wellbeing continue having an exceptional performance in the U.S., double-digit growth both in Liquid I.V. and Nutrafol. Both brands are approaching there the $1 revenue mark for the year. Prestige Beauty has improved after a relatively flattish first half. We delivered mid-single-digit growth. But we don't take that as a new trend, I would say. Very good growth in our glass, very good growth in K18 in the most premium part of Prestige and Paula's Choice and Dermalogica are back to growth, but low single digits. So these are our main Prestige beauty brands there. But also our core in skin care was solid with very, very good performance in Dove and Vaseline there. We have some issues in hair care in the U.S. We decided to release some brands that is having some impact in our growth in care in the U.S., the likes of AXE Hair and Love Beauty and Planet are in process of delisting. That was a conscious decision. We didn't believe that these brands were sustainable, and we decided to delist them. About Latin America. Well, indeed, it has been a very weak quarter for us in Latin America. It's a combination of markets under pressure due to a deteriorating macro broad-based price increases to deal with currency depreciation. And as I have already mentioned previously, we scored a couple of phone calls there. The three major Latin American economies are under pressure, different reasons. In Brazil, the level of household debt and the interest rates are extremely high, remittances in Mexico going down, Argentina contraction in consumption run against the local currency in the short term. And as a result of that, we have seen the markets really going down significantly. If you look in volumes in H1 '24, volume growth of 7%, H2 3%, flat in H1, negative in quarter 3. But there are definitely a couple of goals. In laundry, Brazil, we went too far in our pricing. Historically, our competitors in powders in Brazil tend to follow us in a period of 8 to 12 weeks. That was not the case. We have corrected that, and we are starting to see significant improvements in our sellout. And on top of that, the market is really shifting very quickly to liquids, and we are introducing in quarter 3. We have introduced in quarter 3, our very successful European wonder was mix. So we expect competitive in laundry to progressively improve. And the other big category we have in Brazil, particularly deodorants in that category, we have been gaining substantial market share in the territory of 200 basis points there. But we did boosting our contact applicator formats at the expense of aerosol and this has had some negative consequence in the overall market growth because the revenue per use of aerosol is significantly larger than the one of contact applicators. So the negative growth in aerosol format is crucial. The plans are in place, and there are clear learnings from these two issues that we have had, and we will be sure of not repeating that anywhere else. So that's basically to say about Latin America. We don't expect -- we expect that we will see improvement in Latin America during 2026. At this stage, I don't want to commit to more than that. Regarding the long-term ambition, we continue thinking that it's absolutely possible for us to deliver 2% market volume growth. In the long run, our combined categories and geographical footprint offers around 2% market volume growth, even if at this moment, it is more in the 1% territory. But we are outperforming markets very clearly in Europe and U.S. And in D&E, we see a significant progress, particularly in Asia. Jemma Spalton: Our next question comes from Guillaume at UBS. Guillaume Gerard Delmas: Two questions for me, please. The first one is on pricing. I mean we're having a relatively benign commodity cost environment. You also flagged a relatively weak consumer environment in some key countries like Brazil, where you mentioned some pricing adjustments. So given this backdrop, do you expect price growth to remain at current levels or to actually come down over the coming quarters? So any color on your price growth outlook would be very helpful. And then my second question is on Europe. I mean, volume growth turned slightly negative in the quarter. Could you talk a little bit about the drivers behind this? Is it just down to this very elevated base of comparison? And so nothing to see here volume to return to positive territory from next quarter? Or on an underlying basis, are you maybe seeing some changes in category growth or in the consumer behavior? Fernando Fernandez: Thank you, Guillaume, and Srini will help me with the pricing question. In Europe, we have positive volume when you exclude Ice Cream in the quarter. So against a very tough comparator. We delivered 7% volume growth in Europe in the same quarter last year. So the comparator was very, very tough. I believe you read the same information that we read and you see that we are gaining significant share in Europe, particularly in Home Care and Personal Care that are two of our most sizable business in Europe. So our innovation in the premium segment is really working very, very well there. We are very confident about our prospects in Europe, but the comparator was very, very tough. Our share gain is solid. It is broad-based. In the top five markets in Europe, we are gaining share. We are very pleased overall with the performance that we have structurally in Europe. In the case of pricing, and Srini will help me with that, it's true commodity cost is relatively benign with the exception of a few family of materials, palm oil in particularly is increasing significantly. This has significant implications in HPC liquids, home care, personal care and beauty liquids and also in skin cleansing bars. Aluminum is going up. But I feel it's important also for you to remember that wage inflation is significant. You see wage inflation in Europe and in U.S. in the territory of 4%, and we need to cover for that also. Srini? Srinivas Phatak: So, two additional elements to that, Guillaume. Clearly, the inflationary pressures, as Fernando said in skin cleansing are higher. However, when you look at something like a home care, it's quite benign with crude sitting at around the $60 mark. Having said that, when we really look at the total net material inflation, which is a composition of the materials and ForEx devaluation. That's another important element to see that in all the emerging markets, the currencies have devalued, and therefore, there is an imported inflation. Give or take, we see that net material cost should be about EUR 0.5 billion for this year, and we expect similar levels for next year given the information that we have now. This will really warrant a sensible pricing. This is lower than what we have seen the historical average of EUR 200 million to EUR 300 but it's a little better than that, but obviously much lower than what we experienced through the COVID period. So, in essence, if you really think about those levels of inflation, there is price in the market and there is price clearly in some categories. The only last color is that when it comes to beauty, given the value chain, I think the bigger impact for us will really come from price and mix together because with premium innovations and what we are bringing to the market, we have the propensity and the ability to price up, and we will do that in a sensible manner. Jemma Spalton: Our next question comes from Olivier at Goldman Sachs. Jean-Olivier Nicolai: Just two questions, please. First on within Hair Care and particularly in the U.S., TRESemmé has been struggling for a couple of quarters. Is that still expected to continue into Q4? Or has it improved already by the end of Q3? And how much of an impact it had on price/mix in the U.S.? And then just lastly on Liquid I.V., could you perhaps give us a bit of an update on the global rollout of the brand in how many countries you're expecting to launch it, not necessarily obviously in Q4, but also into 2026? And which geographies will be the priority? Fernando Fernandez: Thank you, Olivier. Regarding Hair Care in the U.S., this year, we entered with two significant relaunches. One was the Dove hair one and the other one was TRESemmé, both imply significant repositioning of growth brands. In the case of Dove hair has been an incredible success, growing double digit in the U.S., significant reposition in terms of pricing, much closer to the average of the market. In the case of TRESemmé, that didn't work in the same way. But we have corrected that. And in the quarter 3, TRESemmé is back to growth with particular good performance in styling. So we are confident in the trend that we are seeing in TRESemmé and in hair care in the U.S. The main issue in U.S., I would say, when you look at hair care performance has been the delisting of some of the brands, but this has been a conscious decision. In the case of Liquid I.V., excellent performance in the U.S., as I mentioned before, the brand is really approaching the EUR 1 billion mark with double-digit growth in another quarter. The brand has been rolled now to eight markets, particularly in Western Europe, Australia. We are starting to introduce the brand in Urban India. The initial results are very, very good. Of course, Canada was launched last year also. Jemma Spalton: Our next question comes from David Hayes at Jefferies. David Hayes: So, two from us as well. So, firstly, just on kind of broader questions, I guess. So just in terms of the margin levels, India, Indonesia, you're seeing signs of improvement, but you've obviously taken quite a dramatic step in terms of profitability as you invest in those areas. So, the question is, is that something you need to do more in other markets, I guess going back to the hard currency question that we had earlier, 2019 margins, which is kind of where you're getting back to, you've had two previous CEOs say that was too high. Why is that the right level now? And is something -- does something needs to be done in other markets to try and restimulate the volume growth as you've seen in those two areas? And the second one, just to pick up on what you talked about a few weeks ago in Boston. The eight power brands focused for the One Unilever markets, you talked about not really supporting the other brands. Just to get a bit more detail on that, is that a case of no A&P spend at all beyond those eight brands in those markets? Can you quantify what percentage of sales that leaves not being supported? And can you talk about what impact you think that might have on those brands in terms of a headwind to growth for a period of time? Fernando Fernandez: Thank you, David. I'll take Power Brands and then Srini will talk about regarding margin. Power Brands in One Unilever market represent around 80% of the revenue. We want to take that into 90%, 95%. This doesn't mean that we will not use other levers of support of our local brands in these markets or that we will let these brands to die. But definitely, we don't want complexity in our strategic move that we are doing. Our performance in One Unilever market has been very strong, consistently strong during this year. We have delivered another quarter of 4.9% with good volumes, excellent performance in most of the geographies. And definitely, we are really concentrating our efforts in rolling out our strongest brands, usually three in beauty, two in Personal Care, one in Home Care and one in Foods in most of these markets, and this is a conscious decision that we are doing. Of course, when there are local jewels, we will protect them. We will support them. We will use our drivers of demand in all these cases. Margin? Srinivas Phatak: So, David, I think it's important to appreciate what is different in the way we are thinking about our profit and profitability. The six or seven levers that we are today exercising are significantly different. We've talked about the importance of volume growth that the 2% volume growth of the anchor actually then starts to provide a leverage for us across the value chain, and that starts to become an important contributor. Given the work that we have done, whether it's in terms of the portfolio mix, the geography mix, the channel mix or the format mix, mix is actually becoming a component, which gives about 25 to 30 basis points on a regular basis for us. In the past, we have spoken to you about how we have reshaped the whole supply chain space, how we are actually buying, whether it's technology, whether it's game theory. Project Lighthouse is consistently enabling us beat the market inflation by about 1%. When we look at the controlled cost element to it, again, serious amount of work which is happening in terms of reshaping the network of manufacturing and logistics, and we can go on. You've also seen how we have reshaped our overall overheads trajectory where we have actually completed, we are well ahead on our productivity program. And actually, now we are driving productivity as a habit and a culture in the organization where our costs will be lower than our revenue growth on a consistent multiyear basis. And we are deploying capital, more than 55% to 60% of our capital today has gone towards savings initiatives, and we are actually looking at a lot more backward integration projects. So when we add up all of these elements and also given the relative strength of our brands, this is what is enabling us to drive our margins differently. Equally, important to highlight that the margin profile, now we will be talking about businesses, excluding Ice Creams, and Ice Creams at an aggregate was a margin dilutive for us. So when we really look at Beauty, Personal Care and Foods, very strong and healthy margins. Given the footprint of Home Care and the positioning, a little lower, but all of them are actually contributing in a sensible way. We're also really very focused on hard currency earnings because that's again a multiyear clear objective. And there, when you look at it, we are also pulling all levers, which includes below-the-line items such as taxation, pension, interest costs. All elements of the value chain today are in play. And I think what gives us this when we have a consistent business, which is delivering day in and day out, margin expansion becomes very integral to the way we really think about growth and we think about profit. So a lot more confidence today is Unilever to continue to build our margins, drive hard currency earnings and get hard currency earnings, hopefully, on a multiyear basis, which are ahead of our sales ambition. Jemma Spalton: Next question comes from Sarah Simon at Morgan Stanley. Sarah Simon: Just a question on the U.S. So we're starting to hear some sort of negative commentary from some of the consumer-oriented companies about the effect of the government shutdown. Just wondering if you are seeing any of that in your businesses? Fernando Fernandez: Thank you, Sarah. We have not seen any significant impact of the government shutdown at this stage in the consumer sentiment. Of course, we follow similar service you follow. I feel the Michigan University consumer sentiment service shows relatively low levels in the last metric, and we see a clear bifurcation in the market there between households that own stocks and households that don't own stocks. So that is -- I believe this explains probably the resilience of our premium portfolio in the U.S. And as you could see in our performance, we continue delivering significant volume growth in the U.S. We are very pleased with our performance there, but it's very clear that we are outperforming markets by a mile there. Jemma Spalton: Our next question comes from Tom at Deutsche Bank. Tom Sykes: Just you mentioned in the presentation, the growth of digital commerce and the channel shift in retail seems to be happening at an accelerated pace. Why would you be well positioned versus that channel shift, please? And any sort of details you could give me? We've got a bit more of an idea of what's happening in the U.S., but some sort of views on the pace of that channel shift in Europe, perhaps in India and some of your other larger markets would be great, please. And just a quick one just on China. Maybe any details on the improvement there and any impact of timing of Chinese New Year on Q4 growth, please? Fernando Fernandez: Yes. Digital commerce is 17% of our revenue. I can give you some data. We are growing Amazon at 15%. We are growing walmart.com at 25%. We are growing Flipkart in India at 30%. We are growing TikTok globally at 70%. So our portfolio is much better suited now after the kind of reset we have done with disposals of value brands and with significant acquisitions in the premium segments, digitally native brands that are operating with a lot of success there. And I believe one of the reasons that we are delivering the type of growth that we are delivering in U.S. is that that's the portfolio with the highest exposure to e-commerce that we have globally. But we see similar trends in other markets. Of course, China India, quick commerce is accelerating a lot. Our quick commerce business in India is more than doubling this year. So we believe that our portfolio is well suited. Our capabilities are significant in that space. A lot of capabilities that were acquired to the business through the acquisitions we have done are really helping us in all these markets. So we are very, very happy with the development of e-comm, particularly in Beauty & Wellbeing in which the level of e-commerce is approaching 27%, 28% for our total business. China, Srini, do you want to talk about that? Srinivas Phatak: So, on a China perspective, actually, it's quite encouraging for us. In the sequence of improvements, we had said that Indonesia will do much better, and it is doing much better. China, we said just given the macroeconomic conditions, we said we are making some fundamental changes to our business model, our go-to-market are updating our capabilities in e-commerce and also actually driving the ongoing premiumization of the portfolio, particularly in Beauty & Wellbeing, Vaseline and Home Care. What's really encouraging is that in quarter 4, all four of our business groups, I'm excluding ice creams, given where we are, have actually returned to positive growth, both from value terms and on volume terms. And just given the fundamental work that we have done, it positions us well going forward. Of course, as Fernando referred to, there is more work to be done in some of the channel shifts which are happening, notably Douyin and what does it really mean to compete. And that's where we are spending a lot of time and effort to really make it strategic, make it important and really play the full 6 piece to win in that channel. But overall, I think given where we are, we are confident in terms of our progress going forward. Jemma Spalton: Next question comes from Jeff Stent at BNP. Jeff Stent: Three questions, if I may. The first one is, could you just shed a little bit more color on Mexico, which I think was down high single digit. What's happening there beyond the macro? And then secondly, do you still expect to grow hard currency earnings this year? Fernando Fernandez: Yes. Mexico, we have seen soft markets there. If you look at the performance of the main retailer in Mexico, I feel in the last two quarters was around 1% and 4%. And that has basically reflected the fact that remittances reduction are having a significant impact in the economy. tariffs have created uncertainty and the GDP growth expected there is around 0.4% the last number I have seen there. So our competitiveness is strong in Mexico. So we don't have significant issues there, but we have seen margins really softening. And there are some significant promotional periods in Mexico, particularly during July. It's called July 3. Most of the retailers have significant activities and the pickup in that period has been relatively poor. So the macro in Mexico is not very good. We don't have any fundamental structural issue in our portfolio in Mexico. Our performance has been good. We have a great food business with Knorr there. We have an excellent deodorant business, and they are very, very solid in shares, but the market has been soft. Hard currency earnings? Srinivas Phatak: So, Jeff, an important element for us is the gross margin trajectory and investment behind our brands. On both these elements, we are making solid progress. In fact, we had said that the 45% gross margin, all businesses included end of last year was really the base for us. All the three quarters, we have made continued progress. I've already explained to you some of the levers and the drivers in this respect. We are continuing to invest significantly behind our brands. We have said that we will continue to increase absolute spends every year. Even this year, we'll be actually increasing our absolute spends and our percentage of BMI will be in the range of 15% to 16%. What's really helping us is significant amount of work that we've done in terms of productivity across the value chain. Our program on productivity, we've already confirmed the about EUR 650 million of savings. We are looking to push that harder and get more out of that. We're going to be very disciplined in terms of our costs, which are within our control. That's going to become an important lever for us. We have done significant amount of work and found efficiencies in the taxation line. We've also had benefits coming through from our interest line. Summary, all these put together, we are confident of really having a positive hard currency earnings in the current year. Jemma Spalton: Our final question comes from Ed Lewis at Rothschild. Edward Lewis: Yes. Just a couple of questions really just on Indonesia and China. Fernando, could you just put in sort of context how you feel about the performance, how good or bad, whatever the 12.7% growth in Indonesia is relative to your expectations? And also on China, backing growth in Q3, I think that might have been a bit earlier than we might have expected. So just the changes you made there, how they're having an impact and how you would assess performance there? Fernando Fernandez: Well, thank you, Ed. In Indonesia, we are very pleased with the renewed leadership team we have put in place there and the progress they are doing in resetting the fundamentals of the business. We are operating now with historic low levels of stocks in our distributors. We have removed any fundamental issue of channel price conflict and that drag us down in 2024. We are relaunching our top brands in the market. We are stepping up significantly our social first marketing capability. As a result of that, we are seeing our run rates in Indonesia improving consistently quarter after quarter. We initiated this reset around July, August last year, and the results are solid. So we expect Indonesia to continue contributing to growth in the next quarters. In China, I feel that, Srini has been clear about it. We are pleased that our four business groups for the remaining company are back to growth in China. It's getting better slowly the market there. We have made significant interventions to disintermediate our route to market in e-commerce. We have set up significant manufacturing and logistics capability for direct-to-consumer delivery, and we are starting to see the benefits of these actions, and we expect that to continue improving in the next few quarters. Jemma Spalton: Thank you very much. That was our final question. Fernando Fernandez: Let me finish, Jemma saying that I hope after the call it is clear that our major growth engines of Beauty & Wellbeing and Personal Care continue to deliver very strong performance, about 5% and 4%, respectively. Our shift to premium and digital commerce is accelerating. The performance in developed markets is strong. We are outperforming markets clearly, both in U.S. and Europe with U.S. being a clear standout in terms of our performance. Our emerging market performance is improving. India, in particular, is very, very well positioned over the medium term. The GST reform has had some impact in the short term, but we believe it's very good news for 40% of our portfolio with close to a 10% reduction. This will boost demand in the medium term. Indonesia and China continue to improve. And there are lessons learned in Latin America that will not be repeated in neither in Latin America nor in any other places. And our business in Latin America is structurally strong, remains intact and our shares have grown in six out of the last seven quarters there. All of these give us confidence for the remainder of the year in our ability to outperform markets, and as Srini mentioned, to deliver hard currency earnings growth. Thank you very much.
Juha Rouhiainen: Good afternoon, good morning, everyone. This is Juha from Metso's Investor Relations. And it's my pleasure to welcome you to this conference call, where we discuss our third quarter 2025 results that were published earlier this morning. The results will be presented by our President and CEO, Sami Takaluoma; and CFO, Pasi Kyckling. And after that, we will have a Q&A session. And as usually, we try and limit the length of this call to 60 minutes. Before we go, I want to remind about forward-looking statements that will be made in this call. And I think without further ado, it's time to hand over to President and CEO, Sami Takaluoma. Sami, please go ahead. Sami Takaluoma: Thank you, Juha, and good morning, good afternoon also from my side. Without further ado, let's start to look for the Q3 highlights. The market activity was very much in line with our expectations, and that also resulted us then to deliver healthy order growth. We had also strong sales growth for the quarter, and our adjusted EBITA was good, normal strong. And for this quarter, cash generation was very solid and gave us quite a clean sheet for the Q3. Looking more than from the group perspective of the key figures. So orders received growth compared to the previous Q3 last year was 2%. And as we have highlighted in the Q3 '24, we did have significant large minerals CapEx orders that we did not have in the Q3 '25. Sales growth was then 10% compared to the previous quarter last year. And adjusted EBITA grew by 9%. All in all, the EBITA as the second quarter was having this dip, so we are now back in the normal Metso EBITA numbers. Looking for our 2 segments, let's start from the Aggregates. We had healthy orders growth coming in the quarter, EUR 280 million. That is 13% in constant currencies. This growth was mainly driven by the normalized market in North America and then the pickup that we have seen coming from the Europe. Equipment orders did represent growth of 11% and the aftermarket, 2% of the order growth. Sales was also stronger than a year ago. Equipment sales growth was 14% and aftermarket 1%. Aftermarket share now with these numbers was then 32% compared to 35% that it was 1 year ago. And adjusted EBITA improvement by EUR 3 million, so EUR 48 million for the quarter, and that represents then 15.6% margin for the segment. And Minerals had a very solid quarter in many ways. Orders grew 5% in the constant currencies, and aftermarket orders growth was now 12%. We saw in the CapEx side, very solid order intake when it comes to the small and midsized equipment orders. And in the aftermarket side, increase of the upgrades and modernizations as we have commented that they are in the pipeline. Regarding the sales, EUR 1 billion plus compared to the EUR 928 million a year before. Aftermarket was delivering 4% growth and the equipment side was now a 19% growth for the quarter. Aftermarket share of the sales in this quarter was 60%, and the adjusted EBITA EUR 184 million was reported, and that gives the margin of 18.0%, which is pretty much in line from the last year, 18.1%. And now Pasi, the CFO, will go more in detail the financial aspects. Pasi Kyckling: Thank you, Sami, and good day, everyone, on my behalf. I would like to start by reminding that we have restated our comparative figures for 24 quarters and first 2 quarters this year regarding the Metals & Chemical processing business that we decided to retain. And consequently, we have reclassified the comparative information. Let's then look at our group income statement more in details. I mean, sales increased 12% in constant currencies from the comparative period to EUR 1,328 million. Adjusted EBITA, EUR 222 million, which is EUR 18 million or 9% improvement from the comparison period. Net financials slightly up, reflecting the higher debt load that we have in our balance sheet. And income tax rate for the quarter, 24%, and then for the first 9 months or 3 quarters this year, 25%, so very much a standard -- within the standard range that we expect. Earnings per share from continuing operations, EUR 0.17, up by EUR 0.01 from the comparative period. If we then look at our financial position. The average interest rate for the period was 3.4%. Our net debt, roughly EUR 1.1 billion. Liquid funds continue to be solid, EUR 460 million is end of September. And our net debt-to-EBITDA KPI when using rolling 12 months in EBITDA was 1.3x which is below our 1.5x target and also down from 1.5 that we had end of second quarter, thanks to good earnings in the quarter as well as strong cash flow during the third quarter. When it comes to available credit facilities, our position is unchanged. We have our fully undrawn RCF. And then we have also a CP program, which is currently not in use. And then our ratings also, no changes. So a BBB flat from S&P and Baa2 from Moody's. If we then move to the cash flow. So we delivered a healthy cash flow during the quarter, the strongest quarterly cash flow this year, EUR 266 million from operations. And overall, we have delivered during the first 9 months, EUR 609 million. A positive note is that working capital is not a drag for us anymore. Of course, the release, EUR 12 million is small. But given that we -- that the business growth was solid, we are quite happy with this and continue to work with further working capital efficiency improvements. With that, I would like to hand back to Sami to talk about our strategy execution and outlook. Sami Takaluoma: Thank you, Pasi. So in Q3, we also launched our new strategy. We go beyond. We are very happy of the launch, both internally and also externally. And in a nutshell, we are striving for being the best in the customer experience in our industries. We are working for the higher and higher aftermarket share of our businesses, and we also set a target for ourselves to be the frontrunners when it comes to sustainability and safety. And all this combined will then also ensure that we do deliver the financial excellence. This is a growth strategy. We have set the target for ourselves for annual growth, and excellence means everything that Metso does, and that will be resulting then that Metso will be the #1 in our selected areas. We do count a lot to our very engaged employees, Metsonites out there. So the customer-centric growth culture is one of the key success factors and also ensuring that we do have the industry-leading capabilities in our organization to help our customers for the upcoming years. I'm talking about the revised financial targets, just a reminder here. So annual sales growth target is 7%. And, well, starting point now looking for the year-to-date '25 numbers. So 2% we have been able to do. So this is clearly the ambition to accelerate this growth. Adjusted EBITA margin, we upgraded that to 18% from the 17% previously divided by the segments so that Aggregates to deliver more than 17% and Minerals more than 20%. And year-to-date so far, we are in 15.7%. Net debt-to-EBITDA, the target for ourselves is that we will be below 1.5x. And that one currently, we are well on track already, and we are targeting to keep that, that way. And regarding the dividends, so the payout is going to be at least 50% of the earnings per share. And as you all remember, 2024, that was 63%. The strategy execution is already ongoing. We have done investments, acquisitions to improve our selected areas. Screening business, Saimu, was acquired in China that made Metso to be in top 3 in the Chinese market for this business. And then 2 smaller ones, TL Solution, which is sustainability-related, mill liner recycling technology company. And then Q&R Industrial Hoses, which is linked to our pump businesses where we are also having accelerated growth targets. We are currently reviewing some of our businesses. One of them is the loading and hauling business and looking for the next strategic steps regarding that business. Investments we have done already during the last year, some investments, especially to support our intentions to grow our aftermarket share, and one of them, the latest one is screening manufacturing center that we are currently building up in Romania. And when it comes to the market outlook, we expect that the market activity in both of our segments, Minerals and Aggregates, will remain at the current level. And we also want to highlight in this context now that the tariff-related turbulence is not over. We do hear this from our customers, and there is potentially effect then for the global economic growth and also the market activity. Juha Rouhiainen: All right. Thank you, gentlemen, for the presentation. And operator, we are now ready for Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Michael Harleaux from Morgan Stanley. Michael Harleaux: I have two, if I may. The first one would be on your impressive aftermarket order growth. If you could help us unpack what's underlying and if there are any one-offs in that, that would be very helpful. And then regarding the Aggregates segment, one of your competitors mentioned dealer restocking. So I was wondering if you could tell us if you are seeing any of that happening? Sami Takaluoma: Excellent questions. Regarding the aftermarket growth in orders especially so, we have commented in these calls earlier that one element of the aftermarket portfolio that we have is the upgrades and modernizations. They do have a small cyclic element, and that has affected them so that the comparison period, especially last year, did not see almost any of those coming through. And then our pipeline has been quite solid at the funnel. We know that the cases are there. There has been slight hesitation from the customers to make the decision, the timing of the decision. And now in Q3, they started to come through from the funnel as an order. So that was in line of our expectation in that sense. When it comes to the Aggregates, the distributor network in -- especially in the U.S. had a situation that 2024, the end customers did not purchase machines at a normal pace, and that created the situation that the distributor stocks were quite full. What we have seen from our side is that the normalization of the U.S. market started to happen at the end of last year, beginning of this year, and that's visible for us when we look at the stock levels of our distributors. They have gradually month after month coming down from the very high levels that they were at the mid '24. So from that perspective, there is element of distributor stock has an impact also to our numbers, but we also see that the market has normalized from that behavior during this year. Operator: The next question comes from Edward Hussey from UBS. The next question comes from Christian Hinderaker from Goldman Sachs. Christian Hinderaker: I want to start on Aggregates. At the CMD, you mentioned equipment utilization was down 20% or so from the year before. Obviously, interested then in the OE order growth in that segment at 11% and some of the comments in the release that you're seeing a better demand environment in both North America and Europe. What's driving that? And also, I wonder if you could perhaps give an indication on the average age of the installed fleet on that side of the business? Sami Takaluoma: Yes. So the running hours is having an impact mainly for the aftermarket demand. Then the new equipment need is not always clearly linked for this because the new technology will enable more cost-efficient operation for the customers. So the renewal of fleet is depending on customers' own behavior in his or hers business case. So from that perspective, it varies based on the customer, normal age, we have a very wide portfolio and deliveries every year, and that makes that there is also second owner or even third owner for the equipment normally. So this is how the aggregate mobile equipment business works. And the typical full lifetime, if well maintained, is between 15 and 20 years when the life is fully ended. Christian Hinderaker: That's helpful. Maybe we can turn to working capital. At the CMD, you set out ambitions to take share in the aftermarket. I guess, keen to understand if we should think about this requiring higher inventory levels over the coming years, either in euro million terms or in percent of sales, or whether you think you can unlock some efficiencies that mean you can grow the top line whilst improving that inventory number? Pasi Kyckling: Thanks, Christian, excellent question. And indeed, one of our pillars -- main pillars in the strategy is to grow the aftermarket business. And I mean, it's not a straightforward question to answer. But of course, if we grow the business in absolute terms, it will require more inventory. But then what we also believe is that in relative terms, when it comes to inventory turns or inventory in comparison to our top line. And there is room for improvement across the board, but then also in the aftermarket part of the business. So that's how we are looking at that. Operator: The next question comes from Chitrita Sinha from JPMorgan. Chitrita Sinha: Congrats on a strong set of results. I have two, please. So my first one is just on the Minerals margin, which was broadly flat at 18% despite the aftermarket mix. Could you provide more color on the organic development here? Sami Takaluoma: Yes. I think 18% is something that at this point, we are happy. It's okay. It's in line of our expectation. As we build the road map in the Capital Market Day that how we are going to be reaching the 20% targeted number for the strategy period, so there are several elements. And in this quarter, the aftermarket was having a good contribution for that one. There is a need for the capital equipment sales to be higher in terms of leveraging that part as well, and then we continue to work with our self-help initiatives, and as 75% of the company is Minerals segment, the impact will be mostly seen there when we do company-wide actions. Pasi Kyckling: Sami, I would like to complete or complement a bit. I think what you have also seen or what we have experienced in the third quarter is the strength of our capital business. I mean, relative share of the capital increase overall, but especially in the Minerals. And we have a good healthy business there and then it supports also delivering this kind of margins, and we are quite satisfied with that. Chitrita Sinha: Great, very clear. So my second question is on the Aggregates margin where you've brought back some costs, I think, in Q2 in anticipation for a ramp. So what is the best way to think about the volume threshold where you can comfortably achieve more than 16% again? I'm trying to drive whether we should expect to pick up in Q4? Will it be more 2026? Pasi Kyckling: Yes. So first of all, this cost that we have taken gradually back in Aggregate refers to our Finnish operations there and the fact that the local legislation here enables laying people off on a temporary basis. And during this low period, we have used that opportunity and are now during first half of this year when our order books have been strengthening, we have taken people back to work, and they are busy, currently working with the order book that we have. Then I'm afraid we are not in a position to give you exact volume guidance on when certain thresholds when it comes to margins are reached, but overall, I mean, we delivered a few percentage points below 16% now in the third quarter. And this is also a volume gain. So there is still capacity in the system to deliver higher volumes without, for example, increasing manpower and then the drop-through from additional business comes with significantly higher margins. Operator: The next question comes from Vivek Mehta from Citi. Vivek Mehta: I hope you can hear me well. It's Vivek on behalf of Klas. First question is around the restatement of the Minerals EBITA from discontinued operations. That impact grew in the second quarter. And curious to know what was the uplift to the Minerals EBITA from this in the third quarter? Was it similar to the second quarter? I appreciate that it doesn't impact the organic growth in margin. Just curious about the absolute impact. Pasi Kyckling: Yes. No, thanks, Vivek, for that, and we published the restated numbers with quarterly breakup of '24 and first half of '26 earlier this month. And while we will not provide a specific third quarter numbers and then going forward, we'll not comment specific business lines, what we can say is that the impact was sort of a similar in third quarter as we experienced in average during these periods that we have restated. And I know that in the second quarter with these numbers, it was slightly higher than in average. But what we had was sort of the average from these restated periods. Vivek Mehta: Understood. My second question is just following up on the outlook and your comments around tariff uncertainty and so on. We're seeing very good growth in Minerals, excluding the larger orders. Appreciate maybe the Section 232 and tariff concerns might be more applicable to Aggregates. So curious, given the strong commodity price backdrop, why you've not potentially raised that Minerals outlook? Sami Takaluoma: Yes. It's true that the tariff situation has impact on both of our segments, but it's also true that the impact potentially is higher for the Aggregate. So, tariff, in Minerals side is a little bit related to the U.S.-based customers and projects. And then generally, globally, the uncertainty, which is not helping making the significant decisions of the investments of multibillion for the new projects. But that, hopefully, is stabilizing and not having impact on that side. And then in the Aggregates, it's really all about how the U.S. market will be reacting because the tariff situation is having an impact on, for example, what is the end customer pricing and these kind of elements. So that might slow down the U.S. now normalized the market from that perspective, potentially. Pasi Kyckling: And also when it comes to Aggregates, and you made a reference to this Section 232. So the cross advance screens have been something that have been earlier excluded. Now it seems that they will be included in the tariff. And then certainly, it will have some impact on Aggregates market in the U.S. going forward. Operator: The next question comes from Panu Laitinmäki from Danske Bank. Panu Laitinmaki: I have a couple of questions. Firstly, on the Minerals market outlook, how do you see the kind of likelihood of receiving very large orders still in this year? We haven't seen any so far, and it's a bit more than 2 months left. So do you think it's still likely or is it more like 2016? And maybe related to that, what is the kind of pipeline or sales funnel for these large projects now compared to what it was like a year ago, for example? Sami Takaluoma: Yes. Thank you. A very good question. And this is something that we also are very interested to get the answers, but unchanged situation, how we read the customer negotiations and discussions, meaning that there are these projects, they are there, they are having a lot more tangible way of discussing, meaning that there is already customer organizations for the greenfield projects and so forth. And that's answer maybe for your second question, that this is something that we see as a difference for 1 year or 2 years ago that there is more concrete, tangible actions happening already on the customer side. And then we remain in the same view that we have had, 2026 is almost like guaranteed that these orders start to come through and still staying on a positive that one, two might be even coming at the end of this year, but as you said, the clock is ticking, and there is 2 months to go. So that remains to be seen. But then beginning of '26, definitely. Pasi Kyckling: From a commodity split point of view, these are gold and copper projects that are more advanced in our pipeline. Panu Laitinmaki: Okay. Let's hope for that. So secondly, I wanted to ask about the Aggregates and the European outlook. So you talk about European recovery. Can you talk a bit more about like what you see, which countries are driving this? Is it the German infra package already? Or what is driving this? Sami Takaluoma: Yes. We believe that the German infra package actually had an impact. The orders that we have been receiving in the last 2 quarters, they are not so much from the Germany. But that decision created the trust in the European countries close by for the future. So the orders are coming from multiple countries into Europe and they are related to infrastructure projects in those countries moving forward and then the customers making the equipment orders to be ready to serve what they have promised to serve. Panu Laitinmaki: Okay. I have a third one, if I may. On Minerals aftermarket, so really good growth in orders, obviously, from the service projects. But if you take that out, how has the kind of underlying spare parts. Spare parts business growth developed? Is it like at the same level? Or has that accelerated significantly? Sami Takaluoma: No major changes there. We have seen already a long time, solid, good single-digit growth for that, what we call day-to-day spare parts and consumer pools and service orders. So that continues the same way also in the Q3. Operator: The next question comes from David Farrell from Jefferies. David Richard Farrell: I'll go one at a time. First question relates to Aggregates. I was wondering in terms of the 9% organic order intake growth, what percentage of that is related to tariff-related surcharges on your U.S. business? Can you kind of unpick that element for us, please. Pasi Kyckling: Thanks, David, very, very good question. I mean a small part is from that factor. But I mean, it's not very material. I mean, I'm afraid I can't -- we can't quantify it, but that's the way to look at it. David Richard Farrell: Okay. And then my second question relates to the Minerals margin. It looks kind of -- by the increase in OE revenue and the impact that has on absorbing fixed costs probably played quite an important role in driving the margin up. Yet, if I look at the book-to-bill for OE so far this year, we're below 1x. Is there a risk that, that is a bit of a headwind as we think about 2026 margins that you simply don't have the OE levels that you had this year, and therefore, margins will face an incremental headwind? Pasi Kyckling: David, good question there. I mean we are not thinking that way. I think when it comes to Minerals capital, book-to-bill, we have basically sold similar amount as we have gotten orders this year. And obviously, some of the orders that we are receiving now in the fourth quarter, they will still play a role also in 2026 sales delivery. But under the assumption that we continue to get healthy order book build during the fourth quarter, maybe some of those larger projects moving forward that we discussed earlier. So we don't see that situation. And then obviously, already this year and also going forward, when we look at, within Minerals, there is quite different situation in the underlying business lines. Some of them are more busy than the others. And that's also the reason you may have seen that we announced and started some labor discussions earlier this month just to adjust our capacity in some of the business lines where we have less work currently. Operator: The next question comes from Vlad Sergievskii from Barclays. Vladimir Sergievskiy: Yes. It's Vlad from Barclays. I'll ask 3 questions, if I may, and go one by one. Firstly, could you give us some maybe initial idea what directional sales growth outlook could we have for 2026. On one hand, commodity prices are super supportive. But on the other, book-to-bill slightly below 1 this quarter, backlog broadly flat. Do you think you could grow next year top line in line with strategic targets, which you recently released or it will be some kind of different phasing here? Pasi Kyckling: Yes, Vlad. Excellent question. And you know also that we are not in a position to give such guidance. However, what we can confirm is that our target is to grow 7% CAGR going forward. And with that clock starts ticking 1 January next year, and we are working hard day in and day out to make sure that we can grow. And if I look at across the portfolio from 1 January onwards to end of September, our order book has increased by EUR 200 million, so -- or EUR 180 million to be specific. So that gives us a much stronger starting point for next year compared to the starting point that we had when we entered 2025. Vladimir Sergievskiy: Excellent, and that's great to hear. And if I could ask you on the consolidation point that you -- the changes you have made this quarter. I appreciate you are not giving the precise numbers for Q3. Would you be able to go to give us some idea what was the impact on the orders because orders for this business that you are consolidating has been super volatile. I think in the comparative quarter, it was almost no orders Q3 last year. Any color you can give us here would be very helpful. Pasi Kyckling: Yes, I can comment on that order specifically. So it was a very low order number also in the third quarter this year. So the order growth is certainly not driven by this MCP business. Vladimir Sergievskiy: Excellent. And the final one from me. On the inventories, trade receivables, obviously, they are optically up sequentially this quarter compared to what we saw before. Is it largely driven by the gain, the consolidation scope that you've done? Or there are some underlying changes there as well? Pasi Kyckling: Yes. Thanks, Vlad. And the consolidation change, for example, in inventory terms has some tens of millions impact on our inventories, i.e., increasing when we brought the MCP business back from discontinued to be part of the normal business, so to say. And then what we see overall happening in the underlying inventories is that we continue to decline the Finnish product inventories. And if I look one level below the balance sheet that we published, the Finnish products have continued to decline from end of June to end of September, order of magnitude EUR 50 million. And then we see a bit growth in the other areas, which is work in process and then raw materials. And you may remember that this EUR 200 million inventory program that we completed by end of June this year, that was really focused on Finnish goods. And then we continue on that journey. And overall, both inventory, trade receivables, but then over the larger working capital continues to be a focus area going forward. Operator: The next question comes from William Mackie from Kepler Cheuvreux. William Mackie: A couple of questions. Firstly, could you perhaps talk a little about the pricing environment and the price realization you've achieved across Minerals and Aggregates in Q3 in your efforts to fully offset any other remaining inflationary pressures? And secondly, against the review in Minerals of the backlog up and the orders strong in the smaller and conversion business, can you talk a little to the seasonality of the business revenue realization in the fourth quarter? Historically, there has been seasonality. What should we think about the Q4 versus Q3 in this year regarding your bookings and realization of revenues off backlog? Sami Takaluoma: Thank you, William. I can take the pricing one. Two segments. In the Minerals side, we see a very little pushback for our pricing. So we use our pricing power where we see that applicable. And that part is working okay. There is some discussions with the customers when they are not sure when they will be ready to release the orders for the capital side to get the price validity longer than we usually do. And so far, we have not gone that route. Then in the Aggregates side, it is a little bit more the current situation in the markets under pressure. So there, it's difficult to use our normal way, the pricing power, and that is quite obvious at the moment in the Aggregate market. Pasi Kyckling: And then, William, when it comes to Minerals seasonality. Overall, in Aggregates, we see clear seasonality, for example, third quarter, also this year was a slower period compared to some of the other quarters. In Minerals, we see much less of that. And we are delivering, we are completing the projects from our backlog also during the fourth quarter normally. So we don't expect anything specific there. Then of course, if I compare to third quarter, for example, there is Christmas and there is holiday seasons, and that may have some limited impact, but that's how we see it. William Mackie: One follow-up, if I may. Building on the earlier question regarding the order pipeline in Minerals. Can you talk a little to the discussion around the upgrades and modernization pipeline rather than large, normally highlighted projects? Do you see the ongoing trend that we've seen in Q3 with exceptional strength continuing in the fourth quarter? Sami Takaluoma: Yes, that's an excellent question. And as you might remember, I was responsible of this business area. And typically, we had the funnel of these upgrades and modernizations, 6 months ago, it was the largest ever in the euro value. So a lot of projects in a very good state of the discussions with the customer. And now we have started to see that they are released. And typically, I'm now referring what has happened in the past. They tend to then follow for 1, 2, 3 quarters in a row as a cycle when the customers make these orders. So expectation is that we do see also those orders coming in the Q4 and maybe also Q1. Operator: The next question comes from Tore Fangmann from Bank of America. The next question comes from Mikael Doepel from Nordea. Mikael Doepel: I have a few questions. I can take them one by one. So just firstly on the Aggregates business and what you see there, particularly in the U.S. If I hear you correctly, you seem to expect Europe to continue to recover into the fourth quarter, but I didn't really catch your views in the U.S. market clearly. So is it so that you see distributor inventory levels currently at normal levels? Or do you also expect some restocking effects there? Have you seen any negative impact of tariffs thus far? Or is it just an expectation that it must come? Just a bit of a clarification on how do you see the demand in the U.S. Sami Takaluoma: I'll try to open that a little bit up. We have not seen yet, but what we look is the distributor inventory levels. And from that perspective, it supports that the business that we see coming from the U.S. would be the normal as the levels are not over high as they used to be 1 year ago, for example. Then on the other hand, there is a risk that the new tariff included price levels of equipment and also parts might have an impact on how the end customers are evaluating their investment timing. Are they doing it now or expecting to look a little bit later. And even might have some challenges to fulfill the business plans with the new pricing coming through. So these 2 are both there and giving this a little bit uncertain situation, if I put it this way. The other one is supporting that the business continues normally and the other one is putting a little bit of the dark clouds out there. Mikael Doepel: Okay. No, that's helpful. And then second question relates to the mining business and maybe the project pipeline you're talking about. Just wondering, if I'm not wrongly remembering things, I think there should be a bit of a tail still left, for example, from the Uzbekistan, fairly large copper smelting order you got back in 2024. There might also be some other tails from other bigger projects. I assume when you talk about larger projects, you are not referring to these ones, but if you could maybe just give an update on the ones that you have won but haven't yet gotten all the orders from, the bigger ones. Pasi Kyckling: Yes. So first of all, Mikael, you have understood it the right way. So when we spoke earlier about the larger projects, so we were talking about future orders, which we have not yet seen and our expectation when they will realize, et cetera. Then when it comes to sort of existing pipeline, you are indeed correct that there is the Uzbekistan project, Almalyk, which is ongoing. And then there is also a number of other not only tails, but activities from the past, which are under delivery, and they are moving forward as per the plans. And then from financial statements point of view, we recognize revenue based on the percentage of completion. And typically it takes quite some time from the order until we start deliveries because of either engineering needs to go forward or if that is done, then just manufacturing activities with some of these equipment takes quite some time. And then the local construction projects, also, they are not small by nature. So it could be 24, 36 months from the order until we are complete with our deliveries. But yes, that's part of the backlog realization that we see every quarter. Mikael Doepel: That's fair. And maybe just a follow-up on that. So what is the reason? I mean, why the tails from Uzbekistan is not coming through? It's a question about the progress on site, which is slow? Or is it financing? Or is it anything else? Just wondering enough when we should expect that one to go through? Pasi Kyckling: Mikael, which way are you thinking? Because I mean, the project execution is moving forward, and we are realizing revenue and so forth, or how are you thinking about this? Mikael Doepel: No, I think there should be still some order value less from project. Have you already received everything? Pasi Kyckling: No. I mean, there is further potential on this and some of the other cases, but we cannot really comment single customer cases in such manner. Operator: The next question comes from Edward Hussey from UBS. Edward Hussey: Sami and Psi, can you hear me now? Pasi Kyckling: Yes, Edward, we can hear you. Edward Hussey: Okay, cool. Sorry about earlier. Just sticking to the rebuild and modernization theme. So first question is just on the order side. My understanding is that the comps in Q4 were also extremely weak. So should we expect to see a similar growth rate on the rebuild and modernization side in Q4? Sami Takaluoma: Yes. I said that these ones are those aftermarket orders that are not super critical from the timing perspective. And that's also the reason why they have this cyclic element. So we do have -- now we got the orders. We are happy of those. They were expected that they start to come during this year. We also expect that we see some of a similar way coming through in the Q4, but fully to be able to estimate or quantify the amount is challenging because they do not have this criticality the same way as other aftermarket products. Pasi Kyckling: And you are right that it's a -- sorry, you are right that it's a weak comparison point in the Q4. We did not see these orders last year in Q4. Edward Hussey: Okay. And then maybe just thinking about the mix in orders. I mean, is it -- when you think about these rebuild modernization orders, do they make up a sort of normalized mix in Q3? Or are they still below what you'd consider a normalized mix? Sami Takaluoma: I would say that when looking at the backlog, for example, so they look normal, and then orders that we are expecting once again, difficult to really estimate very accurate way that how much we will get those. But I would say that they are normal, if something. Edward Hussey: Okay. That's very helpful. And then final question just on the theme is just on the revenue side. Clearly, it seems to be margin accretive from the aftermarket business. In terms of the revenue mix, the rebuild modernizations, are these at normalized levels now? Or is there -- I mean could we potentially see a sort of acceleration in rebuild modernization revenues in Q4, and therefore, support from a margin perspective? Sami Takaluoma: Generally, I can comment that much that upgrades and modernizations for us, they are good and very healthy business when it comes to the margins. So they are in a good level from our sales mix perspective. Operator: The next question comes from Tore Fangmann from Bank of America. Tore Fangmann: Sorry, can you hear me now? Pasi Kyckling: Yes, we can. Tore Fangmann: Perfect. Sorry for before. A little bit of tech issues and cut out sometimes. So excuse me if this was asked before. Just one more question from my side. The Aggregates margin has recovered quite nicely quarter-on-quarter despite the lower revenues total and also like in equipment itself. I was expecting before that the main kicker for a margin improvement would be basically the volumes coming back for the cost absorption. So what would you say is the reason now quarter-on-quarter with the margin recovery that we've seen? Pasi Kyckling: Yes, it's a good question. And Tore, you may remember that, overall, we had some extra costs in the second quarter. And while, of course, Minerals is the one carrying larger share, Aggregate was also impacted. And from that angle, situation has normalized. And overall, not only in Aggregates, but generally, we had sort of a good cost control quarter, and that helped also Aggregate to deliver the margins they did. Tore Fangmann: Okay. Then just as a brief follow-up, if I remember correctly, then the main part that could have impacted aside from the ramp-up of the production cost would have been the ERP system rollout in Q2? Or am I missing out something here? And then when you say good cost control, is this something that you would then expect to continue into Q4? Is it like basically structurally now better cost control? Or is it a little bit more by circumstance that we have better cost control in Q3? Pasi Kyckling: I mean, I was mainly referring to the extra costs, i.e., ERP that we had in the second quarter, and like we said 3 months ago, that was one-off costs. Those have not repeated third quarter. And from a cost performance point of view, our expectation is to remain in a similar position going forward. Juha Rouhiainen: All right. There seems to be no further questions. So we are able to wrap up this conference call well in time. Thanks again for listening. Thanks again for asking questions. We will be back with our fourth quarter and full year results on February 12 next year. But in the meantime, we are sure to meet many of you on the road in different events during the remainder of this year. Looking forward to that. And now we say thanks again, and goodbye. Sami Takaluoma: Thank you. Pasi Kyckling: Thank you.
Martin Carlesund: Good morning, everyone. Welcome to the presentation of Evolution's report for the third quarter of 2025. My name is Martin Carlesund, and I'm the CEO of Evolution. With me, I have our CFO, Joakim Andersson. As always, we will start with some comments on our performance in the quarter and then I will hand over to Joakim for a closer look at our financials. After that, I will conclude with an outlook and then we will open up for your questions. Next slide, please. So let's start with the financial and operational highlights in the quarter. And I would like to start by taking the bull by the horns and address the bad performance in Asia. This has been a recurring theme over the past quarters. But unfortunately, this time, it looks a bit worse. We were, as you remember, very cautiously optimistic about the remainder of the year in the last report. And there's really nothing that doesn't say that Q4 could be better. However, we are experiencing a lot of volatility, which makes the near-term performance hard to predict. At this stage, we want to be realistic and keep expectations low. So what are the main reasons behind the Asian development. First is the cybercrime activity that continues to hurt us. Every day and around the clock, we do everything that we can to mitigate the issues. However, some measures do impact also the end users, and this is what makes it tricky. At the point in time, within the quarter, we did too much, causing loss in revenue. On the other hand, if we do too little, we lose to the pilots. Towards the end of the quarter, we found a better balance, but it's still volatile. And we are -- we do constant security updates to our core to increase protection. We will continue to adapt the changes that are working, and to fine-tune the methods that are working well and explore completely new actions as well. I ask for continued patience on this, but rest assured that is a top priority. Additionally, in Asia, the newly regulated markets, Philippines is volatile, which often is the case when operators and players adapt to the new framework. There are also other markets, such as India, that show signs of moving towards regulation, which creates a higher level of uncertainty than before. And to clarify, with showing signs, I mean that the current heated debate and quick and not widely acknowledged political decisions is something that we often see in the very beginning of potential regulation. Over a longer period of time, it will likely not be noticeable, but on a quarterly basis, it will cause variations like the one we see now. With the context of Asia in mind, let's look at the overall numbers. Net revenue came in at EUR 507.1 million, corresponding to a year-on-year decline of 2.4%. EBITDA amounted to EUR 336.9 million, and the EBITDA margin came in at 66.4%, which is within the range of our full year margin target of 66% to 68%. What stands out as positive in the quarter is the performance in Europe, which is back to growth quarter-on-quarter compared to the first half of the year. We saw the full effect of our protective ring fencing measures in the second quarter, and this provided a new foundation for growth. Worth mentioning is also that we got recognition for our ring fencing from one of the largest regulators in Europe, where we were pointed out as one of the best B2B suppliers. I'm happy with the progress in Europe in this quarter. North America also performed decently, and Latin America is stronger than what we have seen earlier this year. Our Live revenue declined by 3.4% to EUR 431.7 million, while RNG increased by [ 4.2% ] to EUR 75.5 million. It is actually the first time that RNG outperformed Live in terms of growth. Our studios have worked hard and especially Nolimit City has performed great in this quarter. To further strengthen our portfolio, we have launched a completely new brand, Sneaky Slots from scratch, and it will be very exciting to follow that progress going forward. On Live, growth is held back by Asia, but we continue to see good growth in the rest of the world. In both North America and Latin America, Live is still in early days and gains considerable attention from operators and players alike. The opening of our new studio in Brazil has been a true success. On the game side, our highly anticipated Ice Fishing title has finally seen the light, and reception has been great across our market. It is mirroring the trend of faster and shorter forms of entertainment that are widely consumer channels like TikTok and Reels. And it is needed -- is indeed a much faster experience than, for example, Crazy Time. Another great thing is that expansion of Ice Fishing to other studios will be fast compared to the more massive games like Lightning Storm. With its success, we will definitely explore more opportunities in the speed game show arena going forward. To conclude the quarter, overall revenue is not where I want it to be. But when opening the lead, it's clear that the development comes from 1 out of 4 regions. The development in Europe, North America and Latin America is overall good and also supports the margin together with our clear focus on cost efficiency. Next slide, please. If we then move to our operational KPIs, consisting of head count and game round index. On head count, we are growing 4.2% on a year-on-year basis, but we have actually decreased 2.7% quarter-on-quarter. The slowdown is, to some extent, reflected in the revenue. We don't hire unless we grow, but looking at recruitment base within full year, there are sometimes fluctuation based on temporarily slower high pace in recruitment. As we plan for more studio expansion over the next years, the long-term trend is that we will see continued increase in the number of Evolutioneers. The game round index can be seen as a general indicator of activity throughout the network over time, as you know. And for an individual quarter, it can be -- can vary quite a lot and does not always correlate with the revenue development. However, as you also can see this quarter, this actually shows a decrease. Next slide, please. Innovation and quality will always be our signature when it comes to our game portfolio. And I am ever so proud of the continued delivery on our product road map for 2025. During the quarter, we released Ice Fishing, which I have already talked about, and also Dragon Tiger Phoenix, SuperSpeed Dragon Tiger, both the latter are based on a popular Dragon Tiger, a straightforward car game that now has been elevated with the new excitement. Rules are simple and gameplay is quick. In Dragon Tiger Phoenix, the Phoenix is introduced as the third legendary car and the players simply bet on which car that will win or if it will be a tie. Another very exciting release is the Sneaky Slots brand, which joins our portfolio that already includes Nolimit City, Red Tiger, NetEnt, and Big Time Gaming. We have created Sneaky Slots from scratch, leveraging all our know-how that we have within RNG and using our one-stop shop and global sales network to further boost its launch. Sneaky Slots will fill a gap between Nolimit City and NetEnt in terms of game style. And selected releases will use ex mechanics from Nolimit City that we know that the players love. First title was released -- was NetEnt, which will be followed by the new title every month until year-end. Among upcoming releases, we have Red Baron, a mix of Live and RNG where the goal is to cash out before the Red Baron flies away. The longer you wait, the higher the potential. Another release is Insurance Baccarat, which is an exciting variation of the classic Baccarat that adds a unique insurance feature to protect the space. While summarizing the year, we look back at over 110 releases, which is a truly great achievement. And as time flies, there's now only 3 months left until [ Ice ] where we, as always, will showcase the most exciting titles for 2026. I can promise that Todd and his team are ready to take entertainment to yet another level. Next slide, please. Okay. Let's look at the geographical breakdown. As already highlighted, I'm pleased to see that Europe growth quarter-on-quarter, with revenue amounted to EUR 182.2 million. We have talked a lot about ring fencing this year, and you probably remember that the effects on revenues were a bit larger than we had anticipated. It is a price that we have to pay to stay ahead of the regulatory curve. But with that said, we have a new base to grow from. And despite the summer without any major sports event, development has been overall good. I should also mention the dialogue with the U.K. Gaming Commission, which continued, and we are yet to receive the conclusion of its review. What I believe is important to note is that we have been very cooperative and also responsive to various requirements that the Gaming Commission has put upon us. We still have to wait for the outcome, but I truly believe that we have the most sophisticated compliance framework among all providers targeting the U.K. Moving on to Asia, where I have already provided the context for the bad development and revenue decline of 9.6% quarter-on-quarter. Even though the market in Philippines has been volatile, our newly opened studio has been off to a great start. A while ago, there were some media noise on our studio partner losing its B2C license, but it has nothing to do with us or our studio. Everything is working as it should. We did, however, suffer some building damage in the 6.9 magnitude earthquake that struck Cebu in the beginning of October, but to our great relief, no employee was hurt and operations continued, even though that is secondary when people's lives are on the line. Next slide, please. On the contrary from Asia, North America is, thanks to its regulation, more predictable and stable. Quarter-on-quarter growth is modest, but on the positive side, it is -- on the positive side, the operators continue to invest heavily in Live casino solutions and environment. Year-on-year growth is 14.5%. To meet the demand, we have launched our second Live studio brand, Ezugi, just around the end of the quarter, and we are planning to open a second studio in Michigan during the first half of 2026. I would also like to highlight that we, after the quarter, have launched Crazy Time in Connecticut. Great. Very, very good. Also, while speaking on North America, I would like to mention something on Sweepstakes as it has been a topic of discussion during the quarter. Sweepstakes is a popular product in the U.S., and we offer it in states where it's not prohibited or in any way under regulatory scrutiny. Sweepstakes is a very small part of our total revenue, but we believe it has some potential. And as you know, as the market leader, we'll want to offer a great variety of content. In the quarter, a city attorney in Los Angeles made a personal interpretation of the California law, and as our strategy is that we don't offer Sweepstakes where there are regulatory uncertainties, we pulled it from the market, simple as that. I'm also quite certain that you will ask us about the completion of the Galaxy Gaming acquisition. We are still awaiting some regulatory approvals, but believe me, we will be able to -- but we believe we'll be able to close the transaction before year-end. However, it's a regulatory process. It's not completely in our hands. Moving on to Latin America, where growth is picking up with 6.4% year-on-year and 5.9% quarter-on-quarter. The new regulation in Brazil seems to be done with its initial [ teething ] problems, and operator and players are becoming more active. Our new studio in Sao Paulo, Brazil has developed nicely during the quarter and will expand as we move forward. Now I will hand over to Joakim for a closer look at our financials. Next slide, please. Joakim Andersson: Great. Thank you, Martin, and good morning. As usual, I will now zoom in on some of the financial highlights this quarter. Let's start on Slide 7, where we have the financial development of the last 14 quarters. For the ones that are following us and are used to our format, you will note that we have added the revenue split by regulated and unregulated on this slide. Let's start there. As you can see on the line, regulated revenue is up to 46% of the total this quarter. And even if this will fluctuate between quarters as revenue mix shifts, the longer trend is clear. The portion of regulated revenue will continue to go up. To the left, as mentioned by Martin earlier, we had net revenue of EUR 507.1 million this quarter, and EBITDA margin of 66.4%. What is not shown on this graph is that we, now year-to-date, are at 66.7% in EBITDA margin, making it within the expected range of 66% to 68% for the full year. As you can see from the chart, our growth has clearly tapered off and even become negative, and this is not something we are happy about, and we can assure you that we are doing whatever we can to reverse that trend. Let's go to the next slide. And here, we had our profit and loss statement. A lot of numbers on this slide, so I have highlighted the key takeaways, and I will comment on them one by one. So firstly, again, we had net revenues of EUR 507.1 million, which is down 2.4% year-on-year and down by 3.3% quarter-on-quarter. Secondly, total operating expenses amounted to EUR 210.5 million, which is 5% higher than last -- higher than Q3 last year, but more importantly, down 3.4% from last quarter, which is good evidence of our efforts adjusting the cost base to the weaker revenue momentum. We are not only trying to work smarter and be more efficient optimizing how we use our studios and tables, but we are also taking some broad-based cost-cutting measures, which will continue for the rest of the year and into 2026. Thirdly, our operating profit amounted to EUR 296.6 million in the third quarter. And finally, EPS after dilution amounted to EUR 1.25. To be noted, the profit for 2024 includes EUR 59.7 million of other operating revenue related to reversal of earn-out liability. And so to make it comparable with this year, you should probably adjust for that. Let's move on to the next slide, where I'm going to show you the development of our cash flow. First, to the right, our capital expenditures. And as can be seen in the graph, we are down quarter-on-quarter, the total CapEx related to tangible and intangible assets of EUR 29.8 million. With that, we are likely going to be slightly lower than the full year forecast of EUR 140 million that we announced in the beginning of the year. If we then look left, our operating cash flow after investments amounted to EUR 342.1 million in the quarter, which corresponds to a cash conversion of 83%. With that, we are back on track after a seasonally and unusually weak second quarter. The change in working capital was positive EUR 35.2 million this quarter, meaning a swing back from the weaker number last quarter, which is good and in line with our expectations. Then finally for me, some brief comments on our financial position on the next page. On this page, you will find our summary of the balance sheet for the third quarter compared to what it looked like at the end of last year. The main items that I usually highlight, which are all signs of our financial strength, are the value of the bond portfolio of EUR 103.2 million, our total cash balance that amounted to EUR 656.4 million and the equity position at the end of the quarter, which amounts to EUR 3.8 billion. We have continued with the buybacks in the third quarter. And in total, we invested EUR 187 million and bought back 2.5 million shares. In total, we have now used EUR 406.5 million of this year's mandate from the Board of EUR 500 million. And following the release of the Q3 report today, we'll be back in the market with an aim to use the full mandate before the year ends. With that, I will hand back to Martin for his closing remarks. Martin Carlesund: Thank you, Joakim. So let's summarize the quarter and then move to the Q&A. Performance in Asia was bad and left a negative impact on the group revenues as a total. But with that said, the rest of the world is doing decent to good, and we are determined to get Asia back on track. I understand that it causes some frustration, especially since we actually saw some signs of improvement in the second quarter. And believe me, I'm frustrated, too. I can only repeat that it requires patience while being a top priority. I'm happy to see that the margin has improved compared to the first half of the year, and we don't see any reason why -- for it not to stay within our target range of 66% to 68% for the remainder of the year. Cost efficiency is something that I feel strong about as it's part of our roots as an entrepreneurial company. We never spend a penny unless it provides value to the business in terms of growth. This presentation is about the financial performance in Q3. We don't have a separate slide on the movement in the ongoing deformation litigation in the U.S. We have -- where we have for 4 years finally received information on who was behind the [ false ] report. This process will continue in court, and I will not make any comments about its future development. What I can say is that we believe in fair competition, where innovation and excellent operations count. When a competitor decides not to play by these rules, it hurts not -- it hurts not only us, but the industry as a whole. With that said, with a little bit more than 2 months left of 2025, we will continue to run, adapt and improve. When we summarize the year from a financial perspective, it will have been a bumpy ride, but from an operational perspective, a very strong and important period for Evolution. With that, we'll open up for questions. Next slide. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Martin Arnell from DNB Carnegie. Martin Arnell: My first question is on -- if we could discuss the Asia situation just a little bit more. I think you mentioned it remains volatile and you, of course, the ambition is to get it back on track. And my question would be, are there any signs that it has bottomed out because the counter measurements, that's in your control, right? So if you have been too stringent, you can adapt. But the regulatory situation and the effect from that is more -- is not in your hands. Is that a correct interpretation? Martin Carlesund: We are doing everything we can with the countermeasures. And as I said, we did a little bit too much, and we have to do a little bit less, and we'll find the balance. And I think that we are on to it and we're doing the right things. And it's also natural that there will be a situation where you do a little bit too much because otherwise, you won't know where the borders are. When it comes to the dynamic and the regulatory situation in the region, there's a lot of countries. And right now, there's volatility in some of the regions, some of the countries and that affects us as well. I can't predict much more than that. Martin Arnell: And my second question would be, first on Europe, return to growth quarter-on-quarter there. Is that because players finding their way back after the ring fencing through regulated alternatives, do you think? Martin Carlesund: That's a very good question. And I -- yes, I believe that players in some markets find their way back and want to play a regulated and good compound. So that's probably part of it. And we see good development in total. And I'm actually happy with the development in Europe. Martin Arnell: Okay. And final question is just on investments. I mean is there any investment that you could accelerate to improve this current situation in Asia? You've always commented that you will prio growth over margins. Martin Carlesund: It's -- there is no -- it's not -- if I could throw more money at the problem and I would get a quicker solution, I would do that. I don't see that it's a money issue. We invest and we put the resources -- topnotch resources in the world to do whatever we can. And there is actually -- but don't quote me on that, please, but there is no limitation when it comes to that money. We put revenue and market share before cost, but we also need to adapt to the situation we have. So that's what we're doing right now. Operator: The next question comes from Ed Young from Morgan Stanley. Edward Young: My first question is on North America. It's showing the best growth across your geographies, but it's still behind market growth. Could you give us an update on the drivers there? What's going well? What's going less well? And do you expect any material change in the growth rate into next year? The second is on Asia. It sounds like it's a reasonable conclusion from your comments around countermeasures, Martin, you may never be able to fully deal with these issues. So put another way, should we be rebasing fundamentally our Asia revenue and growth expectations? Or on what sort of time line do you have optimism over market growth and market share gains in Asia? And then finally, I'll ask it. I appreciate giving your very final comment. You may not want to answer, but what are you looking for as an outcome from your legal action? Are you seeking maximum financial damages? You expecting regulators to review your competitors' license suitability? What are you looking for? And what sort of time line do you expect this to play out? Martin Carlesund: Thanks. I got it. So when it comes to growth in U.S., Live is doing really well. We have a couple of fluctuations, maybe we didn't have the best quarter when it comes to RNG. There are a little bit fluctuations over the quarters, I'm happy with the development. I look forward to the future in U.S. That's the situation in the U.S. When it comes to Asia, to address this problem, it's technically difficult. It's very advanced, and we're doing it. And we're tuning and we're finding. My belief is over time, that we will find the right balance and the right solutions and continuously enhance and protect our product to make it even better. So in the longer perspective, I look at a very good situation in the Asian market. Now I don't have any -- I can't share any sort of time frame on that right now. I'm a bit more cautious with that. When it comes to the outcome of the litigation process in U.S., I mean I look for fairness, justice. I think that it's horrible to do what has happened to us. Someone is hiding between layers of companies and hiding the true identity and writing false -- a number of false statements in the report to us. It's unfair. We are protecting the shareholder value of Evolution. The company, as such, defending ourselves from our employees. And the first thing that we look for is some kind of justice, I would say. Operator: The next question comes from Ben Shelley from UBS. Benjamin Shelley: I've just -- I've got 3, if that's okay. On Asia, could you talk a bit more about the developments in India in more detail? What exactly is happening on the ground? And how should we expect this to develop over the coming quarters? My second question is on North America. Could you talk more about your Sweepstake exposure in the U.S. and how meaningful that is versus your North American revenues? And three, I was wondering if you could -- if you had any early thoughts on capital allocation for 2026? Do you think EUR 500 million is the right starting point for share buyback expectations for next year? Martin Carlesund: So the situation on the market in Asia, is a lot of different countries. We point out, Philippines is very volatile right now. There's things happening in India, but there's also other countries that are fluctuating and things are happening there as well. India is a large country. There are regions that have portions regulated when it comes to sports. There's a desire in some regions to regulate. Now there are suggestions on a sort of federal level to take a few steps towards blocking online gaming. These type of movements we often see, when there is talks and happenings about regulation, it opens up for different routes forward. It could go into regulation, it could settle down or it could go to somewhere else. We can't speculate on that. We just see that it's affecting us to a certain level right now. North America, I think that you asked about Sweepstakes, and Sweepstakes is -- we provide to the Sweepstakes market, where there are no regulatory problems or any legal problems. And we are very lean. We talked to regulators. And if there would be a letter or someone, a regulator or an authority stating, don't do it here, we would immediately go away. U.S. had the history of river boats that, from the beginning, travel on the river, down to only shore and they have to have the engine running and then they didn't have them, and then it was [indiscernible]. These type of movements have been -- prediction gaming could be one of these. But these type of movements have been there. And we want to supply to them as long as there is no regulatory or authorities saying no. So we did that. In the case of California, it's a state attorney in Los Angeles that made a personal lawsuit, and that's okay. And immediately when that happen, we withdraw from that. So that we -- okay, if that's what you want, then we will withdraw from that. So that's the Sweepstakes situation. Capital allocation, I don't want to comment on that. It's, in the end of the day, an AGM decision and a Board proposal. We are acting on the capital allocation that we have. And you also have the capital policy that we published last year, and I'm sure that the Board will continue following that. Operator: The next question comes from Pravin Gondhale from Barclays. Pravin Gondhale: Firstly, on Asia cyber attacks, so yes, we are seeing that. It sort of continues to be a drag on your performance. But do you see any risk of spreading these cyber attacks to your other markets like Latin America, where black market continues to be big? And then in Europe, can you just give us a sense that between Live and RNG, which have been the key drivers of your European growth on a sequential basis, and any sort of steer on how do you expect European revenues to grow from here? Martin Carlesund: The protection measures that we add to our core is valid for the whole core, meaning supply to all parts of the world. So one of the upsides in doing what we're doing now with advanced technology and AI and everything is that it also protects our core in other markets and all over the world. So I would almost say that it becomes a competitive advantage where we increase the gap to competition. And eventually, we make it so hard to steal our products. So if you want to steal the product, you have to go to someone else. So it's protecting everything. So any measure we take in Asia will be accommodated in all of the core. So that's that. And when it comes to the split in the growth, I mean, we're doing very well right now, momentarily very well, maybe not even showing in the figures in the right way. But when it comes to RNG, we're happy with the development. Nolimit City is delivering great games. And of course, it's contributing in a good way to the total revenue in Europe. Now it's still a smaller part. So Live is the big part. So don't forget that. I mean, it doesn't matter if it does tremendously well. It doesn't affect the figures that much. Operator: The next question comes from Monique Pollard from Citi. Monique Pollard: Three from me, if I can, as well. The first was just on the regulated revenue increase we saw in the quarter. And you talk about the sort of direction of travel. Just trying to understand whether that increase in the regulated revenues is driven by the fact that North America and regulated territories performing better than Asia or whether there were some new markets that regulated in the quarter that also added to that progression? The second question was just on the U.K. Gambling Commission review. You mentioned in the presentation that there's no new news, but also in the report, you say you're expecting a conclusion by the end of the year. So I just wondered what gives you confidence in that time line of end of year, please? And then the final question is in relation to the news we had a couple of days ago on Playtech Black Cube. I appreciate you don't want to get into the details of the types of damages being sought, et cetera. But it would be really helpful if you could give us some indication of how you look to assess the damages. So is the starting point for assessing damages based on market cap movement on the day that these bits of news became public? Or are there other sort of processes you use when you're thinking about the damages that have been caused by these reports? Martin Carlesund: The regulatory percentage, 46% in the quarter, good development. We're moving in that direction. That's nice. That comes out of, of course, that the regulated markets are outperforming the nonregulated, and it's affected, of course, by the situation in Asia. So more and more gets to be regulated. And I might remind you that as soon as it tips over to 50% and if the revenue grows equally, it will continue to increase more and more. So we're in a good position with that. When it comes to the U.K. Gaming Commission time line, unfortunately, I don't have any other information than what -- it's in the hands of the regulator, and we have been -- our estimation is that it will be by the end of this year. I have no further information. That's what it is. For me, when it comes to the Playtech situation, I mean -- I will say about the same things all over again, but -- when someone behaves in that way, [ hypes ] in -- during 4 years doing this type of action with that type of company that the Black Cube using, Juda as a PR company, it takes a bit away from my belief in humanity and fair play and in ethics and moral. Exactly how we will assess the damages, that's a later question, but it's a severe amount. Operator: The next question comes from Adrien de Saint Hilaire from Bank of America. Adrien de Saint Hilaire: So first of all, on Asia, again, it's been a volatile region now for a while. I'm just curious, high level, if there is a point where you might draw a line in your commitment towards that region and refocus towards other markets? Secondly, you touched on this, but cost of employee was down quarter-on-quarter. Can you explain a bit what's going on there and the sustainability of that? And then, sorry, this is a bit like technical perhaps, but there's been quite a switch between current liabilities and other noncurrent liabilities in the quarter. Can you explain a bit what's going on there, please? Martin Carlesund: Okay. I will start with the first 2, and then I will, with warmth, hand over the last one to Joakim. So we look forward and we are engaged, and we actually think it's intriguing, even if it's tough, to find a solution to protect our product in Asia. But I think it will become more and more important also for other markets if we look in a longer time perspective. So we don't have any line that we will draw against Asia. We'll continue to fight that. And as I stated before, it's not about money. It's not a cost that is the problem. It's to find real good solutions on the level for that. When it comes to cost per employee and the cost base, we have talked about all since actually July 2024, where we have the strike in Georgia in that situation and the cost mix and we had to shift a little bit. So we had an unfavorable cost mix. Now we're starting to be able to shift that, which is what we have talked about during the quarters that we need to have a better and favorable cost mix. It's not like we're cutting delivery right now. It's -- we are putting the delivery in the studios, which are good. So that's the reason why we come to that. And then I will hand over to you, Joakim. Joakim Andersson: Of course, the balance sheet question. It's simply a reclassification of earn-out bilities that we have moved from long -- being long term to short term in this quarter as they indeed are shorter than a year. I think that's the one that you are referring to. Well spotted, by the way. Operator: The next question comes from Raymond Ke from Nordea. Raymond Ke: A couple of questions from me. I'll take them one by one, starting with no surprise maybe at Asia as well. Compared to, say, Q2, how much of the decline here that we saw in Q3, which is due to cyber attacks, and how much is from regulations and changes in geographies like Philippines and India, would you estimate? Martin Carlesund: I don't split that out. There are sort of 3 components in the situation. One is cyber attacks, and the cyber attacks is, of course, the constant level of it, but also our action that was a little bit too tough and then we had to retract. And then there is unstability in the region when it comes to regulatory situation. And here, we point out India and Philippines as 2 of those, but there are also others. So unfortunately, I don't want to go into exactly where in detail, and it's also very hard to see that. Raymond Ke: Got it. And then regarding sort of the regulatory situation in not just Philippines and India, I understand it. But how many months of impact would you estimate that we have seen here in Q3? If we compare it sort of to ring fencing back in Q1, do we have the full effect? How much should we expect ahead? It would be really helpful to understand. Martin Carlesund: No, I understand. I assume that you're talking about Asia, right? Raymond Ke: Yes, that's right. Martin Carlesund: So I think that there is a difference between the situation in Europe and Asia, so to speak, but the ring fencing has a little bit of a tail. I think that in Asia, the situation is more momentarily, okay, this is where we are right now, and we need to take it from there. And then we need to see that we do the right things in the coming quarter and see to find the balance. Raymond Ke: Got it. And then on North America, your sequential sales growth was flat here in Q3. You had momentum going into Q2 where it added EUR 2 million on top line. How much of the trend here in Q3 would you say is due to withdrawing from California stake? Is it the majority here? Or is there other explanations? Martin Carlesund: I wouldn't say that, that affects significantly. Raymond Ke: And finally, just one more, if I may. Could you maybe help us get a better understanding of how you intend to reach your margin target with the revenue we see here in Q2? How much should come from, say, revenue growth? How much should come from additional cost savings? Is it sort of equal, equal? Or how should we think about that? Joakim Andersson: No. If I jump in and take that. I mean in Q3, clearly, we are within, right? It has a separate quarter, 66.4% this quarter. And also, as we said, year-to-date, 66.0%. So if we just repeat what we now delivered in Q3, we are there, right? So it doesn't take a lot to make it for the full year, and we are quite confident that we will make it for the full year. Operator: The next question comes from Rasmus Engberg from Kepler Cheuvreux. Rasmus Engberg: Cheuvreux that is. Do you anticipate that India could potentially have an impact also in the fourth quarter? So that's the first question. Martin Carlesund: I can't comment on that. I don't -- I look at Asia right now, and I'm cautious when I make any predictions due to the situation that it's so volatile. Rasmus Engberg: Fair enough. Can you explain the next step in your legal battle with regards to Playtech? What happens next? And could you also perhaps give us an indication of what the run rate of costs that you're incurring, if possible? Martin Carlesund: The first question I can answer. It's like -- the thing that happened this week is actually a non -- it's not an action that affects Evolution in any way. When we initiated the litigation, it was with a fake name, [ Joe Roe ], and that was Playtech, but we just didn't know that it was Playtech. So right now, that is just exchanged for Playtech because we finally got the name. So that's what happened. That's -- and then we gave you, to the market, all the information we had relating to that, and that's it. So from our perspective, and the next thing is that there are a number of depositions and potential information that should be shared, and the legal process will continue just like it had been. When it is -- when it relates to the cost, it's naturally very expensive to do this type of exercises. We do it to protect the shareholders. We do the value for the shareholders. We do to protect the company. We think it's unfair. It's unheard of. It's a behavior that we just don't understand. Now we won't split it out right now, maybe in the future to come, we will look into it. But right now, we don't comment on the exact cost. Operator: The next question comes from Jack Cummings from Berenberg. Jack Cummings: Two questions, please. The first is just on the ring fencing in Europe. Is there any more that you still have to do? Or is all of the European ring fencing now completed? And then just on my second question, I appreciate it's a little bit early than when you normally talk about full year '26. Based upon your comments on cost shift and cost mix, would you expect to see EBITDA margins expand in full year '26 or full year '25? Martin Carlesund: When I look at ring fencing, I think that we are in a very good position right now in Europe. Things can happen in both directions, but I don't know any other actions that are ahead of us right now. When it comes to EBITDA margin, we have full focus on 2025 to deliver the 66% to 68%. And we look forward to do that. And then I assume somewhere on a release to Q1 report -- the Q4 report, sorry for that, I'm a little bit ahead of the curve, then we will guide you for 2026. [indiscernible] is positive. Operator: The next question comes from Karan Puri from JPMorgan. Karan Puri: Most of my questions are actually answered. Just one on Europe, I guess, wondering how should we be thinking about a more normalized growth profile in '26 onwards once you sort of lapped the ring fencing adjustments. If you could share a bit on that, would be great. Martin Carlesund: The answer to that -- I don't guide on the future, but historically, over the time, Europe is the most mature market, and we had a pace of growing 9%, 10%, quite consistently over a number of years. That's the best knowledge we have of the situation. And right now, we are ring-fenced, and we are starting to see a little bit of growth from that. Operator: The next question comes from Andrew Tam from Rothschild & Co Redburn. Andrew Tam: Just one question from me. Can I just clarify just your position on India. You talk about the regulatory volatility there. I just wanted to just fully understand what that means. Obviously, you've seen in recent weeks, one of your largest customers globally, decide to exit that market entirely with the real money gambling band. Are you saying that, that is a market that you would look to ring fence as well, should you get some more regulatory clarity going the other way against you? Martin Carlesund: Ring fencing has to be done in relation to regulation and what is there. We are watching it closely right now, and there are volatility in India, as you understand. At the time, if there would be a ring fencing, that will be later down the road. Andrew Tam: Okay. So no plans to ring fence in future in India? Martin Carlesund: We're watching it carefully right now and see what will be there. Operator: The next question comes from Martin Arnell from DNB Carnegie. Martin Arnell: Yes, I just had a follow-up question on RNG, actually because I saw that you had growth improvement there. And could you just say, is it because Nolimit City has a strong edge in the market? Or do you see the market for RNG has improved? Martin Carlesund: We are doing better and better, slowly, bit by bit when it comes to our RNG offering. Operator: There are no more questions at this time. So I hand the conference back to the speakers for any closing comments. Martin Carlesund: Thank you very much for participating, listening to us. I really look forward to seeing you in a quarter. Thank you.
Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for standing by, and welcome to the First Citizens BancShares Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, today's conference is being recorded. I would now like to introduce the host of this conference call, Ms. Deanna Hart, Head of Investor Relations. You may begin. Deanna Hart: Good morning. Welcome to First Citizens Third Quarter Earnings Call. Joining me on the call today are our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, Frank Holding; and Chief Financial Officer, Craig Nix. They will provide third quarter business and financial updates referencing our earnings presentation, which you can find on our website. Our comments will include forward-looking statements, which are subject to risks and uncertainties that may cause actual results to differ materially from expectations. We assume no obligation to update such statements. These risks are outlined on Page 3 of the presentation. We will also reference non-GAAP financial measures. Reconciliations of these measures against the most directly comparable GAAP measures can be found in Section 5 of the presentation. Finally, First Citizens is not responsible for and does not edit nor guarantee the accuracy of earnings transcripts provided by third parties. I will now turn it over to Frank. Frank Holding: Thank you, Deanna. Good morning. Thank you for joining us for our third quarter earnings call. During the third quarter, our business segments continued to deliver strong performance. I'll focus my comments on our earnings metrics for the quarter and how we are positioning First Citizens to achieve our strategic initiatives as we move forward. I'll then turn it over to Craig to review our performance in more detail and provide guidance on the fourth quarter. Starting on Page 5. Key earnings metrics were solid, marked by net interest income growth, stable NIM and adjusted noninterest expense at the low end of our guidance range. We reported adjusted earnings per share of $44.62, an adjusted ROE of 10.62% and an adjusted ROA of 1.01%. We achieved 2.5% loan growth over the linked quarter spread across all our operating segments, but led by SVB Commercial where global fund banking loans increased 10% sequentially, driven by increased utilization and strong production in our capital call portfolio. Deposits were up by $3.3 billion or 2% sequentially, with notable inflows from our SVB Commercial and General Bank segments. We are pleased that this marks our 7th consecutive quarter of deposit growth. We also maintained strong capital and liquidity positions supporting the balance sheet growth I just mentioned and allowing us to return another $900 million to our shareholders through share repurchases during the quarter. We recently announced an agreement to purchase 138 branches from BMO Bank and while we offer our clients a variety of different ways to interact with us, our branches continue to be integral to our franchise. Building on the scale of our current nationwide platform, we are excited about this opportunity to expand into new markets and offer our client-centered approach in even more regions. Strategically, the net deposit position is expected to enable us to further enhance our liquidity position and provide additional flexibility to support our strategic initiatives including the repayment of the purchase money note as interest rates move lower. Looking ahead on Page 6. We remain committed to deepening client relationships, optimizing our balance sheet and making investments in our franchise that underpin scalable growth. So far, we have made real progress on our strategic initiatives, including platform integration and alignment. We continue to align teams to improve client experience, client segmentation and product orchestration. We have increased outreach across our business segments to deliver more holistic solutions to our clients. Digital and operational improvements. We continue to streamline workflows through automation where it makes sense with the goal of simplifying our operating environment to make us more operationally efficient. Capital and liquidity resilience. We've maintained capital ratios well above regulatory thresholds and our liquidity profile continues to afford us the optionality to support clients, invest in our future and pursue external opportunities. As always, we remain vigilant on the macro and geopolitical landscape, which remains somewhat uncertain. While we recognize that some elements of the landscape could serve as tailwinds and others headwinds, we are pleased to be operating from a position of strength. In closing, I want to emphasize that even in volatile periods across markets and rates, we continue to believe that our diverse business model and disciplined risk posture are key differentiators. Over the last several quarters, we've delivered consistent results even as external conditions shift. We remain deeply committed to being a dependable, thoughtful partner to our clients, communities and shareholders while maintaining flexibility in a dynamic economic environment. With that, I'll turn it over to Craig, who will take you through our third quarter results and forward-looking guidance for the fourth quarter. Craig? Craig Nix: Thank you, Frank. Thanks for joining us today. I will anchor my comments to the third quarter key takeaways outlined on Page 8. Pages 9 through 26 provide more details underlying our results and are for your reference. Frank mentioned, we had another solid quarter in terms of term and return metrics exceeded our expectations. Adjusted net income of $587 million was driven by positive operating leverage which included net revenue growth and expenses at the low end of our guidance range. Positive operating leverage was partially offset by an $82 million charge-off related to the first brands bankruptcy representing our full exposure to the company. We don't believe this loss is reflective of broader issues within our supply chain finance portfolio, and we're confident in the strength of our broader loan portfolio. Tangible book value per share increased by approximately 8% over the prior year and 2% sequentially despite share repurchases totaling $4 billion since inception of our share repurchase plan in July 2024 and $900 million in the third quarter. Headline net interest income was up 2.3% sequentially and in the upper half of our guidance range, driven primarily by higher average earning assets and day count. Net interest income ex accretion grew by 2.7% sequentially. Headline NIM was 3.26%, unchanged from the linked quarter, while NIM ex accretion was 3.15%, up 1 basis point sequentially as we were able to continue to manage deposit costs down while the earning asset yield remained relatively stable. Adjusted noninterest income came in just above our guidance range, increasing modestly by 1% sequentially. The primary drivers of the increase were gains on the sale of previously foreclosed assets and higher client investment fees driven by an increase in average off-balance sheet client funds in SVB Commercial. These increases were partially offset by a $9 million sequential decline in adjusted rental income resulting from higher maintenance costs in our rail business. We continue to believe the underlying fundamentals in this business are solid with utilization close to 97% and continued positive repricing trends. Adjusted noninterest expense came in at the lower end of our guidance range and was virtually unchanged from the linked quarter. Moving to the balance sheet. Loans increased by $3.5 billion or 2.5% sequentially, led by growth in Global Fund Banking within the SVB Commercial segment, followed by modest growth in the general and commercial bank segments. Global Fund Banking loans increased $2.9 billion and quarter end loan balances were at their highest level since the acquisition in this business. New loan production was strong, and we saw increased utilization in our capital call lines of credit. The pipeline for GFB remains strong, totaling approximately $10 billion as of the end of the quarter. We are encouraged by some signs of increased market activity in GFB, which we believe may continue to be a positive driver over the medium term. General Bank loans grew by $238 million, driven by -- primarily by growth in the commercial portfolio within the branch network and our wealth business. Recall, last quarter, we saw a contraction in the commercial portfolio. So we were pleased with its performance as runoff slowed and production increased. Meanwhile, our Wealth business continued to benefit from increased originations in the third quarter. Commercial Bank loans also increased $150 million with middle market banking experienced growth offset by declines within our industry verticals as we saw elevated prepayments as deals move to permanent financing and some deals in the pipeline move to the fourth quarter. We continue to maintain pricing discipline, which was reflected in our loan yield as the ex accretion loan yield held up well, only declining by 1 basis point during the quarter despite the impact of lower interest rates. Turning to the right-hand side of the balance sheet. Deposits grew by $3.3 billion or 2% sequentially as we experienced growth across all our operating segments. SVB Commercial was the largest contributor of the increase, growing by $2.1 billion, driven by growth in both Global Fund Banking and Tech and Healthcare . Deal events led to an increase in GFB deposits, while Tech and Healthcare benefited from new client acquisition and an improving investment environment. Encouragingly, average deposit balances and average total client funds in the SVB commercial business grew by 5.9% over the second quarter. While we are encouraged by this growth and some positive signs in the innovation economy, we remain guarded on the forward-looking impact on the balance sheet, giving known outflows following the end of the quarter and the overall state of the innovation landscape. In SVB Commercial, we remain focused on winning market share that is stable and profitable. In the General Bank, growth was primarily concentrated in the branch network and wealth where we continue to focus on deepening existing relationships and acquiring new customers. As noted last quarter, we have implemented additional deposit growth tactics to help identify both near- and long-term opportunities to accelerate growth through deepening relationships, encouraging more local decision-making, and improving digital capabilities, and we are excited to see these efforts pull through on the balance sheet. We were also encouraged by our ability to grow noninterest-bearing deposits for the third consecutive quarter helping us keep our noninterest-bearing deposit mix stable at 26% despite continued strong growth in total deposits. Moving to credit. Net charge-offs increased by $115 million to $234 million and were 65 basis points for the quarter. As I noted earlier, $82 million of the increase was a result of the First Brands bankruptcy, which contributed 23 basis points or made up around 35% of our total net charge-offs for the third quarter. We don't believe this loss is reflective of broader issues within our supply chain finance portfolio, which totaled $300 million as of the end of the quarter. Outside of this loss, net charge-offs -- outside of this loss net charge-offs were within our expectations and the guidance we provided for the third quarter. Excluding the First Brands charge-off, net charge-offs were mostly concentrated in the SVB commercial investor-dependent portfolio, the commercial bank general office portfolio and our equipment finance portfolio reasonably consistent with prior quarters. While we still see stress in the equipment finance portfolio, we continue to see signs of improvement and trending toward long-term expectations. We have taken steps to mitigate future losses through tightening underwriting as well as increasing collection staff to work through earlier vintages. We expect these efforts to return this business to historical net charge-off levels in the medium term. There are a couple of larger charge-offs this quarter. And as we have noted on past calls, net charge-offs can be lumpy quarter-over-quarter, given the hold sizes of some of our credits. While we continue to monitor these portfolios, we don't see further trends that would signal wider credit quality concerns and believe we are well reserved. The allowance ratio was down 4 basis points to 1.14%, driven by improvements in the macroeconomic outlook, a reduction in reserves related to Hurricane Helene and growth in higher credit quality loan portfolios. We feel good about our over observe coverage as well as the coverage on portfolios experiencing stress. Ultimately, our strong risk management rigorous underwriting standards and diversified portfolio helps safeguard against losses. Given recent industry headlines, I want to briefly touch on our exposure to nondepository financial institutions or NDFI. While the exposure can look sizable based on our call report, approximately 85% is to high-quality, low-risk capital call lines to private equity and VC sponsors. These are backed by institutional investors with committed capital many of which have historically generated solid risk-adjusted returns and credit performance has been excellent. So while the regulatory classification may label them as NDFI, from a credit perspective, we view them as safe, well-managed assets. Moving to capital. Frank mentioned that we continue to make progress on our 2025 share repurchase plan. As of close of business on October 21, we had repurchased just over 15% of Class A common shares or 14% of total common shares outstanding for a total price of $4 billion. Note that this is inclusive of the 2024 plan, which we completed in the third quarter of 2025. With respect to the $4 billion repurchase plan approved by the Board in July 2025, we have completed approximately 7% of this authorization. During the third quarter, repurchases were at the top end of our $600 million to $900 million range -- per quarter range. We expect that repurchases through the end of 2025 and into the first part of 2026, will continue to be near the higher end of this range as we manage CET1 towards our target range. The pace will likely slow down when CET1 is closer to our target range, assuming earnings and RWA growth are in line with expectations. Share repurchases will continue to be a tool to support capital management activities, providing us with an opportunity to return capital to our shareholders and to be more efficient -- capital efficient over time. Although we expect that CET1 will remain above our target range of 10.5% to 11% in 2025, given our current growth expectations and where our capital ratios were to start the year, we believe the repurchase plan will enable us to methodically manage CET1 down to that level over time as we regularly assess our growth outlook, economic conditions, the regulatory environment and capital deployment. The third quarter CET1 ratio was 11.65%, a decrease of 47 basis points from the second quarter as the impact from share repurchases and loan growth outpaced earnings. I will close on Page 28 with our fourth quarter and full year 2025 outlook. We continue to monitor the overall macroeconomic environment but acknowledge that fluidity of changes makes it difficult to narrow the range of potential impacts on the broader economy and our business lines and clients. Accordingly, we have not made significant changes to our guidance but do continue to monitor the environment and how it could impact our performance. Additionally, as Frank noted earlier, we are excited about the recent announcement of the branch acquisition with BMO Bank, given the expected close -- given that the expected close is in mid-2026. The impacts of this deal are not included in the guidance. With those disclaimers out of the way, I'll start with the balance sheet where we anticipate loans in the $143 billion to $146 billion range in the fourth quarter, driven primarily by the same areas we have seen growth year-to-date. As I noted earlier, while we had strong third quarter growth, we remain cautiously optimistic on absolute loan levels as we head into year-end. In the Commercial Bank, we expect recent trends to abate and are projecting growth in our industry verticals. Market activity remains positive. And while there is increasing competition as banks continue to lean into the lending market, our pipeline remains strong, going into the end of the year. Credit metrics remain stable and optimism is being signaled across the industry, pointing to a strong end of the year for the lending market. We expect some pullback in global fund banking in the fourth quarter as we aren't projecting utilization to remain at the levels we saw in the third quarter. Loan outstandings in this business can ebb and flow based on client draws and repayments. And while we are very bullish over the medium term on the continued expansion in this line of business, we are realistic that quarter and snapshots of outstanding balances can be more volatile. We expect deposits to be in the $161 billion to $165 billion range in the fourth quarter. We expect drivers of growth to be continued expansion in the general bank through the branch network and wealth as we continue to focus on deepening existing relationships, inquiring new customers to help drive organic deposit growth. We expect that this growth will be partially offset by a decline in SVB commercial given known outflows from deposits into off-balance sheet products post quarter end that increased third quarter deposit balance on balance sheet. We continue to be focused on strategies to best serve our clients in this business while reducing funding and liquidity costs, which could impact absolute deposit growth levels. Our interest rate forecast covers a range of 0 to 225 basis points rate cuts in the fourth quarter of 2025 with the effective Fed funds rate range, declining from 4% to 4.25% currently to as low as 3.5% to 3.75% by the end of the year. While our baseline forecast includes two rate cuts, we believe stubborn inflationary metrics and possible impacts of macroeconomic policy could lead to fewer or no cuts. Therefore, we believe it is prudent to provide a range of expectations. With that in mind, we expect fourth quarter headline net interest income to be relatively stable compared to the third quarter. For the full year, we are tightening our headline net interest income guidance to be in the range of $6.74 billion to $6.84 billion from $6.68 billion to $6.88 billion. The revision reflects the new forward interest rate curve as well as the jumping off point from the third quarter. In either case, as expected, we project that loan accretion will be down by over $200 million for the year compared to 2024. On credit losses, we anticipate fourth quarter net charge-offs in the range of 35 to 45 basis points, in line with the range we provided in the third quarter but below our third quarter results. As previously discussed, our third quarter net charge-offs were higher than anticipated given one large charge-off. We expect losses to continue to be driven by the same portfolio as we have been discussing for a number of quarters, equipment finance, general office and the SVB investor-dependent portfolio. We remain focused on client selection and prudent underwriting and have tightened in certain sectors and asset classes for specific client profiles. In commercial real estate, while rate cuts could ease some of the pressure on borrowers in the general office sector, we do believe losses will remain elevated in the fourth quarter even as market disruption may lessen as more companies have reinstated office attendance requirements. With respect to the full year range, we are increasing our guide of 35 to 45 basis points to 43 to 47 basis points given the higher jump-off point. We also continue to see some lumpiness and losses in the portfolio and as we mentioned earlier, we have a portfolio where a handful of large deals can swing the ratio. It is important to note that our net charge-off guidance does not include an estimate for the long-term impact of tariffs given the continued shifts in expectations and the difficulty in determining the full impact on our asset quality. While higher tariffs could drive economic stress in the form of inflation and/or lower growth, we believe the credit risk is manageable. We will continually assess the potential impact on our portfolio, but we do believe that its diversity is a strength in this environment. Moving to adjusted noninterest income, we expect to be in the $480 million to $510 million range in the fourth quarter aligned with a typical quarter for us. Overall, we continue to see strength in many of our core lines of business such as rail, merchant, card, wealth and lending-related fees. Given that we have three quarters behind us, we have tightened our full year adjusted noninterest income range to $1.99 billion to $2.02 billion. Year-over-year growth continues to be driven by our rail outlook, which includes a balanced railcar portfolio in a strategic exploration ladder. We also expect continued growth in wealth and international fees, thanks to new client acquisition and an increase in flow of funds. We are also encouraged by the performance of our capital markets business as we are on target to achieve another year of record fee income. The increase in off-balance sheet client funds has also benefited client investment fees. I do want to caution that given the changing rate environment, our client derivative positions can fluctuate between quarters causing some lumpiness in our results. Moving to adjusted noninterest expense. We expect the fourth quarter to be up modestly compared to the third quarter as we continue to invest in Category 3 readiness and to help simplify and optimize our platforms to allow us to scale efficiently in the future. We also have seasonal expenses that generally pull through in the fourth quarter like higher travel, client entertainment and year-end contributions, making it a bit lumpy. Looking at the full year, we tightened our adjusted noninterest expense range to $5.12 billion to $5.16 billion. Exercising disciplined expense management while making opportunistic investments through the cycle and technology and risk management is a top priority for us given headwinds to net interest income. Our adjusted efficiency ratio is expected to be in the upper 50% range in 2025 as the impact of the Fed rate cut cycle puts downward pressure on net interest margin and we continue to make investments into areas that will help us scale to Category 3 status. Longer term, our goal remains to operate in the mid-50s. Finally, for both the third quarter and full year -- for both the fourth quarter and full year 2025, we expect our tax rate to be in the range of 25% to 26%, which is exclusive of any discrete items. To conclude, we are pleased to deliver another quarter of strong financial results, reflective of the strength and resilience of our diversified business model. Thanks to our long-term focus, continued investments in our business and strong risk management framework, we're well positioned to continue delivering value to our clients, customers, communities and shareholders. I will now turn it over to the operator for instructions for the question-and-answer portion of the call. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And our first question comes from Chris McGratty at KBW. Christopher McGratty: Craig, on the NII guide, I want to start there. It looks like you just added a cut to the guide from last quarter. Can you help us about -- within the range for Q4 if we get the forward curve, is the $1.7 billion the right number if you get two cut? I know there's a lot moving on with the balance sheet. Craig Nix: Yes. If we get two cuts, which frankly would be our base forecast, we think it's more likely than not having any cuts or one cut. So when we look at both headline net interest income and net interest income ex purchase accounting, we would expect those numbers to be down low single digits percentage points sequentially. And if we look at NIM headline. We're looking in the high 3.10%. And if we look at NIM ex accretion in the high 3.00% for the fourth quarter. Christopher McGratty: Okay. And then I guess, fast forwarding, I mean, I guess the question is, when do you assume NII bottoms? Craig Nix: Really all -- both headline NII and ex-accretion NII and headline NIM and ex accretion NIM with trough in the first quarter of '26. But let me point out that there's a little nuance there that if the interest rate forecast holds, which assumes two more rate cuts this year, with the Fed fund rate ending at around 3.75%, we do anticipate paying down the note as the arbitrage in it either disappears or becomes 0 as opposed to where we have a 70 basis point spread right now. So at that point, repayment would have a positive impact on NIM to the extent, which will be determined by the amount of our pay down. So our NIM troughs are pulled forward to the first quarter, even despite our asset sensitivity given that the paydown will be accretive to NIM, absent the paydown, which wouldn't make any sense if there's an arbitrage in it, those troughs will be pushed out to the first part of '27. Christopher McGratty: Okay. And on the $35 or so billion, are you thinking tranches? How are you thinking about repayment? Any kind of color there? Andrew Giangrave: Yes. On the purchase money note, we can pay portions of it. So we would not go out and pay off the whole things as it makes up a substantive, obviously, a portion of our balance sheet and also we do the optionality obviously carries some value above and beyond the rate we're paying on it. So it would be something we would sort of leg into but maybe make a slightly larger first payment on. . Operator: The next question is from Bernard Von Gizycki from Deutsche Bank. Bernard Von Gizycki: I know you mentioned the $82 million charge-off to First Brands and represents all your exposure there. But can you just share any information on any additional monitoring you might have conducted throughout that portfolio? I think it was called out that the allowance for loan losses, there were some higher specific reserves for individually evaluated loans. So just any color you can share on that? Andrew Giangrave: Sure. This is Andy. Just to remind, our supply chain portfolio is about $300 million across 24 borrowers. So it's, on average, about $13 million of exposure, we don't have the level of concentration in the remainder of that portfolio that we did with First Brands, certainly did a deep dive post-perse brands and feel very comfortable with the remainder of that portfolio. Obviously, there's a lot of widespread allegations around fraud there. But it's going to take some time to work through that through the bankruptcy process before we learn more there. And we don't think that it's emblematic of the supply chain portfolio or supply chain in general. Bernard Von Gizycki: And just as a follow-up on M&A, post acquisition of BMO's branches expected to close for mid next year. Just given the favorable regulatory backdrop, can you just talk about your appetite to do an additional branch acquisition or a whole bank acquisition? Craig Nix: Yes. Beyond BMO, we have no specific M&A plans. But as BMO indicates, long term, M&A will remain a significant part of our growth strategy. So we don't have -- and outside of BMO, we don't have a specific time line on when we'll be back in the market as we continue to focus on category 3 readiness and capital efficiency. But when we do enter the market, we will be the same opportunistic buyer focused on accretive M&A that brings more scale and enhances our ability to compete and makes us a better bank for our customers and clients. Operator: The next question comes from Casey Haire with Autonomous. Casey Haire: I wanted to touch on the loan growth. So the loan growth guide, I hear you that it's that you expect lower utilization in fund banking, but you just put up a 10% annualized growth and it sounds like the pipeline is just as strong. So -- but the guide introduces the possibility of loans coming in, in the fourth quarter. Just in -- want to get a little color on what you really expect loan growth because it seems a little conservative. Frank Holding: Let me -- let Marc start with that and Elliot amplify. Marc Einerman: Sure. So this is Marc and speaking specifically about the GFB segment. Totally understand your point, given the 10% quarter-over-quarter growth in the third quarter. A call out there though. And maybe going back to something, Craig, I think you said earlier, is borrowings and repayments tend swing around a lot. And with Global Fund Banking, in particular, that can happen. And it's probably best illustrated when I think about the average loan growth in that segment versus the period end, that average loan growth is sub-$1 billion over the course of the third quarter. And that obviously is quite a bit less than the plus 3% on a period end basis. And so I think that illustrates sort of the point right there. And by extension, I think hopefully explains the appearance of conservatism in that part of the fourth quarter loan growth outlook. I'll stop there and pass it to you, Craig. Casey Haire: Okay. And just on the expenses. So first off, I guess, a pretty wide range in the fourth quarter, up 10%, up 50%. Just what are the wildcards within that? And then just as a follow-up, that implies 6% to 7% expense both on the year and '25. Just wondering how much of that is Category 3 prep and when we could see a relief on the expense pressure? Craig Nix: Yes. I'll let Elliot talk about the guide, but I'll handle the last part of that question, but the escalation of expenses in '25, as we guided previously, are related primarily to that work. Large financial institution program as well as several large projects related to that work as well. So that is the reason for the mid- to upper single-digit expense growth in '25 over '24. I'll let Elliot speak to the guide a bit for the fourth quarter. Elliot Howard: Yes, sure. Craig touched on some of the script. I mean I think when you look at the fourth quarter, there are certain things that are kind of more particular plus seasonal to the fourth quarter. We see kind of elevated client entertainment, we see elevated travel, in addition, when you look at something like health insurance, a lot of employees have hit their deductibles, so we see that pull through at a higher rate in the fourth quarter. In addition, I think third quarter, we had some larger meaningful projects close out. And so the depreciation impact is now going to be reflected in the fourth quarter. So as far as what could tipped up or down, I think some of those aforementioned things and then really just the timing of kind of idiosyncratic project expenses really related to kind of the tech build-out and simplification. Casey Haire: Okay. And just Craig, the Category 3 prep expense -- is that -- can we -- when can we start to see some relief on those expenses? Is that a near-term event? Or is that further down the road? Craig Nix: I would call it medium term. I think in terms of -- we made a lot of progress there. And there's certainly a great focus within our company to continue to make progress there. Most of the Category 3 requirements are either enhancements to what we currently do or represent formalization of rules that we already comply with. But there are -- there's a lot of work around data modeling and then reporting frequency, which really has us reworking processes, systems and data delivery. So there are some expenses there. I think we're probably to use a baseball analogy in the 7th inning stretch there. So there will be some expenses pulling through there, but we may -- but I do want to mention we have made a lot of great progress on that. We do intend to be able to meet those requirements in the first half of '26. Operator: The next question comes from Anthony Elian from JPMorgan. Anthony Elian: For Marc, on total client funds, I'd like to get more color on total client funds. What specifically drove the strong growth you saw in 3Q. And I know in Craig's prepared remarks, there's a level of cautiousness on the outlook for SVB. But given the backdrop of lower rates, more IPOs coming to market and VC investments continuing at a strong pace. What exactly is causing you to believe that the strong level of activity won't continue? Marc Einerman: So I will start, others may wish to contribute as well. I think this really goes to the caution that was represented in Craig's comments and with regard to Q4 guidance. It certainly has been encouraging and was encouraging to see that growth in the third quarter. At the same time, you mentioned IPOs, and there were 7 over $1 billion or with pre-money valuation over $1 billion, or with pre-money valuations over $1 billion, I think it was in the quarter, but not yet again, a torrid pace there. And as I think we all know, thus far, in the fourth quarter, there are no IPOs, SEC, I believe, remains closed. And so, that would be 1 factor. We are encouraged by some improving exit activity outside of IPOs. And I'm speaking specifically to M&A that could potentially result in further improvement in venture capital sentiment improvement in investment. But there are so many -- again, as Craig referenced, uncertainty, headwinds, et cetera, out there that is just really difficult to predict at the moment, whether that trend we saw in the third quarter will continue in the fourth and beyond. And so that hopefully helps to explain some of our caution there. And maybe actually to pen just one last comment. While venture capital investment to, I think, another point you made is on track to have a second best year ever. That concentration in the mega round end of the segment over $30 billion going to the large AI round. The -- what's left after that really hasn't changed terribly much when you look at what that represents on a quarterly basis and early-stage investment, which is particularly important to the SVB segment. really hasn't come back yet aside from maybe deal count in certain segments having gone up a bit. And so with all of that for context, hopefully, that explains our more cautious outlook there, and I will pass it, to Craig, to you if you have anything to add there. Craig Nix: I have nothing to add. Anthony Elian: And then my follow-up on credit. I'm curious if you've done any broader reviews on policies and procedures, particularly on the CIT portfolio beyond supply chain after first grants and the other recent credit events that have happened across the industry. Andrew Giangrave: Yes. I mean, that is part of our normal course where we're continuously looking at policies, procedures, our credit standards. It goes through a regular cadence of reapproval, and to ensure that is in line with our risk appetite. So yes, that is part of our normal cadence and our risk management. Operator: The next question comes from Steven Alexopoulos from TD Cowen. Steven Alexopoulos: I want to start, go back to Casey's question. So you have elevated expenses related to LFI prep. And if we think about the work you're doing I think we're all trying to figure out how much of the expense level is sticky, right? You're just hiring more full-time people, et cetera. And once you get done with this, let's just say, for argument's sake, it's mid-2026, do expenses from that point start growing at a more normal cadence? Or are there costs in the run rate now that will actually fall out that caused expenses to step down a bit before they start growing? Elliot Howard: Yes, Steve, I think a few things there. I think while there might be some that falls out, it's ultimately going to be replaced with a lot of the investment that we're doing in tech and simplification. As we look to -- Casey referenced kind of the 6% to 7% guide kind of from the end of the year this year or '24, we would expect that to probably be in the range of mid-single digits next year. So it certainly pulled back a little bit. But I think as we look towards kind of that longer-term road map, as we look to some of the investments in the tech space are going to help scale us for growth. We don't see really the expenses pulling back and going down, but more moderating from the levels they've been at. Steven Alexopoulos: So they just get replaced with other expenses. Okay. That's helpful. And then -- which is tied to that actually. So if we look at the ROTCE, PAA is a factor, but ROTCE is down about 11% adjusted this quarter. So it's down quite a bit over the past year. Now I know you're active in repurchasing shares already this quarter. But what's stopping you from getting much more active, just given you're above your target stocks down, I don't know, 17% or so year-to-date just above tangible book. Why not get even more active here? It seems like you have a window to do that. Craig Nix: And just to be clear, you're talking about in terms of share repurchases getting more active? Steven Alexopoulos: Yes. Craig Nix: Okay. Yes. Well, first of all, the -- we lay out our plan for share repurchases in our capital plan. And we've always said that we want it to be methodical about that. And we believe a range of $600 million to $900 million, which on the time of that is aggressive is a good pace. And that's what we would intend to do going forward. We obviously have to be very cognizant of while we're doing this of our growth outlooks, internal growth, the economic environment, regulatory changes and just capital deployment options in general. So we believe that, that range is really getting after it. We've repurchased 15% of our A shares and 14% of total common since the commencement of the plan. So we believe our pace is getting after it. Operator: The next question comes from Brian Foran from Truist. Brian Foran: I'm not sure if you can speak to this, but 2026 NII is obviously such a big debate given the tension of underlying growth and rate cuts. So appreciate the comments that you think or forecast that NII would bottom in 1Q '26. Is it possible to give any bounds on the level? And then as you look to 2Q '26 and beyond, any thoughts on the directional bias would you see it as more flat do you think you can grow even with Fed rate cuts? And again, totally appreciate it's early for '26 guidance, but it's the biggest question I hear from investors. So any thoughts would be helpful. Craig Nix: Sure. I'd be glad to give you some directional color there, with two rate cuts and two in '26. We could -- we would expect both net interest income and headline and ex accretion to be fairly stable and the NIM -- headline NIM and ex accretion NIM to be fairly stable with the exit in the fourth quarter of '25. So fairly stable. If we had more rate cuts, obviously, that would change -- that could change. Brian Foran: That's really helpful. Maybe for Marc, more of just qualitative one, can you speak to the AI boom and where that's benefiting SVB? And then conversely, anywhere, it's not benefiting SVB, is it a size of deal thing? Is it a client coverage thing? Is it a your choices and selections of what you want to be involved in, just broadly, if you could speak to the AI trends that are such a big part of market right now? Marc Einerman: Sure. So starting with venture investment as referenced in my earlier remarks, there's an awful lot of capital going into the space that has been very dramatically different in terms of the investment pace valuation trends, et cetera, relative to the broader venture backdrop, that's where things have been going through a reset or whatever, we would call it, since around mid-'22. So where SVB benefits is -- and in fact, AI is working its way into all of the other sectors that we focus on in one way, shape or form, an enabler, a feature, et cetera. And that for the companies that are successfully weaving that into their offering. That is enabling them to so many words, get in on the AI boom and be more attractive to investment and there's some parsing there that I think investors are doing not too different from what happened in [ dot-com ] when suddenly everyone was [ dot-com ] , you had to figure out who really was. Some of that is going on here. But clearly, that spread of that enhancement into these sectors, again, is driving investment in helping us find those better opportunities to bring clients on to lend, et cetera. Where we don't see as much benefit is those mega rounds I mentioned earlier, those going to the very largest AI companies, LLM companies, et cetera, that really hasn't been a factor for us in terms of driving business results. And so hopefully, that color helps with the bifurcation. The very biggest ones, not really our target market, starting to see some benefit across the sectors we bank elsewhere. Jim Hudak: This is Jim Hudak. One thing to just interject to Marc's point and other places where we're benefiting in for Citizens, we have had a very good ride on the data center side. And a lot of that growth in data centers is a need for capacity -- computing capacity from AI. So on the places where we're actually financing some of the infrastructure, a lot of that has actually been driven by AI. And that's actually helped us on the loan growth side. And one other point I just wanted to make was in relation to -- looking at our loan growth, we've actually benefited from the fact that there's so much liquidity in the market. So even though we are doing quite a bit on the data center side, sometimes we will get paid out because as those data centers get built and stabilized, they'll be taken up to the securitization markets and then we will go and recycle that money. And where that shows up for us is actually enhanced capital markets fees. It may not necessarily be in quarter-over-quarter strong growth each time. But a lot of benefits to us when we're financing infrastructure, where it's -- where a lot of that is promoted by the demand for AI. Brian Foran: If I could sneak in a follow-up there, but do we know the size of this data center lending book and geographically, does that show up at SVB? Or does that show up somewhere else in your disclosure? Jim Hudak: So the data center side is on the commercial bank side, commercial finance. And our exposure is about $3.5 billion. Operator: The next question is from Samuel Varga at UBS. Samuel Varga: I just wanted to go back to SVB for one more finer point on 2026. Just based on all the commentary you've provided this morning, is it fair to say that the growth to come is more on the new client acquisition side rather than utilization uptake? Or it could be still from both into next year? Marc Einerman: I will start, and I think it could be both, right? It's early-stage venture investment, were to pick up. that would certainly be helpful on the new client acquisition side and helpful to our Tech & Healthcare banking business. And generally speaking, if investors are investing more, that is going to help with utilization of those capital call lines, but typically are how VCs fund those investments, recognizing that there is a large significant portion really more than half of the capital call portfolio that is private equity driven and not really about venture investment, innovation economy, et cetera. Though as we saw in the third quarter, that was certainly part of the utilization story as well. And so I'll try to stick the landing here in that we think in an improving environment, we would hopefully see both. But I'll end by saying, again, given our caution, the mixed outlook, et cetera, nothing I've said should be taken as a guidance for '26 at this point. Craig, I'll pass it to you if you want to add or speak on anything? Craig Nix: I think that covers it, Marc. Thank you. Samuel Varga: And then just a short one on credit, nonaccruals moved up a little bit, as you noted, Craig, in the prepared remarks. Can you provide any updates or any further color on migration trends or the mitigation trends? Andrew Giangrave: Yes. I think it was driven by a handful of larger credits. We had one in the innovation portfolio, which was a non-investor dependent transaction that migrated this quarter. We had a couple of credits in our wine portfolio migrate as well and then an additional credit in CRE. Outside of that, everything has been pretty stable. I think I would point out that our criticized and classified assets did come down for the second quarter in a row by about 4.5%. And to Craig's point, I think from a charge-off perspective, absent First Brands it's right in line with where we would expect things to come up this quarter. So we're feeling pretty good about credit. Operator: Next question comes from Christopher Marinac from Janney Montgomery Scott. Christopher Marinac: I just wanted to go back over the years as you've had other fraudulent situations. Can you just walk us through kind of how you have evolved your fraud detection in general, post CIT and now post SVB? Gregory Smith: So this is Greg Smith. I run the enterprise operations. Fraud has always been a key focus for us, and we have invested quite a bit of money over the past few years in talent and in technology I won't get into some of the details. But on a day-to-day basis, we now use AI. We have different algorithms to detect fraud. And we've really seen I'll say, stability in that market, although it is something that is a key focus, and it may grow over time, we have spikes once in a while for individual products, but we have strengthened our environment quite a bit over the last few years. Christopher Marinac: Great. And then Craig, just a quick one for you. As the branch acquisition closes next year. Does that help you become more neutral from a rate risk perspective? . Craig Nix: It certainly is net deposit based, so less asset sensitive, yes. I won't say -- I haven't really calculated the actual position. So I wouldn't say neutral because it's just relatively small -- relative to the overall balance sheet but certainly is directionally in the right place. I'll let Tom mention, he wants to say something about that as well. Tom Eklund: I think really, if you're thinking about asset sensitivity, I think the major driver is as we start paying down that fixed rate purchase money note is what's going to help get that down. And obviously, if you look at that branch acquisition, that's replacement with deposit funding to that purchase money note, I think that's an accurate statement. Operator: Not showing any further questions at this time. So I'd like to turn the call back over to our host, Ms. Deanna Hart for any closing remarks. Deanna Hart: Thank you, everyone, for joining us today on our earnings call. We appreciate your ongoing interest in our company. And if you have further questions or need additional information, please feel free to reach out to the Investor Relations team through our website. We hope you have a great rest of your day. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, this concludes today's conference call. You may now disconnect. Have a wonderful day.
Bertina Engelbrecht: Good afternoon and a warm welcome to the webcast of our annual results for the year ended 31 August 2025. I am Bertina Engelbrecht, Chief Executive Officer of the Clicks Group. Joining me here today is Gordon Traill, our Chief Financial Officer. We will be taking you through the presentation of our annual results and respond to your questions after the conclusion of our presentation. This slide sets out the outline we will follow. I will start with a review of our financial year. Gordon will follow with an overview of our financial results. I will take you through the trading performances of our business units; first Clicks, then UPD; and I will then close with the outlook for the group. Please submit any questions that you may have via the webcast platform during and after the conclusion of our presentation. Sue Hemp from our Investor Relations team will read out your questions to which Gordon and I will respond. I will now commence with a review of the year. At the macro environment level, green shoots are starting such as a slight expansion of GDP growth, the easing of domestic inflationary pressures and lower debt servicing costs. Although confidence levels are below historic averages, the latest consumer confidence index reported a modest easing of pessimism. Despite some challenges, particularly the high unemployment rate and fiscal constraints, we maintained performance momentum because of our focused results orientation, resilient business model, brand strength and incredibly loyal ClubCard customers. In the year, we delivered diluted headline earnings per share growth of 14.1%. This is comfortably within our guidance range and an enviable return on equity of 49.2%. We are reaping the benefit of the foresight of past leaders who launched our loyalty program in 1995. In August, our ClubCard celebrated its 30th anniversary with over 12.6 million active members who contributed 82.6% to our sales. Last year, I said I would be disappointed if we did not exceed our store and pharmacy rollout targets. True to form, our teams did not disappoint. We increased our Clicks store count to 990, pharmacy count to 780 and primary care clinics to 225. We are strengthening our relationship with the Department of Health, a key stakeholder. Post the year-end, additional pharmacy licenses are being issued. This supports our pharmacy expansion program. In a subdued trading environment, customers focus on value by switching to lower priced brands, buying on promotion and using loyalty programs. As a value retailer with a respected private label program, we were well positioned to leverage our market-leading shares in defensive retail categories. Customers responded favorably to our product and price offers resulting in market share gains in our core health and beauty categories. I will provide greater detail on the market share and category performances in the retail segments review stabilized and the business is gaining positive traction. Purchasing compliance from both Clicks and the listed private hospital groups have recovered. Expense management, as Gordon will share in more detail, was exceptional. As a group, we embrace inclusive transformation with a strong emphasis on gender diversity and local empowerment, the results of which are reflected in our BBBEE level 3 rating and our top achiever status in the UN Women's Empowerment Principles. I now hand over to Gordon, who will take you through the group's financial results. Gordon Traill: Thank you, Bertina. Good afternoon. As in previous years, we will cover the financial performance of the group starting with the group highlights. If we consider the financial highlights, group turnover increased by 5.3%. Retail turnover grew 6% for the year with half 2 slightly slower due to new stores and pharmacies being opened later in the year and lower inflation. UPD had a slower second half after the recovery from the system implementation in the previous year. Total income margin grew by 90 basis points resulting from strong growth in private label, supply chain efficiency income and lower shrink in the retail business. The group trading margin at 9.8% increased by 60 basis points due to the growth of retail and good cost control from UPD. Diluted headline earnings per share for the group increased to ZAR 13.62 per share, up 14.1% on last year within our guided range of 11% to 16%. The group's operations generated strong cash inflows of ZAR 6.6 billion. During the year, we returned over ZAR 2.7 billion to shareholders in dividends and share buybacks. The group's return on equity at 49.2% increased from 46.4% in the prior year. And the dividend declared for the year has been increased by 14.2% to ZAR 0.886 per share, which is a 65% payout ratio. Retail had a slower second half due to the later opening of stores and pharmacies, inflation remaining muted and a slower flu season. UPD's compliance levels in both its main channels continued improving resulting in good growth in sales to Clicks while positive growth was maintained in the hospital channel. If we exclude the Unicorn disposal in the prior year, retail grew 7% with same stores growing 4.7% excluding the additional trading day in the prior year. New stores and pharmacies added 2.3% to the top line while selling price inflation averaged 2.6% for the year, lower in the second half. Distribution business had a consistent performance in the second half with good compliance from its major sales channels. The business grew despite continuing genericization in the hospital channel and lower inflation. Bertina will cover the detail of each business' performance later in the presentation. This slide reflects our total income earned, which has increased by 8.4% for the year. You can see the total income margin in retail was 70 basis points higher than last year as there was good growth across pharmacy, health and beauty and personal care driven by private label. In addition, the previous investments in systems has allowed us to generate additional supply chain efficiency income. UPD's total income margin was down 10 basis points to 9.9% and this was due to the higher SEP increase granted in the previous year. Overall, the faster growth of the retail business at 8.1% and the growth in UPD has resulted in the group's total income margin being 90 basis points higher than last year. Retail costs grew 7.9%, which was lower than in the first half and remained well controlled. In the second half, cost growth was 7.3%. Store staff bonuses have increased by 9%, which is on top of a 21% increase in the prior year and is well deserved based on this year's performance. In the year, we have added a net 55 Click stores and a net 60 pharmacies. We are looking forward to continue accelerating our pharmacy growth in the next financial year. We would also like to thank the Department of Health for their support in the last year in working with us to close the gap in stores without pharmacies. Comparable retail cost growth, excluding new stores, was up 5% for the year with costs growing at a lower rate in the second half. The IFRS 16 interest charge increased as a result of the increase in number of renewals in the period. The growth has slowed from the prior year. UPD's costs have grown lower than turnover as the systems implementation was completed and efficiencies have been extracted. It is pleasing to note that costs grew 1.6% in the first half and 2.2% in the second half. Employment costs in the second half continued to be well controlled although were ahead of the first half due to the provision of performance bonuses. Other costs fell by 3.9% in the second half as a result of good cost control and lower debtor provisions required. The investments in solar have paid off with electricity, water and generator costs for the year declining by 35% despite the higher electricity tariffs. Our investment in electric vehicles has resulted in further efficiencies with transport costs down 0.2% year-on-year. Further investments have been made to allow delivery with electric vehicles, which will come through in our financial year 2026. This further supports reducing our carbon footprint. Retail grew trading profit by 8.4% with the margin improving by 30 basis points to 10.5%. This has been due to good sales growth, strong other income generation together with efficient cost management. UPD's trading profit increased by 9% with the trading margin increasing by 10 basis points to 3.3% and this was due to consistent sales growth and good cost control. Overall, the group's trading profit increased by 12.1% to ZAR 4.7 billion for the year. This slide reflects the growth in turnover, trading profit and margin of the group over the past 5 years. The company has sustainably grown its performance through various economic cycles. And to note that in last year, inflation has moderated, interest rates have reduced and we have all benefited from the lack of load shedding in the past year. There are some concerns though with the impact of external tariffs further straining the economy. That said, the group has demonstrated its ability to continue to evolve the trading margin over the past 5 years. Inventory levels for the group has increased by 4 days to 78 days. Retail stock days are 1 day higher than last year and inventory remains well controlled although increased due to the later opening of new stores in the year and higher levels of inventory being held ahead of the warehouse management system going live in Cape Town. UPD stock days at 45 days are 3 days higher than last year partially due to higher levels of GLP-1 buy-ins and Unicorn stock held at year-end. Overall, working capital was well managed with net working capital days at 34 days. This slide shows the movement of cash during the year. As you can see, we started the year with cash of ZAR 2.7 billion reflected in dark blue on the left-hand side and ended the year with ZAR 3.3 billion on the right-hand side of the slide. The group has generated cash of ZAR 6.5 billion highlighted in green, working capital inflows of ZAR 73 million, repayment of lease liabilities amounting to ZAR 1.1 billion and tax payments of ZAR 1.2 billion. ZAR 985 million was reinvested in capital expenditure across the group. From this amount: ZAR 599 million was invested in new stores as well as quick store refurbishments, ZAR 152 million was spent in distribution centers including the expansion of our Centurion DC and ZAR 234 million was spent in IT and other retail infrastructure. We returned ZAR 2.7 billion to shareholders this year and this was in the form of dividends of over ZAR 1.9 billion and share buybacks of ZAR 751 million. Final cash dividend of ZAR 1.5 billion will be paid out to shareholders in January. This slide shows our commitment to a disciplined approach to capital allocation. We expect to continue to invest in the business and return capital to our shareholders through dividends. Over and above this, our preference is to return any excess cash through share buybacks, which is demonstrated in this graph. Since 2006, we have bought back 164 million shares at a cost of ZAR 7.8 billion. At the closing share price on 31 August 2025, the value of these shares would have amounted to ZAR 61.2 billion. CapEx of over ZAR 1.2 billion is planned for the year ahead. ZAR 662 million will be invested in our store and pharmacy network and this will include 40 to 50 new Clicks stores and pharmacies and 70 to 80 retail store refurbishments. ZAR 594 million will be spent on IT systems and infrastructure, ZAR 88 million of this amount will be invested in UPD IT and warehouse equipment and we will invest the balance of ZAR 506 million in retail IT systems and infrastructure. This will include the completion of our new pharmacy management system and rollout of the implementation of the new warehouse management systems to our 2 other DCs and further investment in solar. We will continue to grow and invest in the retail footprint. UPD is positioned for growth now that the implementation has been completed and we will continue investment in systems for pharmacy and our distribution centers in the retail business. This slide reflects our medium-term financial targets. We have made good progress against these. Importantly, the group has continuing headroom for growth, particularly in expanding the retail store base. While we have shown good progress, these targets will not be revised at this stage. As indicated earlier, we have increased our investment in the business for growth. In framing these medium-term targets, we continue to seek to optimize the balance sheet, improve working capital efficiency, enhance cash returns to shareholders and maintain the dividend payout ratio between 60% and 65%. This slide demonstrates how the group has sustained its financial performance over the past decade. This is reflected in the 10-year compound annual growth rates achieved in diluted headline earnings per share of 13.5% per annum and dividend per share growth of 14.2% per annum. The compound annual total shareholder return over the past 10 years equates to 17.3% per annum. These excellent growth rates have been driven by strong organic growth, particularly in our health and beauty business, which has been supported by an efficient supply chain. This has in turn translated into strong cash returns, which have not only been reinvested in the business, but also allowed us to progressively increase our dividend. This graph shows the group's share price performance over the last 10 years. This performance is all the more pleasing when compared to the return in the Food and Drug Retailers Index of 4.6% and the Top 40 index of 7.8%. This performance is a testament to the hard work of all our employees throughout the group. Earlier, I noted that bonuses for employees have again increased. It is pleasing to note that our long-term shareholders have also benefited. I will now hand over to Bertina to cover the trading performance. Bertina Engelbrecht: Thank you so much, Gordon. I will now take you through our trading performances starting with Clicks followed by UPD. This is the review of the Clicks business. Despite the subdued trading environment and a muted cold and flu season, the retail business delivered a solid result. Existing stores grew sales by 4.7% excluding the extra trading day in 2024. Inflation slowed down from 6.3% last year to 2.6% this year and we achieved volume growth of 2.1%. I now turn to the 4 categories to provide you with greater detail. Pharmacy sales grew 6.9% despite a soft cold and flu season as well as significant price reductions in key molecules to align with medical scheme formulary compliance requirements. Turnover in our 24-hour UniCare format achieved growth of 8% driven by strong support from doctors, the implementation of our after-hours doctor service and the exceptional performances of wound care, diabetes, primary care and IV clinics. Despite the delay in opening new pharmacies, we accelerated in the second half to open a total of 62 new pharmacies for the year, of which 29 were in the last quarter. ClubCard customers contributed over 87% of pharmacy sales and we continue to be rated as the customer's first choice retail pharmacy. We have increased our primary care clinic count to 225. Clinic sales increased by 10% driven by medical aid funded services and support for our virtual doctor consultation services. Front shop health and baby achieved strong growth with value growth of 8% and volume growth of 10.1%. In the baby category, volumes were up 15.3% compared to value growth of 6.2%. Front shop health growth was driven by the extension of our health care elevation to 138 stores, exceptional performances in sports and slimming which was up 27% and the continuing strong momentum of branded supplements up 29%. Our integrated baby strategy is entrenching our position as the leader in baby. Despite price deflation driven by supplier branded diapers and baby foods as well as supplier infill challenges. This category is continuing to perform well with private label and exclusive ranges the key to our success. Sales in our stand-alone Clicks baby stores were up 23%. Baby store-in-store sales grew by 12.4% and online baby sales grew 27%. Sales growth, as you can see, is gaining momentum and we are evolving margin. Sales in our beauty and personal care category was up 7.4%. Despite a heavily competed beauty market and the disappointing performance of The Body Shop, we grew sales ahead of the market fueled by new launches and the continued rollout of the elevated beauty hall concept in key nodes. The personal care category delivered a strong performance up 9.8% driven by strong private label sales which was up 17.6%, strong promotional sales and innovation in [indiscernible], Being Kind, Dove and Vaseline product ranges. Our exclusive body freshness range was up 42.6% driven by exponential growth in Spritzer, which was up 44%. In May, the new Body Shop owners unveiled their post-acquisition turnaround strategy with new product development launches such as Spa of the World and Passionfruit. These new ranges are in store and the teams are working to improve the infill rate. General merchandise sales performance was disappointing, up just 4.4% due to our underperformance of small household electrical appliances. In the next section, I will provide you with more detail. Despite the increasingly competitive environment, we are continuing to extend our market shares in core beauty and beauty retail categories. Let me take you through these starting with health. It is a relief to report that our intentional efforts at engaging collaboratively with the Department of Health to advance our public health agenda of improving the accessibility and affordability of health care is delivering results. We opened 62 new pharmacies in the year. Although 29 pharmacies only opened in July and August, we gained market share of 20 basis points creating positive momentum for our new financial year. Front shop health declined by 30 basis points despite strong gains across sports and slimming up 140 basis points, first aid up 290 basis points and incontinence up 100 basis points. Our comprehensive baby execution; which integrates our private label and online offering, convenient locations, competitive pricing and Baby ClubCard benefit strategy; drove our market share gain of 80 basis points in baby. Exceptional gains were recorded in diapers up 110 basis points, baby wet wipes up 270 basis points and baby dry foods up 230 basis points. Pleasingly, we have identified even more opportunities to grow our share of baby. We continue to gain market share in beauty and personal care. Skin care gained another 20 basis points fueled by strong share gains in face wash, lip care and moist wipes and we defended our market-leading share in hair care. Personal care continues to gain market share up 60 basis points across every measurement period with strong gains in body freshness, [ sun pro ] and sun care. In general merchandise, we declined by 40 basis points in our legacy category of small household appliances. This was due to significant out of stocks in the first half and an oversupply in the market. What is encouraging though is that over the last quarter, we were once again regaining market share. I now turn to the key drivers that support our growth starting with value. Our brand position of feel good, pay less supported by generous ClubCard rewards, extensive private label and exclusive ranges and convenient locations resonated with consumers. Despite heightened competition, we stayed true to our legacy as a value retailer with great everyday pricing and promotions. In so doing, we maintained our competitive pricing against all major retailers on a volume-weighted price index that excludes our 3 for 2 promotions, bulk offers and ClubCard cashbacks. We grew promotional sales by 12.4% to account for 47% of turnover across all front shop categories. We are committed to delivering on our public health care agenda of extending access to affordable health care for all. The convenience of our pharmacy and clinic network, virtual doctor offering and partnerships with health care funders enable us to deliver on our agenda. In the year, generics grew by 8.8% accounting for 59% of sales by value and 71% of sales by volume. Cash rewards are relevant especially in a tough economic environment. During the year and with the support of our affinity partners, we returned ZAR 855 million to loyal customers in the form of cashback rewards. Our differentiation strategy is premised on responding to changes in consumer demographics, preferences and shopping behaviors within the context of the trading environment we face. Our private label and exclusive ranges are core to offering the consumer choice. Private label and exclusive brands delivered sales of ZAR 9.7 billion as it continues its momentum of growing sales ahead of total retail sales. Customers trust our private label brands because of their proven quality and price positioning. This year, 1 in every 3 products sold in our front shop was a private label or exclusive product. Private label and exclusives contributed 25.9% to total sales, 30.6% to front shop and 12.3% to pharmacy sales. Our private label and commercial teams drive innovation and quality in addition to supporting our sustainability and local empowerment goals. In the year, 6 of the private label products won SA Product of the Year in their respective categories. Sales in our 6 stand-alone baby stores grew 23.7%. We increased our store-in-store executions from 5 last year to 14 this year. This is what enabled our gains in baby market share as we also improved margins in this category. The execution of our elevated beauty halls, which is now in 44 stores is driving increased sales in the big beauty brands and in brands exclusively available in Clicks. Our affinity partnership with and equity investment in ARC, a retail brand focused on the premium beauty market, enables us to extend our access to the premium beauty customer. In this month, ARC opened the largest beauty store in Africa at Sandton City to great acclaim. This year we are celebrating the 30th anniversary of the Clicks ClubCard loyalty program. The nostalgic reflections of loyal customers who shared their ClubCard journey with us and on their social media platforms fill us with pride. 30 years on, we are still growing with an active ClubCard membership base that increased to 12.6 million this year. The contribution of ClubCard members to total sales increased to 82.6% accounting for 80.7% of front shop and 87.4% of pharmacy sales. The 2025 Truth and BrandMapp loyalty white paper confirmed the ClubCard program as the most used loyalty program in South Africa. It continues to provide us with the mechanism to attract, engage and retain customers through personalized experiences that reinforce emotional affiliation to our brand. The use of advanced analytics to drive focused customer segmentation and tailored personalized rewards is critical to the success of the ClubCard loyalty program. This is an area that requires targeted investment in technological enablement as well as in the correct skill sets. Although online sales grew by 15.9%, we can and we will do better. Pharmacy is a key driver of our sustained performance. By November, we will have completed the national deployment phase of our LEAP pharmacy management system. We can now leverage the system to enhance service levels and increase sales. The expansion of our store network is progressing well and we are accelerating our pharmacy and clinic rollout program because of its proven positive impact on front shop growth. Internally, we have invested in people and improved processes to support our growth aspirations. We ended the year on 990 Clicks stores, 1 UniCare specialized 24-hour pharmacy store, 780 Clicks pharmacies and 225 primary care clinics. We remain committed to delivering affordable, accessible health care. 53.2% of the South African population live within a 5-kilometer radius of a Clicks pharmacy. We have increased our primary care clinics to 225. These are profitable due to medical aid funded services such as diabetes and the extension of our virtual doctor consultations. Now that M-Kem has been integrated and the rebranding of the UniCare concept approved, we will be extending our specialized 24-hour UniCare format by 2 greenfield sites and 2 acquisitions by February of next year. As with property, we have invested in the skills required to accelerate the growth of this format and we are accelerating our presence in lower income areas with 247 of our stores located in such areas contributing 23.7% of turnover. That completes the review of the Clicks business. I will now turn to UPD's trading performance. UPD's fine wholesale turnover, which excludes bulk distribution and preferred supplier contracts, was up 5.2% despite the subdued cold and flu season and lower inflation, a pleasing improvement against last year's negative 0.5% performance. This performance is attributable to greatly improved service levels, which has always been a core UPD strength. All operational service metrics are being met and the investments we made in systems, people and processes are bearing results. I will briefly turn to the core customers in this channel. As UPD's largest customer, Clicks contributed 58.4% of the turnover. Sales to Clicks pharmacies grew by 9.5% as purchasing compliance improved to over 98%. Clicks is growing ahead of the market and is accelerating its new pharmacy openings and importantly, actively driving purchasing compliance. This will greatly benefit UPD. Sales to the private hospital channel, which contributed 36.2% of turnover, grew by just 1.4% despite improved purchasing compliance. Volumes were up 8.8% due to increasing genericization and growth in the nonlisted acute hospital space. The continued decline of sales to independent pharmacies and other smaller channels is eroding UPD's market share, which is down to 26.2%. The improved purchasing compliance from both Clicks and the private hospitals as well as the stabilization of UPD's operational and service metrics will sustain its performance. UPD's total managed turnover, which includes fine wholesale sales as well as turnover managed on behalf of bulk distribution clients, was up 2% to ZAR 30.5 billion. In the prior year, UPD's total managed turnover was down 6.7%. So this is a good turnaround. The growing contribution of generics now 75.7% of volume versus 68.8% last year coupled with lower price inflation had a deflationary impact on turnover. The UPD team focused on improving quality and service levels and invested in its key account management principles to drive sales. During the year, UPD stock levels were elevated to improve stock availability for retail pharmacy and hospital formulary lines and to also improve access to GLP-1 medicines for its customers. The termination of excess property leases has been completed. We have, as Gordon pointed out, extracted the surplus costs carried during the wholesale system rollout and we have now also implemented more effective management practices to reduce variable employment costs. The UPD team achieved excellent cost management at a low growth of just 1.9% aided by its early investments in solar, batteries and electric vehicles. The wholesale systems implementation is complete. On the bulk side, the new systems have been rolled out to 7 distribution clients with the rollout to the remaining distribution clients on track to be completed by March next year. In support of our commitment to a sustainable carbon neutral future, we are in the process of ordering another 40 electric vehicles for use nationally. This completes the review of our trading performance for the year. It was a challenging year. Despite positive shifts in macroeconomic indicators, the early promise of an improved trading environment did not fully materialize. The resilience of our business model and our teams was tested. I am incredibly proud of our performance. It was forged by teams with an unrelenting focus on excellence. In retail, the teams delivered superior income growth and margin expansion coupled with truly outstanding shrink and wastage results. The continued growth of private label and exclusive ranges inspires confidence and the contribution of ClubCard to turnover is positive. Our new stores, pharmacies and clinic openings as well as the record number of store revamps exceeded expectations. Bongiwe Ntuli has inherited a healthy business from Vikash Singh. I'm confident that she will lead the team to even greater success. Gwarega Mangozhe and the new Rest of Africa team delivered a stellar performance with sales growth in every territory exceeding target due to strong delivery of the operational and customer service metrics. I'm going to call out Corne Visser and the Namibia team in particular who delivered a consistent exceptional performance. The UPD's team performance in the second half of the year was outstanding. The operational and customer service metrics are aligned to our goals and the work that Trevor McCoy and the team have put into improving the business has created positive momentum for the new financial year. Our group services team under the leadership of my colleague here, Gordon Traill, has been instrumental on delivering and might even say getting very, very close to the upper end of our medium-term financial targets. The IT team under his control has partnered well with the business to progress our IT investments. We still have so many opportunities to increase our scale, to leverage our loyalty and strengthen customer loyalty, to extend our private label offer, to extract efficiencies and to improve on our digitization. What matters most is our people, especially our store, pharmacy teams and our DC teams. Last night, we were privileged to have our Top 10 store managers and our Top 10 pharmacy managers as well as our Clicks and UPD DC general managers join our senior leadership team as we took our teams through our results after close of the market. This provided them with the opportunity to represent their teams and for us to publicly recognize their contributions. In presenting our results here today, Gordon and I acknowledge that we do so on behalf of our people. From our Board and executive teams to all of our people and their extended families, thank you. I will now conclude our presentation with the outlook. Although the macroeconomic indicators are improving, the consumer remains constrained. The consumer is therefore prioritizing value, convenience and rewards from companies that inspire trust. Our retail strategic pillars of value, convenience and differentiation supported by our private label and exclusive program and ClubCard loyalty program is aligned to the consumer needs and positions us for sustained growth. In distribution, our strategic pillars of quality, efficiency and customer excellence is fundamental to profitable growth. We remain well positioned to thrive in this environment due to our competitive advantage in defensive health and beauty sectors, our growing market-leading shares in core retail categories and in pharmaceutical wholesale and distribution, our sustained long-term growth opportunities underpinned by our value proposition and customer service and our increasing scale which enables us to maximize efficiencies and leverage it for effective execution and reach. Over the past 5 years, we invested in systems in both retail and distribution for growth. We have invested in Lee, a modern pharmacy management system to fuel our pharmacy growth. We invested in infrastructure and in the expansion of our store, pharmacy and clinic network to support growth. And we invested in adjacencies in health and beauty to extend our access to market segments in which we are underindexed. We are now poised to fully leverage these investments made to improve service and increase sales in our network. In the 2026 financial year, we will increase the number of UniCare 24-hour specialized pharmacy stores to a total of 5. The Sorbet and ARC customers are our most profitable ClubCard customers. And increasingly, we still have opportunity to increase ClubCard penetration in these businesses. Our first Sorbet master franchises for Botswana and Mauritius will be concluded in 2026 and we are on track to extend the number of Sorbet stores in South Africa. We will deliver on our medium-term target of 1,200 Clicks stores. In 2026, we will open another 40 to 50 stores and 40 to 50 pharmacies and over the medium term, we will open 10 to 15 UniCare stores. Our private label and exclusive program is core to our offering and we are driving towards our goal of achieving a 35% contribution to our front shop sales. The objectives outlined above require investments, which will be supported by our planned CapEx spend of ZAR 1.3 billion per annum over the medium term. The increasing scale of the business and requirement to plan for succession necessitated a review of our executive structure. In September, the group executive was expanded to 6 members to drive focus, create capacity for growth, invest in core capabilities and to prepare for succession in our usual disciplined manner. The expanded group executive portfolios in addition to the CEO and CFO covers Retail South Africa, Rest of Africa Retail, UPD, our investments in health and beauty and people. The complementary diversity profile, broad sector experience and track record of performance of the expanded group executive team significantly strengthens our leadership capability. Earlier, Gordon shared with you our pleasing performance against our medium-term targets. No wonder I remain confident of the group's capability to continue to delight shareholders by delivering on our medium-term targets. Thank you so much for listening. I will now hand over to Sue Hemp, who will assist us with taking your questions. Sue Hemp: The first set of questions I have come from Michael Jacks at Bank of America. Congrats on the solid results. I have 3. One, can you please elaborate a little more on the LEAP system implementation, expected benefits and whether it is a differentiator of Clicks or UPD versus peers? Bertina Engelbrecht: I can take that one. So first of all, Michael, thank you very much for the message that you’ve sent us. Let's talk a little bit. By November, we will have completed the rollout of LEAP to all our pharmacies. In my notes, what I said is now the next step for us post deployment is to really utilize the system in order for us to improve service levels and of course as well to increase sales. How will we do that? It's to ensure that the pharmacists when they are consulting with the customer has the opportunity to now also talk about expanded services, first of all, within our network; but importantly, some of the complementary medicines that the patient ought to be taking. When we take an antibiotic, ideally we should be taking a probiotic as well. So that's what we mean in terms of the expanded benefits. We are of course also because of our ability to service the customer much more quicker, what it means is the pharmacist has more time to consult with a patient that is standing right there with them. Differentiation, all of the pharmacy management systems were built at a time when there was no corporate retail pharmacy. And so what we have done is to acknowledge that retail pharmacy is the bedrock of our performance. And so what we have done is really to ensure that we've got a modern system, which no one else has, that will create for us an incredible advantage going forward. The process to develop a modern pharmacy management system will take years. Gordon, I’m not sure if you wanted to add anything. Gordon Traill: The only other point is probably the last point regarding does it give us a differentiation? Well, bottom line is it does give us a differentiation because there is no other system in the market just now that is modern and web based and our competitors are going to have to find something that they can use. Sue Hemp: His second question, market share trends are positive in many categories, but you lost some share in general merchandise. Has this been due to online or offline competition? Bertina Engelbrecht: The way that we look at the competitor is every competitor not only in South Africa in terms of bricks and mortar, but every online player within South Africa and every online player globally. That's really our competitive set because we had significant out of stocks in the first half of the year and there was a drought of supply in the market itself. And really what we have to take is we look at all of these opportunities and say where can we do better. And I would say we didn't do good enough and so now we are poised to really focus on that in our usual manner. And as I've noted, in the last quarter of the year, we were once again regaining market share in that legacy category of ours. I will not give up on it. Sue Hemp: His third question. You mentioned earlier in the year that you were accelerating on e-commerce. The online store and app looks great, but delivery options and lead times are still limited. What are you doing to address this? Gordon Traill: So I think we recognize that we can do better in this area. So over the next 12 months we are going to be replatforming our online system both on the app and the web and that's going to allow us further delivery options. But not only that, a lot of other functionality that we're going to be able to roll out. So I think the advice is watch this space and in 12 to 18 months, we should be in a very different position. Sue Hemp: Another set of questions from Michael de Nobrega at Avior Capital Markets. Well done on the great set of results. His first question. On the beauty and health care segment, growth has moderate yet Clicks has maintained market share despite increased competition and accelerated rollouts from peers. Could you please elaborate on how you see the competitive landscape evolving and where you view growth to come from in this category? Bertina Engelbrecht: Well, let me talk about the market in terms of 3 segments. First of all, thank you very much, Michael, for the comment. The market really is in 3 sectors. So first is the super high LSM customer, which is super protected against any of the economic indicators in the country and you see that really in the performance of ARC. Now that's the reason 5 years ago we took an investment decision to invest in ARC and so we've got that exposure to that premium beauty customer. And the way in which it works, ARC is an affinity customer. That customer comes and redeems the cashback rewards within the Clicks store. We of course play very, very solidly within the middle and the end of the market and there the things that we have done is of course we use our ClubCard program and of course what we do is as well, we've got private label and exclusive brands. And so that I think is great. We have to grow our market share. We have specifically elevated our execution in beauty and that's the 44 elevated beauty halls that I speak about and we have seen incredible growth in those stores. We are learning from what we've done there and we are improving even more. Our performance and market share in skin care is not by accident. It is because of the way in which we have changed the customer journey by bringing skin care much more to the front of the store itself. And then there's the lower end of the market. Now interestingly, we have got a private label brand actually at the lower end of the market called [ Swatch ], which in the SA Product of the Year actually won the SA Product of the Year award -- 2 actually of the awards. So I think great opportunity for us there. But yes, here we competed and that's the reason why the way which we are preferring to, if you will, respond to the changes in the market and competitive activity is to really stratify the market into these 3 broad sectors and to ensure that we are acting in order to respond to the needs of every one of those segments. Sue Hemp: His second question, could you please expand on the rationale for the WMS rollout across the 3 retail distribution centers? Do you expect any large operational disruption during the implementation and what efficiency or benefits do you anticipate once it's fully deployed? Gordon Traill: So the rationale was to create capacity because the ways of working on the previous warehouse management system limited the amount of product that we could get through these DCs. So in introducing the new warehouse management system, it allows parallel working and just allows throughput through those DCs and extends the life of these without further expansion. Expansion will be necessary at some point and we've been doing that in Centurion over a period of time. Do we expect disruption? I haven't been through our system implementation yet, but there isn't some disruption. But what I am pleased to say is that yesterday, we were actually picking up in the Cape Town DC above levels that we were doing in the prior year. So it's hard work and I really commend our systems implementation partner, our IT teams and especially our DC teams for working with us. I think we've got over the hump in that one and everything is really firing at Cape Town DC now. Sue Hemp: His third question. Clicks Group has built up a strong cash position of ZAR 3.2 billion. How are you thinking about capital allocation priorities going forward? In particular, would you consider accelerating store expansion or increasing share buybacks? Gordon Traill: I think we always look at investing in the business and that we've been doing on a consistent basis for a number of years and reinvesting in our systems and we've also increased the number of stores. We've also done some acquisitions over the past few years. We've set out what our dividend policy is. We’ve given the range of 60% to 65% and where the opportunity has come up, any excess cash has been returned to shareholders through share buybacks. But I don't think any of that is going to change over the next few years. We would consider expanding or accelerating store growth where the opportunity came up and we've done that in the past where in certain years we've grown store expansion by 100 stores where there's been an acquisition. Sue Hemp: Yes. Last question on post period trade is also asked by Sa'ad Chothia from Citi who says well done on the pleasing results. Can you give some color on post period trade? Bertina Engelbrecht: One of the teams actually asked the question last night and I said well, I'm not displeased. Gordon and I certainly am not displeased by the performance since we started the new financial year. Sue Hemp: His second question is what sort of inflation can we expect in FY '26? Gordon Traill: I think since our Reserve Bank is doing such a great job on inflation and it's got to be commended for that, you would probably expect that inflation is going to be remaining on the lower side. Bertina Engelbrecht: And if we could encourage the Reserve Bank to then also look at the interest rates, I think that the consumer would certainly welcome that. Sue Hemp: [ Ander Tyami ] from Invest Securities says please can you provide some color on occupancy costs in retail remaining flat year-on-year despite higher than guided store growth? Gordon Traill: I think the thing to bear in mind with occupancy cost growth is it's not actually rental related or it's not the rents and it’s largely the other aspects of store costs that include parking, et cetera. It does include some turnover rentals, but it's really the lowest element of the cost growth related to stores. Store cost growth sits in our ROU depreciation and our IFRS 16 charge. Bertina Engelbrecht: But it also would be fair to say, Gordon, that we have taken control of that. We put in metering for example, we check all of the bills that are coming through for payment. We don't take it for granted. We've invested in solar. So there are a number of things. We've got automatic switches for example in the stores to switch off electricity at night when it's not trading. So it's also not as a consequence of luck. We have done work to get us to that point. Sue Hemp: And it also asks about post period trade, which we've answered, but say particular store openings, including pharmacies. And I think we've given numbers in the presentation of 40 to 50 stores and 40 to 50 pharmacies. But if we get more opportunities, we will open more. Bertina Engelbrecht: We will. And maybe the point to call out is that the teams have promised me that we will get to number 1,000 by December. Sue Hemp: Jovan Jackson from Fairtree. How should we think about the normalization of intra-group profit on Unicorn stock? Do you recoup this through increased retail margin in FY '26? Gordon Traill: So this is a little bit of an odd year. Because of the Unicorn disposal in the prior year, what we had was we had an intra-group profit related to the Unicorn stock that we had purchased when Unicorn was still our subsidiary. So that's been unwinding during the year, which is where the intra-group profit comes through. That is not a one-off because that does move into retail that will sit in the retail division next year. So this year is an odd year. Sue Hemp: Kgomotso Mokabane from Sanlam Private Wealth says well done on the net 55 new stores. Can you give some color on the execution challenges or constraints that resulted in the bulk of openings being delayed until Q4 of the financial year? Gordon Traill: We would always prefer to open our stores earlier. What impacted us probably more last year was some weather-related challenges that impacted landlords that just pushed store openings later. But it's not something that we plan to do, but it was an unfortunate impact. Sue Hemp: Kgomotso also asks or says commercial and private label sales were both up strongly in double digits. And with internal inflation low, one would have expected a bit more of a pickup in volumes than the 2.1% reported. Can you give some color on what's driving the volume outcome? Gordon Traill: So we did have some really excellent growth in certain categories. Where it was probably a little bit slower in the year was on the pharmacy side and that was due to later opening of pharmacies, both this year and in the previous year when we couldn't open pharmacies. So although we've worked really well with the Department of Health, we still got over 100 applications for new pharmacies that are waiting to be considered there. So as we get these, we're really seeing a very nice volume boost in the pharmacy side and that also impacts the rest of the store as well as those pharmacies are rolled out because we see a real lift in front shop when we drop in the pharmacies. Sue Hemp: Another question from Kgomotso. With the rollout of the new pharmacy management system LEAP, have there been any teething issues or disruptions to operations? Gordon Traill: LEAP was a very different rollout because we could do it on a store-by-store basis so it was in a very controlled manner. So no, we haven't really seen any impact of the store rollout. Bertina Engelbrecht: I was also going to say one of the things that we learned through the UPD system is that we have invested in project management capability. And secondly, understanding the changed management must be integrated into any UPD particular project as well as training. So I think that's the reason probably, Gordon, even if you look at SEP upgraded UPD September last year, looking at the LEAP program, we're looking even WMS; I think they've all gone a whole lot smoother because we've taken the lessons and we have applied those lessons and we are trying to do better. Sue Hemp: Another question from Kgomotso. Can you comment on the performance of the 247 stores located in low income areas relative to convenience and destination formats? What percentage of these stores include a pharmacy component and have there been any unexpected trends or outliers in performance so far? Gordon Traill: Generally, these stores actually ramp up in terms of sales much quicker and have been performing ahead of the rest of the estate. I think the trends that you see are probably in line with what you would expect. You see a very big component of baby in those stores and because we offer such good guarantees in our electrical and electrical is also a favorite destination in these stores. So while it's better, it’s not dissimilar to the performance that we see in the other stores. Sue Hemp: A question from [indiscernible]. If 55% of population that's within 5 kilometers radius to Clicks, would that mean co-mobilization is possible? Bertina Engelbrecht: The way that we look at it is it's 53.2% to a Clicks pharmacy and remember, we've got 780 pharmacies. So not every store currently has a pharmacy because, as Gordon called out, we still have the gap that we're working to close with the Department of Health in terms of the issue of the pharmacy licenses. Sue Hemp: [indiscernible] says well done on the results. You mentioned that the wholesale market share loss is due to decreased sales to independents. Is this a strategic choice? Bertina Engelbrecht: Well, we've always said the reason we acquired the UPD business in the first instance was for it to be the preferred supply chain partner to Clicks in order to fuel Clicks' growth in pharmacy and that it does very well. And if you look over the period how the Clicks market share within UPD's wholesale channel has just grown and that's good for UPD. The second one is that UPD has got strength in terms of the listed private hospital groups where you see that happening. And of course partly it's because UPD up until probably the first half of the year was a little bit hamstrung by the effects of its systems implementation, but that has now recovered. But what is happening within the private hospital space is there's increased genericization. So that's having an impact there. Now are we super concerned about independence? Not necessarily and the reason for that is because we've always said UPD because of its low margins has to always focus on efficiency and profitability. And what we shouldn't be is a place where people use us just to circle through because they are managing their credit risk. Sue Hemp: Warwick Bam from RMB Morgan Stanley asks what are the challenges of The Body Shop? Bertina Engelbrecht: The challenges of the Body Shop is as always when you've got a change of ownership, first of all, there are some transition challenges there. The second bit is that the new owners, as one could expect, focus on the areas that they wanted to turn around first, which was the Body Shop corporate portfolio in both the U.K. and of course within the U.S. And what that meant is that product development and innovation, which is so critical to any beauty brand, was maybe put later on the agenda. Now that's where we are and we can see the new product ranges coming through. So I mean I think we are cautiously optimistic about what the future holds. Sue Hemp: His second question is about what we think about the medium-term prospects for the small electrical appliances sales growth. I don't know if there's anything more you want to add from what you’ve already said. Bertina Engelbrecht: We didn't have sufficient stock in the first half and the market had an oversupply. Sue Hemp: I have a very complicated list of questions here so I'll take them one by one. Given the disinflationary pressure on comparable store sales; volume growth, OpEx control and further total income margin expansion will likely be required to provide earnings support. With this in mind, could you provide a bit of color on, one, the GLP-1 opportunity for Clicks in SA? Gordon Traill: GLP-1s have been growing very, very fast over the past 24 months and we referenced that at the interim. To bear in mind on the high sales, that’s because we maintain a very low dispensing fee, our income that we generate from those GLP-1 is much lower than any sales growth. The opportunity would be as the originators genericize and that is where there would be likely to be some margin that's possible because generally in the generics, you're earning a higher margin than the originators especially on UPD side in terms of distribution. Sue Hemp: Secondly, is there any expected benefit to Clicks following the recent Supreme Court ruling allowing pharmacists to now administer HIV treatment? Bertina Engelbrecht: What we have done is in that particular case, we did provide commentary. Obviously, our public health agenda is how do you extend access to affordable health care. And you're talking here about a vulnerable segment of the population that we could most certainly support both through our pharmacy program. So we are reviewing very carefully the implications of the decision or the judgment and what, if any, how would we respond to that. But we are supportive broadly of the outcome of the judgment. Sue Hemp: Thirdly, the rollout of PCDT or primary care drug therapy pharmacist model and whether you're seeing any consumer traction here? Bertina Engelbrecht: We're probably seeing more traction in terms of the virtual doctor consultations and most certainly an increase in medical aid co-funded services through the clinics itself. So those are probably the 2 areas we'll continue to focus on. Sue Hemp: Four, are there any OpEx levers you can pull to drive positive operating leverage in existing stores? Gordon Traill: I think some of that is going to come out of the systems investment because that was the reason for investing in LEAP so to free up the time of the pharmacist to consult with patients and hopefully to deal with more patients in the same period of time. There are always opportunities that we've got because we can look at the same that we've done with UPD, rolling out smaller electric vehicles within the retail DC network because we saw that UPD managed to slightly reduce the overall transport cost for those. So we're always on the lookout. The big things that we've done, but we've always been able to eke out further efficiencies. Sue Hemp: And I think we've answered his remaining 3 questions which are on Africa inflation, the benefits of LEAP and the WMS possible disruption. [ Lulama Qongqo ] from Mergence Investment Managers says well done on the performance. On UniCare, how are the store economics of the 24-hour store versus a normal Flexicare with the pharmacy in it? What are the opportunities with this kind of format? Bertina Engelbrecht: Obviously it is about ensuring that we in the mind of the customer, in the mind of doctors and the health care profession are seen as a place to go to. So first, I think understand our position in terms of health care. What UniCare does? UniCare offers a comprehensive suite of services. So that's why we talk about the wound care clinic. In fact the catchment area, if your normal catchment area for a Clicks pharmacy is 5 kilometers, for a UniCare store it's actually 50 kilometers. And so you've got a much broader catchment area from which you draw patients. You now find that many of the specialist doctors actually refer their patients to a UniCare store. Thirdly, there is an opportunity for medical aid. So I think that the specific data point is that something like over 50% of medical aid members who go to an ER 24 service should not have gone there first if they could have gone to a doctor. So the fact that we've got a 24-hour doctor service attached to the 24-hour specialized pharmacy means that we can support medical aid scenes in that regard and of course the script flows into that store. There's other things such as for example diabetes management, the IV infusion clinics and the travel clinics. UniCare for example works a lot with corporates to drive vaccination. So very often corporate people that are traveling or local municipalities, the people that work for example in sanitation, they got to have certain vaccinations. And so it's a very, very different format; high, high, high service touch that we have there. Sue Hemp: Junaid Bray from Laurium Capital says congrats on the results. How much of a concern is Sorbet's spa's expansion into pharmacy? And with regards to your market share gains, who are you gaining market share from? Bertina Engelbrecht: I guess we're thinking about that one for a minute. First, I mean my own view always is competition is good because if we weren't doing a good job as a drug store, then no one would be interested in trying to emulate our success. So that's the first I'd take from that. The second is to always remember you mustn't be arrogant and you mustn't be complacent about your success. So that's the second part. Then we look at the competitors coming in and we understand that it's because we've been able to show them that you can do this successfully and profitably. And I think it's always been aware of what it is that they're doing and how do you respond to it. To really, really, really compete with us, you have to have an integrated pharmaceutical distribution, wholesale and retail pharmacy model supported by an independent group such as Clicks. And I think that is probably our single biggest advantage. Our single biggest advantage is that we've got a completely integrated strategy. And then of course the fact that if you spoke only about -- if you ask the customer maybe a pharmacy, well, we come up first consistently. Someone else comes up second not a grocer. And third comes up [ Clicks ] , which is a brand that we own. So I think that we are very well positioned without being arrogant and without being complacent because we are still nowhere as great as we could be. We are only on the path to greatness though. Sue Hemp: [ Junie from AAP ] asks with 47% of sales now promotional, do you see that as a new normal? And how will you protect margins if that level persists? Gordon Traill: I think if we look at the last few years, we have consistently grown promotional sales as a percentage of our total sales, which we've been happy to do because suppliers have worked with us because they wanted higher volumes and have funded the growth in promotions. It's also supported by the growth in our private label, which is at a higher margin and that's also allowed us to evolve margins over the last few years. I don't see that this is going to change. Sue Hemp: Craig Metherell from Denker Capital. Given the trading margin is near the top of the medium-term target range and you've alluded to not updating your targets at this point, could you provide any further detail around the margin profile going forward? Gordon Traill: I think we will always be aiming to evolve our margin, which is one of the graphs showed. However, we have also got to bear in mind that if you take something like the UniCare format, which is profitable and it's much higher turnover and to a certain extent that could result in a little bit of margin dilution, but not profit. So we've just got to bear that in mind over the next 12 to 18 months. But the rest of the business will be evolving the margin. Sue Hemp: I have some more questions from Kgomotso Mokabane from Sanlam Private Wealth. Can you give some color on how Flexicare is performing and whether it's starting to gain real traction or scale within the business? Also, are there deliberate plans in place to accelerate growth of the offering? Bertina Engelbrecht: We are working with the Discovery team. It would be fair I think to say that we are not satisfied with the performance of Flexicare. And so we are working with our partner, which is Discovery, to say what is it that we have to do to improve the performance of the Flexicare product. Sue Hemp: And I think in the interest of time, the last question from Kgomotso. Can you give some color on the rationale behind strengthening and expanding the group executive team? Where did you identify capability gaps or areas needing reinforcement? Bertina Engelbrecht: It's not so much about identifying gaps. It's about what is it that we have to do to ensure that we are positioned for the future. That's really what it is all about. So first South Africa, there can be no doubt South Africa has got tremendous opportunities for us to expand and it therefore made sense that we focus on South Africa and that is why Bongiwe Ntuli was appointed to specifically focus on South Africa. Then when I look at the Rest of Africa Retail and the complete unperformance of it made complete sense to say now what we do need is an executive that can focus specifically on the Rest of Africa because every market is different and we most certainly want to make sure that we get the offer right. So this is about Southern Africa and the areas in which we already are. If you look at Namibia as an example where we have added 2 stores in the last 12-month period, the forecast for Namibia's GDP growth is fantastic. Why would we not be there when it’s about focus on the Rest of Africa. The third one is around people. Are you seeing enough people in corporate affairs? And it was making sure that we do not neglect that in a retail business the people are the difference and that we needed to have a person at this level. And then finally, it's well, of course UPD. And then the final one is that we've made investments in adjacencies such as Sorbet and in M-Kem, which are all health and beauty. What we now need to do is to ensure that we've got dedicated focus on that as well. So that was the reason for expanding the group executive not gaps, but opportunities to do better. There being no further questions. Thank you so much, everyone, for dialing into our webcast. The questions that you asked were really great. It's made me think and I'm sure Gordon as well and we'll leave it at that. Thank you.
Operator: Thank you for standing by. This is the conference operator. Welcome to the Rogers Communications, Inc. Third Quarter 2025 Results Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] The conference is being recorded. [Operator Instructions] I would now like to turn the conference over to Paul Carpino, Vice President of Investor Relations with Rogers Communications. Please go ahead, Mr. Carpino. Paul Carpino: Thank you, Galyene, and good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us. Today, I'm here with our President and Chief Executive Officer, Tony Staffieri; and our Chief Financial Officer, Glenn Brandt. Today's discussion will include estimates and other forward-looking information from which our actual results could differ. Please review the cautionary language in today's earnings report and in our 2024 annual report regarding the various factors, assumptions and risks that could cause our actual results to differ. With that, let me turn it over to Tony to begin. Anthony Staffieri: Thank you, Paul, and good morning, everyone. It's been quite a week for our Toronto Blue Jays, American League Champions, so I just wanted to say a few words about Canada's team. We're thrilled. The Blue Jays are in the world series, and it all starts north of the border tomorrow. As owner, our job is to give leadership the tools and resources to win. And as Canada's communications and entertainment company, we're about providing Canadians with the best sports and entertainment experiences. This is one of those moments, and this is what Rogers is all about. Let me now turn to the quarter. Q3 was another strong quarter for Rogers. We delivered industry-best combined mobile phone and Internet customer additions. We continue to grow our Cable business anchored by Canada's most reliable Internet. We again delivered the best Wireless and Cable margins in our sector, and we're seeing healthy revenue growth from our Media operations through organic growth and through now including MLSE revenue in our results. Overall, we executed with discipline and a clear focus on driving growth across our three main businesses. Let me start with Wireless. In the highly competitive Wireless market, we saw some pressure on service revenue and ARPU. Our priority continues to be on the consistent delivery of results. We added 111,000 total mobile phone net additions in Q3 and year-to-date, we added 206,000 mobile subscribers with the vast majority on the Rogers postpaid brand. We are leading the industry with innovative, transparent, feature-rich add-a-line plans. These plans meet the dual objective of providing customers with simple value-add options while targeting revenue growth opportunities to support strategic investments in our network. We are also leading the industry with satellite to mobile. This new groundbreaking technology connects Canadians in remote areas, and we now deliver 3x more coverage than any other carrier in Canada. Since launching our beta trial in July, we have seen terrific response from both our customers and Canadians. We recently extended the beta trial and will launch even more capabilities in the coming months. The launch of satellite to mobile reinforces our 65-year history of leading the industry and innovating for Canadians. Our customers are embracing the strategic approach. Our postpaid churn in the quarter was 0.99%, down 13 basis points year-on-year and the lowest churn in over two years. We are leading in innovation and delivering more value for our customers while maintaining industry-leading Wireless margins of 67%. In Cable, growth remains positive, reflecting a clear reversal of the negative trends seen in previous years. Retail Internet additions were 29,000 in the quarter, and we have delivered approximately 80,000 new Internet subscribers year-to-date across the country. This is in part driven by Rogers leading 5G home Internet technology. 5G Home Internet is one of many areas where we're leading. With the Xfinity road map, we're rolling out new features and plans that drive value and deliver new innovations on our world-class entertainment platform. We've launched Rogers Xfinity StreamSaver to bring together popular streaming services at a price point that's attractive to the consumer. We've launched more smart home devices and new features for Rogers Xfinity self-protection. We were the first Canadian Internet provider to introduce WiFi 7, the latest generation of WiFi technology. Our focus on execution, efficiency and discipline continues to drive industry-leading Cable margins of 58%. Finally, in Media, revenue growth was up 26% driven by a strong Blue Jays regular season and the consolidation of MLSE results. We are in the early stages of transforming our Sports & Entertainment business into one of the best sports businesses globally. This is our third pillar of growth beyond Wireless and Cable and will be meaningful to Rogers over time. With the acquisition of the additional stake in MLSE, we have added revenue and profitability growth to our core business. Taking a step back, in calendar 2025, we project Media revenue and adjusted EBITDA, including MLSE for the full year to be $4 billion and $250 million, respectively. Our collection of Sports and Media assets has a value in excess of $15 billion and is among the most impressive in the world. This value is not currently reflected in our share price. We are well positioned to surface this significant unrecognized value for Rogers shareholders over time. In 2026, we expect to acquire the outstanding minority state in MLSE as part of this process, so more to come on this. We are building a sports business at scale, and we are assessing multiple options to unlock additional value. We will take the time to be thoughtful, deliberate and get it right. In the meantime, we will continue to operate with financial discipline while providing team leadership with the tools and resources to build championships. Finally, on balance sheet and capital spending, we are effectively managing leverage down even as we scale up our exceptional asset base. In Q3, we continue to execute on our commitment to maintain a strong balance sheet. We reported a debt leverage ratio of 3.9x. This was achieved after completing the acquisition of the additional stake in MLSE. As you saw this morning, we now expect CapEx for the current year to come in at $3.7 billion. This is below our previous target of $3.8 billion and reflects the current regulatory environment. Free cash flow is now expected to be between $3.2 billion and $3.3 billion, higher than our previous target. In the coming quarters, we will maintain our laser-like focus on preserving a strong, investment-grade balance sheet even as we complete our transformational investments. As we pursue growth in our three core businesses, we will continue to align capital spending and free cash flow growth to the best growth opportunities and balance sheet deleveraging priorities. As we get ready for peak selling in the fourth quarter, we will remain focused on balancing execution discipline with revenue and subscriber growth. Thank you to our exceptional team for their continued commitment to drive growth long term. I will now turn the call over to Glenn. Glenn Brandt: Thank you, Tony, and good morning, everyone. Thank you for joining us. We are pleased to report that Rogers' Third Quarter results reflect another quarter of strong, disciplined and leading financial and operating performance. Once again, we have delivered industry-leading margin performance in Cable and Wireless, and our Wireless churn is the best we have seen in over two years. We have delivered positive Cable revenue and adjusted EBITDA growth, and we expect that our combined Internet and wireless loading will once again lead our peers. Media has once again delivered sector-leading growth driven by our added Warner, Discovery media content and by our Toronto Blue Jays' very strong regular season performance. As well, this is the first quarter in which MLSE results are now fully consolidated with our Rogers Sports and Media business segment. And so we are pleased to report that Rogers is delivering solid results across all three core businesses against the backdrop of a competitive environment and slower growth economy. Starting with Wireless. We continue to deliver solid market share supported by disciplined financials. Wireless service revenue was flat and adjusted EBITDA was up 1% year-over-year, primarily reflecting the ongoing competitive intensity in the marketplace, continued lower immigration and lower international roaming and wholesale revenue. Our sustained emphasis driving cost efficiencies has moved our industry-leading Wireless margin to 67%, up 60 basis points against the prior year and near our all-time high of 68%. As well, we have maintained strong market share for mobile phone net additions, adding 111,000 net new subscribers, consisting of 62,000 postpaid and 49,000 prepaid mobile customers. Across the entire sector, Wireless subscriber additions continued lower versus prior year, reflecting continued lower immigration levels. Against this lower growth backdrop, we have added a sector-leading 206,000 net new mobile phone customers year-to-date, with the majority of these subscribers added on our feature-rich Rogers premium service plans. Continued emphasis on responsive customer service and improved customer base management has lowered customer churn to a very strong 0.99%, our best churn performance in over two years. Blended mobile phone ARPU of $56.70 is down 3% from the prior year, reflecting the ongoing impact from competitive intensity, combined with lower international and wholesale roaming revenue, as mentioned earlier. Moving to Cable. Cable service revenue has once again grown 1% year-over-year, driven by retail Internet subscriber growth, combined with continued discipline in the face of ongoing market competition. Cable adjusted EBITDA is up 2% year-over-year, driven by the flow-through of modest service revenue growth combined with our ongoing cost efficiency initiatives. As a result, Cable margins have reached an industry-leading 58%, an increase of 70 basis points over the prior year. Internet net additions of 29,000 customers reflect our continued success expanding subscribers throughout our national footprint and includes our continued success with 5G Home Internet, expanding our bundled service offerings into every region from coast to coast. And finally, Rogers Sports & Media revenue of $753 million, was up by 26% over the prior year, reflecting the combined contributions of three key initiatives: Our added Warner Discovery suite of media content; stronger results for Sportsnet and the Toronto Blue Jays, particularly through September to close out the regular season and the consolidation of MLSE effective July 1. Media EBITDA was $75 million compared to $136 million last year, reflecting both the positive flow-through of Warner Discovery and the Blue Jays regular season, offset by the seasonally low third quarter EBITDA loss for MLSE, which is consolidated in 2025, but not in 2024. We expect MLSE will be substantially accretive to earnings in Q4 and for the second half of 2025. As well, the Blue Jays' very successful MLB playoffs and World Series run will provide further added growth in the fourth quarter. In terms of unlocking additional value from our Sports & Media assets, let me recap our current view on process and timing. To be clear, we remain determined and committed to delevering our balance sheet and to unlocking the significant unrecognized value in the RCI share price from these world-class sports assets. With the current estimated value of more than $15 billion for our Sports & Media properties, we continue our work to identify and execute on the best long-term strategy to surface value. And the way our Toronto Blue Jays World Series run is captivating this country is a very clear demonstration of the power of our iconic sports teams. We anticipate a transaction could occur over the next 18 months or so, likely coincident with or subsequent to us acquiring the remaining 25% minority interest in MLSE. In the meantime, as we assess multiple options, our Sports & Media operations remain highly successful. They operate at scale and are delivering sector-leading and growing financial results and investment returns. Finally, rounding out my comments on the third quarter. Our consolidated service revenue is up by 4% to $4.7 billion and adjusted EBITDA is $2.5 billion, down 1%. As mentioned earlier, the year-over-year changes in both service revenue and EBITDA reflect the flow-through of modest growth in Wireless, Cable and Media combined with consolidation of MLSE results starting this quarter. Capital expenditures were $964 million, which is relatively flat to last year, even as we absorbed some additional capital spending from consolidating MLSE. Free cash flow of $829 million was down 9%, driven by increasing taxable income and the timing of tax installment payments. We continued to delever in Q3 even as we acquired our additional stake in MLSE for $4.7 billion, roughly a 0.5 turn increase in leverage at acquisition. Immediate execution on driving operating synergies and MLSE EBITDA growth, combined with ongoing application of free cash flow and capital initiatives to delever, allowed us to close the quarter with debt leverage of 3.9x, down roughly 10 to 20 basis points in the first three months of the MLSE acquisition. Notwithstanding this notable progress, our third quarter leverage is up by 0.3x as a result of the MLSE acquisition. And so here, I will emphasize that we remain committed to strengthening our balance sheet further and to improving our investment-grade credit ratings. We are in regular contact with each of the credit rating agencies to communicate our plans and progress. This will be driven by continued prudent capital priorities together with earnings and free cash flow growth to pay down debt and lower leverage. Unlocking value from our Sports & Media Holdings is a very substantial part of that exercise. At quarter end, we maintained our very strong liquidity position with available liquidity of $6.4 billion. This included $1.5 billion in cash and cash equivalents and $4.9 billion available under our bank and other credit facilities. As you have seen in our Q3 cash flow -- free cash flow statement issued today, we are now reporting distributions paid by subsidiaries to noncontrolling interest, reflecting the distribution payment associated with the minority investment and a portion of our Wireless network infrastructure. The $14 million amount reflects the prorated timing for the transaction, which closed in late June, and so the Q3 distribution is for a partial prior quarter. In our Q4 results and going forward, the full quarterly amount of the distribution will be reflected, which we anticipate will be approximately $100 million per quarter. And as we discussed last quarter, a very substantial portion of this quarterly distribution is offset by the lower interest expense generated from using the proceeds from this transaction to pay down debt. The last piece I will touch on before we open up the call for Q&A is for affirmation and updates to our 2025 guidance, where we have improved our outlook for both capital expenditures and free cash flow for the rest of the year, reflecting our ongoing efforts to drive more efficient capital allocation and also reflecting the current regulatory environment. We now expect to end 2025 with capital expenditures of approximately $3.7 billion, which is a further $100 million reduction to our previous adjusted target of $3.8 billion and a full $300 million improvement from the previously anticipated high end of our guidance range announced in January, when we were targeting $3.8 billion to $4 billion. Notably, we are improving our targeted capital outlook even as we absorb the additional capital expenditures associated with MLSE. We have driven careful prioritization of our capital investments in 2025 and you should expect this determined prioritization to continue in 2026. As well, we now expect our 2025 free cash flow to be in the range of $3.2 billion to $3.3 billion compared to the $3.0 billion to $3.2 billion range previously estimated at the beginning of the year. As we prepare for 2026 and beyond, you should expect that we will continue to drive more efficient capital investment, improve free cash flow and further strengthen and delever the balance sheet. And so in summary, our Q3 results demonstrate that Rogers continues to successfully execute on its core Wireless and Cable strategies. We have achieved consistent strong performance for almost four years now, and we will continue to build on this track record in the quarters and years ahead. In Sports & Media, we continue to make progress on our very unique opportunity to surface significant unrecognized value from these assets for our shareholders. And in the meantime, we continue to pursue sector-leading growth and improved profitability for Rogers Sports & Media. Let me close by extending a very sincere and appreciative thank you to our employees who are the engine driving and sustaining our strong execution and who play a critical role in driving our future success. Thank you for your tremendous pride and determination. And finally, Go Jays. I will now ask Galyene to open the call for our Q&A session. Thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] First question is from Stephanie Price with CIBC. Stephanie Price: I was hoping you could talk a little bit more on the Wireless competitive environment as we head into the holiday season? And if you think the current pricing environment can be sustained here? Anthony Staffieri: Stephanie, thanks for the question. In terms of -- we approached back-to-school, with a view of having a very simple redefined value propositions for the customer. And so we streamlined our price offerings. We made it more clear on the differentiation amongst the plans with features that are beyond just data bucket sizes. And what we found is it resonated well. We focused on add-a-line construct so that we could increase the number of lines per customer, and that's trending well for us as well. And we recently introduced tiered hardware promotional discounts so that the amount of discount on our hardware is graduated depending on the plan that the customer comes in on Verizon, if they're in currently customers today. And what we're finding is that's resonating extremely well with customers, and you're seeing that in our subscriber performance. And that's been continuing throughout October as well. And so we think we've got the right value proposition as we head into Black Friday and to the end of the year. And so that's what you should expect to see from us. We'll see how the marketplace responds. And to the extent we need to pivot based on the market dynamics, then we'll do so. But right now, we're feeling pretty good about the pricing constructs that we have in the marketplace. Stephanie Price: And then maybe a follow-up on churn. Your churn has been down over the past 2 quarters. Great to see and hoping you can give us some thoughts on churn management and where there's further opportunities potentially. Anthony Staffieri: What you're seeing is a very concerted effort. We've always focused on base management, but we've taken a much more holistic approach to base management and employing tactics that are resonating with customers in terms of what's important to them, drilling down on customers that we think might have a propensity to churn and dealing with the issues in advance of them calling us. And so there are a number of tactics that we've been going through, and the team is executing extremely well in base management. We expect to continue to see good churn performance across our entire base. Operator: The next question is from Aravinda Galappatthige with Canaccord Genuity. Aravinda Galappatthige: I wanted to start off with Wireless. Obviously, the lag effect of the historical promotional activity, it continues to show in the service revenue numbers. But just looking at the sequential trend in service revenue growth, I wanted to sort of clarify whether that was sort of items around roaming or external customers that would have had an impact on that number? Glenn Brandt: Thanks, Aravinda. Yes, the part of that decline really is lower roaming volumes as well as a reference to some wholesale revenues that, I'll shortcut and simply say, moved to another carrier. And so you're seeing that roll through. That's a very substantial part of what you've seen in the revenue. Aravinda Galappatthige: And just maybe just a bigger picture question on operating leverage. I mean with the progress that's made on the AI side of things, the latest generation being agentic AI and so forth. Can you talk about the magnitude of the opportunities that you have to potentially deploy those technologies within the firm and potentially drive streamlining efforts within Rogers, whether it's in CX or even on the network operations side, marketing, et cetera? Just to get a sense of how material that could be from an operating leverage perspective to the company. Anthony Staffieri: Thanks for the question, Aravinda. Really good question and something we've been spending quite a bit of time on, not just historically, but as advancements in AI tools and technology continues to grow exponentially, we continue to look at ways to capitalize on it. And we see three main areas. One is the customer experience, as you indicated, combining with a completely digital experience, and that's the journey we're on. It's going to allow us to give the customer a more consistent, streamlined experience to address whatever issue they have. And we're really looking forward to that and are much more cost effective -- on a much more cost-effective basis. The second relates to efficiency and the ability of these AI tools to make us much more efficient and some of which you're seeing already in our industry-leading margins in both Wireless and Cable. And then the third really relates to security and the ability to continue to enhance security for our customers and for our own data. And so it's all three of those categories that we're very much focused on, and we'll continue to deploy. So the opportunity for this is significant for us in this sector and we'll continue to follow in many ways the large players globally and the tools that they've deployed successfully, so that we're a fast follower in many of these areas and implementing them efficiently. Operator: The next question is from Drew McReynolds with RBC. Drew McReynolds: Maybe extending the network revenue question, I think from Aravinda. Maybe, Glenn, can you talk about just, let's level set expectations about how that trends just given all the moving parts whether you want to talk about Q4 into 2026, just how are you thinking of the puts and takes and the trajectory? And then second question, obviously going to fit in a Jays one here. On the sports assets, I mean, clearly, incredible to see the whole country alive here. Maybe, Tony, you've talked about kind of how these three businesses have to stand on their own, but clearly, there's a branding and cross-promotional aspect to this all. Just wondering if we would see or have seen direct impacts on your telecom business in terms of subscriber growth or benefits that are coming your way on the telecom side that we'd see in either Q3 or Q4 or just maybe longer term? Glenn Brandt: Thanks, Drew. Let me start with the first part of that. I'm not going to take the opportunity to start guiding for '26. I will say the trends you see, I'll say, through the first 3 quarters of 2025 and the trajectory of hitting growth on the year for service revenue, we remain firmly committed to and expect. And so for the year, you'll see positive service revenue growth for Wireless. We all know the competitive framework that we operate in and the slower subscriber growth. That's why you see us leaning in on base management and churn improvement. That's a very efficient way of finding, if not revenue growth, certainly sustaining the base of operations. And so we remain committed to that. Q4, I expect, you'll see strong execution. Part of our Q3 backdrop as we are lapping a very strong Q3 in the prior year, and we have sustained and held the very fast part of that growth that you saw in '24 through the first 3 quarters of '25. So I'm pleased with that progress. So Q4 will be another strong quarter. I won't comment further on guiding for that or beyond in '26, but pleased with progress for sustaining that base management through the 3 quarters. Anthony Staffieri: Drew, with respect to your second question, as you pointed out, we're looking to each one of our pillars of growth being Wireless, Cable and now Sports & Entertainment to stand on their own and drive value, profitability and growth in their own respect. But we also look to ensure that we're capitalizing on the cross synergies amongst all our assets. And the run of the Toronto Blue Jays and heading into the World Series, you can see that in spades in terms of the ability to enhance our brand, the ability to showcase our Cable and Wireless products and services to viewers of the game, and we've seen that throughout the year. If you think about some of the key events in 2025, Four Nations, the playoff run of the Toronto Maple Leafs, and then the Toronto Blue Jays and there are others as well. But you see the power of live sports, and it's good to see, and it's been a benefit for us, as I said, in and of itself, but also in terms of helping the broader Rogers. Operator: The next question is from Vince Valentini with TD Cowen. Vince Valentini: I assume you're getting a lot of favors and requests for tickets for the World Series. I'm wondering if you can compare that. How many requests are you getting for this versus the Taylor Swift concerts. You don't have to answer that. Anthony Staffieri: These are the most World Series requests we've had in 32 years. Vince Valentini: Thanks, Glenn, a very accurate answer as always. The more serious question. Look, you've been asked this several times. I want to hit this head on. Given pricing is improving in Wireless, your front book is now above your back book. And we've seen the CPI stats showed a material improvement in September to basically flat for Wireless pricing versus double-digit declines earlier in the year. All that should mean that Q3 is the trough quarter for Wireless ARPU at minus 3.2%. Can you not confirm that, that it won't get worse than that and should gradually get better over the next 5, 6 quarters? Glenn Brandt: Succinctly, I agree with your sentiment. I think we are seeing some strong initiatives around a large number of initiatives to sustain the base, low churn and sustain revenue. And so broadly, yes, I think you are seeing us continue solid Wireless growth on a full year as well as quarter-to-quarter. You saw a dip in the third quarter, but all of the elements that you've pointed out are true Vince. Vince Valentini: If I can just sneak in one more. Wireless equipment margin was pretty positive contributor to EBITDA again this quarter. In the past, it hasn't always been a positive. Has something changed in terms of handset subsidies and the amounts you're giving out to or something changed with your deals with the vendors to allow that to be a sustainable source of positive EBITDA? Anthony Staffieri: That's -- the driver for it in the third quarter was really our shift to the tiered promotional discounting that I spoke about. Although we implemented it later in the quarter, it came out of time with higher volumes with back-to-school. And so it was extremely and continues to be very effective in reducing our net hardware costs, but also in incenting the customer to move up tier. And so when we look at our ARPU in, we're really pleased with the effect that it's happening. You see ARPU in up very nicely year-on-year. So we like what we see there. And so it is, we believe, the beginning of a trend in terms of net hardware cost for us. Operator: The next question is from Maher Yaghi with Scotiabank. Maher Yaghi: Glenn, I just wanted to double check on something. You -- in the previous question, you said in your response that you agreed with all the assumptions based on the basis of the question. But I'd just be very specific. Are you saying that you confirm that the back book of your Wireless service customers is above -- sorry, is below the current front book? Glenn Brandt: I'm answering from a general sentiment of whether or not we are troughing whether or not Wireless service revenue is growing. I'm not getting into the detail of front or back book. You've heard me answer these questions consistently, Vince, when -- or Maher, when we're asked on what's ARPU trajectory, I focus on service revenue growth and EBITDA growth. And on service revenue growth, I expect Wireless service revenue to grow each quarter and each year. We had a slight and it's a very slight decline just below 0 or flat in the third quarter. For the year we'll be positive, and I expect will be positive going forward. It's a mix of subscriber additions, pricing initiatives, service plan initiatives, simplifying our service plan offerings and trying to move customers up through premium plans. I could go on and on. So I don't want to talk about front and back book because it makes it seem like there's a difference between new and long-standing customers. It's really working with our service plans and our initiatives all around that to drive service revenue and EBITDA growth. So don't read too much into that. I'm answering from a general sentiment we expect Wireless Service revenue to grow period. Maher Yaghi: Perfect. Thank you for answering this question more precisely because I think there's still some gap left to be closed, but I agree that there's upside for next year. So I just wanted to ask you, I know it's not much visible in your results. And I'm not surprised because in Canada, we have a lag to the U.S. in terms of new product introduction, but results from AT&T yesterday and T-Mobile this morning are showing a significant increase in jump balls coming from customers looking to get their hands on the new iPhones. So I wanted to just see if you're noticing thus far in Q4, a slight pickup in jump balls in Canada yet? Or if not, why not? And how are you positioning yourself for Q4 for -- if we do see the same trend occurring in Canada, do you think handset subsidization will become a bigger factor in overall economics of floating customers in Q4 versus prior quarters? Anthony Staffieri: A couple of things that you touched on, and I'll work backwards from your question. In terms of Q4, the demand for new devices and the subsidy and cost for us, what you see in market for us is how we intend to approach the marketplace in the fourth quarter. We think we have a very good value proposition, and our promotional incentives are really going to be centered around hardware rather than rate plans. But we're also going to be very disciplined in the tiering constructs that I spoke about earlier, so that higher promotional discounts come with our more premium plans and vice versa. In terms of, to use your term, jump ball that we're seeing with the launch of the new iPhone device, we've seen good demand for it. Our bigger constraint has been supply, frankly, on that front. And so that's been a limiting factor for us, but I would say at the margin. But we're seeing the same type of industry constructs for our business that you described. Operator: The next question is from Batya Levi with UBS. Batya Levi: Can you talk a little bit about the competitive environment in terms of, if you're seeing any pickup in go-to-market strategy with converged offers? And from your perspective, can you give us a sense of maybe what percent of your broadband base takes the Rogers services as for mobile? And what are some benefits you see beyond just churn reduction? Anthony Staffieri: Thanks, Batya, for the question. Converged offering is something that we spoke about in previous calls and continues to be competitive advantage for us, frankly, given our Wireline and Wireless converged footprint. And now with FWA, we're essentially converged on 100%. And so our go-to-market strategy has been to leverage our distribution channels, which are the strongest and frankly, the best in the industry here in Canada and leverage those to offer customers a converged home solution as well as their wireless products, and we're seeing good pickup in that. In terms of the percentage, we don't disclose that, but it continues to rise rather rapidly and customers looking for that solution. And there are a number of benefits beyond. The converged offer is a bundled discount, a modest discount for it, but there are other benefits the customer sees in terms of simplified servicing, having to deal with only one provider. And the convergence of the technologies as that evolves, they see benefit in that. Batya Levi: Got it. And just a quick follow-up on the lower CapEx for this year. Can you just provide a bit more color on where it's coming from and also how we should think about capital intensity going forward? Anthony Staffieri: We've been very focused on efficiency throughout our operations. You've seen it and continue to see it in our operating margins across our Cable and Wireless businesses. And you'll see it in our Media business as well going forward at scale. But we've also continued to focus on capital efficiency. And that's what you're seeing play out there. There are projects that we decided not to invest in as a result of government decision on TPIA. Certain projects were just not viable and carried too much uncertainty and it's disappointing. We're a company that wants to invest in this country and in infrastructure. And when faced with uncertainty that those types of decisions create for us, we have no choice but to pull back on capital investment, and you see that impacting the total dollars. In terms of going forward, you should expect us to continue to look for improved efficiencies and ways of continuing to reduce our capital intensity across our businesses. Operator: The next question is from Jerome Dubreuil with Desjardins. Jerome Dubreuil: The first one, I just wanted to hear maybe more about the financing plan for the Kilmer deal, which we understand is coming. Glenn, you mentioned that there's been credit agencies discussion. I'm sure they're aware but if you can comment on the plan maybe to bridge a gap just so the market is ready, and we don't have to start over with the balance sheet questions when the Kilmer deal comes. Glenn Brandt: So the -- what we're focused -- thank you, Jerome. What we're focused on is, first, acquiring the remaining 25% minority stake, combining the operations and then proceeding with recapitalizing the combined Roger Sports & Media, including MLSE and Blue Jays entity. That could happen very shortly on the heels of acquiring the minority stake or it could happen sometime following that. And so we're guiding towards -- within the next 18 months. I do anticipate it could well be in 2026, which is just inside 18 months now that we're standing in October. But it's over a timeframe that is going to take some time to work through the acquisition of the 25% stake. And over the course of that exercise, we are working with our analysis to figure out how best to capitalize that combined entity. It's going to depend upon the arrangements that we strike with the minority shareholder on buying out their stake and just when that comes. Tremendous interest being expressed by institutional -- potential institutional investors. They are an extremely attractive set of assets. We are working with the credit rating agencies, so they are aware of our timing. You mentioned -- you heard me mention on the second quarter call, critical for us was getting our arms around the Shaw delevering at midyear before and then embarking on this MLSE consolidation with RSM and recapitalization that allows the calendar to be reset, gives us time to fill in those details. So I'll quickly draw to a conclusion then, Jerome, that I'm not going to give you the roadmap on exactly how much we're selling down into whom because we -- I don't want to pre-announce. I don't have anything to pre-announce. I do know we have assets that are worth more than $20 billion once we combine it all and tremendous interest in buying in. We have shown time and again, most recently, with the Shaw acquisition, our ability to delever. We are absolutely focused on that exercise, and we have a tremendous value of assets here to do that with. So I'm highly confident on our execution. Jerome Dubreuil: Great, Glenn, and if I can just go more specifically on this if I can summarize there is that credit agencies are aware we're not going to need any equity to bridge a gap and probably -- I know the answer to that question, but it would be great to have it out there. Glenn Brandt: The -- yes, succinctly, yes, they are aware we have time to execute. They know we are committed to executing on this. I have been managing our credit ratings and our capitalization and capital structure and funding as a primary part of my role for coming up on 34 years now, I've been working with these credit rating agencies throughout that 34-year period. They're well aware of our intentions and our capabilities. Paul Carpino: Galyene, we have time for two more questions, please. Operator: The next question is from Matthew Griffiths with Bank of America. Matthew Griffiths: Just on the Sports, in the past, if I'm not mistaken, it's been a priority to consider control of the assets following the transaction. That hasn't been brought up this morning, but I just wanted to see if that remains kind of one of the priorities that you're factoring in, in addition to the kind of shareholder return maximization from any potential deal 18 months down the road? And then separately, just on Wireless. On the cost side, in the release, it was mentioned kind of the satellite -- launch of the satellite service was one of the items called out for increased cost. And I just was curious if that was mostly a marketing-related comment or if it's related to kind of the payments to the partner or a combination of both? Just kind of what was -- what exactly is that referring to? Because I know so it's early days. So I just wanted some clarity, if it's possible. Glenn Brandt: Thank you, Matt. Let me start with the Sports side of it. I'll answer it quickly with just a reference back to the asset value within our sports holdings is, as I've said, somewhere in the range of once we own 100% of everything, Blue Jays and RSM operations today plus MLSE. We've indicated we think the value of that is over $20 billion if we were to sell a majority stake that would be raising north of $10 billion. I don't need $10 billion of equity improvement in the RCI balance sheet. And so I do expect we will maintain control simply because the exercise is not that large, and these assets are very valuable. We do anticipate we will control these assets. Anthony Staffieri: And the second part of your question, Matt, in terms of our Wireless operating costs, you're referring to the comments made in the press release. Year-on-year, we've had a very modest increase in operating costs, and you see it in the disclosures of about $8 million. It's a combination of several factors. One of those factors that is described is the satellite to mobile initiative. And as you rightly point out, it does encompass both the marketing as well as the fee paid for the service under our contract. And we are currently in the beta trial mode. We've extended the beta trial mode to allow the commercial launch to be coincident with the launch of new feature capabilities of the satellite. Right now, it is just texting, but very soon, we're pleased to announce and see that it will include data as well. And so that's the reason for extending the beta trial before we get to commercial launch. And so you don't see any of the revenue pickup in our Q3 results, and you won't see it until we move to commercial launch. Operator: The next question is from David McFadgen with Cormark Securities. David McFadgen: So maybe just following on the Rogers Satellite for a second. So right now, this texting, do you expect to add data, I guess that would be a light data plan. And then do you have any ideas when you'd be able to offer text, voice and just full data? Anthony Staffieri: Thanks for the question, David. So on launch, again, to reiterate, it was texting, including 911 texting in terms of capability. We are extremely pleased with the advancement of the roadmap. Data wasn't going to come until next year and voice was planned for the year after that. As a result of the work that our partner has been doing at a very rapid pace, we're pleased that this quarter, what we will have for our customers is the ability to use data and apps. As you describe, it will be somewhat light data. We'll see the capability in terms of bandwidth once it's into production. But we're really excited about that. And then the next to follow is voice. We don't have something we can disclose on that. But you should expect it at some point in 2026. David McFadgen: Okay. And then can you give us any idea on the number of people that have signed up for the trial so far? Anthony Staffieri: It's received terrific demand from our customers and Canadians broadly in signing up for it. As you can imagine, just given our topography and landscape here in Canada, there are significant areas that weren't covered by any wireless network, including some major highways. And so the use case for it is significant. And what we're seeing is a very good pickup. So it's a material amount. What I can tell you, it's over $1 million, but we're not disclosing the specific number because we don't want to get too far ahead of ourselves in trying to extrapolate what kind of revenue that means. Glenn Brandt: One of the real opportunities here for us, David, is that it covers the very remote regions of the country, it covers virtually every road and highway. And so there's the individual Canadians that are signing up the enablement of this for businesses is tremendous and the opportunity for us is tremendous. David McFadgen: Well, the fact that you've had over 1 million sign-ups, that's pretty very good. And then just one, if I could squeeze in one more. Just on the Wireless side. So if we don't see any change in immigration, immigration stays at the current levels, do you think your Wireless net adds would be similar next year or higher or lower? Glenn Brandt: Right. I think let me avoid guiding for next year. But I would say if I look at 2025, even with very, very low immigration our growth is in the range of 3% for the sector, for the industry and 3% growth is roughly 1 million adds for the industry. And so I would expect that to continue until immigration turns up again. It will at some point. I don't expect that in '26, would be wonderful if it did, but it will come back at some point. We will look to growing the population. Again, I expect that's a key part of economic growth for any country, but 3% growth in the base is certainly something we can still build on. Paul Carpino: Thanks, everyone for joining us. If there's any follow-up, please feel free to reach out, and have a great day. Glenn Brandt: Thank you all. Go Jays. Operator: This brings to a close today's conference call. You may disconnect your lines. Thank you for participating, and have a pleasant day.
Operator: Good morning, ladies and gentlemen, and welcome to the Amalgamated Financial Corporation Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] A telephonic replay of this call and the presentation slides to complement today's discussion is available on the Investors section of our website. Please also refer to the disclaimers on Slide 2 of our presentation concerning forward statements and non-GAAP financial measures. As a reminder, this conference call is being recorded. I would now like to turn the call over to your host, Mr. Jason Darby, Chief Financial Officer. Please go ahead, sir. Jason Darby: Thank you, operator, and good morning, everyone. We appreciate your participation in our earnings call. With me today is Priscilla Sims Brown, our President and Chief Executive Officer. Additionally, Sam Brown, our Chief Banking Officer, is here for the Q&A portion of today's call. First, I want to note that we are introducing shorter prepared comments this quarter. By condensing this section of the call, we hope to transition to your questions faster and avoid repeating details you've already reviewed in the earnings materials. Let me now turn the call over to Priscilla. Priscilla Sims Brown: Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us. Well, it was another good quarter. Amalgamated delivered core earnings per share of $0.91 in the third quarter, and we experienced strength on both sides of our balance sheet, highlighted by across-the-board share gain in our deposit franchise, coupled with accelerating loan growth as our new lenders are already having an impact. Amalgamated has now delivered $2.66 year-to-date core earnings per share, which is about 3% growth, making our case for an implied value of our stock well above where we have been trading recently. One thing I'd like to remind us is that we are coming off of a 2024 year where we grew core EPS by over 18%, far exceeding most banks. So what we're doing in 2025 is just that much more remarkable comparatively speaking. So for Q3, what stands out to me, mainly that we keep delivering great results. And the quality and sustainability of our earnings allows us to handle problem situations with ease. Last quarter, Jason discussed a $10.8 million syndicated commercial and industrial business loan to an originator of consumer loans for renewable energy efficiency improvements that was under stress. I'm happy to report the quick, successful and final resolution of this loan during this quarter with the final impact all absorbed within our core earnings. I use the word successful to reflect on the decisive action we took to exit a problem credit, negotiate what we felt to be the best near-term recovery value and put the problem behind us so that our investors can see our overall credit portfolio quality with clarity. While, of course, we're not happy to absorb a loan loss every quarter charge-off, the flip side to that is a nice improvement to our nonperforming assets and overall credit quality metrics. Nonperforming assets decreased $12.2 million or 34.6% to $23 million or 0.26% of total assets and credit quality improved nearly $19 million to $79.2 million or 1.67% of total loans, which is our best ratio since I've been here. All that said, we recognize that the credit cycle is still in process, and we are acutely aware of some of the big reserves and charge-offs taken by some super regional banks recently. The best thing I can say is that you can be sure Amalgamated will be early in disclosure and decisive in our resolution. Now let's move on to some more fun stuff. Back in the first quarter with the change in administration, we said we were built for this moment, built to thrive. Nothing has changed there. We still are. Our mission, brand and values resonate with our customers, which can be seen in how our production team performed this quarter. Loans grew by $99 million across our growth mode portfolios of multifamily, CRE and C&I, about 3.3% growth, a nice acceleration from the second quarter's growth rate of 2.1%. This was in line with our quarterly targets and benefited from the addition of some C&I experts that added to our origination team in the second quarter. Our PACE portfolio also saw an acceleration as total assessments grew $27.4 million. The strength came from over 8% growth in C-PACE, where there is a rapidly growing range of opportunity and to capitalize on our new originator partnership. And then there's our deposit franchise. Wow, these folks are amazing. We just keep taking market share in our deposit gathering as all of our segments saw growth during the quarter, driving over $415 million of new deposit generation. Very few banks our size can do what we do. Looking at our segments, political was a standout with deposits increasing $235 million or 19% to $1.4 billion as fundraising begins to accelerate looking to the midterm elections, which are now only a year away. Our Climate and Sustainability segment was also a standout as deposits increased $86 million or 21%. Not-for-profit also grew $42 million. Labor grew $26 million. And overall, it was just another great quarter for our deposit gathering team. For the most part, I like what we see. We still have some work to do, no doubt, but the bank is firing on most cylinders, which provides real optimism as we look to the future. To support our growth and to ensure we efficiently scale our operations, we have been investing in a fully integrated digital modernization program, which will drive improved productivity, provide a holistic view of our customers to better understand their needs, provide more customized solutions and ultimately deliver more revenue growth. This platform went live in the third quarter, and we're already seeing the benefits across our organization as we continue to manage the business to key metrics. To close, I could not be more excited with what the future holds for Amalgamated. Our ability to deliver balanced and predictable contribution from our lending channels is starting to show, and I'm happy that we have geographic diversity, which will help us manage future loan growth targets. We are keeping a close eye on the policy debate playing out in New York City. But regardless, we feel very good about our current rent stabilization exposure. We've added some more disclosure for you this quarter in the presentation on Slide 14, and we're happy to take your questions on that. There's also more I could talk about, but we want to get to your questions sooner this time. So let me turn the call over to Jason. Jason Darby: Thanks, Priscilla. Starting off with some key highlights on Slide 3. Net income was $26.8 million or $0.88 per diluted share, while core net income, a non-GAAP measure, was $27.6 million or $0.91 per diluted share. Our net interest income grew by 4.9% to $76.4 million, which exceeded the high end of our guidance range, bolstered a bit by the recapture of some loan interest income from the payoff of one of our legacy problem assets. Additionally, our net interest margin increased 5 basis points to 3.6%. Margin expansion was partially offset by a 5 basis point rise in our cost of funds as we carried a higher average balance of interest-bearing deposits in the quarter. It's worth noting that our average spot rate paid on deposits declined 8 basis points after we repriced our deposits following the Fed's 25 basis point rate cut in September. Deposits were strong. Excluding $112.3 million of temporary pension funding deposits, total on-balance sheet deposits increased $149 million or 1.9% to $7.6 billion. We also held $265 million of deposits off balance sheet at the end of the quarter. Continuing to Slide 4, we look at some of our key performance metrics during the third quarter. Starting on the left, our tangible book value per share increased $0.98 or 4% to $25.31 and has grown over 46% since September '21, which was Priscilla's first full quarter as CEO. Tangible book value is a key component of management's long-term equity incentives, which tightly aligns management with our shareholders. Our leverage ratio was managed well at 9.18%. During the quarter, we used capital to improve our TCE ratio to 8.79%, absorbed $4.5 million of losses to improve our credit quality metrics, returned capital to shareholders through approximately $10.4 million in share repurchases and to pay our $0.14 quarterly dividend. Looking forward, we expect to continue our buybacks over the coming quarters until our share price rises to a level that we feel realistically reflects our forward earnings projection. Our core revenue per diluted share was $2.84, a $0.17 increase from the prior quarter. This increase was due to a combination of higher net interest income and the effect of our share repurchases. Importantly, this metric shows our balance sheet optimization and commitment to positive operating leverage. We're laser-focused on driving this message to the top of the broader industry peer group. Jumping ahead to Slide 9. Core noninterest expense was $43.4 million, an increase of $2.9 million from the linked quarter. This was mainly driven by a $2.2 million increase in employee compensation expense as well as an expected $0.5 million increase in technology spend due to continued investment in digital transformation development. Overall, we were pretty much right where we want to be with expense management, and we're able to add some additional compensation accruals for full year performance that is starting to look pretty promising. I'm also really happy with our core efficiency ratio of 50.17%, which places Amalgamated on average at the top of the pack from banks in the $5 billion to $10 billion range as well as banks in the $10 billion to $100 billion range. We'll continue to keep our target of approximately $170 million for annual OpEx, though there may be some upside to that number. Hopping to Slide 10. Net charge-offs were 0.81% of total loans. Obviously, this is an elevated number, but there is some good news within this metric. First, as Priscilla mentioned, was the final resolution of the problem C&I credit we talked about in the second quarter. That resulted in a $5.4 million charge-off, but the P&L impact this quarter was only $3.1 million due to prior period reserves. This credit situation is done. And thankfully, we don't have to speculate about it any further. Another bit of good news was the note sale of a legacy nonperforming leveraged loan. This resulted in a $1.5 million charge-off, but also a small recovery of $0.6 million that flowed through our net provision expense during the quarter. The remainder of the charge-offs related to normal activity from our consumer solar and business banking portfolios, although each showed some modest improvement from the prior quarter. One thing we thought would be interesting to note is the bank received a revised outlook to positive from KBRA during our annual credit rating surveillance report completed during the quarter as well. Turning to Slide 11. The allowance for credit losses on loans decreased $2.5 million to $56.5 million. The ratio of allowance to total loans was 1.18%, a decrease of 7 basis points from 1.25% in the prior quarter. The decrease was primarily the result of a $2.3 million net reserve release related to the resolution of the loan I just discussed and also by a $2.1 million reserve release related to the resolution of a legacy leverage loan credit. This was partially offset by a $1.6 million increase in reserves related to one $2.8 million multifamily loan that went nonaccrual in the quarter and a $0.2 million reserve increase for a nonperforming construction loan. Finishing on Slide 16, turning to our outlook. Today, we are raising our full year 2025 core pretax pre-provision earnings guidance to $164 million to $165 million and tightening our 2025 net interest income guidance to $295 million to $296 million, which considers the effect of the forward rate curve of 2025. Additionally, we estimate an approximate $2.2 million decrease in annual net interest income for a parallel 25 basis point decrease in interest rates beyond what the forward curve currently suggests. Briefly looking at the fourth quarter of 2025, we target average balance sheet size at approximately $8.65 billion and our net interest income to range between $75 million and $76 million. We expect our net interest margin to stay near flat relative to our Q3 mark as we believe our loan yields will drop due to repricing as we model the Fed to cut rates again by a total of 50 basis points in Q4. Based on these targets, we've gone ahead and done the implied full year math on the guidance page, so you can easily compare it to our 2024 results as well as our baseline 2025 performance targets. We're now happy to take your questions. Operator, please open up the line for Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Mark Fitzgibbon with Piper Sandler. Mark Fitzgibbon: First question I had, I was curious in the slide deck on Page 11, you mentioned that there was a $1.9 million specific reserve. What is that against? Jason Darby: Mark, this is Jason. The specific reserve that was built is related to one of our multifamily properties that we had an appraisal put against. It's one of the properties that we had already been through a refinance or a renewal about a year ago. It had a little bit of an equity infusion. We did a modification of terms. It had been paying and then we received an updated appraisal as part of our normal process for evaluating substandard credits that are real estate oriented and the valuation didn't look appropriate for the value of the property that we had originally been carrying on the books. So the reserve was put in place to effectively account for a change in the LTV. As of right now, the credit is moving to a nonaccrual status, and we're trying to figure out a path forward with that particular deal. But the [indiscernible] is pretty good at the moment. We just felt the reserve was appropriate. And as we've said before, when we see problems in the portfolio, you'll see our coverage ratios move, and that has been reflected also in the overall coverage for the portfolio moving up to 30 basis points from the 20 we had it at previously. Mark Fitzgibbon: Okay. And then, Priscilla, you had mentioned before your comments about changes to the rent-regulated multifamily market in New York and you guys feeling comfortable with that. I guess I'm curious, in the event that we do have a [ Mamdani ] and he freezes rents through the rent guidelines Board, would that change your outlook for that rent-regulated multifamily business? Is it likely that you'd sort of slow down growth in it or maybe exit and sell some of the portfolio? Priscilla Sims Brown: No. Thank you, Mark, for the question. I'm sure it's on the minds of a number of people, certainly those watching New York politics. By the way, this is why we're giving more disclosure. You see it on Page 13 and 14, and we'll continue to monitor the situation closely and update you as we learn more. But we don't expect that we're going to see impact in the next 18 to 24 months, certainly based on those changes. I do think it's important to think about the fact that, that's one tool, and it's one that's talked about quite a lot, this notion of rent freezes or stabilization. But there are other tools as well, zoning reform, public-private partnerships, community land trust, which Mamdani has spoken about, and certainly, office to residential conversion, social housing, all those things. And so keep in mind that there's real potential upside if a balanced approach leads to creation of more housing in New York, and that's one of the things we're looking at as well. Mark Fitzgibbon: Okay. And then sort of unrelated, it seems like we read every day that the Department of Energy is canceling or pulling funding from green energy projects. I think the Department of Energy has canceled something like $8 billion worth of projects and pulled funds back. And I know in the past, you guys have sort of said the funds were allocated, so you weren't concerned. But now that the administration is pulling those dollars back, I guess I'm wondering if you're concerned about any of your various projects related to that and how those are likely to sort of play out if federal funding evaporates. Sam Brown: Mark, it's Sam. I'll jump in on that one. So look, in the existing portfolio, we feel totally great about where we are. Those projects are already in the ground. And as we've talked about in the past, their funding streams, including their tax credit provisions, including any federal contribution is locked in. The other thing I'll mention is we talked about back in the second quarter call, the acceleration of projects and transactions in order to hit that deadline that will happen in 18 and 24 months. You certainly saw some of that pull-through happen in our C&I growth for the quarter, which we are very pleased about. And we're also seeing that in pipeline as well. The other thing I'll add just on the broader market spectrum, as you mentioned, about what does that mean kind of in general, as things change, you've heard us talk a lot about growing energy demand, citing a bunch of stats and figures from various well-respected authorities. Kind of the best thing I would throw out is this -- there is a new kind of base case assumption about what renewable energy deployment looks like being only 4% less than what it was before the budget was passed last year. So again, we feel good about that. And when you couple that with how energy demand is expected to continue to rise between 2.5% and 3.5% per year, getting up to 25% by 2030, 78% by 2050, the demand here dictates that there is going to be a need to finance these projects. And so while, yes, federal capital contribution might change, the reality is this industry is alive and well and is going to have a lot of participants in the financing these projects for years to come. Mark Fitzgibbon: It's hard to believe, Sam, that none of the projects you're involved in the fund -- federal funds have been pulled back from. And it's also -- it's hard to believe that if you don't have federal funding, the projects still pencil out financially. I guess I'm curious, just from the outside looking in, reading the media every day with money evaporating, it just seems a stretch to understand that. Sam Brown: Yes. And I think a lot of what is out there, Mark, is funds being pulled back for projects that haven't started yet. For example, I know that there was the largest project in Nevada was certainly a big headline recently. In our portfolio, everything we financed is already underway, has -- in an operating state, those projects are not in jeopardy because they are underway. Where there are projects that are still in pre-dev, I think that is a completely valid concern. That is not something we have present on our balance sheet and not an area we focused on as we've built out our portfolio. Mark Fitzgibbon: Okay. Last question I had. I guess I'm curious, we're in kind of unusual times with what's going on in Washington and all this sort of conversation around debanking. I know you guys have been written about in some articles in the journal and elsewhere. I guess I'm curious, how can you best position Amalgamated so that you don't become a target for the regulators given their aggressive debanking efforts? Priscilla Sims Brown: Thank you, Mark. Yes, there's a lot of noise in the news, and we certainly see it all as well, and we know you do. I guess the best way I can address that is to say we continue to be a bank that just follows all laws and regulations, and we always will. We focus on risk management, and we focus on solid, consistent performance. Organizations that manage with appropriate KYC and BSA requirements, they know we're open for business. And you've seen that on both sides of the balance sheet consistently since these concerns started to be manifested in the last -- this year, certainly. If you look at the core deposit growth, it's phenomenal. We continue to see growth across all of our segments, not just some. And so that -- those solid returns and strong profitability is really our best answer to what you're hearing. And we don't expect to see any material risk to our business model or our customer base based on the fact that we are a bank first and foremost. Operator: Our next question comes from [ Mark Shutley ] with KBW. Unknown Analyst: So on expenses, you mentioned you still target the $170 million a year, I think, but expenses came in a little higher than we were expecting in the third quarter. I know you've got the digital transformation underway. And so it sounds like a better run rate for quarterly expenses is probably somewhere in between this quarter and last quarter. Just trying to think about the moving pieces of the PPNR guide. Jason Darby: Yes. Sure, Mark. I'll take it. This is Jason. So on expenses, I think this quarter came in very much what we were expecting in terms of our overall progression towards our $170 million annual OpEx guidance. And we have been talking about for a couple of quarters, the ramping in expenses that was going to happen as we got to the back half of the year. And we were in a better spot than I was really expecting at the end of the second quarter. Here in the third quarter, we also did very, very well on the expense side. Now we were able to book a little bit of accrual in this quarter for some compensation-related expense that would be tied to year-end performance as it's becoming clearer and clearer that we're going to have a pretty strong year. So that really was the top off on maybe the expense expectation you had versus where we came in at about $43.3 million for the quarter. But if you look at it year-to-date, we're $125 million versus an average target of $127.5 million. So we're doing better there. The core efficiency is still really, really strong. And to your comment about what the fourth quarter ought to look like, I would expect it to look very similar to Q3. Now we've said that $170 million is still the target, but there's some potential upside there. If we hit expenses that looked a lot like Q3, we'd probably have some upside beat on our $170 million target. But we sort of leave that out there as a conservative marker because in the fourth quarter, occasionally, things pop up that require some additional expense to cure year-end processes relative to audits or other types of things that pop up towards the end of the year. So all things equal, I like a run rate of very similar to what we had for the third quarter as the projection for the fourth quarter. And in theory, if we hit that, there's some upside potential to the $170 million overall target. Unknown Analyst: Okay. That's helpful. And then maybe switching gears. You mentioned the loan yields. I think you expect that to come down next quarter. Obviously, those saw a nice increase this quarter and kind of drove the NIM. But with a couple of rate cuts expected, I totally get that. But I was just wanting to dig in a little bit more and see maybe what new originations were coming on at in the quarter and sort of any additional color you have there? Jason Darby: Yes. Perfect. Great question. Let me start off with the loan yield and the decline. I think, obviously, picked up on our projection of the 50 basis points of the total rate cuts, and that's obviously going to have an impact on some of the variable pricing we have in the C&I portfolio. And also, I did make a comment there was a bit of a one-timer that flowed through with the recapture of some interest income for a very long-dated problem credit that we have had on our books that we were able to get a full payoff from recovery on. So that accounted for about 9 basis points of loan yield in this quarter. So most of the drop will probably be just tied to the resetting of net interest income -- I'm sorry, noninterest income -- net interest income for the quarter, absent that onetime effect for the current period. Now in terms of the bring on, we had a pretty decent quarter in terms of overall bring on. I think where we were on the C&I side was in the high 6s, maybe even crossing to low 7s in certain places for the quarter. The real estate portfolio came in just above 6%, which are pretty strong yields given the credit quality that we're seeking. And then going forward for the fourth quarter, we're pretty much saying it's going to be about 30 to 50 basis points lower just as a result of the repricing. So figure somewhere in the 6.50% to maybe 6.75% range on your C&I deals and maybe close to 6%, maybe 5.75%. I'm kind of getting a little bit wrong there, probably about 25 basis point decline in the bring on yields from the current quarter. And then the only other thing to point out is that we still have a very strong origination on the PACE side, which drives a yield of about 7%. Now we'll see probably a little bit of erosion there, but those coupons are pretty strong, and they really help the margin from a rollover perspective on the yield side. Operator: We have reached the end of the question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the call back over to Priscilla Sims Brown for closing comments. Priscilla Sims Brown: Thank you, and thank you for those very good questions. I'm sure they will continue as we follow up today and in the future around the quarter. But I want to just take a second again, as we do every quarter, to thank our employees for their hard work and the dedication to the bank and our customers. We know our success would not be possible without the commitment and the determination of our talented team of bankers. To conclude, I'm very pleased with our third quarter results, which demonstrates our lending -- sorry, our leading deposit franchise, which is unique in the industry and when you combine that with our lending platform, which I also believe is unique, we are at an important inflection point. Taken together, we're poised to deliver continued organic growth as we further build the earnings power of the bank and as we focus on delivering long-term value for shareholders. I look forward to updating you on our progress on the fourth quarter call and taking your calls in the meantime. Thank you. Operator: This concludes today's conference. You may disconnect your lines at this time, and we thank you for your participation. Enjoy the rest of your day.
Operator: Greetings, and welcome to the First American Financial Corporation's Third Quarter Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] A copy of today's press release is available on First American's website at www.firstam.com/investor. Please note the call is being recorded and will be available for replay from the company's investor website and for a short time by dialing (877) 660-6853 or (201) 612-7415 and enter the conference ID 13756641. We will now turn the call over to Craig Barberio, Vice President of Investor Relations, to make an introductory statement. Craig, please go ahead. Craig J. Barberio: Thank you. Good morning, everyone, and welcome to First American's earnings conference call for the third quarter of 2025. Joining us today on the call will be our Chief Executive Officer, Mark Seaton; and Matt Wagner, Chief Financial Officer. Some of the statements made today may contain forward-looking statements that do not relate strictly to historical or current fact. These forward-looking statements speak only as of the date they are made, and the company does not undertake to update forward-looking statements to reflect circumstances or events that occur after the date the forward-looking statements are made. Risks and uncertainties exist that may cause results to differ materially from those set forth in these forward-looking statements. For more information on these risks and uncertainties, please refer to yesterday's earnings release and the risk factors discussed on our Form 10-K and subsequent SEC filings. Our presentation today also contains certain non-GAAP financial measures that we believe provide additional insight into the operational efficiency and performance of the company relative to earlier periods and relative to the company's competitors. For more details on these non-GAAP financial measures, including presentation with and reconciliation to the most directly comparable GAAP financials, please refer to yesterday's earnings release, which is available on our website at www.firstam.com. I will now turn the call over to Mark Seaton. Mark Seaton: Thank you, Craig, and thank you to everyone joining our call. Today, I will provide a brief review of our earnings and share our outlook on the market. Today, we announced adjusted earnings per share of $1.70 for the third quarter, another strong result that highlights the resilience of our business. We continue to see 2 distinct market dynamics. Our commercial business delivered outstanding performance, while the residential market remains in a period of transition. Even so, our adjusted consolidated revenue grew 14% and adjusted EPS increased 27%. Commercial revenue increased 29%, and we set a record for average revenue per order at just over $16,000 per closing. The rebound in the commercial market began in the third quarter of 2024, which means the year-over-year comparisons are becoming more challenging. Nonetheless, even against tougher comps, we delivered another strong quarter with a 29% growth rate. We continue to see broad-based strength in commercial, led by the industrial sector which includes data center transactions, a consistently high-performing sub-asset class. Even excluding data centers, the industrial market remains robust, driven by sustained e-commerce demand for logistics and warehouse space. Multifamily was our second strongest asset class with solid performance across a wide range of geographies. Investment income grew 12% this quarter. Our investment portfolio, and particularly our bank continues to serve as a countercyclical earnings driver. The residential side of our business continues to navigate challenging market conditions. Purchase revenue declined 2%, primarily due to reduced demand for new homes. The purchase market has remained soft over the last 3 years, largely driven by affordability challenges and elevated mortgage rates. However, when purchase volumes begin to normalize and return to long-term trends, we are well positioned to capture growth, thanks to our operating leverage and strong relationships with local real estate professionals who play a critical role in driving purchase activity. Refinance revenue was up 28% this quarter. Although we've seen an uptick in volumes, the refinance market remains at historically low levels. Our home warranty business continues to post very strong earnings. Our pretax income was up 80%, driven by a lower loss rate, and we continue to grow our direct-to-consumer channel, which is offsetting the ongoing weakness in real estate. I'm optimistic about our long-term outlook. We're at the early stages of the next real estate cycle and our industry-leading investments in data, technology and AI position us to outperform as the market strengthens. By modernizing our platforms and integrating AI across our operations, we expect to drive significant productivity gains, reduce risk and unlock new revenue opportunities. further extending First American's leadership in the industry. Now I would like to turn the call over to Matt for a more detailed review of our financial results. Matthew Wajner: Thank you, Mark. This quarter, we generated GAAP earnings of $1.84 per diluted share. Our adjusted earnings, which exclude the impact of net investment gains and purchase-related intangible amortization was $1.70 per diluted share. Adjusted revenue in our Title segment was $1.8 billion, up 14% compared with the same quarter of 2024. Commercial revenue was $246 million, a 29% increase over last year. Our closed orders increased 6% from the prior year, and our average revenue per order was up 22%. Purchase revenue was down 2% during the quarter, driven by a 5% decline in closed orders, partially offset by a 3% improvement in the average revenue per order. While refinance revenue was up 28% compared with last year, it accounted for just 6% of our direct revenue this quarter and highlights how challenged this market continues to be. In the Agency business, revenue was $799 million, up 17% from last year. Given the reporting lag in agent revenues of approximately 1 quarter, these results primarily reflect remittances related to second quarter economic activity. Information and other revenues were $276 million during the quarter, up 14% compared with last year, primarily due to refinance activity in the company's Canadian operations, revenue growth in the company's subservicing business and higher demand for noninsured information products and services. Investment income was $153 million in the third quarter, up 12% compared with the same quarter of last year, primarily due to higher interest income from the company's investment portfolio partly offset by a decline in interest income from operating cash due to lower balances and lower short-term interest rates. Net investment gains were $6 million in the current quarter, compared with net investment losses of $308 million in the third quarter of 2024, which were primarily due to losses realized from the company's investment portfolio rebalancing project. Personnel costs were $543 million in the third quarter, up 10% compared with the same quarter of 2024. The increase was primarily due to incentive compensation expense resulting from higher revenue and profitability and higher salary expense and employee benefit costs. Other operating expenses were $276 million in the quarter, up 9% compared with last year, primarily due to higher production expense driven by higher volumes and increased software expense. Our success ratio for the quarter was 62%, which is in line with our historic target of 60%. The provision for policy losses and other claims was $42 million in the third quarter or 3.0% of title premiums and escrow fees, unchanged from the prior year. The third quarter rate reflects an ultimate loss rate of 3.75% for the current policy year and a net decrease of $11 million in the loss reserve estimate for prior policy years. Pretax margin in the title segment was 12.9% on both a GAAP and adjusted basis. Looking at October, we are seeing a similar pattern in opened orders to what we have experienced so far this year with a strong commercial market and sluggish residential market continuing. For the first 3 weeks of October, commercial orders are up 14%, while purchase orders are down 6%. The strength in commercial order activity is positioning us well for the remainder of the year and into 2026. Turning to the Home Warranty segment. Total revenue was $115 million this quarter, up 3% compared with last year. The loss ratio was 47%, down from 54% in the third quarter of 2024. The improvement in the loss ratio was primarily due to lower claim frequency, largely driven by favorable weather conditions. Pretax margin in the Home Warranty segment was 14.1% or 13.5% on an adjusted basis. The effective tax rate in the quarter was 23.1% and which is slightly below the company's normalized tax rate of 24%. Our debt-to-capital ratio was 33.0%. Excluding secured financings payable, our debt-to-capital ratio was 22.5%. This quarter, we raised our common stock dividend by 2% to an annual rate of $2.20 per share. We also repurchased 598,000 shares in the third quarter for a total of $34 million at an average price of $56.24. Now I would like to turn the call back over to the operator to take your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And our first question comes from the line of Mark Hughes with Truist Securities. Mark Hughes: On the commercial ARPO revenue per order, obviously, 3Q is very strong. Could you talk about that, the sustainability, perhaps what you're seeing so far in 4Q? Mark Seaton: Thanks for the question, Mark. Yes, I would say it's sustainable. I mean typically, in commercial, there is some seasonality to ARPO, right? It usually builds throughout the year. And we think it will continue to build in Q4. We're just seeing a lot of momentum in commercial. There's a lot of big transactions. We track 11 asset classes. 10 of our asset classes were up in the third quarter year-over-year. The only one that wasn't up was energy, which has historically been a really good asset class for us, but Q4 is typically a big energy quarter. We've got some big deals in the pipeline. So just in terms of Q3, it exceeded our expectations. And we're really optimistic about what we see in Q4. So it's been a really good story for us. Mark Hughes: Yes. How about the outlook currently for investment income? I know you've talked about some historically some sensitivities, but kind of what should we anticipate in Q4? Matthew Wajner: This is Matt. Thanks for the question, Mark. So for Q4, we continue to see -- we think it will be down slightly sequentially just due to kind of some of the headwinds from rate cuts. But it should be modestly down sequentially. It's the expectation right now. Mark Hughes: Okay. And then when we think about the refi orders, what's the kind of recent trend in refi per day? Matthew Wajner: The -- so for the first 3 weeks of October, we're opening about 875 open orders per day in refi. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Terry Ma with Barclays. Terry Ma: I was hoping you could give an update on maybe just Sequoia and Endpoint in terms of the time line for the pilots. I think last quarter, you said Endpoint pilot was going to roll out December. Is that still on track? And then for Sequoia in the markets that you're piloting currently, any kind of early results? Mark Seaton: Yes. Thanks, Terry. Well, first of all, in terms of Endpoint, yes, we're still on track with everything we talked about in the third quarter. We -- the product is ready for testing. In fact, we got people here on campus last week and this week testing the product and testing is going well, and we are still on track to roll it out in our first office in December. And we're -- right now, we're planning on sort of a broader rollout in the springtime to kind of start rolling it out throughout the country. It's going to take us roughly 2 years or so to get it national, but it's something we're really excited about. Our current system, which we call FAST, we rolled it out in 2002, and so we've been on the system for 23 years. It's been a good system for us for a long time. But obviously, technology has changed and AI is here and we're really excited about Endpoint. It's going to give us productivity improvements we haven't seen before. It's going to be a great user interface for our escrow officers and it's really going to amplify their talent. It's going to reduce the mundane task or part of the escrow transaction and free up more time for our escrow officers to spend more time with the client. We're really excited about it. And we're really on track with everything since last quarter, since we talked about last quarter. So that's we keep hitting our milestones. In terms of Sequoia, we're also very optimistic about Sequoia. We really started Sequoia with the vision of having instant title for purchase transactions. It's never been done in the industry. There's instant title for refinance transactions. We've got a solution for that. Our competitors have solutions for that. Nobody has it for purchase transaction. And we're continuing to make milestones with Sequoia too. We have rolled out our AI engine for Sequoia and we're running live refinance orders through Sequoia today, and that's a big milestone. The product is out there. It's in production. It's in 3 counties. We've sort of exceeded our expectations in terms of the hit rates that we can get. And as of right now, the plan is to have our first purchase transaction go live in the first quarter. And so we -- that's been our plan, and it continues to be our plan, and we see really good progress with Sequoia as well. So we're going to start testing the purchase product in the first quarter. And that's similarly, it's going to take us roughly 2 years or so to do a national rollout. But when we do, we'll be able to produce a commitment faster arguably with more accuracy and cheaper than anything that's out here in the market. So we're really excited about really both Endpoint and Sequoia. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Bose George with KBW. Bose George: Just sticking to Sequoia and Endpoint, can you remind us just what the margin impact of those programs are of just running the 2 platforms and just the way to think about the time line for that kind of rolling off? Mark Seaton: Yes. Thanks a lot, Bose. One thing I would say is we initially broke out our -- we call it our margin drag from Endpoint and Sequoia early on because we really wanted investors to be able to evaluate the performance of our core title business without these investments that we were making with Endpoint and Sequoia. And at the time, we didn't know if they were going to work or not. There were big technological hurdles. We weren't sure it was going to work. Well, now we're -- we know it's going to work. I think there's still -- there's always questions on the timing of things, but we know that they're both going to work. And so we are integrating them into our core operations now. It's just part of our title segment. So we're not going to disclose the drag with endpoint Sequoia anymore. A, because we don't feel like it's fair to back that out. We want investors to judge us on our core operating performance, including those. And b, is because they're being integrated in their core operations before they were really stand-alone entities. But now it's just being -- it's harder and harder for us to track it just because they're being more integrated into what we're doing. So we're not going to give that anymore. Bose George: That makes sense. But I guess I'm just trying to think about -- but there will be a benefit as once they rolled out and your old platforms are shut down, right? So I guess because it's hard to quantify at the moment, but there is going to be that sort of benefit at the end of this process. Mark Seaton: There's no question about that, Bose. The last time that we have talked about the drag, it's been roughly 100 basis points. And so you don't spend 100 basis points just to get nothing. I mean, you spend 100 basis points to get more than 100 basis points, right? And so there's a few different ways to get value. The first is we're really supporting 2 different systems. I think for both Endpoints and Sequoia, we've got our old system where our business is running on the old systems. And then we have the new systems which are showing a lot of promise, but they have very little volumes, right? So we're really double paying with technology right now. And eventually, we'll get everything on the new systems, and there'll be some savings by shutting down the old systems. That's the first thing. The second thing is -- the thing we're excited about is it's not just a copy and paste in terms of productivity. I mean the new system is going to create a lot more productivity, and we'll see that. And the third is I really believe that we can gain market share for both of those products. And that remains to be seen. It's tough to gain market share in our business, but I think there's a lot of reasons to believe that more customers are going to want to do business with First American because of this modern platform that we have. And so I think there's 3 different levels of value creation and that will happen over -- gradually over time, you'll see incremental improvements. Bose George: Okay. That's helpful. And then actually just on the order count, the default and the other -- that line item has gone up quite a bit again. Is that -- I mean, are those like you sort of clients allocating product? Or just curious what's going on there. Mark Seaton: Just so you're looking at the default and other, Bose? Bose George: Yes. Just -- yes, the order count, just the increase in the order count in that other line item. Mark Seaton: I would just say, first of all, it's -- of all of our order counts, we look at purchase commercial refi and then of course, what you're referring to is the other. We have seen an increase in default activity. It's there, but it's -- I wouldn't say it's material and it's really not a material part of our business right now, but we have seen it. And there's like -- it's not necessarily like foreclosures. There could be some foreclosures. A lot of it is like loss mitigation work that we do in some alternative products. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Geoffrey Dunn with Dowling & Partners. Geoffrey Dunn: Mark, back on Sequoia, it doesn't seem like there's a demand for instantaneous title. So it really sounds like it's more about efficiency gains. But then obviously, you have political pressure picking up every so often according to the cost of title. So as you think about the longer-term profile of the business, is this just naturally where the business is evolving to and maybe you struggle to keep those gains? Or do you think that there's something more sustainable in those efficiency gains over time? Mark Seaton: Well, I think it's -- well, there's a few things there, Jeff. And I want to make sure I answer your questions, if I don't call me back, call me out on it. But first of all, I think for Sequoia, I don't know, I would take issue that the demand isn't there for instant title. I mean I've heard that, but I'll tell you, I've talked to customers and our sales team that think that instant title for purchase transactions is a big deal. And so maybe it is, maybe it isn't, but we're going to test it. We're going to be the ones that test it. And even if it's not, even in the worst case that it's not helpful to have an instant purchase transaction, right? And you can have an instant purchase transaction when the transaction won't close in 55 days. Even if it's not, we're really turning a labor product into a data product. And it gives us a lot more flexibility and innovation to create new products out there. So I think that it will be at advantages. And I think particularly on the agency side, if you can have a lower cost to produce your products, you're going to have an advantage out there. In terms of like the title waivers and where the market is going and are these sustainable? I mean we're in the title insurance business. We're not in the title waiver business. I think we've got a responsibility to consumers to not only a, protect consumers and lenders, but also to do it at a reasonable price point, too. And so there's been a lot of talk about the title waiver pilot. I just think the title insurance is going to be here, it's necessary. And the title waivers, we all, as an industry, have an obligation to do what's best for the consumer, both in terms of protection, protecting their property rights, but also we've got an obligation to make it affordable, too. And so we'll see what happens -- we'll see what happens and how the market develops. But I think particularly with Sequoia it just gives us a lot of strategic optionality going forward once it's naturally rolled out. Geoffrey Dunn: Okay. And then I thought it was interesting, you brought up AI directly in your press release, you mentioned again on the call. Can you give some examples of how you're using AI? And I guess, in particular, how much is AI coming into play with your kind of living title initiatives? Mark Seaton: It's a huge deal for -- well, okay, for both Endpoint and Sequoia, which we were reading a lot of questions on this call. And for good reasons, we're spending a lot of time talking about it internally and focusing on it. We started both of those initiatives and without AI. We started to reimagine the title production process through Sequoia and the settlement process through Endpoint, and it wasn't AI-driven at first. We wanted to build modern platforms. And really about 6 to 12 months ago, these AI models came out. These new LLM models came out, Agentic AI has come out, and it's really changed our thinking on how to do things. And so we pivoted -- and both of those are AI-native platforms. Now both Endpoint and Sequoia, they leverage AI at the core to build a better product than we were on pace to build just because these technologies have become available to us in the last year. So those are AI-driven and AI-native products that we're very excited about. And they're going to be -- they're just going to be better than the track that we were on. So we have this top-down approach with leveraging AI, but we also have a bottoms-up approach with leveraging AI. And we've got ChatGPT enterprise for all 19,000 of our employees. We just rolled it out in October -- October 1. And I'm very excited to see what that produces to. And I have anecdotes of us keeping customers because of AI, us reducing risk, us thinking about new ways to do our process. And so we have a top-down and bottoms-up approach. And I think the gains are going to happen over time. We're not going to wake up 1 quarter and see 300 basis points up margins because of AI. But I think over time, gradually, we will start to become more and more efficient as we as a company, learn how to use these technologies. Geoffrey Dunn: Okay. And then just specifically to the living title efforts, is AI a big part of that? Mark Seaton: It is, yes... Geoffrey Dunn: Or is that still... Mark Seaton: No, it's -- so the living title it is AI. And so I could go into more details on this. I'll just say that when I think of Sequoia now, it's an AI-driven product that is producing an automated title commitment for refis today and purchase tomorrow using AI. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Mark DeVries with Deutsche Bank. Mark DeVries: Looks like you only purchased about 20,000 shares after you reported 2Q results. Is there any color you can provide on why you pulled back and what you need to see to get more active? Matthew Wajner: Mark, thanks for the question. This is Matt. So yes, I mean we're continuing to focus on returning excess capital to shareholders. During the quarter, we raised our dividend. And like you mentioned, we repurchased some shares during the quarter. We purchased $122 million worth of shares this year. But at the time -- at this time, we paused our buyback program to just evaluate how things develop and consider whether there may be better uses for the capital. But we continually evaluate it, and we will be buying back shares opportunistically. Mark DeVries: Okay. It looks like you ended up delevering a little bit in the quarter. Could you just kind of discuss the range of debt-to-capital ratios you'll look to operate in and kind of where you'd expect to get more aggressive on using excess capital? Matthew Wajner: Yes. So over the long term of the cycle, we targeted debt-to-capital of 20%. Right now, we're a little bit over that at 22.5%. And which we feel very comfortable and because we're at the lower part of the market right now, lower part of the cycle. So it's okay for us to have a little bit of a higher debt-to-cap. And when you say we did levered, we didn't pay down any debt. We just -- as we generate earnings, we obviously generate additional capital. So it went from, I think, 23% to 22.5%. So we're comfortable where we're at. As the market continues to increase in the cycle turns, we look to get back towards the 20% over time. Mark DeVries: Okay. And are you guys seeing more of potential interest on the M&A front that could be a use of some of that excess? Mark Seaton: Yes, we are. We are seeing it. When the market initially fell in the first half of 2022, I think we were really hopeful that there would be acquisitions and deals to do. And we just really didn't see much. And over the last couple of years, we've really kind of leaned into the buyback, and we were -- felt really good about that. But now there are more things that are coming across our desk. And so we'll see if those deals close or what happens, but they're both on the title side and the non-title side. And there's just more opportunities today than there have been in the last couple of years. Mark DeVries: Yes, it makes sense. I mean is it fair to say that some of the weakness in the residential side is creating more and more pressure from potential sellers at this point? Mark Seaton: Yes, we're seeing that. We're definitely seeing that. So we're disciplined. I mean I would just say just on the M&A side, too, Mark, is we don't feel like we have to do anything. We're not just trying to grow for the sake of growing. The deal has to make sense and it has to be strategic, and we have to make sure we have a good expected outcome in terms of the financials. So if we don't do any deals, we're fine with that. But we do think what we know, there's just more and more opportunities that are rising because the sluggish market has lasted a long time. And I think more and more people are calling us now. Operator: The next question will come again from the line of Mark Hughes with Truist Securities. Mark Hughes: Yes. Mark, you'd mentioned the title waiver, you're proposing a title solution. Anything new on the regulatory front, either on the demonstration project or maybe even on the rate front at the various states, anything new? Mark Seaton: I would say there's nothing new since last quarter. I mean, the title waiver pilot is still going on, and we're just on the sidelines waiting to kind of -- and we're sort of monitoring results and seeing where that goes. There's been nothing new on that front. On the state front, I would say there's nothing new. I mean the most material thing that is the Texas rate issue. And again, that's not new from the last call, but there's -- the industry now is expecting a 6.2% rate cut in Texas in March. It's not final yet. There's still another hearing that needs to happen, but I think that's the -- that's what we're sort of expecting internally. That's probably the biggest news on the rate side. But again, that's not new since the last call we had. Mark Hughes: Yes. And then when we think about net investment income for 2026, any early thoughts there? Matthew Wajner: Yes, Mark, from an early thought perspective, when I look out into '26, right, the obvious headwinds for interest -- for an investment income are the expected rate cuts and then we've already gotten a rate cut this year. So as a reminder, each 25 basis rate cut -- basis point rate cut impacts us by $15 million on an annual basis. So each rate cut will reduce investment income by approximately $15 million based on kind of current balances. I would say the offsets that we have potentially for next year that could help that are, one is we are expecting growth in kind of all of our markets that matter to us, specifically commercial and moderately in purchase. And if we get growth in transaction levels and transaction volumes, we can -- we'll get growth in deposit balances. So we'll have a higher balance rate or a higher level of balances, which will be helpful. The other thing that we did recently towards the end of Q3 is we made some operational enhancements at our bank, which now allows us to put 1031 exchange deposits at our bank. So historically, we had to put those positive third-party banks, and now our bank can handle those deposits, which will just increase the economic value of those deposits. And that will be a tailwind going into next year. That will hopefully offset any impacts of rate cuts. Mark Hughes: And just a follow-up on that. So the -- is the kind of takeaway message, the balances, the operational enhancements, maybe offsetting the rate cuts and so therefore, kind of a more stable outlook for '26? Matthew Wajner: I'd say it's too early to say, right? And it's dependent on the level of activity and the level of rate cuts. But right now, where we sit, we would probably see investment income being down year-over-year. Operator: Thank you. There are no additional questions at this time, and this will conclude this morning's call. We'd like to remind listeners today that today's call will be available for replay on the company's website or by dialing (877) 660-6853 or (201) 612-7415 and enter the conference ID 13756641. The company would like to thank you for your participation. This concludes today's conference call. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Greetings, and welcome to the Tri Pointe Homes' Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, this conference is being recorded. It is now my pleasure to introduce David Lee, General Counsel at Tri Pointe Homes. You may proceed. David Lee: Good morning, and welcome to Tri Pointe Homes earnings conference call. Earlier this morning, the company released its financial results for the third quarter of 2025. Documents detailing these results, including a slide deck, are available at www.tripointehomes.com through the Investors link and under the Events and Presentations tab. Before the call begins, I would like to remind everyone that certain statements made on this call, which are not historical facts, including statements concerning future financial and operating performance, are forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. A discussion of risks and uncertainties and other factors that could cause actual results to differ materially are detailed in the company's SEC filings. Except as required by law, the company undertakes no duty to update these forward-looking statements. Additionally, reconciliations of non-GAAP financial measures discussed on this call the most comparable GAAP measures can be accessed through Tri Pointe's website and in its SEC filings. Hosting the call today are Doug Bauer, the company's Chief Executive Officer; Glenn Keeler, the company's Chief Financial Officer; Tom Mitchell, the company's President and Chief Operating Officer; and Linda Mamet, the company's Executive Vice President and Chief Marketing Officer. With that, I will now turn the call over to Doug. Douglas Bauer: Good morning, and thank you for joining us today as we review Tri Pointe's results for the third quarter of 2025. I want to begin by recognizing our entire Tri Pointe team, their dedication and focus allowed us to deliver strong results in a period that continues to present challenges to the housing industry. In the third quarter, we exceeded the high end of our delivery guidance, closing 1,217 homes at an average sales price of $672,000 generating $817 million in home sales revenue. Our adjusted homebuilding gross margin, excluding $8 million of inventory-related charges, was 21.6%, while adjusted net income was $62 million or $0.71 per diluted share. We remain focused on creating long-term shareholder value. During the quarter, we spent $51 million repurchasing 1.5 million shares, bringing our year-to-date total spend to $226 million, representing a total of 7 million shares. This activity has reduced our share count by 7% year-to-date and by 47% since we initiated the program in 2016, underscoring our disciplined approach to enhancing shareholder returns. Additionally, we also strengthened our liquidity by increasing our term loan by $200 million with optionality to extend the maturity into 2029. We believe this incremental leverage is prudent, supporting capital efficiency, funding for our community count growth and continued flexibility to return capital to our shareholders. We ended the quarter with $1.6 billion in total liquidity, including $792 million in cash and a debt-to-capital ratio of 25.1% and a net debt to net capital ratio of 8.7%. Market conditions remained soft throughout the third quarter. Home buyer interest remains somewhat muted with lower confidence driven by slow job growth and broader economic uncertainty. However, we continue to see underlying demand homeownership among needs-based buyers. We anticipate that home shoppers are preparing to reengage when conditions stabilize, leading to more normalized absorptions. Our management team has successfully navigated multiple housing cycles, and we remain focused on near-term execution while staying aligned with our long-term growth strategy. In the short term, we are prioritizing inventory management, disciplined cost control and the sale of move-in ready homes while steadily increasing the mix of to-be-built homes over time. For long-term success, we continue to invest in both our core and expansion markets with the goal of scaling our operations, consistently growing community count and increasing book value per share to drive sustained shareholder returns. We are encouraged by the progress of our new market expansions in Utah, Florida and Coastal Carolinas. Development activity is well underway and strong local leadership teams are in place. While initial contributions will be modest, we expect these divisions to generate meaningful growth beginning in 2027 and beyond as they gain scale. During the quarter, we are pleased to open our first two communities in Utah, a key milestone for that region. A cornerstone of our strategy is to invest in well-located core land positions close to employment centers, high-performing schools and key amenities. We currently own or control over 32,000 lots, position us well for community count growth in the years ahead. We expect to end 2025 with approximately 155 communities, and we anticipate growing our ending commuting count by 10% to 15% by the end of 2026. The majority of this growth will be driven by expansion in our Central and East regions. This disciplined growth strategy enhances our operating scale, increases geographic diversification, and positions Tri Pointe for sustainable, profitable growth as demand improves and our expansion divisions mature. At Tri Pointe, our product is primarily targeted to premium move up buyers with financial strength, seeking better locations, larger homes, curated finishes and elevated lifestyles. This segment has demonstrated resilience even amid shifting market conditions, supported by strong income profiles, down credit and larger down payments and our backlog reflects this strength. Homebuyers financing through Tri Pointe Connect, our affiliated mortgage company have an average household income of $220,000 FICO score of 752, 78% loan-to-value ratio, an average debt-to-income level of 41%, consistent with recent quarters. These strong characteristics have reinforced the financial stability and quality of our customer base and the durability of our future deliveries. As consumer confidence improves, we expect pent-up demand to grow the pool of move-up buyers attracted to our premium communities and design-driven offerings that align with their lifestyle aspirations. Our premium brand community locations and innovative product design continue to differentiate Tri Pointe in the marketplace. We have the financial strength and operational discipline to invest through the cycle while returning capital to shareholders. Together, these strengths, along with an experienced management team, positions Tri Pointe to drive long-term performance and value creation. With that, I'll turn the call over to Glenn to provide additional detail on our financial results. Glenn? Glenn Keeler: Thanks, Doug, and good morning. I'd like to highlight key results for the third quarter and then finish my remarks with our expectations and outlook for the fourth quarter and full year. The third quarter produced strong financial results for the company. We delivered 1,217 homes, exceeding the high end of our guidance. Home sales revenue was $817 million for the quarter with an average sales price of $672,000. Gross margin adjusted to exclude an $8 million impairment charge was 21.6% for the quarter. SG&A expense as a percentage of home sales revenue was 12.9%, which is at the lower end of our guidance, benefiting from savings in G&A and better top line revenue leverage as a result of exceeding our delivery guidance. Finally, net income for the year was $62 million or $0.71 per diluted share, also adjusted for the same inventory related charge. Net home orders in the third quarter were 995 with an absorption pace of 2.2 homes per community per month. Regionally, our absorption pace in the West was 2.3, with the Southern California markets outperforming and the Bay Area experiencing softer market conditions. The Central region averaged 1.8 absorption pace for the quarter, with increased supply of both new and resale homes in Austin, Dallas and Denver impacted pace during the quarter, while Houston continued to outperform in the region. In the East, absorption pace was 2.8 led by strong results in our D.C. Metro and Raleigh division, while Charlotte was consistent with the company average. We invested approximately $260 million in land and land development during the quarter and ended with over 32,000 total lots, 51% of which are controlled via option. Looking at the balance sheet. We ended the quarter with $1.6 billion in liquidity, consisting of $792 million of cash and $791 million available under our unsecured revolving credit facility. As of the end of the quarter, our homebuilding debt-to-capital ratio was 25.1%, and our homebuilding net debt to net capital ratio was 8.7%. As Doug mentioned, we increased our term loan by $200 million to a total outstanding amount of $450 million and added extension rights that if exercised could extend the due date to 2029. The term loan is an effective source of additional liquidity to help fuel our future community count growth and other capital needs. Now I'd like to summarize our outlook for the fourth quarter and full year of 2025. For the fourth quarter, we expect to deliver between 1,200 and 1,400 homes at an average sales price of between $690,000 and $700,000. We anticipate homebuilding gross margin percentage to be in the range of 19.5% to 20.5%. We expect our SG&A expense ratio to be in the range of 10.5% to 11.5% and we estimate our effective tax rate for the fourth quarter to be approximately 27%. For the full year, we expect deliveries between 4,800 and 5,000 homes with an average sales price of approximately $680,000. We anticipate our full year homebuilding gross margin to be approximately 21.8%, which excludes the inventory-related charges recorded year-to-date. Finally, we anticipate our SG&A expense ratio to be approximately 12.5% and we estimate our effective tax rate for the full year to be approximately 27%. With that, I will now turn the call back over to Doug for closing remarks. Douglas Bauer: Thanks, Glenn. In closing, I want to thank our team members, customers, trade partners, and shareholders for their ongoing trust and support. We're proud to have been recognized once again as one of Fortune 100 best companies to work for in 2025. A reflection of the culture and values that drive our performance. While the near-term environment remains uncertain, our long-term outlook is very positive, and we are confident that our strategy, our people and our financial and operating discipline, position Tri Pointe Homes to deliver sustainable growth and long-term shareholder value. With that, I'll turn the call over to the operator for any questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question is from Paul Przybylski with Wolfe Research. Paul Przybylski: I guess, first off, could you provide some color on the monthly cadence of your orders and incentives through the quarter? Glenn Keeler: Sure, Paul, this is Glenn. The monthly cadence was pretty consistent actually through the quarter. If you look at absorption, it was roughly the same each month, with September being a little bit better than August. And then on incentive, incentives were also consistent throughout the quarter. Incentive on deliveries were 8.2% for the quarter. Paul Przybylski: And then I guess your absorptions are getting down close to the 2 level. Is there an absolute floor that you want to maintain on your sales pace, i.e. increase incentives to keep a level? Douglas Bauer: Paul, it's Doug. It's a good question. I mean the industry is kind of working through a big -- it's like tudging through mud right now. And somewhere between 2 and 2.5 is kind of where everybody seems to be landing and if you're looking at -- we're really looking at a very strong community count growth in '26. So as we look towards that, and even under similar market conditions, we've got some pretty nice growth in orders going forward. Operator: Our next question is from Stephen Kim with Evercore. Stephen Kim: If I could just follow up on Paul's question here on the incentives, you said 8.2%, I think, of revenues or home sales. Were -- how much of those were financial incentives, if you sort of include closing costs and rate buydowns for purchase commitments and that sort of thing? Glenn Keeler: Stephen, it's Glenn. You're correct. It was 8.2% of revenue in the quarter and about 1/3 of those were financing related, including closing costs. Stephen Kim: Okay. And what do you -- how about forward purchase commitments specifically, do you use them very much? Linda Mamet: Stephen, this is Linda. Yes, we do. We primarily use forward commitments for advertising purposes and they do have good value in driving additional interest in traffic. But ultimately, as Glenn said most of our customers really don't need to have a significantly lower interest rate to qualify for the home, so they prefer to use more of their incentive dollars and design studio personalization. Stephen Kim: Yes. So like if you think of 1/3, let's say, the 35% or whatever that are financial incentives, how much of that 1/3 would you say is forward purchase commitments? Linda Mamet: It's very small, under 1%. Douglas Bauer: Yes, very small number. Stephen Kim: Yes. That's great. And then your average order ASP, not your closings ASP but your order ASP has come down to, call it, a 654, I think, this quarter. Last quarter, it was like about 665. So is it reasonable to think that eventually your closings ASP is going to be at roughly that kind of level, 650, 660? Glenn Keeler: It is, Stephen. I mean the mix within the quarter does play a part. But when you look at our growth next year of a lot of Central and East regions, and those do carry a little bit lower of an ASP versus the West. And so just -- it's really just mix for us more than anything else. Operator: Our next question is from Jay McCanless with Wedbush Securities. James McCanless: First one, the SG&A guide for the fourth quarter, it looks like you guys are getting much better leverage than what the top line would suggest. Are there some onetimes in there? Can you talk about how you're able to potentially get this figured SG&A to sales number? Douglas Bauer: No. We're all specific onetime there, Jay. It is just a little bit more revenue in the quarter with a higher delivery number, and that's what's really driving it. James McCanless: Okay. And then kind of -- that was actually going to be my next question. The gross margin guide is better than we were expecting. Is there some mix in there, more move up? Anything you can give us on that? Glenn Keeler: A little bit of mix. I think some of the divisions that continue to outperform our strong margin divisions like when you look at like Houston, Inland Empire and Southern California things like that have driven the mix of margin to our benefit. So that plays a little part into it, Jay. James McCanless: And then one more, if I could. Just kind of thinking about the newer markets you all discussed and just wondering what you all think ASP might look like next year, just given some of the smaller medium price markets that you're going to be expanding into? Glenn Keeler: We'll give that guidance next time, Jay, as we kind of roll out the plan and see what that looks like. But I don't think you're going to be too different than where we're at this year. Douglas Bauer: No, we're not getting significant contributions out of our new expansion divisions yet next year. So it should have a minimal impact. Operator: Our next question is from Alan Ratner with Zelman & Associates. Alan Ratner: Can you just update us on your spec position and strategy and how you're thinking about spec just in terms of the contribution to the business? And I guess just thinking forward to '26, you're going to enter the year with a backlog that's down quite a bit. So -- are you going to lean heavily on spec next year to kind of bridge that gap? Or is that kind of a TBD based on what happens in the spring? Douglas Bauer: Its Doug, Alan. We've got about 3/4 of our orders are running at specs as into the end of the year. All the builders have a little bit more inventory than what they anticipated. So we'll burn through that inventory going into the first quarter or so of next year and then get to a more balanced approach. Again, demand is very inelastic and we're going to continue to focus on price over pace as we go into the new year. We're just assuming similar market conditions. What we're really focused on is that strong community count growth even at similar market conditions, as I mentioned earlier, we'll have a really good order growth going into '26 and then '27. So we're really looking to the future while we've been dealing with some of the obviously, the challenges the market has posed to the entire industry. So that's kind of how we're looking at our approach. Linda Mamet: And just to add to that, Alan, we did reduce our total spec inventory by 17% quarter-over-quarter. Alan Ratner: Got it. Linda, is that total specs under construction or completed homes specifically? Linda Mamet: Both together. Alan Ratner: Got it. That's the total number. Perfect. Doug, you mentioned community count growth next year several times. I'm just curious, when you think about the pricing strategy there. Obviously, you guys have been very steadfast in your approach. When you open up communities, how do you think about pricing on those? Is the intention to kind of maybe come out of the gate with more attractive pricing and build up a backlog as you -- and then raise prices through the life cycle of the project? Or are you kind of maintaining a similar strategy to your active communities like you have an idea of what the value is and you're going to come to market with that price and whatever the absorption is, that's what it's going to be for the time being. Douglas Bauer: Yes. No, Tri Pointe, as you know, Alan, is more of a premium brand proposition. So we look at our value proposition as it enters the market. Sure, you'd love to start with some momentum, but there's not a any sort of material pricing thought process there because we're building along Main and Main, great locations, close to employment and great amenities. So the value proposition is what we're looking at. And frankly, as you said, I'm really -- my lens is to the future. We've been dealing with choppy market conditions, in my mind, for about 18 months. So -- and if it's more of the same next year, so be it, but we're going to have a strong community count and we'll price the product appropriately to the marketplace to have the right value proposition that we propose. Operator: Our next question is from Mike Dahl with RBC Capital Markets. Unknown Analyst: Is Chris on for Mike. Can you just talk through your initial thoughts around the administrations, affordable housing push? What conversations have you had to date? And how are you thinking about the opportunities and risks to your operating and capital allocation strategy? Douglas Bauer: Yes. No, obviously, several builders have already made comments on that, and we're kind of the tail wagging the dog here, so to speak. But we share the administration's goal of providing more housing in the U.S. As Duly noted, I mean, the industry has been underbuilt and been doing this for 35 years. It kind of started out to the great financial crisis that makes me very old. But we welcome working with the relevant stakeholders at the federal, state and local levels. It's a very complicated interrelated discussion. Most of it happens at the local and state level but we look forward to working with the administration wherever Tri Pointe can help. We will build -- I mean we've got 32,000 lots that we own and control. We're opening very strong community count growth of up to 15% next year. So we'll be doing our share of bringing in more communities that will be attainable for our buyer profile. Unknown Analyst: Makes sense. Yes, the community count growth was definitely encouraging. And just shifting to the 4Q gross margin guide. Could you just help bracket some of the big moving pieces moving pieces around the sequential step down in gross margin? How much of that is incremental incentives, mix, stick and brick, just help frame that for us. Glenn Keeler: Yes. This is Glenn. Good question. And it's not really stick and bricks or anything like that. I think it's a little bit of mix but also just we've increased incentives as we've gotten through the year. We have spec homes to sell and close within the quarter, and those generally carry a little bit higher of an incentive. So all that kind of goes into that margin guide. Operator: Our next question is from Ken Zener with Seaport Research. Kenneth Zener: I am hoping you can walk us through kind of the logic, not giving guidance or anything, but just kind of understand the cadence. So looking at starts and orders, it looks like you guys did about 500 starts this quarter in the third quarter versus orders that were higher than that. So as we exit the year, how are you thinking about starts versus orders because your inventory is down -- units are down about 30% year-over-year. So I'm just trying to understand, since you're talking about opening communities, And Doug, I think you just said upwards of 15%? Or is that what you had said as well community growth next year potentially? Douglas Bauer: We indicated that community count growth will be 10% to 15%... Kenneth Zener: So I'm just trying to see how we actually get these right, the units in the ground, which could portend future closings. So that's why I'm focusing on the starts versus the order and how you're thinking about that. Thomas Mitchell: Yes, Ken, this is Tom. It's a great place to focus on as we've been focused on it as well. As Doug mentioned earlier in the Q&A, we're focused on getting our business back to a more balanced approach of spec to be build. And you're right on with our starts for Q3 was about 577 and that's down significantly from where we were in Q1 and Q2. But again, it's relative to that balanced approach. I think you'll see Q4 starts more comparable with what Q3 was just because of the amount of in-process under construction homes that we have available, and that's our #1 goal to move through that inventory. And then after that, we'll move to a more normalized strategy, which takes into account absorption on a community-by-community basis. Kenneth Zener: What I heard you say 4Q starts is going to be similar to 3Q. Is that right? I mean that means you're ending inventory. I'm just trying to imagine the growth you're having in community count with the actual contraction in your inventory units. I guess I'm trying to -- is that -- I think if there's some greater inflection that I don't understand. Thomas Mitchell: No, I don't think you're missing anything there. I mean as you look at it on a community-by-community basis, obviously, when we're moving into new communities, we're making the necessary starts relative to our anticipated demand. But where we have existing communities, obviously, we have excess inventory that we're going to be working through before we move to a more normalized balance start strategy. Kenneth Zener: Appreciate it. And then on the community count growth, most of that G&A, the fixed G&A already kind of loaded in there. Is there any big lift we should expect there? Glenn Keeler: Not too much of a lift on the G&A side, maybe some incremental -- that's more field than sales that will exceed to open those communities, but... Operator: There are no further questions at this time. I'd like to turn the floor back over to Doug Bauer for closing remarks. Douglas Bauer: Well, thank you, everybody, for joining us today. We're looking forward to sharing our growth plan and strategy for 2026 and beyond with you at our next quarter's call. And as we go into 2026, we're very excited and bullish about the future for housing. So thank you, and talk to you next quarter. Operator: Thank you. This concludes today's conference. You may disconnect your lines at this time.